•m^immmmmi^. 
 
1 ^ro 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
ST PAUL'S EPISTLES TO THE 
 
 THESSALONIANS. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
CainbtiSgE : 
 
 PKrNTKD BY C. J. CLAY, M.A. 
 AT THE UMryKESlTy PEESS. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
ST PAUL'S EPISTLES TO THE 
 THESSALONIANS : 
 
 WITH A CRITICAL AND GEAMMATICAL 
 
 COMMENTARY, 
 
 AND A REVISED TRANSLATION, 
 
 CHARLES J. E,LLICOTT D.D. 
 
 BISHOP OF OLOnOEHTEE AND BRISTOL. 
 
 THE FOURTH EDITION. 
 
 LONDON: 
 LONGMAN, GKEEN, LONGMAN, ROBERTS & GREEN. 
 
 1880. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
This book was digitized by Microsoft Corporation in 
 
 cooperation witli Cornell University Library, 2008. 
 
 You may use and print this copy in limited quantity 
 
 for your personal purposes, but may not distribute or 
 
 provide access to it (or modified or partial versions of it) 
 
 for revenue-generating or other commercial purposes. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. 
 
 AVERY slight amount of change has been found necessary 
 during the revision of this volume for the new edition. 
 It is however brought fully up to the standard adopted in 
 the Third Edition of the Pastoral Epistles, especially as re- 
 gards the Translation. 
 
 It is as well to call the reader's attention once for all to 
 the fact that in these two Epistles the Codex Ephraemi only 
 contains ch. i. 2 — ii. 8 of the First Epistle. This has been 
 often noticed in the critical notes, but not invariably. 
 
 GtOUCESTEB, 
 
 AprU, 1866. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 ^PHE present edition diifefs hit little from the first. There 
 -*- will be found however traces of a regular and deliberate 
 revision on every page. Scriptural references have been 
 again verified ; readings and interpretations have been care- 
 fully reconsidered, and the grammatical principles on which 
 the interpretations appear to rest tested by fresh investiga- 
 tion. Though the result is a very small amount of change, 
 yet the amount of time thus spent in reconsideration has not 
 been wholly thrown away ; as the Commentary is now pre- 
 sented anew to the reader with a humble yet increased con- 
 fidence in the general soundness of the principles on which 
 it is based. 
 
 EXEIEB, 
 
 December, 1861. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 THE present volume forms the fifth part of my Commen- 
 tary on St Paul's Epistles, and is constructed as nearly 
 as possible on the same plan as the portion which appeared 
 last year, viz. that containing the Epistles to the Philippians, 
 the Colossians, and Philemon. I particularly specify this, as 
 I have been informed by friends on whose judgment I can 
 rely that the last portion of my labours is an improvement 
 on those which preceded it. 
 
 If I may venture to assume that this is really the case, 
 I cannot help feeling that it is to be attributed not only to 
 increased experience, but also to the cautious but somewhat 
 freer admixture of exegesis which two of the three Epistles 
 contained in the volume seemed more especially to require. 
 This slight modification, and so to say dilution, of the critical 
 and grammatical severity which distinguished the earlier 
 parts of the work has been continued in the present volume, 
 bat it has been done both watchfully and cautiously, and 
 will be really seen more in the way of slight addition than 
 in actual change. Time and experience both seem to show 
 that the system of interpretation that I have been enabled 
 to pursue is substantially sound, that plain and patient accu- 
 racy in detail does in most cases lead to hopeful results, and 
 serves not unfrequently to guide us to far loftier and more 
 ennobling views of the Word of Life than such an unpre- 
 tending method might at first prepare us to expect. 
 
 The modifications then, or rather additions and expan- 
 sions, are really slight, and may be briefly summed up under 
 two heads ; on the one hand, an attempt to elucidate more 
 clearly the connexion of clauses and the general sequence of 
 thought ; and on the other hand, an attempt to develop more 
 completely the dogmatical significance of passages of a more 
 profound and more purely theological import. Neither of 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
viii PKEFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 these portions of sacred interpretation was neglected in the 
 early parts of this Commentary, but in the present a deep- 
 ening sense of their extreme importance has suggested this 
 further expansion and development. 
 
 A few slight additions to other departments of the Com- 
 mentary may be briefly noticed. 
 
 To the ancient Versions which I have been in the habit 
 of consulting, viz. the Old Latin, the Peshito, the Gothic, the 
 Coptic, the Philoxenian Syriac, and the two Ethiopic Versions, 
 I did not think it would be necessary for me ever to make 
 any addition. I have been convinced however by the able 
 notice of the Armenian Version in Home's Introduction by 
 my learned acquaintance Dr Tregelles that this venerable 
 Version has greater claims on our attention than I had before 
 believed. In spite of the excellent edition of Zohrab, I had 
 shared the opinion entertained by the majority of critics 
 that the once-called 'Queen of the Versions' had but slender 
 claims to that supremacy, and had suffered so much from 
 Latinizing recensions as to be but of doubtful authority. 
 The charges which have been brought against the labours of 
 King Haithom in the thirteenth century, and the readings . 
 adopted by the collator Uscan in the seventeenth, tended 
 of late years to awaken the suspicions of critical scholars. 
 It is fair however to say that the charges of Latinism do 
 not appear to be well founded, and that this ancient Version 
 deserves the attention of the critic and commentator; still, 
 if I am not presumptuous in hazarding an opinion, I do 
 seem to myself to perceive a generally Occidental tinge in 
 its interpretations, and I have more than once verified the 
 observation of Loebe and De Gabelentz that there are coin- 
 cidences and accordances with the Gothic Version that seem 
 to be not wholly accidental. My knowledge however is at 
 present too limited to enable me to speak with confidence. 
 
 I have then deemed it my duty to make use of this 
 Version, and to acquire such a knowledge of the language as 
 should enable me to state faithfully its opinion in contested 
 passages. To the student who may feel attracted towards 
 this interesting, highly inflected, yet not very difficult lan- 
 guage, I will venture to recommend the Grammar and Dic- 
 tionary of Aucher*. The former is now selling at a low 
 price, and can easily be procured. Its great defect is in the 
 
 1 Sinoe the above was wiitten a 1841). It has a simple Clirestomathy 
 
 much more useful and better arranged and good Glossary, but no Syntax. 
 
 Grammar bus come under my notice, The standard Grammar of a larger 
 
 viz. Brevii lAngua Armeniaccs Oram- size appears to be that of Cirbied. 
 
 matka, by J. H. Pdtermann (Berol. [1861]. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. ix 
 
 syntax, which I cannot think very clearly or scientifically 
 arranged; and in the Chrestomathy, which is not at first 
 sufficiently easy and progressive. The extracts, though cu- 
 rious, are not well suited for a beginner, and are not intro- 
 duced by any elementary lessons in parsing and grammatical 
 application. A strong sense of the value of such aids re- 
 minds me that I may not unsuitably take this opportunity 
 of recommending the Coptic Grammar of Uhlemann. It is 
 extremely well arranged, is brief and perspicuous, and be- 
 sides a good progressive Chrestomathy is furnished with a 
 small but very useful Vocabulary. 
 
 I again venture to commend these ancient Versions to 
 the attention of all students who have leisure, and an aptitude 
 for the acquisition of languages. It is startling to find how 
 little we really know of these ancient witnesses, how erro- 
 neous are the current statements of their mere readings, how 
 neglected their authority in interpretation. And yet we see 
 on all sides critical editions of the sacred volume multiplying, 
 and, in at least one instance (I regret to say that I allude 
 to the otherwise useful editions of Dr Tischendorf), can 
 abundantly verify the fact that Latin translations, not always 
 trustworthy or exact, have been the main authorities from 
 which the readings have been derived. Is it too much to 
 demand of a critical editor, of one who is by the very nature 
 of his work free from the many distractions of thought that 
 are the lot of the commentator, — is it too much to demand 
 that he should consider it a part of his duties to acquire 
 himself such a knowledge of these languages as to be able to 
 tell us plainly and unmistakeably what are and what are not 
 the true readings of these early and invaluable witnesses ? 
 Nay more, it is, and it will ever be, of paramount importance 
 that the loyal critic should use no eyes but his own. He 
 may endeavour to procure collations from others, he may try 
 to proceed on the principle of division of labour, but he will 
 I firmly believe ultimately be forced to admit that this is 
 one of those cases in which labour cannot be well divided, 
 and in which the mechanically-made comparisons of the 
 associated collator can never be put in the same rank with 
 the results of the intelligent search of the professed critic. 
 The very interest that the latter feels in what he is looking 
 for protects him to a great degree from those inaccuracies 
 which the mere collator can never hope entirely to escape ; 
 added to which, his exact knowledge of the variations of the 
 reading at issue will save him as nothing else can from 
 confounding merely a greater inclusiveness of meaning with 
 evidences of distinct textual change. To cite a single and 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
X PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 familiar instance, — how often must the critical scholar have 
 observed that Oriental Versions are adduced on one side 
 or other in such cases of prepositional variation as iv and 
 Bid, when the plain fact is that the greater inclusiveness of 
 the Beth or Bet of the Version leaves the actual reading 
 which the translator had before him a matter of complete 
 uncertainty. Are then our scholars, and more especially 
 our critics, to shrink from such a useful and even necessary 
 duty as the study of the ancient Versions ? Are a certain 
 number of weary hours, more or less, to be set in comparison 
 with the ability and the privilege of making clearly known 
 to others the critical characteristics of Versions of the Book 
 of Life that have been the blessed media of salvation to 
 early churches and to ancient nations ? 
 
 One word, and one word only, as to my own humble, most 
 humble efiforts in this particular province. Time, toil, and 
 patience, have done something ; and though, alas, my know- 
 ledge is still limited, yet I may at length venture to hope 
 that in most of these Versions the student may fully rely on 
 my statements, and that the number of those statements that 
 may hereafter be reversed by wiser and better scholars than 
 myself will not be very large. I am forced to say this, as I 
 have observed in one or two reviews with which I have been 
 favoured, that avowals of inexperience, which seemed the 
 more suitable and becoming in proportion as the means of 
 detecting it were in fewer hands, have been understood to 
 imply that my citations from these ancient authorities con- 
 fessedly could not be relied on. This however has not been 
 and is not the case. While I sensitively shrink from drag- 
 ging into notice the amount of my own labours, I stiU 
 perceive that I must beware of leading the reader to pass 
 over what may be of real use to him, and of feeling distrust 
 where actually there may be no just ground for it. The 
 intelligent scholar will see at a glance that to state fairly and 
 correctly the translation of words of which the subject is 
 familiarly known is a task which certainly does not lie be- 
 yond the reach of ordinary patience and industry. 
 
 Among other additions the reader will I trust be benefit- 
 ed by the still increasing attention paid to our best English 
 divinity. I have made it my study to refer especially to 
 sermons on all the more interesting and difiicult verses, and 
 it is unusually cheering to find that no portion of my labours 
 has been more kindly appreciated, or has apparently been of 
 more real service to theological students. Without drawing 
 any unfair comparison between English and German divinity, 
 it does not seem one whit too much to say that if we are 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. xi 
 
 often indebted to the latter for patient and laborious exegesis, 
 it is to the former alone that we must go if we would fain 
 add to our mere contextual knowledge some true perceptions 
 of the analogy of Scripture, and are really and sincerely 
 interested in striving to comprehend all the profound and 
 mysterious harmonies of Catholic Truth. 
 
 With regard to matters of textual criticism, the student 
 will observe in this volume the same persistent attention to 
 the principal differences of reading, even in the grammatical 
 notes. My constant effort is to popularize this sort of know- 
 ledge, to make exegesis lend it a helping hand, and insensibly 
 to decoy the student into examining and considering for 
 himself what human words seem to have the best claims to 
 be regarded as the earthly instruments by which the adorable 
 mercies of God have been made known to the children of 
 men. These notices, it must be remembered, are merely 
 selected, and neither are nor are intended to be enumerations 
 of all the differences of reading ; still I have good hope that 
 no reading that deserves attention has been overlooked. 
 
 I have now only to conclude with a few notices of those 
 works to which I am especially indebted. The list is gra- 
 dually becoming shorter. I have been enabled to use so 
 many more first-class authorities than when I commenced 
 this series, that it does not seem disrespectful to omit si- 
 lently such as can be fairly considered second-class from 
 pages where text and notes only too often stand in an 
 undesirable though unavoidable disproportion. 
 
 In these Epistles, as in the Pastoral Epistles, I have lost 
 the sagacious guidance of Dr Meyer; I have not however 
 so much to lament the change of editor as in the Epistles 
 above alluded to. Though distinctly inferior to Meyer, es- 
 pecially in the critical and grammatical portion of his work, 
 Dr Liinemann is still a commentator of a very high order. 
 His exegesis is usually sound and convincing, and no one, I 
 am sure, can beneficially study these two beautiful Epistles 
 without having at hand the Commentary of this able editor. 
 
 The larger and more comprehensive Commentaries will 
 be found specified in former portions of this work, but I 
 must pause to express my hearty sense of the continued 
 excellence of my friend Dean Alford's Commentary. As our 
 readers will see, we occasionally break a friendly lance, more 
 especially in matters of detail. These gentle encounters 
 however are not only unavoidable but even desirable. It 
 is by all such amicable conflicts of opinion that the truth, 
 often lying midway between those engaged in her defence, is 
 most surely seen and recognised. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
xii PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 Of the separate editions of these Epistles I desire to specify 
 the very able Commentaries of Pelt and Schott. The former 
 of these two writers has the great merit of being one of the 
 first of later times who distinctly felt the importance of using 
 the exegetical works of the Greek Fathers, and the latter 
 supplies a good specimen of that patient mode of grammatical 
 interpretation which has now obtained such general currency. 
 Though both these works have been many years before the 
 world, and though in many cases their opinions have been 
 reversed by more modem expositors, they can neither of 
 them be justly considered as superseded or antiquated. 
 
 Last of all I come to the edition of Professor Jowett. 
 And here I would rather that our differences of opinion 
 appeared in their respective places than were specifically 
 alluded to. I feel it however a duty to speak, and it is with 
 pain that I must record my fixed opinion that the system 
 of interpretation pursued by Professor Jowett is as dangerous 
 as I believe it to be inaccurate and untenable. After making 
 every possible allowance for the obvious fact that our systems 
 of interpretation are completely and persistently antagonistic, 
 after willingly making in my own case every correction for 
 bias, I still feel morally convinced that the objections to 
 Professor Jowett's system of interpretation are such as cannot 
 be evaded or explained away. After having thus performed 
 a very painful duty, I trust I may be permitted to express 
 my full recognition of the genius that pervades his writings, 
 the ease, finish, and, alas, persuasiveness of the style, the 
 kindly though self-conscious spirit that animates his teach- 
 ing, and the love of truth that, however sadly and deeply 
 wounded by paradoxes and polemics, still seems to be ever 
 both felt and cultivated. May these good gifts be dedicated 
 anew to the service of Divine Truth and be overruled to 
 more happy and more chastened issues. 
 
 It now only remains for me with all humility and low- 
 liness of heart to lay this work before the Great Father of 
 Lights, imploring His blessing on what I may have said 
 aright, and His mercy where my eyes have been holden, 
 and where I have not been permitted to see clearly all the 
 blessed lineaments of Divine Truth. 
 
 TPIA2, MONAS, BAEHSON. 
 London, August ^th, 1858. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
nPOS eESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THIS calm, practical, and profoundly consolatory Epistle was 
 written by the Apostle to his converts in the wealthy and 
 populous city of Thessalonica not long after his first visit to 
 Macedonia (Acts xvi. 9), when in conjunction with Silas and 
 Timothy he laid the foundations of the Thessalonian Church 
 ^Acts xvii. I sq.). See notes on ch. i. i. 
 
 The exact time of writing the Epistle appears to have been 
 the early months of the Apostle's year and a half stay at Corinth 
 {Acts xviii. 11), soon after Timothy had joined him (i Thess. 
 iii. 6) and reported the spiritual state of their converts, into 
 which he had been sent to enquire (ch. iii. 2), probably from 
 Athens; see notes on ch. iii. i. "We may thus consider the close 
 of A.D. 52, or the beginning of a.d. 53, as the probable date, and, 
 if this be correct, must place the Epistle first on the chronological 
 list of the Apostle's writings. 
 
 The arguments in favour of a later date are based either on 
 passages which have been thought to imply that the Apostle had 
 preached the Gospel for some time elsewhere (ch. i. 8), or on 
 statements in the Epistle (ch. iv. 13, v. 12; see 2 Thess. iii. 17) 
 which have been judged to be in accordance with a greater in- 
 terval between the time of the first preaching at Thessalonica and 
 the date of the Epistle than is usually assigned. These have all 
 been satisfactorily answered by Davidson {Introd. Vol. 11. p. 435), 
 and have met with no acceptance at the hands of recent exposi- 
 tors or chronologers j comp. Liinemann, EiiHeitung, p. 6, Wieseler, 
 Ghronol. p. 40 sq. 
 
 The main object of the Apostle in writing this Epistle can 
 easily be gathered from some of the leading expressions. It was 
 designed alike to console and to admonish; — to console, with 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
xvi INTRODUCTION. 
 
 reference both to recent external trials and afflictions (eh. ii. 14 sq.), 
 and still more to internal trials arisiag from anxieties as to the 
 state of their departed friends (oh. iv. 13 sq.) ; — to admonish, with 
 reference to grave moral principles (ch. iv. i sq.), Christian watch- 
 fulness (oh. V. I sq.), and various practical duties (ch. v. 14) which 
 had been neglected owing to the feverish expectations and anxie- 
 ties which appear to have prevailed at Thessalonica even from 
 the first : comp. ch. iv. 11, and see notes iw loc. St Paul had 
 heard of all these things from Timothy; and this information, 
 combined with the Apostle's full consciousness that there were 
 many points both in knowledge and practice in which they were 
 deficient (ch. iii. 10) and on which he would fain have further 
 taught them personally (comp. ch. ii. 17 sq.), appears to have 
 called forth this instructive and strengthening Epistle. 
 
 The authenticity and genuineness of the Epistle are placed 
 beyond all reasonable doubt both by clear external testimonies 
 (Irenaeus, Hxr. v. 6. i, Clem. -Alex. Pcedag. i. p. 109, ed. Potter, 
 TertulUan, de Mesurr. Ga/rn. cap. 24) and by still stronger in- 
 ternal arguments derived from the style and tone of thought. 
 The objections that have been urged against it, like those ad- 
 vanced against the Second Epistle (see Introd.), may justly be 
 pronounced rash, arbitrary, and unworthy of serious consider- 
 ation. They will be found fully answered in Davidson, Introd. 
 Vol. II. p. 454 sq. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
IIPOS GESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 Apostolic 
 saiutatiOD, 
 
 address and I I AYA02 KOI ZlAovai/Of Hoi TtflO- T. 
 
 -'--»- deos t5 eKKSticrlq. QearaaXoviKewv ey 
 
 I. IlauXas] The absence of th6 
 official designation. iir6irTo\os in the 
 salutations of these Epp. is not due to 
 their early date, nor to the fact that 
 the title had not yet been assumed by 
 St Paul (comp. Jowett), but simply to 
 the terms of affection that subsisted 
 between St Paul and his converts at 
 Thessalonica, and their loving recog- 
 nition of his office and authority ; comp. 
 Beng. in he, and see notes on Phil. i. 
 1. The reason of Chrys., followed by 
 Theoph. and CEoum., 5i4 rd veoKarti' 
 X/f"^^ ^^""■^ '■"'^s wSpas Kal firiSiira 
 adroO iretpAv elXrj^^vaL, does not seem 
 sufficient. That it was ' propter reve- 
 rentiam Silvani' (Cajet:, Est.) is far 
 from probable, for comp. i and 2 Cor. 
 i. i. Col. i. 1. SiXovavos] Iden- 
 
 tical with Silas mentioned in the Acts 
 (comp. Acts xvi. 19 sq. with i Thess. 
 ii. I, 2, and Acts xviii. 5 with 2 Cor. 
 i. 19), a irptxp'v'"'!' (Acts xv. 32), one 
 ■iryoiiievm iv rots &SeK<poh in the Church 
 of Jerusalem (ver. 22), and also pro- 
 bablya Koman citizen (Acts Xvi. 37); 
 he was sent by'the Apostles and elders 
 of that Church with St Paul and St 
 Barnabas to Antioch, and, after first 
 returning to Jerusalem (ver. 33), ac- 
 companied the former on his second 
 missionary journey (Acts xv; 40) 
 through Asia Minor to Macedonia. 
 There he co'operates with the Apostle 
 
 E. T. 
 
 (Acts xvii. 4) and Timothy (oomp. 
 Acts xvi. 3, xvii. 14, 1 Thess. iii. 6) 
 in founding the Church of Thessalo- 
 nica, and after staying behind at 
 Bercea (Acts xvii. 14) rejoins St Paul 
 either at Athens or Corinth, and ac- 
 tively preaches the Gospel in the lasi 
 named city (2 Cor. i. 19). It does' not 
 Seem improbable that he afterwards 
 joined St Peter, and is identical with 
 the SUvanus mentioned in i Pet., v. 12 ; 
 compare Bleek on Sebr. Vol. I. p. 
 ■408. He is here placed before 
 
 Timothy (so also Acts xvii. 14, 15, 
 xviii. 5, 2 Cor. i. 19, 2 Thess. i. i), as 
 being probably the older man, and 
 certainly the older associate of St 
 Paul. According to tradition, 
 
 Silas was afterwards Bishop of Co- 
 rinth, and Silvanus of Thessalonica 
 (compare the list in Fabric. Imx 
 ■Evang. p. 117)} the former name 
 however, though paroxytone, is in all 
 probability only a contracted form of 
 the latter; see Winer, Gr. § 16. note 
 I, p. 93. For farther and legendary 
 notices of ^as, see Acta Sand. July 
 t3, Vol. III. p. 476, and for an at- 
 tempt to identify Silas with St Luke, 
 see Journal of Sacr. Lit. Oct. 1 850, 
 p. 328 sq. TinoBtos] The 
 
 name of this convert is too well 
 known to need more than a brief 
 notice! He was the son of a Greek 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
nPOS eESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 Qew irarpi kuI K.vpia) 'Ii/troi/ "X-piarS. 
 
 X°P^S ^M-tv Kat 
 
 father and a Jewish mother (Acts xvi. 
 I, 2 Tiin. i. 5), most probably fronj 
 Lystra, and perhaps converted by St 
 Paul on bis first visit to that city 
 (Acts xiv. 8 sq.). He aooompanied 
 the Apostle on his second missionary 
 journey to Macedonia, remains behind 
 at Beroea (Acts zvii. 14), is summoned 
 by St Paul, when at Athens; pro- 
 bably rejoins him there (oomp. i Thess. 
 iii. I, 2, and see Neander, Planting, 
 Vol, I. p. 195), is despatched to Thes- 
 salonica, and returns. to the Apostle 
 at .Corinth (Acts, xviii.. 5). After an 
 iuteryal, he reappears in St Paul's 
 third missipnary journey, and is sent 
 from Ephesus to Macedonia (Acts xix. 
 22) and, Corinth (i Cor. iv. 17). He 
 was, with St Paul \?hen he wrote 2 
 Oor. (i. i) apd Bom. (xvi. 21), accom- 
 panied him from Corinth to Asia 
 (Acts _xx. 4), and subsequently was 
 with him when he, wrote Phil. (i. i), 
 Coi. (i. i), and Philem. (ver. i). He 
 appears afterwards to have been left 
 in charge of the Church at Ephesus 
 (i Tim, i. 3), and finally is summoned 
 by St Paul to Eome, at the close of 
 the , Apostle's second imprisonment. 
 He is named by Eusebius (Hist. Eccl. 
 l\l. 4, comp. Const. Apost. Til. 46) as 
 first bishop of Ephesus, and is said to 
 have suffered martyrdom under Do- 
 mitian; see Phot. Biblioth. OOLIV. 
 p. 1402 (ed. Hoesoh.), Acta Sanct., 
 Jan. 24, Vol II. p. 562, and Menolog, 
 Qi-cis. Vol. II. p. 128. It maybe 
 
 remfirked that Silvanus and Timothy 
 are here named with St Paul, not 
 merely as being then with him (oomp. 
 Gal. i. 2), or as the ' sooii saJlutationis' 
 (see notes on Phil. i. i), but also as 
 haying co-operated with him in found- 
 ing the Church of Thessalonioa,, 
 TTJ 6K(5X. ©eo-iraX. k.t.X.] 'to the 
 
 Church of the Thessalonians in God 
 the Father,' &c. ; not ' sciibnnt aut 
 mittunt banc epistolam' (Est.), but in 
 the usual elliptical form of greeting 
 (Lucian, Conviv. § 22), the x"^^!'^''" 
 (James i. i) being involved and im- 
 plied in the wish (x&pis k.t.\.) which 
 forms the second period of the saluta- 
 tion : see notes on i Tim. i. 2. 
 Thessalonioa was a large (Lucian, 
 Asin. § 46), wealthy, and populous 
 city (Strabo, Geogr. vii. j. 4, Vol. 11. 
 p. 60, ed. Kramer), at the north-east 
 corner of the Sinus Thermaicus. It 
 was built on the site of or near to 
 (Pliny, Bist. Nat. IV. 10 [17], ed.. 
 Sillig) the ancient Therme (Herod. 
 VII. 121, Thucyd. I. 61) by Cassander, 
 in honour of his wife GeiriroXoWitij 
 (Strabo, Geogr. vn. Pragm. 21, Vol. 
 II. p. 7C), ed. Kram.), and under the 
 Komans was of sufficient importance 
 to be chosen first as the capital of the 
 second district of Macedonia, and 
 afterwards, when the four districts 
 were united, of the whole province: 
 see notes on ver. 7, and Livy, ZLV. 29. 
 It afterwards became a- libera civitas 
 (Pliny, I. c.). It retained its import- 
 ance through the middle ages (see 
 Conyb, and Howson, St Paul, Vol. i. 
 p. 34S sq., ed. i), and even at the 
 present day, under the name of Salo- 
 niki, is one of the chief cities of 
 European Turkey: see Leake, N. 
 Greece, Vol. in. p. 238 sq. For fur- 
 ther notices, see the good account of 
 Conyb. and Hows. I. c, Winer, IIW^. 
 Vol. n. p. 608, Pauly, Seal Encyel. 
 Vol. VI. p. 1880, and especially the 
 learned and comprehensive treatise of 
 Tafel, de Thessal. ejusque agro, Berol. 
 1839. iv ©eif irarpC k.t.X. 
 
 must be closely joined with rfi hxX 
 e.effo-., to which it stands in.the.rel*- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
I. 2. 
 
 We thank God foryour EvyaOtO'TOVaeu TW QcM TTtti'TOTe 2; 
 
 spiritual progress. The 'r ' ' ' 
 
 pr»&an/?ete»TI ^ «/»' Tai/TWl/ VflSlV, fiVeiaV VflZv TTOIOV- . 
 the Gospel is now well known unto all men.' 
 
 tion of a kind of tertiary predicate 
 (Donalds. Gr. § 489), and which it 
 serves to distinguish from the noWal 
 licKkriclai. Kal 'XouSai'xal Kal 'EWrpuKal 
 (Chrys.) which were in that city; iv 
 6c(fi irarpl, as De Wette suggests, dis- 
 tinguishing it from the latter, KalKvp, 
 K.T.\., from the former. To connect 
 these words with what follows (Koppe), 
 or to understand x^'P"" X^7ouiriv 
 (Schott, — not Winer [Alf.], who ex- 
 pressly adopts the right view) is arbi- 
 trary and untenable, and to supply tJ 
 orrij ovirii (De W., Alf., comp. Chrys., 
 Syr.) unnecessary and even inexact, 
 such unions without an art. being by 
 no means uncommon in the K.T. ; see. 
 exx. in Winer, Or. § 20. 2, p. 123, 
 and for the principle of such combina- 
 tions, notea/onSph. i. 15. Com- 
 mentators call attention to thd fact, 
 that the term ckkK. occurs only in the 
 addresses to i and 2 Thess., i and 2 
 Cor., and 6aL, while in the supposed 
 later Epp. Bom., Eph., Phil., Col., 
 the more individualizing tois iuylois 
 K.T.X. is adopted. The variation is 
 slightly noticeable ; it does not how- 
 ever seem to point to gradually altered 
 views with regard to the attributes of 
 the Church (Jowett), but merely to 
 the present comparative paucity of 
 numbers (compare Chrys.), and their 
 aggregation in a single assembly; 
 comp. Koch, p. 56, note. On the 
 meaning and application of the term, 
 see Pearson, Creed, Art. ix. Vol. i. 
 p. 397 (ed. Burt.), Jackson, Creed, 
 XII. 2. I sq. \clpts ifttv 
 K.T.X.] Soil, dn, not l(TTU (Schott) ; see 
 notes on Mpk. i. 2. On the blended 
 form of Greek and Hebrew greeting, 
 see notes on Gal. i. 3, Bph. i. 2. The 
 reading is somewhat doubtful : Sec. 
 
 adds diri 0eoC Tarpbs ituwv Kal Kvplov 
 'Irjaov Xp. on strong external authority 
 [AC (appy.) KL and DE omitting 
 riiiSiv; most mss. ; Fnld., Tol., Copt., 
 Syr.-Phil. with asterisk), .^Eth. (Piatt) ; 
 Chrys. al. (Laehm. in brackets)] ; the 
 omission however is fairly supported 
 [BEG : some mss. ; Vulg., Syr., Mih., 
 Arm. ; Chrys. (oomm.), Theoph., al, 
 (2%cA..)], and on critical grounds i.< 
 decidedly preferable, as the uniqueness 
 of the form in St Paul's Epp. would 
 be likely to suggest interpolation ; 
 comp. Col. i. 2. 
 
 2. Eijxopio-Toii|uv] ' We give thanks ;" 
 see note on Phil. i. 3, and add 2 Thess. 
 i. 3, ii. 13. It has beeu doubted whe- 
 ther the plural is to be understood of 
 the Apostle alone (Koch, Conyb-), as 
 in ch. ii. i8,iii. i sq., or to be referred 
 also to Silvanus and Timothy ; obn- 
 traat PhU. i. i, 3. As the plural is, 
 elsewhere used in reference to the 
 Apostle and his avvepyol (comp. 2 Cor. ^ 
 i. 19, and notes on Col. i. 3), and as 
 Silvanus and Timothy stood in a 
 very close relation to the Church of 
 Thessalonica, it seems most natural 
 here to adopt the latter view ; so 
 Liinem., and AUord, who however 
 appears inexact in claiming all the 
 ancient commentt., as Chrys. and the 
 Greek expositors seem clearly, though 
 indirectly, to adopt the former view. 
 On the late use of the verb eixapi- 
 ariiv in the sense of 'gratiaS agere,' see 
 notes on Phil. i. 3, and esp. an Col. 
 i. 12; the more correct x^P'" ^X'^ 
 occurs in i Tim. i. 12, 2 Tim. i. 3, 
 and as an alternative reading in Phi- 
 lem. 7 {Tiach.). These thanks 
 
 are returned to God (the Father, comp. 
 Col. i.. 3), ws airbs ipyaai.u'evoi Ti>, 
 v&v, Chrys. : so 2 Thess. i. 3, 2 Tiin. 
 B2 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
4 nPOS eESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 i. 3, and, with the addition of /iov, 
 Bom. i. S, I Cor. i. 4, Phil. i. 3, 
 Philem. 4. irdvroTe k.t.X. 
 
 here obviously belongs to the finite 
 verb (r Cor. i. 4, 2 Thess. i. 3, comp. 
 Epb. i; 16), not to the participle 
 (Phil. i. 4, Col. i. 3, Philem. 4). Even 
 if the second ipdv be omitted (see 
 below), the connexion with the par- 
 ticiple will be almost equally unten- 
 able^ as the expression /welav voidaBai 
 wept Ttvos, though not unclassical 
 (Plato, Prolog, p. 317 e), is not else- 
 where found in St Pavd's Epp. ; so 
 Syr., ^th., the Greek expositors 
 (silet Tbeod.), and nearly all modern 
 editors. On the alliteration rdPTOTe 
 vepl irivTuv, comp. notes on Phil, i 
 4. vcpV irdvTuv v|ui>v] ' concern- 
 
 ing you all;' not without slight em- 
 phasis and affectionate cumulation ; 
 the Church of Thessalonica, like that 
 of Philippi, presented but few unfa- 
 vourable developments. The very 
 eixapunia was tacitly commendatoiy 
 (t6 eixapurrav k.t.X. imprvpowrbs 
 ianv airrois iroWi)!/ irpoKo-rrijp, Chrys.), 
 the inclusive nature of it still more 
 expressly so. The difference be- 
 
 tween the use of jrepl (i Cor. i. 4, <fcc.) 
 and vwip .{Bom. i. 8, <fcc.) in this and 
 -similar formulae in the N.T. is scarcely 
 appreciable ; see notes on Eph. vi. 19. 
 Perhaps, as a general rule, we may 
 say that in the former the attention 
 is more directed to the object or cir- 
 cumstances to which the action of the 
 verb extends, in the latter more to 
 that action itself; see notes on Gal. 
 i. 4, and Phil. i. 7. 
 
 (tvcCav vfiuv iroiov|i.] 'maUng men- 
 tion, of you-' not a limitation of the 
 preceding tixap. vtivrore, but a de- 
 finition of the circumstances under 
 which it took place ; see Bom. i. ■ 9, 
 Eph. i. 16, Philem. 4, and comp. Phil. 
 
 i. 3, 4, 2 Tim. i. 3. 'For further re- 
 marks on the formula (not ' making 
 mention of or rememiering,' Jowett, 
 but simply the former, — as often in 
 Aristotle, aL), see notes on Philem. 4, 
 and for a distinction between ixvihiti 
 (yevmyi rirucru ^UXV') ^^^ pvela 
 (X670J KttT dvav^affLv \ey6fieyos)f Am- 
 monius, Voc. Diff. p. 95 (ed. Valck.). 
 Mvela has the meaning ' commemo- 
 ratio' only when it is joined with 
 vmeiffOai, see notes on Phil. i. 3. 
 The reading is doubtful ; Lachm. omits 
 inQv after iivelav with ABK' ; Vulg. 
 (Amiat.), C omits v/iwc (i) ; see crit. 
 note on Eph. i. 16. It does not how- 
 ever seem improbable that the pre- 
 sence of the former v/uov suggested a 
 supposed emendatory omission. 
 4irl Tuv irfoxrea^uv i]|wv] 'm our 
 prayers' ' in orationibus nostris, ' Vulg. , 
 Copt. (comp. Syr., .ffith.), — not merely 
 ' at the time I offer them,' but, with a 
 tinge of local reference, 'in my per- 
 formanceof that duty ;' see Bemhardy, 
 Syra. V. 23 a, p. 246, and notes on 
 Eph. i. 16. In such cases the funda- 
 mental meaning of the prep, may just 
 be traced in the way in which it 
 marks the object to which the action 
 has reference, its point, so to say, of 
 application; see Kruger, Sprachl. g 68. 
 40. s. 
 
 3. dSioXcCirros] 'unremittingly/ 
 nsed in the N. T. only by St Paul, 
 ch. ii. 13, V. 17, Bom. i. 9, and in 
 all cases in direct (ch. v. 17) or indirect 
 connexion with prayer or thanksgiv- 
 ing. The adverb is referred by Vulg., 
 Syr., .^th.. Arm., and some modern 
 expositors, to the preceding participle, 
 but far more naturally by Chrys. and 
 the Greek commentators to lu/ijuovti- 
 oKTfs, each new clause serving to en- 
 hance and expand what had preceded ; 
 so Lachm., Titch., Buttm., and per- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
I. 3. 
 
 veuovres vfiHv rov epyov rijt iricrTeun koI tow kottoi/'t?? 
 
 haps Copt., Vulg. (Amiat.). Alford 
 connects it with irotoifi. urging Kom. i. 
 
 9, but there the order is different. 
 |tVT]|jLovciiovre$ 'remembering,' Auth., 
 ' memores,' Vulg., Clarom. ; partici- 
 pial clause parallel to the preceding 
 /ivelav woioi/ievoi, and defining not 
 the cause (Schott) but the circum- 
 stances and temporai concomitants of 
 the action : the €ixapt<rTLa found its 
 utterance in the prayers, and owed its 
 persistence (mivTOTe) to the unceasing 
 continuance of the lirr^/ir). The first 
 participle has thus more of a modal, 
 the second of a temporal tinge; oi 
 liivor ijyiiiaiv ivl twv TrpoirevxCiv /wv 
 lUpa/y)Hai viucv dXXd Kal SXKare irdv- 
 Tore, Theoph. It has been doubted 
 whether /ivrjiiov. is here 'commemo- 
 rare ' (Beza), or ' memor [esse '] (Vulg., 
 pyr., ^th., Arm., and appy. Copt.) 
 as in Heb. xi. 22 (but with wepi and 
 a gen.). The context (iixirpouBev 6eoO 
 K.T.X.) seems to be slightly in favour 
 of the former (De Wette), but St 
 Paul's use of the verb, and the case 
 which follows it (gen. not accus.), are 
 somewhat decidedly in favour of the 
 latter; see ch. ii. 9, Winer, Or. § 30. 
 
 10, p. 184, Jelf, Gr. § 515, obs„ and 
 notes on 2 Tim. ii. 8. The three 
 objects of the Apostle's remembrance 
 then follow in their natural order (so 
 ch. V. 8, Col. i. 4, comp. Tit. ii. 2; 
 alitor I Cor. xiii. 13), d^djrij being the 
 result and exemplification of irlaTis, 
 and iKirii the link between the pre- 
 sent and the future ; comp. also i Pet. 
 i. 21, 22, and see Beuss, Th4ol. Chret. 
 IV. 20, Vol. II. p. 219, and esp. Us- 
 teri, Lehrb. 11. 1. 4. P- 238. 
 
 v|jw3v Toii 2pY0u k.t.X.] 'yovr work of 
 faith,' i.e. ' which characterizes, is 
 the distinctive feature of faith ;' comp. 
 Jbom. ii. 15, and in point of sentiment 
 Gal. V. 6, vUrru Si' dyiirris ivepyov- 
 
 liAmi. The precise meaning and con. 
 nexion of these words has been much 
 contested. The simplest view seems 
 to be as follows: (i) 'T/iSe is not 
 immediately dependent on //.vYi/iov. 
 (CEcum.), as this would involve an 
 untenable ellipse of a prep, before the 
 succeeding words (see Herm. Viger^ 
 p. 701, Lend. 1824), but is a possess, 
 gen. in connexion with roO Ipyov, and 
 also (as its slightly emphatic position 
 suggests) with rov ubirov and ttjs ivo- 
 liovTis : see further exx. in Winer, Gr. 
 § 22. 7. note I, p. 140. (2) ToO ipyov 
 is certainly not pleonastic, but must 
 stand in parallelism both in force and 
 meaning (hence not ' Veritas,' Eypke, 
 06s. Vol. n. p. 332) with the succeed- 
 ing rod Kbirov (Winer, Gr. § 65. 7, p. 
 £41), and has probably here not so 
 
 muchacolleotive(Syr. r '^'^ [opera]), 
 
 as a tinge of active force, imparted 
 both by the context and the following 
 ToB Kiirov; comp. Eph. iv. 12, Knapp, 
 Scripta Var. Arg. Vol. ii. p. 491 note, 
 and Usteri, ZeAri. n. i. 4, p. 238. (3) 
 T^s iriaTeas is certainly not a gen. of 
 apposition (Alf.), as it would thus lose 
 all parallelism with the succeeding 
 genitives, but is either (a) a gen. of the 
 origin (Hartung, Casus, p. 17, comp. 
 notes on Col. i. 23), ' quod ex fide pro- 
 fioisoitur,' Grot., or perhaps more 
 simply (i) a possessive genitive, rov 
 Ipyou being the prevailing feature and 
 characteristic of the irlims, and that 
 by which it evinces its vitality ; comp. 
 Chrys., 7 irtcrns Sii, twv (pyiov delKvv- 
 TO(, who however, with Theod., al., 
 limits rb (pyoii to endurance in suffer- 
 ings (t4 hi Kui&ivoii p^patoVf Theod.), 
 a very doubtful restriction. 
 ToS K^irou Ttis dyAiTTls] ' toil of 
 love,' i.e. (retaining the same geniti- 
 val relation as in the preceding words) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
EPOS eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 aydiri]! Kal t?? VTrofiovijt r^i eXiriSos rav Kvpiov tifiiev 
 ^Iriaov Hpia-Tou e/HTrpoa-Oev tov Qeov KOi irarpoi ^f-S>v, 
 
 'the toil which oharaoteiizes and 
 evinces the vitality of love ;' ' multum 
 est per se dilectio, sed multo magis si 
 accedunt molesti labores, id enira k6- 
 TTOS,' Grot. ; see notes on i Tim. iv. lo. 
 The dydiTTi is here not in reference to 
 God, or to God and one ■ another 
 (comp. CEcum.), but simply to the lat- 
 ter (Col. i. 4, Heb. vi. lo) ; and that 
 as evinced, — not merely in teaching 
 (comp. De W.) or in bearing a bro- 
 ther's faults (Theod.) orin ministering 
 to the sick, <fcc. (Alf.) — but, as the 
 forcible /c67ros seems to suggest, in mi- 
 nistering to, labouring for, and if need 
 be suffering for, a brother-Christian; 
 comp. Chrys. in loe. On the theolo- 
 gical meaning and application of 
 %ydirri (Vulg. ' caritas ' [89 times] or 
 ' dilectio ' [24 times] but never ' amor,' 
 consider ho-wever August, de Civ, Dei^ 
 XIV. 7), see Eeuss, TMol. Chrii. IV. 
 ig, Vol. II. p. 203 sq., and comp. 
 Barrow, iSerm. xxvii. Vol. 11. p. 44 sq. 
 TijS 4iro(Ji; •nfjs t'Xir.] ' paUence of 
 Bojpe,^. i.e. as before, the patience 
 which is not exactly the product (De 
 W.) or the cause (CEcum.), but the 
 distinguishing and characterizing fea- 
 ture of your hope ; vwoixivaii Si irpoirf]- 
 Ket rbv Tairifv Se^dfievop tt;!' iXirlSa, 
 Kal (p^petv yevvaicijs Tct irpoaTrlisrovTa 
 aKvffpwird, Theod. In the noble word 
 irofLavri, there always appears in the 
 N. T. a background of dvSpeia (comp. 
 Plato, Theat. p. 177 b, where avSpixas 
 viroimvcu is opp. to avdvSpws ^eiyeiv) ; 
 it does not mark merely the endurance, 
 the ' sustinentia ' (Vulg., but here 
 only), or even the 'patientia' (Clarom. 
 here, and Vulg. generally), but the 
 ' perseverantia ' (see Cicero, de Irmenl. 
 11. 54. 163), the brave patience with 
 which the Christian contends against 
 the various hindrances, persecutions 
 
 (Chrys.), and temptations (Theoph.), 
 that befall him in his conflict with 
 the inward and outward world; comp. 
 Kev. ii. 3, and see notes on 2 Tim, ii. 
 10, Trench, Synon, Part. 11. § 3, and 
 Neander, Planting, Vol. 1. p. 479 
 (Bohn). In some cases it seems almost 
 to occupy the place of iXiris, as it 
 stands in conjunction with ttUttis and 
 dyairri in i Tim. vi. 1 1, Tit. ii. 2, and 
 with Tlt7Tis in 2 Thess. i. 4 : for a full 
 notice of other shades of meaning, 
 comp. Barrow, Serm. XLii. Vol. n. p. 
 
 525 sq. Toi KvpCoV K.T.X. 
 
 does not refer to the three preceding 
 substantives (Olsh.), but merely to the 
 immediately foregoing cXrlSos; our 
 Lord was the object of that hope; 
 His second coming was that to which 
 it ever turned its gaze ; comp. ver lo,- 
 and see Keuss, Thiol. Chr6t. iv. 20, 
 Vol. II. p. 221. For exx. of similar 
 accumulation of genitives, esp. in St 
 Paul's Epp., see Winer, Gr. % 30. 3. 
 note I, p. 172. ^irpoo-Bev k.t.X,] 
 'before God and our Father,' scil. 
 /M'lj/ioi'cioi'Tes (Syr., Theoph. i, Beng., 
 Alf.), not with rai? ipyov t^ Trttrrews 
 K.T,\. (Theod., Theoph. 1, Jowett), as 
 in such a case the article could 
 scarcely be dispensed with. "Efiirpo^yBar 
 is joined expressly with tov 6eoC only 
 in this Ep. {ch. iii. 9, 13, comp. ii. ig), 
 and in Acts x. 4 (not Eec.) ; but the 
 phrase is scarcely distinguishable in 
 meaning from the more usual ivibiriov 
 Tou 6., Hom. xiv. 22, Gal. i. 20, al., or 
 the less usual Ivavri tov 6. , Luke i. 8, 
 Acts viii. 2 1 (not Rec.) : itservesto hint 
 at the more solemn circumstances (of 
 prayer) under which the remembrance 
 took place, and to mark its sincerity 
 and earnestness ; it was no accidental 
 or pretended /ivcla, but one entertain- 
 ed in His presence, and in which His 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
4, 5- 
 
 etSoref, aoeX^ol ^yanr^fievoi viro Oeov, r^u eKXoy^v 4 
 v/iwv on TO evayyeXiQV ^fitov ovk eyevr/Qri els vfias 5 
 
 eyes saw no insincerity ; comp. Calv. 
 in loc, and on the phrase generally, 
 ■Frankel. Vorstud. z. LXX. p. 159-. 
 On the formula 6 ee6s koX irariip, see 
 notes on Gal. i. 4, and on the most suit- 
 able translation, notes to Transl. in loc. 
 4. elSoTEs] ' seeing we imow,' or 
 
 ' at we do;' i->-it ^ ^ 1 ^ t-t 
 
 [novimua enim] Syr. ; participial clause 
 parallel to fivrj/ioveioiires, and similarly 
 dependent on evxapurtov/iev, serving 
 to explain the reasons and motives 
 which led to the evxaptffTla. Ths 
 finite verb has thus three participial 
 clauses attached to it ; the first serves 
 principally to define the manner, the 
 second the time and circumstances, the 
 third the reason and motive of the 
 action. These delicate uses of the 
 Greek participle deserve particular 
 attention ; coinpi Kriiger, Sprackl. % 
 56. 10 sq. See also Phil, i; 3, 4, 5, 
 and notes on ver. g. It is somewhat 
 singular that so good a commentator 
 as Theodoret should refer elSSres to 
 the Thessalonians ; so also Grot., whd 
 connects the clause with the remote 
 iyevTJ6T]Te, ver. 6. There is no trace 
 of such a connexion in any of the an- 
 cient Vv. except .^th.-PoI. 
 i[yaT'r\iUvoi iiro 0«oi] 'beloved i'l) 
 God;' comp. 2 Thess. ii. 13 J so rightly 
 Syr., Vulg., Clarom., Copt., .<Eth.- 
 Pol., and inferentially Chrys. (virip 
 yiip Tujv foO Oeov &yain]Tuv tL o^k dv 
 TLS irdtrxot). To connect virlt Qeou with 
 TTJv iickoyiiii, as ^tb. (Piatt), Theoph., 
 and our own Auth., involves a dis- 
 turbance of the natural order, and an 
 ellipse of etvac that is here highly im- 
 probable. The article is inserted be- 
 fore 0eoO by ACKX ; 10 mss. 
 Ti^v IkXoy'I'' "(""v] 'your election;' 
 scil. out of others not ixXcKTol^ \tith 
 
 reference to the sovereign decree of 
 God made before the foundatioii of the 
 world ; see Eph. i. 4, and notes im loo. 
 To refer this merely to the manner of 
 their election to the Gospel (Baumg.- 
 Crus., Jowett 2), or to any internal 
 renewing of the Spirit (Pelt), is in a 
 high degree forced and unsatisfactory. 
 On the use of the terms inKi^airBai; 
 iKKoyq, and ik\eicris, in St Paul's Epp-. 
 see Reuss, Thgol. ChrSt. iv. 14, VoL 11. 
 p. 132, and on the doctrine generally, 
 the clear and in the main seLtisfactory 
 statements of Ebrard, DogmMik, § 560J 
 561 ; comp. also the very valuable 
 remarks of Hooker, on Predest. Vol. 
 H. p. 70s sqi (ed. Keble), especially 
 pp. 711, 712. 
 
 Si oTi] 'in that," because,'^ ^^-pO 
 Syr., 'quia,' Vulg. (liot perfectly 
 Conclusive), and sim. Copt.j Mth^; 
 Arm. : reason for this knowledge on 
 the part of St Paul ^nd his Com- 
 panions, in having here its causal 
 force (Winer, Gr^ § 53. 8. b, p. 3915), 
 and, with its regular objective charac- 
 teristics (Kriiger, SpracM. § 65. 8; i)j 
 referring to known facts as confirma- 
 tory of a preceding assertion. The 
 Apostle argues they inust be eleotj 
 first because (ver. s) he and his com- 
 panions were enabled to preach the 
 Gospel among them with such power; 
 and secondly (ver. 6) because they reJ 
 ceived it with such joy; ix roirov 
 tpTjal 8^\ov QTt iKXeKTol icrre; ix rov 
 Tiv Oebv TO kripvyiia h ifuv So^d&ai, 
 Theoph. Others, as Bengel and Schott, 
 give Sn its expository force, 'thAt,' 
 'to wit that' (see Kriigery Sprachl. 
 § 6i. I. 3), and place only a comma 
 after v/jMr ; in which case ver. s be- 
 comes an objective sentence (Donalds. 
 Or^_i 584 sq.) dependent oii eii6fes. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
B 
 
 nP02 eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 eir \oy~^ fi.6mva.XKa koi' eir Svvafiei koi ev IIvevnaTi uyi<p 
 Kui ev. irXtipocpopia iroW^, Ka6m otSare oioi iyev^dtinev 
 
 'and more distinctly explanatory of the 
 nature of the ikXayv- This is gram- 
 matically tenahle, but certainly not 
 exegetically satisfactory, aa the whole 
 context seems to have more of a direct 
 and argumentative, than of a depend- 
 ent and explanatory nature. 
 
 rh fvaYY- iil»»v] 'our Oospel,' 'the 
 Gospel which we preached ;' the gen. 
 being appy. that of the mediate source 
 or origin (Hartung, Oams, p. 23), or 
 perhaps rather of the mediate cauta 
 efficiens; see notes on ver. 6. 
 pvK I7CVIJ6T) eIs v)uis] ' came not unto 
 you ;' not ' erga tos,' Calv., but simply 
 'ad vos,' Vnlg., Copt., the preposition 
 not having here its ethical force (comp. 
 Fhilem. 6), but simply marking the 
 direction which was taken by the 
 fiayyi\i»v ; comp. Donalds. Cratyl. 
 % 170, and notes on Gal, iii. 14. 
 The reading is perhaps doubtful. Upis 
 i/ias is well supported, viz. by ACD 
 EFG ; s ™3a. ; Chiys., Theoph. 
 (Lachm^ • As however els appears a less 
 probable correction for irpbs than the 
 converse, and is supported by strong ex- 
 ternal authority [B (perhaps C^) KLK ; 
 nearly all mss. ; Chiys. (ms.), Theod., 
 al., Griesi., Tiach.}, we retain the 
 reading of JRec. If irptis be adopted, 
 the same meaning will be admissible 
 (comp. 2 John 12, not Sec), but 
 wUl seem less probable than ' apud ' 
 (Clarom. ; comp. i Cur. xvi. 10), as 
 tbe general reference of the context 
 is rather to the development of tbe 
 Gospel among them than the circum- 
 stances of its first arrival; for this 
 meaning of yeviaSai irpbs (denoting 
 continuance} in the N.T., which Alford 
 seems to doubt, see Meyer on 1 Cor.. 
 ii. 3, and Fritz, on Mark, p. 201. 
 On the passive form iyevfiBri, which 
 occurs noticeably often in this and the 
 
 following chapter (8 times, against 17 
 in the rest of the N.T. of which 5 are 
 quotations from the LXX.), but appy. 
 does not involve any passive meaning 
 (Alf.), see Lobeck, Phryn. p. 108, 
 Thomas M. p. 189 (ed. Bern.), and 
 notes on Col. iv. 11. 
 iv Xo7<p] ' in word ;' not merely equi- 
 valent to \6yos (comp. Jowett), but, 
 as usual, with a reference to the sphere 
 or domain of its action ; ' non stetit 
 intra verba,' Grot. ; compare Winer, 
 Gr. § 48. a. 3. a, p. 345. 
 ev 8iivd|Ki K.T.X.] 'in power and in 
 the Holy QJiost;' 'in the element of 
 power and — to sperafy a yet higher 
 principle (xal being not so much ex- 
 planatory as slightly climactic, see 
 notes on ver. 6) — in the influence of the 
 Holy Ghost ;' the preposition as before 
 defining the sphere, and thence tn- 
 ferentiaily the manner, in which tbe 
 preaching took place ; see notes on 
 ch. ii. 3. Avva/iet does not appear to 
 refer specially to ' miraculous powers ' 
 (Theod., Theoph., al.), but, as in the 
 similar passage i Cor. ii. 4, to the 
 reality, energy, and effective earnest- 
 ness, with which the Apostle and his 
 followers preached among the Thessa- 
 lonians. Jowett defends the refer- 
 ence of iv dw. to the influence pro- 
 duced on the Thess., but is thus led 
 into an interpr. of iv Hvei/i, iylip, — 
 ' the inspiration of the speaker caught 
 by the hearers,' which, as tending 
 to obscure the reference to the per- 
 sonal IIi>eu;ua a7to», seems in a high 
 degree precarious and unsatisfactory. 
 On the use of HveSpLa as a proper 
 name, see notes on Gal. v. 5, and 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 19. 1, p. iii. 
 cv irXijpo^opCf iroW'g] ' in mucft as- 
 surance,^ i.e. ' much confidence, much 
 assured persuasion,' on the part of the 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
I. 6. ( 
 
 ev ufiiv Si w/iaj- Koi vfjieii fiifx^Tal finwv eyev^OijTe Kai 6 
 
 preachers ; siibjective, corresponding to 
 the more objective side presented in the 
 preceding clause: comp. Heb. x. 22, 
 ir\ijpoit>opl<i. irioreus, which latter subst. 
 Alford here unnecessarily inserts in 
 translation. Of the three explanations 
 which Jowett proposes, (o) certainty, 
 (6) fulness of spiritual gifts. Com. a 
 Lap., al., (c) effect, fulfilment, Thom. 
 Aq. 2, the first alone seems in harmony 
 with the context, if limited to the 
 Apostle and his companions. To refer 
 it to the Thessalonians (Muse, comp. 
 Zanch. ap. Pol. Syn.), or to them and 
 the Apostle (Vorst., Schott], seems to 
 mar the correct sequence of thought, 
 and to introduce notices of the state 
 of the recipients which come first into 
 view in ver. 6. The word irXripo- 
 
 <t>opla (Hesych. pe^ailmii) appears to 
 be confined to the N. T. (Col. ii. 2, 
 Heb. vi. II, X. 22) and the ecclesiasti- 
 cal writers. The iv before irXripotp. is 
 omitted by BK ; some mss. 
 Ka6ius otSare] 'even as ye know;' 
 ' appeal for confirmation to the know- 
 ledge of the readers themselves,' Olsh. ; 
 i/ieis ^<rl ndpTvpes irus iv v/iiy Ave- 
 oTpo0i7/iei', Theoph. To place a colon 
 or period at iroXXj, and regard Kadiis 
 otSare as the antecedent member of a 
 sentence of which Kal vfiets is the conse- 
 quent Cqualem me vidistis . , , tales 
 etiam vos estis,' Koppe), involves un? 
 tenable meanings of oldare and iyevf/- 
 ffrire, and is well refuted by Liinemann 
 in loc. otoi I7Cvi)6t||i.cv] 'what 
 
 manner of men we proved;' not ' quales 
 fuerimus,' Vulg., nor yet quite so much 
 as 'facti simus,' Alf. (who throws un- 
 due emphasis on the passive form), 
 but, with the more certain and natural 
 sense, ' came to be, proved to be ;' see 
 notes above, and on Col. iv. 11. The 
 TTOiSTris was not evinced merely in con- 
 frontingdangers(Theod.comp.Chrys.), 
 
 but in the power and confidfeuce with 
 which they delivered their message. 
 81' iS)i.as] ' on your account,' 'for your 
 sake ;' ' propter vos,' Vulg. ; not with 
 so specific a force as iir^p ifiuv (comp. 
 Theod., who uses this latter formula 
 in connexion with KLvS6fovs itpeaTavai), 
 nor yet one so undefined as irepl i/MV, 
 but with a clear and distinct reference 
 to the cause and best interests [' sake,' 
 — Sax. sac. Germ. Sache] of those to 
 whom the Apostle preached ; rrjs i/iTJs 
 [rj/ieTdpas] (riroiSi)^ t^s c& iptas i) i/iwv 
 irapk GfioO ^KKoyrj Trpb<l>atTi,s ydyovev, 
 (Ecum. The ^i" vfuv, it need Scarcely 
 be said, is simply ■ among you ;' dve- 
 (TTpa.iprip.ev iv vfilv, Theoph. The iv 
 however is omitted by ACK ; 4 mss. ; 
 Vulg. (Amiat.). 
 
 6. Kal iSftEts K.T.\.] ' and [because] 
 yebecameimitators of us;' second ground 
 for knowing that the Tbess. were 
 iKKeKToi, — the Kai not being ascensive 
 (comp. notes onEpk.ii. 1, Phil.iv. 12) 
 or equivalent to 'sic, more Hebrseo' 
 (Grot.), but simply copulative, and the 
 verse remaining, if not structurally, 
 yet logically, under the vinculum of 
 the preceding Sri. It thus seems best 
 to place neither a period (Tisch., Alf.) 
 nor a comma (Lachm., Buttm.), but a 
 colon, after ver. 5. Here, as in ver. 5 , 
 Liinem. and Alf. lay a stress on the 
 passive form iyeviiBip-e. This however 
 is lexically doubtful: the Apostle is 
 rather dwelling on the effects pro- 
 duced among them, on what they 
 came to be, and thus significantlyadopts 
 not the simple verb p,ip,eT<r8ai, but the 
 more definitive pA.p.7)Tai yivecr&at ; see 
 J Cor. iv. 16, xi. i, Eph. v. 1, Phil, 
 iii. 17. Kal Toi ICvpCou] 
 
 ' and of the Lord,' all misunderstand- 
 ing is prevented by means of the in- 
 sertion of ToO K. with the slightly 
 climactic Kat, see Hartung, Partik. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
10 
 
 nP02 0E22AAONIKEIS A. 
 
 TOW Kvptov, Se^dfievoi tov \6yov eV flXt'Yet iroXX^ fiera 
 7 yapai} YiveifxaTOi dyiov, (aJTe yevtcrOai vfias rv-nov 
 
 Kal, 5. 4, Vol. I. p. 145. This use of 
 the particle, which is strictly in ac- 
 cordance with its supposed derivation 
 [tshi, ' camulare,' oomp. Pott, Elym. 
 Purach, Vol. 11. p. 320], forms the sort 
 of connecting link between its simply 
 copulative and simply ascensive uses, 
 and may perhaps be termed its cli- 
 mactic use ; comp. Fritz, on Mark i. 5, 
 p. II. For a brief analysis of the 
 leading distinctions in the use of this 
 particle, see notes on Phil. iv. 12. 
 The exact manner in which the Thes- 
 salonians became imitators of their 
 founders, — and of the Lord, is defined 
 in the concluding words of the verse, 
 ^v &\i\pei ttoXKtj fiera xapas III', ay tov ; 
 joy amid svfferitig and affliction is the 
 ' tertium comparationis ;' comp. Acts 
 V. 41, Heb. X. 34. SE^d)i.evoi 
 
 tAv Xoyov] 'homing received the word;' 
 temporal use of the participle (see notes 
 on Eph. iv. 8), marking here the con- 
 temporaneousness of the action with 
 that of the finite verb : the predication 
 of manner is given in the following 
 words ; comp. Kom. iv. 20. It is 
 scarcely necessary to add that rbv 
 \6yov is here practically equivalent to 
 t6v \byoy tov Kupiov (ver. 8), rod GeoO 
 (2 Cor. ii. 17), or Trjs dXriBelas (Eph. i. 
 15), and refers to the preaching of the 
 Gospel, which was the Xivos Kar' i^o- 
 X^"', comp. Luke viii. 13, Acts xvii. 
 II. On the force of Si^aaSai Thv 
 \byov, and its probable distinction 
 from irapaXa^eiv r. l^by., see notes on 
 ch. ii. 13. iv 6X£<|/«i, iroXX'jj] 
 
 'in much affliction.'' The affliction of 
 the Thessalonians dated back as early 
 as their first reception of the Gospel 
 (see Acts xvii. 6), and, as this Epistle 
 incidentally shows, continued both 
 while the Apostle was with them (ch. 
 ii. 14), and' after he had left them 
 
 (ch. iii. 2, 3). xapas 
 
 IIve^liaTos dy.] 'joy of the Holy Spi- 
 rit/ certainly not 'IsetitiamdeSpiritu,' 
 Fritz. {Nova Opusc. p. 271), still less 
 Xap4 irvev/MTiKij (Jowett), but 'joy 
 inspired by and emanating from the 
 Spirit :' gen. of the originating cause; 
 see notes on Col. i. 23. Between the 
 two usual forms of the gen. of ' abla- 
 tion ' (see Donaldson, Gr. § 448, 449), 
 viz. [a] the stronger gen. of the causa 
 efflciens, and (c) the weaker gen. ori- 
 ginis, which forms tlie point of transi- 
 tion to the partitive genitive, it is 
 perhaps not hypercritical in the N.T. 
 to insert (h) a gen. of the originating 
 cause, or, if the expression be permis- 
 Bible, the originating agent,- — in which 
 the two ideas of source and agency 
 are blended and intermixed; consider 
 the exx. cited in Scheuerl. Synt. §17. 
 I, p. 126. With the present case, 
 which appears to fall under (6), — the 
 Spirit being not only an external 
 giver, but an internal source of the 
 Xapii — contrast on the one hand 2 
 Thess. ii. 13, ayiaffnhs Xli'e'ifiaTos, 
 where the verbal in -/ios suggests {a), 
 and on the other Gal. v. 22, 6 Kapiris 
 TOV Tlfed^., where, if the gen. be not 
 possessive, the image seems to suggest 
 the weaker (c). Such distinctions, 
 which are not wholly without impor- 
 tance in the N.T., are really due as 
 much to doctrinal as to grammatical 
 considerations; comp. Winer, Gr. § 30. 
 I, p. 167 sq. 
 
 7. iiimyev. liji. niirov] 'so that ye 
 became an ensample :' spiritual progress 
 of the Thessalonian converts ; they 
 were not only imitators of the ex- 
 ample of their teachers, but were 
 themselves (regarded as a collective 
 body; comp. Winer, Gr. § 27. i, p. 
 157 note) an example to o'Jiers. This 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
I. 7, 8. 
 
 11 
 
 nracriv Tots iria-Tevoveriv evT^ M.aKeSovia Koi evr^ 'Aj^ata. 
 a^' vfjLmv yap i^i]j(tirai 6 Xoyoi tov Hvpiov ov fiovov ev 8 
 
 could hardly apply to those who had 
 received the Gospel before them (ol 
 TrpoKapdvTes, Chrys., Theoph.)i for, as 
 LilnemaQn obaerves, the church of 
 Phillppi was the only one in Europe 
 which received the Gospel before that 
 of Thessalonica ; comp. ch. ii. i, Acts 
 xvi. 1 2 sq. The reading is very doubt- 
 ful ; the plural riJrrous {Sec.) is well 
 supported [ACFGKLX ; most mss. ; 
 Boern., Syr.-Phil. ; many Ff.], but 
 seems so much more likely to have 
 been changed from the singular than 
 vice versS (Schott), that on the whole 
 riirov, though having less external 
 authority [BD'(D^B and i ms. read 
 Tinros) ; 7 mss. ; Clarom., Sangerm., 
 Vulg., Syr., ^th. (both), al., Lachm. 
 (uon marg.), Tisch.\ is here to be pre- 
 ferred. ira(riv toIs irio-T.] 
 'to all ike helievers/ inaTe^ovaiv nob 
 having here a pure participial force, 
 Tofs ■^St] Ti(rTevov(n, Chrys., but, as 
 often in the N.T., coalescing with the 
 article to form a substantive; see 
 Winer, Gr. % 45. 7, p. 316. 
 tv T^ MoKeS. Kul 6v T^p 'Ax.] ' Mace- 
 donia and Achaia,' i.e. the whole of 
 Greece ; Acts xix. 21, Eom. xv. 26, 
 comp. 2 Cor. ix. 2. Macedonia was 
 at first (B.C. 167) divided by the Ro- 
 mans into four districts, but subse- 
 quently (B.C. 142) reunited into one 
 province comprising all the northern 
 portion of Greece. Achaia proper was 
 also united with Hellas and the rest 
 of the Peloponneae (B.C. 142) in one 
 province, and as the leading state at 
 that time gave the name to the whole 
 southern portion of Greece ; see Winer, 
 JtWB. Vol. I. p. 16, and- Vol. II. p. 
 44. The omission of iv before rg 'A- 
 Xatf {Rec.) has against it all the uncial 
 MSS. except KL. 
 
 8. a(|> iJiMov 7ap] ' For from you T 
 
 proof and amplification of the pre- 
 ceding assertion. The preposition is 
 here simply local (Alf.), — not ethical 
 (' vobis efficientibus,' Storr; a very 
 questionable paraphrase), nor both com- 
 bined (Schott), — and marks the Thes- 
 salonians as the simple terminus a quo 
 of the i^riXf^cSat. It may be observed 
 that appy. in all oases in the N.T. 
 where Airb is said to be equivalent to 
 virii the action implied in the verb is 
 represented as emanating from, rather 
 than wrought by the assumed agent ; 
 comp. Luke vi. 18 (not Sec), James 
 i. 13, see Winer, Gr, § 47. b, p. 331, 
 and notes on Qal. i. i. 
 eliiXITai] ' hath sounded forth ;' an 
 aV. \ey6/ji,. in the N.T. (Hesychius, 
 i^ijXSeV iKTipixSyj), but found in the 
 LXX. (Joel iii. 14, Ecclus. xl. 13) 
 and occasionally in later writers, e.g. 
 Polyb. Sist. XXX. 4. 7, t6 KVKveiov 
 ^^tlXViyavres. The word forcibly marks 
 both the clear and the pervasive na- 
 ture of the X070S TOV Kvpiov ws iirl 
 tyaXiTLyyos \afnrphv rixovffrjs Kal kirl 
 7roXi> (piavoiffTis, Theoph. 
 6 Xoyos Toil KvpCou] ' the word of the 
 Lord,' i.e. the Gospel (see above, ver. 6) 
 as received by the Thessalonians, not 
 ' the report that it was received by 
 them ' (De W.), still less ' your bright 
 example became itself a message from 
 the Lord ' (Alf.), — ^both of which in- 
 terpretations seem needlessly artificial. 
 The Gospel was received by them with 
 such eager zeal, its words were so 
 constantly in their mouths and so 
 wrought in their hearts, that it swelled 
 as it were into a mighty trumpet-call 
 that was heard of all men sounding 
 forth from Thessalonica. 
 iv T'n MoK. Kal 'Ax-] Here the omis- 
 sion of the article and prep, before 
 'Axa^ is not only permissible (oii the 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
12 
 
 nP02 eESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 T? MuKeSovla xai 'Aj(a/a, a\\' ev iravTi tottw ^ xto-TJy 
 y/*(3v ^ TT/joy Toi/ 0601/ e^eX^XvQev, wcrre firj \peiav e)(eiv 
 
 ground that the previous more exact 
 Bpecificatlon of each would preclude 
 any misconception), but really gram- 
 matically exact : Macedonia and A- 
 chaia novr form a whole in antithesis 
 to the rest of the world ; oomp. Winer, 
 Cfr. § 19. 4, p. 116 sq. The reading 
 however is very doubtful : Lachm, in- 
 serts ev Tj with the strongest external 
 testimony [CDEFGKLK ; 30 msa. ; 
 Vulg., Clarom., Syr. (both), al.], but 
 as the insertion of the iv ry would 
 seom so much more likely to have been 
 a conformation to ver. 7, than its 
 omission to have been accidental, we 
 retain the reading of Ree., Tisch., 
 though only with B ; majority of mss. ; 
 some Vv. ; Chrys., Theod., al. In A 
 there is a lacuna (ver. 8 beginning 
 with d\V 6/ ircwrl) arising from Ho- 
 moeoteleuton. dXX" Iv iravrC 
 
 K.T.X.] There is some little difficulty in 
 the exact conneiiion, as dAX' iv k.t.'K. 
 seems clearly to stand in immediate 
 antithesis to ov iibvov k.t.X. (opp. to 
 Lunem, who places a colon after 
 Vivplov), but yet stands associated with 
 a new nominative. The most simple 
 explanation is that of Ruckert (Xoc. 
 Paul. Expl. Jen. 1844), according to 
 which the Apostle is led by the desire 
 of making a forcible climax into a 
 disregard of the preceding nominative, 
 and in fact puts a sentence in anti- 
 thesis to oi> /mvov — 'Axatf, instead of 
 the simple local clause iv wavrl rSwtfi 
 or iv oX(j) Tip Kbajiif (Rom. i. 8) which 
 the strict logical connexion actually 
 required. Rec. inserts koX after 
 
 AWi, but on decidedly insufficient 
 authority— viz. D'EKL ; Vulg. (not 
 Amiat.), and several Ff On the dis- 
 tinction between this latter form (' ubi 
 piior notio non per se sed quatenus 
 sola est negatur ') and oiJ iJ.bvov...SKKa 
 
 ('ubi posterior notio ut gravior in 
 locum prioris substituitur priore non 
 plane sublato '), see the good note of 
 Kilhner on Xen. Mem. I. 6. 2, and 
 correct accordingly Jelf , Gr. § 762. i ; 
 see also Klotz, Deowr. Vol. ir. p. 8. 
 1] irpis Tov 0c6v] ' which is toward 
 Ood,' 'to God-ward,' Auth. : more 
 exact definition of the Triims by means 
 of the repeated article ; comp. Tit. ii. 
 10, notes on 6al. iii. 26, and Winer, 
 Gr. § 20. I, p. 119 sq. The less usual 
 preposition irpis is here used with 
 great propriety, as there is a tacit 
 contrast to a previous faith wpis ri 
 eiSuXa (see ver. 9), in which latter 
 case the deeper wIitt. els (faith to and 
 mto, — surely not 'on,' Alf.) would 
 seem to be theologically unsuitable. 
 On the meaning of Trlar. irpis, see 
 notes on Philem. £, and on the force 
 of iriffTis and Tnarevav with different 
 prepp., Reuss, Thiol. Chret. IV. 14, 
 Vol. II. p. 129, and notes on i Tim. 
 i. 16. ^$cXijXv8cv] ' is gone 
 
 forth ;' so, with reference to a report, 
 Matth, ix. 26, Mark i. 28, Rom. x. 18 
 (Ps. xix. 5) ; Eoch compares the He- 
 brew XXJ, Ezek. xvi. 14, SiiiKBe, 
 LXX. The cuiTency of the report 
 was probably much promoted by the 
 commercial intercourse between Thes- 
 salonica and other cities, both in 
 Greece and elsewhere; see Koch in 
 loc., and Wieseler, Chronol. p. 42, 
 who suggests that Aquila and Pris- 
 cilia, who had lately come from Rome 
 to Corinth (Acts xviii. 2), might have 
 mentioned to the Apostle the preva- 
 lence of the report even in that more 
 distant city. If this be so, the justice 
 and truth of the Apostle's hyperbole 
 is still more apparent ; to be known 
 in Rome was to be known everywhere : 
 contrast Baur, Paulus, p. 484. Mec. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
1. 9. 
 
 13 
 
 ifids XaXeiv Tf avToi yap vepi ^fxwv a-TrayyeXXovartp 9 
 oTToiav eta-oSov err^fofxev vpoiufxav, koi ttws iirea-Tpe-drare 
 vpos Tov Qeov a-TTo Ttov eiSiiXtov SovXeveiv QetS tSivTi koi 
 
 adopts the order iinas (x^iv, but only 
 
 with E.L ; most mss. 
 
 XoXcIv Ti] ' to speah anything, ' sc. about 
 
 your vlaris, or as Syr, . n "i . \ v 
 
 ^ 7 
 [de Tobis]; vpavXaptv ri/ias ^ ^^A") 
 Kol Trap dWcan &Koiofi.ev a \4yeiv i6i- 
 Xo/tcy, Theod. On the difference be- 
 tween XaXc?!* and \4yeiv, comp. notes 
 on Tit. ii. i ; and see Trench, Synon. 
 Part II. § 26. The fundamental dis- 
 tinction that XaXeiv (Hesych. (f)$iy- 
 yeadai) points merely to sound and 
 utterance, \iyetv to purport, is mainly 
 observed in the N.T. with the excep- 
 tion that XaXeFv is' sometimes used 
 where \iyav would appear more natu- 
 ral, but never vice vers^ ; see esp. the 
 good note of Liicke on John viii. 43. 
 
 9. auTol] 'they themselves;' i.e. the 
 people in Macedonia and Achaia and 
 elsewhere ; a very intelligible ' con 
 struotio ad sensum;' see Winer, Gr. 
 § 22. 3, p. 131, and notes on Gal. ii. 2 
 The interpr. of Pelt, 'sponte,' airo- 
 Iia0uis, is here artificial and unneces 
 sary: airoi stands in somewhat em 
 phatic antithesis to the preceding i;/;tas; 
 'we have no need to say anything 
 about yon, for they to whom otherwise 
 we might have told it themselves 
 speak of it and spread it ;' 06 irapaiU- 
 vovaiv dKouffai 7rep2 v/iwv, dXXa rods 
 waphvTat xai reffeg/t^vous to i/i4Tepa 
 KaropOii/Mra oi fiij irapoi^res /aiSi tc- 
 Beafiipoi TrapaXa/ipdvovo'ii', Chrys. 
 ircpl ^|i<»v] ' about us,' sell, the Apostle 
 and his helpers ,' not ' de me et vobis 
 simul,' Zanch. (compare Liinem., — 
 well answered by Alf.), as the studied 
 prominence of vepl ^puiv and the real 
 point of the clause are thus completely' 
 overlooked : instead of our telling 
 
 about our own success, they do it for 
 us ; & yhp airois ixpv" ^ap' ■fip.av 
 &Kovetv, Tavra airroX vpoXa^orres \4- 
 •youo-i, Chrys. oiroCav k.t.\.] 
 
 '^what manner of entering in, we had 
 unto you: ' fuUer explanation of the 
 preceding irepl iniwv. The reference 
 of the qualitative oirolavto the dangers 
 and sufferings undergone by St Paul 
 and his followers in their first preach- 
 ing at Thessalonioa (Chrys., Theoph. , 
 CEcum.) is rightly rejected by most 
 modem commentators : the TrbiiT-ijs is 
 rather evinced in the power and confi- 
 dence with which they preached, and 
 serves to illustrate verse 5. 
 EiftroSos has here no ethical meaning, 
 "■indolem nostram ' (^th.-Pol. ; comp. 
 Dish.), but, as always in the N.T; 
 (ch. ii. I, Acts xiii. 24, Heb. x. 19, 
 2 Pet. i. n), is simply local in its re- 
 ference, 'introitus,' Vulg., Arm., 'in- 
 greasus,' Copt., ' quomodo venimus ad 
 vos,' Mth.. (Piatt) : so too inferentially 
 the Greek commentators, and after 
 them most modem writers. The pre-' 
 sent f^oyf (Rec.) appy. rests only on 
 the authority of cursive mss., and is 
 rejected by all modern editors. 
 ir«3s lire<rTp^i((OTe] 'how ye turned;' 
 Ulustration of ver. 6. The 'irws does 
 not necessarily involve (vkSKus, fieri, 
 troXX^s aijioSpoT'iyrot, Chrys., 'quanta 
 facilitate,' Calv., but simply paints to 
 the fact of bn&Tpoipri (Alf.), the clause 
 being not modal but objective; coinp. 
 Donalds. Or. § 584. In the verb iin- 
 BTpiipeai the prep, does not here seem 
 to mark regression (comp. notes on 
 Gal. iv. 2), but simply direction : both 
 meanings are lexically admissible (see 
 Best u. Palm, Lex. a. v. and s. v. iirl, 
 c), but the second seems to^be most 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
14 
 
 nPOS eEZSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 lO a.>.ti6ivS, Kui am/JLeveiv tov vlov avToO e/c tccv ovpavwv, 
 ov '^yeipev ex twv vSKpSiv, 'Irjvovv tov pvofievov ^fiai airo 
 •tni opytjt tSj epx^f^ev^i- 
 
 in accordance with the context. 
 irpAs TOV ©eAv] marks the conversion 
 in its generalrather than ita specifically 
 Christian aspects, with reference to 
 the former heathen and Gentile condi- 
 tion of the Thessalonians : if they had 
 been Jews, the appropriate formula, 
 as Olsh. well observes, would have 
 been Trpfis rbv Kvpiov^ On this and 
 the following verse, see a sound ser- 
 mon by Sherlock, Serm. Liii. Vol. lii. 
 p. 56 (ed. Hughes). BovXeueiv 
 
 K.T.X.] ' to serve the living and true 
 Ood;' infinitive of the purpose or in- 
 tention, ds t6 SovKeieiv if.T.X., Chrys., 
 — a form of the final sentence (Donalds. 
 Gr. § 606) not uncommon in St Paul's 
 Bpp. ; see i Cor. i. 17, Eph. i. 4, Col. 
 i. 12. On the difference between this 
 and the infin. with oio-re (consecutive 
 sentence), see notes on Col. I. c, and 
 comp. Winer, Gr. % 44. I, p. 284, ed. 
 6, but more fully in § 45. 3, ed. 5. 
 God has here the appropriate title of 
 fffli' (Acts xiv. 15) in contrast with 
 the dead (Wisdom xiv. 5, 29, comp. 
 Habak. ii. 19) and practically non- 
 existent (i Cor. viii. 4, see Meyer in 
 loc.) gods of the heathen, — and that 
 of &X-n6ivbs (John xvii. 3, i John v. 
 20, comp. 2 Chron. xv. 3) in contrast 
 to their false semblance (Gal. iv. 8) 
 and iMTaioTiis (hence D?vS Lev. xix. 
 4, xxvi. i). On the omission of the 
 art. with 9e6s, comp. Winer, Or. § ig. 
 I, p. no. 
 
 10. dva|j.ilvciv] ' to await ;' second 
 great purpose involved in the iwurrpo- 
 tpri : hope of the nature here described, 
 as Liiuem. observes, involves and in- 
 cludes faith, and forms a suitable pre- 
 paration for the allusions in the latter 
 portion of the Epistle. If xo/)4 be said 
 
 to be the key-note of the Ep. to the 
 Philippians (iii. i), i\rls may truly be 
 termed that of the present Ep. The 
 verb dvafUffiv, a dV. XeySfi. in the 
 N. T., does not here involve any re- 
 ference to awaiting one who is to retwm 
 (comp. Beng.), nor yet any specific 
 notion of eagerness or joy (Flatt), but 
 simply that of patience ('erharren,' 
 Winer) and confidence ; the dvi having 
 that modified intensive force (wpoaiii- 
 vuv, Theod. , see i Tim. i. 3 : irepiiU- 
 vav, Theoph. , see Acts i. 4), which is 
 so hard to convey without paraphrase ; 
 see esp. Winer, de Verb. Comp. iii. 
 p. 15, and comp. Kost u. Palm, Lex. 
 s. V. dco, B. b. Ik tuv oiipavuv 
 
 belongs to ivaiihew, involving a slight 
 but perfectly intelligible form of bra- 
 chylogy, soil, ipxo/ievov ix twv oip. ; 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 66. 2, p. S47. 
 ov T[7€ip€V K.T.X.] * whom he raised 
 from the dead :' relative sentence placed 
 emphatically before 'IijffoOv as involv- 
 ing an ' argumentum palmarium ' 
 (Beng.) of His sonsliip; seeEom. i. 4, 
 and comp. Pearson, Creed, Art. v. Vol. 
 !• P- 313 (^"J- Burton). The article 
 before veKpQv is omitted by Sec. with 
 ACK; CEc, but is supported by pre- 
 ponderating external evidence [BDE 
 FGLN; Ff.], and by the probability 
 of a conformation to the more usual 
 iyeipeiv ix veKpQv. 'Iijo-ovv 
 
 K.T.X.] 'Jesus who delivereth us.' The 
 present participle has not the force of 
 an aor. ('qui eripnit,' Vulg., Arm.) or 
 future part, ('qui eripiet,' Clarom., 
 ' qui liberabit,' Copt.), but may serve 
 (a) to mark the action as commenced 
 and continuing (Vorst., Beng. ' Cbris- 
 tus nos semel Avrpufraro, semper 
 ^lierot'), or (i) as 'rem certo futurara' 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
I. lO, II, I, 2. 
 
 15 
 
 tdi 
 
 otoare, 
 
 aSeXcbi 
 
 01, TtjV 
 
 pur coming among you AvTOl -VOO 
 
 was not vain; we nei- *ivi uc /^^ 
 
 ther beguiled .you nor ir ^ t '> % y r ^ ff , « 
 
 were burdensome, but (fjcrpopi/ ^fJLUV TrjV TTpOi V/xaf OTt OV K€VIJ 
 
 tolled bravely, and en- •, \ g 
 
 MKanno^d^!' ^^ yivovev aWu vpoTraOovTei Kai v^pir- 
 
 II. 
 
 (Schott), or still more probably (c) is 
 associated with the article in a aub- 
 Btantival character, ' our deliverer,' 
 Alf. ; see Winer, Gr. § 45. 7, p. 316. 
 diro Tijs op'yiijs] This powerful word 
 (ipyh) 13 not merely synonymous with 
 KoXacris or n/jLwpla (Orig. CeU. iv. p. 
 211 ; comp. Lunem.), but implies de- 
 finitely the holy anger of God against 
 sin, — that anger which, when deeply 
 considered, only serves to evince Hia 
 love; see eap. MiiUer, Doctr. of Sin, 
 I. 2. 2, Vol. i. p. 265 (Clark). For 
 iirb Trjs dpy. ABN ; 17, 73, read ix t. 
 ipy. Tijs lpxo|Uvtis] ' which is 
 
 coming;' more specific definition of 
 the dpy^ ; el-Tre ttjv iviffrafTiv, \4yei 
 Kal TT]v dvTaTr6Soati>, ■^v r)iUpav dpy^s 
 KoKeT, CEcum. The present participle 
 has no future tinge, e.g.=iJi,s\\ov<rr]S 
 (pish., Koch), but marks the certainty 
 of the coming (Bemhardy, Synt. X. 7, 
 p. 371), and hints at the enduring 
 principles of the moral government of 
 God ; comp. Eph. y. g, Col. iij. 6. 
 
 Chaeteb II. X. AvTol vdp otSoTe] 
 'For ye yourselves know;' explanatory 
 confirmation of the first part of chi i. 
 9, by an appeal to the knowledge and 
 experience of his readers. In ch. i. 9 
 two distinct subjects are alluded to, 
 (a) the power and confidence of the 
 preachers, (6) the obedience and recep- 
 tivity of the hearers, comp. Chrys. : 
 the former is amplified in the present 
 and 1 1 following verses, the latter in 
 ver. 13 — 16. ri/> is thus certainly not 
 resumptive, nor yet explicative, but 
 what Hartung {PaMik. yap, § 2) terms 
 ' argumentativ-explicativ,' the apa ele- 
 ment of the particle referring to what 
 had preceded (' quasi pro re nat^ jam 
 
 recte atque ordine hoc ita se habere 
 dicitur,' Klotz), the yk element add- 
 ing an explanatory asseveration ; see 
 esp. Klotz, Devar. Vol. ir. p. 235. If 
 the distinction of Hand (Tv^sdl. Vol. 
 II. p. 375) be correct, 'nam ipsi,' 
 Vulg., is here a judicious correctipn 
 of ' ipsi enim,' Clarom. 
 Sti ov KeviJ 7^7.] ' that it has not been 
 emjpty,' i.e. void of power and earnest- 
 ness; 'non inanis, sed plena virtutis,' 
 Beng. In this form of the objective 
 sentence — by no means uncommon 
 after verbs of ' knowledge, perception, 
 cC;c.' — there is an idiomatic anticipation 
 of the object, which serves to awaken 
 the reader's attention to the subsequent 
 predications ; see esp. Kruger, Sprachl. 
 § 61. 6. -i. For other forms of the 
 objective sentence, see Donalds. Gr. 
 § J92. The exact meaning of Kevij 
 
 has been somewhat differently esti- 
 mated : it can scarcely involve any 
 ethical reference (' deceitful,' Ham- 
 mond, nvffoi xj/evdeTs Kal 'Kijpoi, CEoum.), 
 or any allusion to accompanying dan- 
 gers (Theod., Theoph.), or yet to the 
 results of the eSroSos (De Wette i), as 
 these belong to the second part of ver. 
 g, — but, as ylyovtv and the leading 
 idea in the following words {^wafi^riir. 
 iv T$ Qeif K.T.X.) both suggest, to the 
 essential character of the eifcroSos, its 
 fulness of power and purpose and 
 reality ; ovk avdptairivrj oiiS^ ri TUXovfTa, 
 Chrys. So rightly De Wette 2, Lu- 
 nem., and Alf. 
 
 2. aWd introduces the positive an- 
 tithesis to the preceding negative oi5 
 Kevti yiyovBi ; see i Cor. xv. 10. Rec. 
 reads oiKKb, Kal, but has only the sup- 
 port of a few mas., and Clarom. 
 irpoiraS. Kal vPpio-S.] ' hamng w^ered. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
16 nP02 eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 adevrei KaOws oiSaTe ev ^il^iinrois, eirapp>}cna<rdfi.eda 
 
 ev TO) Qew iiftcov XaX^arai irpoi vfias ro evayyeXtov 
 
 3 Tov Qeov ev iroXXm aywvi. >f yap ■^apaKXnitrii tjfxuv 
 
 previously and hammg been injuriouisly 
 treated,' Acts xvi. 22 sq. ; 'id quod 
 alios a prEedicando deterrere potuisset,' 
 Beng. It is doubtful whether the 
 participle ia here concessive (' although 
 we had, &c,,' Lunem. ; see Plato, Eep. 
 II. p. 376 A), or simply temporal. If 
 Kol (Rec.) were to be admitted in the 
 text before the part., the former mean- 
 ing would seem more probable, as ia 
 such cases the koI (though not = Kciiirep, 
 De W.) serves to sharpen the anti- 
 thesis involved in the concession (see 
 Kruger, SpracJil. § 56. 13. 1 sq.) ; as 
 however Kal must be rejected, the sim- 
 ple participle seems here more natu- 
 rally regarded as temporal; comp. Xen. 
 Mem. ir. 2. 5. So Auth., and appy. 
 Syr., Copt. The verb irpoTr&ex^"' '» 
 a aV. Xeryoii, in the N.T. though not 
 Uncommon elsewhere (Thucyd. III. 67, 
 Xen. I. c, Plato, {. c), and serves 
 clearly to define the relation of time ; 
 i,Tb KivBivuv iK^vySpTes tAXiv els iri- 
 povs KLvSvvovs ivGTT^ffOfiev ; comp. Syr. 
 and .aith. (Piatt). To this word the 
 addition of i^piaB. gives force and cir- 
 cumstantiality. ^ira^pTicriacrd- 
 |ic8a] 'we were bold of speech;' so dis- 
 tinctly ^th. -Pol. (but not Piatt). It 
 seems more exact to retain this pri- 
 mary meaning ; for though wafipriala 
 has indisputably in the N.T. the deri- 
 vative meaning of confidence, boldness 
 (see on Eph. iii. 12), still after a com- 
 parison of Eph. vi. 20, and Acts xxvi. 
 26 (a speech of St Paul's), the idea of 
 bold ((pcecAi even though reiterated in 
 "KaKijaai, can scarcely be excluded. 
 This jrafi^Tiirla was ^v ti^ Qtif ij|jiuv ; 
 it was in Hm, (not exactly 'per Deum,' 
 Schott i), as the causal sphere and 
 ground of its existence, that the ira/i- 
 
 priala was felt and manifested. On the 
 particularizing •qnwu, see notes on 
 Philem. 4, and PhU. i. 3. 
 XoXijirai] 'so at to speak / explanatory 
 infinitive, defining still more clearly 
 the oraJ nature of the boldness ; see 
 Winer, Gr. § 44. i, p. 285 ; so rightly 
 De W., Meyer (on Eph. vi. 20), and 
 Koch, who however appears (from his 
 reference to Winer, Gr. p. 379, ed. 5) 
 to confound this use with' that of the 
 inf. with ToC. Ltinem., Alf., and 
 others, far less plausibly, consider the 
 inf. as a simple object-infin. after 
 iira^pri<r. The ancient Vv. here give 
 no distinct opinion, except perhaps 
 Syr.-PhU., ' in fiducia (?) in Deo nostro 
 loqui, <fec.,' where the inf. seems clear- 
 ly regarded as explanatory: so too 
 (appy.) Chrys. tA evayy. to5 
 
 6eov] 'the Gospel of God;' the Gospel 
 which comes from Him, and of which 
 He is the origin ; gen. not of the ob- 
 ject (Ghrys. on Rom. i. i), but of the 
 origin or originating cause; see notes 
 on ch. i. 6. On the various genitives 
 associated with tiayf., comp. note on 
 £i)A..i. I3,andesp. Keuss, ThSol.Chrlt. 
 IV. 8, Vol. II. p. 81. iv TToWip 
 
 sIyuvi] ' in mitch conflict ;' not without 
 emphasis : it was this fortitude amidst 
 external dangers thatpeculiarlyevinced 
 that the etffodos od Kepri 7^'yovei'. It 
 does not seem necessary here to refer 
 ayi)!' to any internal conflict (comp. 
 notes on Col. ii. i), but simply, in ac- 
 cordance with the context, to the ex- 
 ternal dangers by which- they were 
 surrounded; so Theoph., CEoum. ; 
 Chrys. appears to unite both. 
 
 3. T\ ^dp irapdicX. i]|usv] ' For our 
 exhortation/' explanatory confirmation 
 (comp. note on ver. i) of iraji^. k.t.X., 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
II. 
 
 17 
 
 OVK CK irXavtjs ovSe e^ aKaOapaiai ovSe ev Jo'Xo), aXKa 4 
 
 3. oiU (2)] So Lachm. with ABCD'FGN ; 6 mss. ; Copt. (Tiach. ed. i). 
 In ed. 1, 7, however, Tisch. reads oft-e with D'EKL ; nearly all mss. ; Chrys. 
 (aliquotiea), Theod. (oflrc.otlTe), Dam., al. (JBec, Alf.), and with some plausi- 
 bility, as oiSk might be thought a correction for oUre, which, though unusual, 
 is here deemed not indefensible (comp, Sckott, Alf.) : still, as this defence rests 
 mainly on a doubtful use of h, — -as a recognition of the change of prepp. might 
 have suggested a change from ovSi to ovre nearly as probably as a non-recogni- 
 tion of it the converse,-.rand lastly, as the uncial authority very distinctly 
 preponderates in favour of mU, we revert to thp readfaig of Tiach. (ed. i). So 
 Win^, Or. § 55. 6,, p. 437, Olsh., De W., Limem., Spch. 
 
 especially of the concluding words ; oJ 
 Trkavwvres ovK els Kivd6vovs iavTois ixSi- 
 Sbaaai, CEcnm., compare Chrys. There 
 is here, as Bengel acutely observes, an 
 'setiologia duplex,' the present thp 
 introducinga reference to the Apostle's 
 regular habit, the second ylip (ver. 5) 
 to that habit as specially evinced 
 among the Thessalonians. The word 
 ■n-apajcXijats here includes ' totum prse- 
 conium evangelicum' (Beng.), and ap- 
 proaches in meaning to 5iSa;\;iJXC}urys.), 
 or 5iSa(7KaX£a (Theod.), from both of 
 which however it is perhaps distin- 
 guishable, as being directed more to 
 the feelings than the understanding; 
 comp. notes ore i 2%i>. iv, 13, and 
 Beng. in loc. who says 'vap&K. late 
 patet ; ubi desides excitat est hartatio, 
 ubi tristitiffi medetur.est solatium.' A 
 good dissertation on irapaKoKeiv, Trapi- 
 xXijirts, and rapdiiSiiTos will be found 
 in Knapp, Seript. Yair. Argv/ia. No. iv. ; 
 see esp. p. 134. 
 
 oiiK «K irXcivris] 'is not of error/ not 
 'grounded on,' Alf. i. but 'having 
 its source in,' AM. 2, the prep, retain- 
 ing its usual ajid primary force of 
 origination from; see notes on Oal. ii. 
 16, Winer, Gr.% 47. b, p. 329. The 
 verb to be supplied .is not rfv (Syr.^ 
 .^th.) but iarlv (Cgpt.) ; as the Apo- 
 stle is here referring to bis general 
 and habitual mode of preaching ; see 
 above. Lastly, irXAvti is not trans- 
 
 itive, 'impostura,' Beza, 'seduoendi 
 Btudium,' Grot. (comp. Theoph.), but, 
 as appy. in all -passages in the N. T. , 
 
 intransitive, 'error,' yu]g., y <^ ' ^ t 
 
 [error]Syr., thecontext servingtoshow 
 whether it is in the more abstract 
 sense of 'mentis error' (Irrthum) as 
 in Eph. iv. I4,.pr as'here in the more 
 general meaning of 'bdng deceived' 
 (Irrwahn, delusion), whether by one- 
 aelf or others; comp. Theod., oiiic fooee 
 r& Trap ijfiup Trpofftpepdpieva r^ fivBoKo^ 
 yli} tOjv irotTjTuVj a troKKov fiiv ^evdoOs 
 ■flroXX^j Si dgoKafflas i/i,T4ir\r]<rTac. 
 aKa6ap(rta«] 'impurity,' almost 'im- 
 pure moti/ees;' not apparently with any 
 reference to the tmclean and licentious 
 teaching of /layoi (col y6r]Tet, Theoph. 
 (comp. Chrys.), but, as h rpoipiffa 
 irXeove^las (ver. 5) seems to suggest, 
 Jwith reference to moral impurity 
 («omp. notes on Gal.y. 19), more espe- 
 cially as evinced in covetousness (Olsh.) 
 and desire of gain (Liinem., Alf.) ; 
 comp. alffXpoKepSrjs as used in ref . to 
 Christian teachers in i Tim. iii. 8, 
 Jit. i. 7, and the charges that appear 
 to have been brought against the 
 Apostle himself, 2 Cor. zi. 8 sq, 
 ovSi-iv 8oX(ji] 'nor in guile,' i.e. 'in 
 any deliberate intention to deceive;* 
 not so much with reference to 'the 
 manner in which' (Alf.), as to the 
 ethical sphere in which the irapi,K\riiris 
 
 E. T. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
18 
 
 nPOS eE22AA0NIKEIS A. 
 
 KaOm Se§0Kifiaa-fie6a virb rod QeoS nriarevBtimi to 
 
 evayyiXiov ouTwy \a\ovfiev, ou^ wj avOpunrois apea-KOvres 
 
 5 aX\a Qef tw SoKifid^ovTi ray KapSias jq^mv. Oure yap 
 
 was found, and by which it was, as it 
 were, environed; oomp. 2 Cor. iv. 2, 
 liTj irepiiraTovi'Tes iv jravovpylil. fi.'ifih 
 SoXoOnTCS rhv "Kbyov rod 0coC, a some- 
 what instructive parallel. The use of 
 iv, especially with abstract or non- 
 personal substantives, is always some- 
 what debateable in the N. T., and can 
 only be fixed by the context; it some- 
 times librates towards Siot both with 
 gen. (i Pet. i. 5) and aco. (Matth. vi. 
 7), sometimes towards yuerii (ver. 17, 
 Col. ii. 7, iv. i, see notes), sometimes, 
 appy. very rarely, towards KarA (Heb. 
 iv. 1 1), — but is commonly best referred 
 to the imaginary sphere in which ihe 
 action takes place ; see Winer, Or. % 48. 
 a, p. 345, and Eost u. Palm, Lean. a. v., 
 where this prep, is very fully discuss- 
 ed. On the reading of this passage, 
 see crit. note, and on the most suitable 
 iransl. oi oi..,mSi, notes to Trtmsl. 
 
 4. KaSios SeSokiii;,] ' according as 
 vie have been approved ;' ouk avroxeipo- 
 r&vriToi SiSamcaXof KiBeaTriKanev, d\V 
 ■virb. Tov Qeop rb evayyiXiov iiruTTei- 
 Brifiev, Theod. Kaflis. (see notes on 
 Gal. iii. 6) has here no argumentative 
 force (Eph. i. 3, see notes), but stands 
 in correlation to ovtws, marking the 
 measure or proportion existing be- 
 tween their approval by God to preach 
 the Gospel and their actual perform- 
 ance of the commission. The idea of 
 a recognition of any worth on the part 
 of God in the SeboKi/iaffiiivoi (Chrys^ 
 Theoph., CEoum.) is certainly here not 
 necessarily involved in the word. Ao- 
 Kind^eiv is properly {a) ' to put to the 
 test' (Luke xiv. 19, Eph. v. 10, 1 Tim. 
 iii. 10, (fee), thence by an easy grada- 
 tion (6) ' to choose after testing ' (see 
 Rom. i. 2S, with infiu.), which again 
 
 passes insensibly into — (c) ' to approve 
 of what is so tested:' oomp. Eom. 
 xiv. 22, I Cor. xvi. 3, and notes on 
 Phil. i. 10. In the present case the 
 appended notice of the subject in 
 respect of which the doKifiaala was 
 exercised seems clearly to limit the 
 meaning to (6) : ^jretS-ij ISo^ev airif 
 Ktd iBodfiaa-e mirTeuffai riiuv, Theod. 
 irio~reii6ijvai to evo"y7,] ' to ha/ve the 
 Gospel entrusted to M,' comp. i Tim. i. 
 II, Tit. ii 3: explanatory infinitive 
 serving to define more nearly that to 
 which the doKi/Mffia was directed, see 
 Winer, Or, § 44. 1 , p. 285 ; compare 
 Madvig, Synt. § 148. Eor remarks 
 on,, and exx. of the idiomatic construc- 
 tion of the accus. m with Tno'Teio/uii, 
 and similar verbs, see Winer. Or, § 
 32. s, p. 204. oix "S ov6. 
 
 dpuTKovTEs] ' not as Imsied in pleasing 
 men,/ the present tense having here 
 its fullest force, and marking that 
 which they were engaged in, were 
 seeking to do; ouk Apianeiv BiKonres, 
 Theoph.; see Scheuerl. Synt. § 31. 2, 
 p. 313, and comp. notes on Gal, i. 10. 
 The particle ibs serves as usual to 
 characterize the action, and to define 
 the aspect in which the whole was to 
 be regarded; ' not as striving to please 
 men, but (as striving to please) God, 
 <fcc. ;' comp. Bernhardy, Synt. VII. 2, 
 p. 333, and notes on Eph. v. 22. 
 T^ 8oKi|i. K.T.X.] ' whoproveth, trieth, 
 ■our hearts/ SoKtfi. here relapsing back 
 to its primany meaning, see above. 
 The plural thiSiv can here scarcely be 
 referred otherwise than to St Paul 
 and his fellow-preachers at Thessalo- 
 nica : if the sentence had been gene- 
 ral, it would have been omitted (Bom, 
 viii. 27) ; if the reference were simply 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
II. 5. 
 
 19 
 
 wore ev Xoyw KoXuKelai iyev^dtjueu, KaOrn oiSare, outs eu 
 
 to St Paul, the plurals KopSias and 
 ^vx&s (ver. 8) would seem wholly inap- 
 propriate. The art. before Gei? 
 (Bee), though weU attested [AD^EEG 
 KLX*], seems due to grammatical cor- 
 rection, andis rightly rejected by Tiaeh. ; 
 it is inserted in brackets by Lachm. 
 
 5. Ofire Yop K.T.X.] Confirmation 
 of this general character of his and 
 their Apostolic teaching by a special 
 appeal to the experience of his readers ; 
 eomp. Ter. 3. Iv X. k. c7evi^6T||i€v] 
 'came we [to sAore] in;' scarcely 
 'were we found employed in' (comp. 
 Liinem.), as the more distinct passive 
 meaning cannot safely be maintained : 
 see notes on Eph. iii. 7 ; on the form, 
 see note on ch. i. 5. The Greek 
 commentators (Chrys., Theoph.) para- 
 phrase it simply by iKoXaKeiaa/iev ; 
 this however somewhat falls short of 
 the idiomatic ylyvo/iai iv, 'in ali^iiSr 
 re versor' (Matth. 6r. § 577. 5, Yol. 
 II. p. 1004), and fails to mark the 
 entrance into, and existence in the 
 given thing or condition ; see notes 
 on I Tim. ii. 14. 
 
 X6Y<a KoXaKECas] 'speech offiattery,' 
 'sermone adulationis,' yulg,, 'verbo 
 adulationis,' Syr., Copt., -'blanditiis 
 ...in voce,' Mih. (Piatt); \byos 
 having here its simple and .proper 
 meaning of 'speech,' 'teaching' (not 
 coextensive vrith Heb. 'lij'l, — a use 
 apparently not found jn the ,If. T.]l, 
 and Ko\aKelas being a gen. — not of 
 quality ('assentatorio,' Beza), nor of 
 origin ('ex adulandi studio profecto,' 
 Sohott), but of the suhstance and con- 
 tents; comp. i Cor. vi. 7; Eplj. i, .13, 
 al. ; and see Scheuerl. Synt. § 12. i, 
 p. 182, Hartung, Oasm, p. 21. The 
 word KoXaxeta [possibly connected with 
 (tXe/eic, Pott, Etymol. Forsch. Vol. I. 
 p. 233, or with Kb\os, k\6,u, in sense of 
 broken-spiritedness, cringing\ is a oV. 
 
 Xe^OiU. in the N. T., and is defined in 
 Pseud. -Plat. Def. p. 415 B (Vol. ix. 
 p. 272, ed. Bekk.) as o/iiXJa 1/ irpos 
 T^SovTjv &yeu toO PcXtIctov : comp. 
 Theoph. Cha/ract. 2. It serves here 
 more specifically to illustrate the it> 
 d6\iij of ver, 3, and forms a natural 
 transition to the next words, the es- 
 sence of KoXaKela being self-interest; 
 6 5^ Situs utpiXetd rts avri^ yiyvTjraL 
 els xp:7^aTtt Kal oVa Sti yfi-nimTUv 
 KoXaJ, Aristotle, Ethic. Nicom. IV. 12 
 (ad fin.), comp. viil. 9. 
 kv irpoi(>ao-ci itXeov.] 'in a clohe of 
 covetousness;' 'prsetextu specioso quo 
 tegeremus avaritiam,' Beng. The exact 
 meaning of these words is not per- 
 fectly cle^. Xlpoifiairis is not here 
 ' oooasio,' Vulg., Clarom., nor 'accu- 
 satio,' Hamm., nor even 'species,' 
 Wolf, still less is otiose, Loesn. {Obs, 
 P- 376)) l^ut has its simple and usual 
 meaning of ' praetextus ' (comp. Copt. ; 
 
 jAVv Syr. is.spmewhat indef.), while 
 
 the gen. nrXesiie^las is a gen. dbjecti 
 ^(oomp. Scheuerl. iSyni. § 17. i,p. 126) 
 serving to define that to which the 
 wfySfpnais was applied, and which it 
 was intended to mask and conceal; 
 comp. Xen. Oyr. n. i. 25, vplxjytuns 
 /laoi/e^ia^ and see exx. in Best u. Palm, 
 £ex. B. V. (b), Vol. II. p. 1251. The 
 Apostle and his companions used no 
 \6yos which contained Ko\aKela, nor 
 any Tpoipaffis which was intended to 
 cloke their irXcove^fa. On the true 
 meaning of wXeone^la, see notes on 
 Eph. iv. I9,.and on its distinction froni 
 ^i\apyvpla, Trench, Synon, § 24. 
 0e6s |i.(tpTvs] ''God is vritness ;' strong 
 confirmation of the declaration imme- 
 diately preceding; comp. Kdm. i, 9, 
 Phil. i. 8. The Greek commentators 
 pertinently remark that in what men 
 could judge of he appeals to his read- 
 
 C2 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
20 
 
 nPOS GESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 6 wpocpia-ei TrXeove^/as, Geo? fidprvg- ovre ^riTovvret 
 e^ avOpwvm So^av, ovre acj} vixwv ovre airo aXXwf, Swa- 
 
 7 nevoi €V ^dpei etvai toy X.pi(rTOv ' airocTToXof aX\ 
 
 era, but in what they could not so 
 distinctly recognise he appeals to God; 
 fijrep ^c Sp^ov, avTois KoKei ptaprrvpar 
 tl iKoXaxeiaanev w/ieis otSare ifnislv 
 Sr-ep 5i aSi/Xoo ^v, tA ip rpi-ircfi ir\eov- 
 ef/as, Qebv caXa /idprfipa, Chrys. 
 
 6. oi!T€ tT|To5vTes K.T.X. 'iwiher 
 seeJdng glory from men ;' continued 
 notice on the negative side of the 
 characteristics of his own and his 
 companions' ministry ; fijroOifres being 
 dependent on the preceding iyeiniBij- 
 Hev, and the clause serving to illustrate 
 o6x <i>s ca>6p. ipiax., ver. 4. It is very 
 difficult here to substantiate any real 
 distinction between i^ and diri. The 
 assertion of Sohott and Olsh. that ^k 
 refers to the immediate, dirb to the 
 more remote origin, is true (see notes 
 on Gal. ii. 16), but here (inapplicable; 
 that of Liinem. and Alf.,— 'that iic 
 belongs more to the abstract ground of 
 the S6|a, airb to the concrete-olject from 
 which it was in each case to accrue,' 
 — ^is artificial and precarious. It would 
 l«ally seem more probable that they 
 are here synonymous (Winer, Gr. § 
 50. 1, p. 365), and that while in the 
 first clause ix might seem more idioma- 
 tic in immediate union with itfretv, the 
 disjunctive clauses into which it is ex- 
 panded might admit of and be lightened 
 by the change to airb. St Paul's love 
 of prepositional variation has often 
 been noticed ; comp. Winer, Gr. § 50^ 
 6, p. 372, and notes on Gal. i. i. 
 8uv(i|i,evoi Iv Papa cTvai] ' tlumgh we 
 could be of weight;' concessive parti- 
 cipial clause subordinated to the pre- 
 ceding part. fijToOn-es : comp. Krii- 
 ger, Sprachl. § 56. 13. i, Donalds. Gr. 
 § 621, The meaning of iv pdpei etvai 
 is somewhat doubtful. Two interpre- 
 
 tations deserve consideration : (a) ' on- 
 eri esse,' Vulg., Mth. (Copt, baroa, 
 uncertain), jSipo! retaining its more 
 simple meaning, and referring to the 
 Apostolic right of being maintained 
 by the Churches (Theod.) ; comp. irpbs 
 rb /iri inpapijirai, ver. 9, 2 These, iii. 
 8, oi Kare^dpiitra, i Cor. xii. 16, and 
 apapij...iiMt)Tb» h-rjpriaa, 2 Cor. xi. 9: 
 (6) 'ingravitate[honore]esse,'Clarom., 
 
 and appy. Syr. ^0CTT V)\ Ti " 1 O 1 
 
 • X 
 
 [honoralnles esse ; see Schaaf, Lex. 
 8. v.], p&po! having its derivative sense 
 of ' weight,' 'authority ;' comp. Diod, 
 Sic. IV. 61, rb pdpos r^s iroXcus (tjjv 
 Iffxiv, Suid.), esp. XVI. 8 (where it is 
 associated with d^/cij/ta), and somewhat 
 similarly Polyb. Mist. IV. 32. 7, XXX. 
 i^. I : see esp. Suidas, s.v. Of these 
 (a) is plausible on account of iiripap., 
 ver. g: as however the concessive 
 clause is closely appended to one in 
 which 56Ja is the prevalent notion, 
 and as the reference to iJirtoTijs serves 
 to enhance the same idea by contrast, 
 it seems more exegetically correct, and 
 more in harmony with the immediate 
 context, to adopt (6) ; so Chiys. jroX- 
 \7]S' dTToXavtrai tiju^s, and less decidedly 
 Theoph. and (Ecum. 
 us Xp. diroiTToXoi,] ' OS Chntt's Apo- 
 sUes;' the possessive gen. marking with 
 slight emphasis whose ministers they 
 were (see notes on, Eph..i. i. Col. i. 1), 
 and the term dirooroXoi receiving its 
 more extended 'Sense (see notes on 
 Gal. i. j), and including Silvanus and 
 Timothy. De Wette, Koch, al., refer 
 the plural solely to St Paul, but with- 
 out sufficient reason. Though a refer- 
 ence to the Apostle's coadjutors must 
 not perhaps be strongly pressed in 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
II. 6, 7. 8. 
 
 21 
 
 eyevj^6>]fiev ^mot ev fx,ecrip vpLwv, ws eav Tpo(poi QaXvri to 
 eai/T^j TeKva, ovto); 6ft.eip6fi.evoi vfiSv evSoKovfjiei/ fiera- 8 
 
 every case where the plural occurs, 
 yet in the present passage the plurals 
 KapSlas (ver. 4) and ^ux^s (ver. 8) 
 seem distinctly to favour the wider 
 application. 
 
 7. dXX' {Ycvii6i))iiev] Statement, on 
 the positive side, of the behaviour of 
 the Apostle and his helpers, the dWd 
 introducing an antithesis, not merely 
 to the last clause, but to the whole 
 of the preceding verse: they did not 
 seek 56|a» as 5iSd<rKa\oi, but, what was 
 very different (see Klotz, Devar. Vol. 
 u. p. i), evinced the aflfeotion of a 
 parent ; oi ^apv oiSi Ko/iTor Ix"" <•"■«- 
 Sei^ifieBa, Chiys. ifmoi] 
 
 'gentle:'' a Sis \ey6fi. in' the N. T., 
 here and 2 Tim. ii. 24. The epithet 
 is similarly applied to a father (Horn. 
 Od. n. 47), to a ruler (Herod, in. 89), 
 to a god, Dionysus (Eur. £ae. 861), as 
 marking 'animi lenitatem in aliis fe- 
 rendis ' (Tittm.), and pointing to an 
 outward exhibition of an inward jrpa6- 
 Tijs" comp. Etym. M., ■^irios' i iv \oytf 
 iravTa iroi.wv xal piij iriBa, ix luraX-fi- 
 ij/etas di Kal 6 dia \6yov irpoffTjp^s Koi 
 irpSos (where however the derivatinn 
 seems too much pressed), see Tittm. 
 Synon. I. p. 140; and notes on a Tim, 
 l. c. The reading is doubtful : 
 
 vijinoi is most strongly supported 
 [ZacAm.withBG'DiPGN'; somemss;; 
 Vulg., Clarom., Copt., ^th. (both), 
 al.], but as a repetition of the K, 
 owing to the somewhat common use 
 of v^mos in St Paul's Epp., is more 
 probable than that of an omission, 
 and as y^nos mars both the sense and 
 metaphor, we seem justiBed in retain- 
 ing ^mos, with AC^DSEKLN*; great 
 majority of mss. ; Sah., Baam., Syr. 
 (both). So Tisch., and the majority 
 of recent editors. iv )iAing ifmv] 
 
 ' in the midet of you; ' scarcely, by an 
 
 anticipation of the image, 'sicut gal- 
 lina pullis circumdata,' Beng., — ^but, 
 with a bint at the absence of all as- 
 Bumption of authority, 'as one of your- 
 selves,' 'ut Eequales idque cum omni- 
 bus,' Zanch. ; us oc etiroi ns i^ v/iuv, 
 oixi Tfjy occi) XojSoi'Tes X?Ji», Chrys. 
 «5s 4dv rpo^os k.t.X.] 'as a nurse 
 (nursing mother) doth cherish her own 
 children; ' the particle us having here 
 not a temporal but simply a compara- 
 tive force (Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 
 
 7S7) J*-* |0 [sicut etiam] Syr., 'tam- 
 
 7 
 quam si,' Vulg., Clarom., 'sicut,' 
 Copt., .^th., — and combining with 
 4ii,» and the pres. subj. in marking the 
 habitude or perhaps rather the con- 
 tinuance of the objectively-possible 
 event; see Winer, Gr. § 42. 3. b, p. 
 274, and- comp. Herm. de Part, dv, 
 p. 275, Green, Gr. p. 57 sq. Rec. 
 reads &v with AD'(K?)LK ; most mss. 
 For exx. of somewhat similar usages 
 of rpoipos, see the list collected by 
 Loesner, Obs. p. 377, and on the 
 meaning of BdXreiv [fostering warmtli 
 of the breast, comp. Deut. xxii. 6], 
 see ICrebs, Obs. p. 345, and notes on 
 £ph. V. 29. The tenderness conveyed 
 in the rft lavr^s rixva should not be 
 overlooked; tV <j>iKoiTTopyla» mrod 
 SeUvvnv, Theoph. The present 
 
 clause must not be marked off by a 
 colon at u/tSy (Liinem.), but regarded 
 both as an illustration of the preceding 
 words, and as the protasis to the follow- 
 ing oiiTUS 6iJ,eip6p-evoL Vjj,iSv eidoKov/i.ei', 
 ver. 8. 
 
 8. £|Uip6|jicvoi i^av] 'ewmesHj/, 
 affectionately, desiring you,' ' Imnng a 
 fond affectum for you; ' iiriBviiovvTes, 
 Hesych., Photius (Lex. p. 242): This 
 form, though not found in the current 
 lexicons (Bost u. Palm not excepted), 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
22 
 
 nPOS eE22AAONIKEI2 A. 
 
 Sovvai vfuv ov fiovov to evayyeXiov rov Qeov aWa Kai 
 Taj eavTZv ■^v)(ai Siori ayair^rol jjV'" eyev^dijTe. 
 
 is supported by all the uncial and 
 more than 30 cursive diss., and rightly 
 adopted instead of l/ieip. Sec) by 
 Lachm., Titch., and most modem 
 commentators. It is not compounded 
 of 6/<ou and ttpav (Theoph., Phot.), 
 but is either (a) a f oim of the shorter 
 fieipofioi (comp. dvpofiai, ddopofiat), 
 "Winer, Gr, % 16. 4, p. 92, or (6) a late 
 andperhaps coarsely-strengthened form 
 of the more usual liielpoiiai, comp. 
 Fritz. I, onMa/rk, p. 792. As it seems 
 probable that lielpo/uu (Nicander, The- 
 riaca, 401) is not an independent 
 verb, but only an apocopated form of 
 Ifidpo/iat *metri causa' (see Kost u. 
 Falin, Lex. b.v. lictpop,.), it seems safer 
 to adopt (i), and to consider o/ielpoftai 
 as a corrupted and perhaps strength- 
 ened form of the more usual verb. 
 oiiT(i)S...EvSoK.] 'So...hadwegoodvnll;' 
 the ouTftis being connected not with 
 the participle but with the finite verb. 
 The- verb evSoK. is here not present, 
 ' cupimus,' Clarom. , but imperf ., ' cu- 
 pide volebamuB,' Vulg. (comp. Copt., 
 an-temat), the past tenses being com- 
 monly found in the N. T. with the 
 more Attic ei (comp. Lobeck, Phryn. 
 p. 140, 456), not with Tiii as B here, 
 and a few M8S. elsewhere, see ch. iii. 
 I [BN], I Cor. X. 5 [ABCl Col. i. 19 
 [ADE], al. The verb eiSoic. is only 
 found in writers after the time of 
 Alexander (see Sturz, de Dial. Maced. 
 .p. 167), and appears to be commonly 
 used in N.T. not as a mere equivalent 
 for ioKiia (comp. Koch), but as con- 
 veying the idea either of the 'propensa 
 voluntas' (Fritz.), or of the free, un- 
 conditioned, and gracious will (Luke 
 xii. 32, Gal. i. 15, comp. i Thess. iii. 
 i) of the subject; comp. notes on Eph. 
 i. 5, and esp. see Fritz. Horn. x. i. 
 Vol. II. p. 369 sq. For a notice of 
 
 the constructions of tiSoK, in the 
 N.T., see notes on Col. i. 19. 
 fiCToSovvai.] ' to impart; ' properly and 
 specially connected with ri eiayy., 
 but also by a very intelligible zeugjna 
 with ros iavTuv ^uxas, the compound 
 verb being in the latter case under- 
 stood in its simple form ; comp. dovvat 
 TTiv ynixv": Mark x. 45. The use of 
 fieTaSidovaL with a dat. and ace, 
 though less usu^ than with a dat. 
 and gen. (Jelf, Gr. § 535), is not with- 
 out example, especially when the par- 
 titive notion is owing to the context 
 inadmissible ; see Kriiger, Sprachl, § 
 47. 15. dXX<i KaC K.T.V.] 
 
 ' but even our own souls,' ' nostras ani- 
 mas,' Clarom., Vulg. ; not with any 
 Hebraistic tinge (=-U'ni65'S3) ' nos- 
 met ipsos' (Koppe), nor even merely 
 'nostras vitas,' but perhaps with a 
 faint reference to the deeper meaning 
 of ^vx?lf ^9 pointing to the centre of 
 the personality (Olshaus. Opusc. p. 
 154,- Beck, Seelenl. §1), our lite and 
 soul (Fell), our very existence, and all 
 things pertaining to it. On the plu- 
 ral, see above on ver. 4, and on the 
 use of eavTbh' with reference to the 
 first person, Winer, Gr. § 22. 5, p. 136. 
 The force of the strong antithesis 06 
 iu6i'o;>...aXXa xal is noticed in notes on 
 ch, i. 8. Si6ti d7air. n^jitv l^cv.] 
 
 'became ye became very dear {beloved) 
 to Its;' surely here with no reference 
 to the Agent by whom they were 
 made so (Alf.), but simply to their 
 having become so, owing to their eager 
 and earnest reception of the Apostolic 
 message; see notes on ch. i. 5. On 
 the pronominal conjunction Ston, here 
 used in its slightly modified sense of 
 8hJ tovto on {eo guod), 'quoniam,' 
 Vulg. , ' quia, ' Clarom. , see Fritz. Som. 
 i. 19, Vol. 1. p. 58, but correct the 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
IT. 9. 
 
 23 
 
 /xvtifAOvevere yap, a§e\(f)oi, tov kottqv iJ/jloov koI rbv 9 
 HO)(0ov vvKTOi Ka). ijfxepaii ipya^ofievoi vpos to firi 
 
 very doubtful statement (endorsed by 
 Koch) that Swti, is there equivalent to 
 yhfi or • nam,' see Meyer im, he. The 
 reading of Rec. yey^vtjffde is only sup- 
 ported by K ; msB. ; and may have 
 been a correction to harmonize the 
 clause with the supposed present eiSoK. 
 9. )i.vi)|iovcverE -yap] ' For ye re- 
 member;' confirmation of the main 
 declaration of ver. 8, neTaSovrat...Tas 
 iavTwv ^vxis, not of the more remote 
 iyeniiBriiiev rjirioi (comp. Olah.), still 
 less of the subordinate causal member 
 8toTi K.T.X. (Liinem. ; comp. Just., 
 Alf.), — a doubtful reference of yi,p 
 appy. suggested by limiting the term 
 i^ux^s unduly, and still more by find- 
 ing no allusion in the present verse to 
 actual dangers. This however is not 
 necessary: the Apostle and his fol- 
 lowers practically gave up their ' ex- 
 istence ' to their converts, when they 
 spent night and day in toil rather than 
 be a burden to any of them. Mvqii,. 
 is of course the indie, pres. On ixvri- 
 fwr. with the accus. see notes on ch. 
 i. 3, and esp. on 2 ,Tim. ii. 8. Com- 
 pare throughout this verse 2 Thess. 
 iii. 8. T^v K^irov i]|ialv xal 
 
 TOV \u&)(9ov] 'our toil and owr travail,' 
 the article being repeated to give em- 
 phasis to the enumeration and to en- 
 hance the dimaz ; comp. Winer, Gr, 
 § 19. S, p. 117. The words KoVosand 
 fiox^o' ^^^ again found connected in 
 2 Thess. iii. 8 and 2 Cor. xi. 27 : the 
 former perhaps marks the toil on the 
 side of the suffering it involves (see 
 notes on i Tim. iv. 10), the latter, afl 
 its derivation seems to suggest [con- 
 nected with /idyis, and perhaps alHed 
 to fiiyas, see Pott, Stym. Forach. Vol. 
 I. p. 283], on the side of the magni- 
 tude of the obstacles it has to over- 
 come : the connexion of ii6xOos with 
 
 &x6os (Koch, Eost u. Palm, Lex. s.v.) 
 seems philologically doubtful; comp. 
 Pott, I.e. No. 373. 
 
 WKT^s KoV '^ft. Ip^a^.] 'worhing nighi 
 and day;' modal participial clause de- 
 fining the circumstances under which 
 the KTipvyna was delivered. On the 
 secondary predication of time cuktos 
 Kol iiiiApas, and on the strict gramma- 
 tical force of the gen. as pointing to 
 some indefinite point of the space of 
 time expressed by the subst. (contrast 
 2 Thess. iii. 8, Rec., Tisch.], see notes 
 on I Tim. v. 5. There is perhaps 
 some emphasis in the collocation of 
 the whole expression, but appy. none 
 in the fact of vvKrbs preceding ijiUpai 
 (Alf,), as St Paul always adopts this 
 order ; see further on i Tim. I. c, and 
 comp. Lobeck, Paralipom. p. 62 sq. 
 The addition of yhp after wktSs [Rec. 
 with D'EKL; mss. ; Chrys. (text), 
 Theod.], though partially defended by 
 De W. , seems to have been an inser- 
 tion 'nexus caus^,' and is rightly re- 
 jected by most modem editors. 
 ipya,t,6fxiioi has here a special refer- 
 ence to the manual labour (Schott) of 
 the Apostle and his associates ; comp. 
 Acts xviii. 3. In i Cor. iv. 12 (comp. 
 Eph. iv. 28) the verb is enhanced by 
 the addition rats IStats x^P"^"- 
 irpis TO (Mj K.T.X.] 'with a view to not 
 being bv/rdemome toanyofyou;' objec!^ 
 contemplated in the vvKTbs xal riii, 
 ipyaj;. On this use of irpos, comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 44. 6, p. 295, and on its 
 possible distinction from els, comp. 
 notes on 2 Thess. iii. 4. The late form 
 impapeiv (2 Cor. ii. 5, 2 Thess. iii. 8, 
 comp. Dion. Halic. iv. 9, viii. 73) is 
 nearly but not quite equivalent in 
 meaning to Karapapeii' (2 Cor. xii. 16), 
 the prep, in the former case being 
 mainly directive (onus imponere), in 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
24 
 
 nP02 eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 etri^apriCTal riva v/jLtSv ex^pv^a/^ev els v/jiai to evayyeXiov 
 
 10 TOW QeoO. vfieli fudprvpes koi 6 0eoy m oa-lm kui 
 
 SiKaiws Ku) a/JLefiirTtei vfi.iv rots iriarTevovtriv eyev^dtit^ev 
 
 the latter mainly mtenaive; comp. 
 iiripapiyeiv, Bxod. xxl. 30. The in- 
 ference of Ohrys,, Theoph., that the 
 Thessalonians were iy ireiitif is very 
 questionable; consider Acta xvii. 4, 
 yvvaiKuy re tuv irpt^ruiv o6k 6\lr/aLf 
 and comp. Baumgarten, Acta, Yol. 11. 
 p. '208 sq. (ClarU). {Ki]p4£. els 
 
 jjxas] 'we preitched i/tnio pou,' - n'^V 
 
 Syr.j Vulg." (Amiat.), ^th. j not 'in 
 Tobis,' Vulg., Clarom., Copt., the pre- 
 position being not equivalent to iff 
 but indicative of the direction, so to 
 say, which the nr/pvyna. took; see 
 Matth. Gr. § 578. b. It is singular 
 that Winer (Or. g 31. s, p. 191, ed. 6) 
 should have been induced merely by 
 the plural following to adopt the less 
 probable translation ' unter,' especially 
 as in ed. 5 (p. 241) he has added the 
 more exact rendering 'Botschaft an 
 die Yolker gebracht;' comp, Mark 
 ziii. 10, Luke xsiv. 47, i Pet. i. 15. 
 
 10. {(iiets iioCpT. Kal o 0eos] ' Ye aire 
 witnesses, and [so i»] God:' statement 
 in a collected form of what had pre- 
 viously beeu-expanded into particulars. 
 As the summary involves what could 
 not be adequately judged of by man, 
 the Apostle subjoins an appeal to God ; 
 Tou Si 6eoO Trjv liaprvplav vpoariBef 
 Key iireiSii rots dyBpiirots S^\a rik 
 ipiiiKva liora, tQ Si &eif xai ra Tois 
 irBpiitrovs \av6av6iJKva, Theod, 
 (US oo-fws K.r.X.] ' how holily cmd righU 
 eomly and Uamdessly we hehamed to you 
 that believe; ' characteristics of the be- 
 haviour of the Apostle and his asso- 
 ciates, the adverbs iirlus k.t.\. not 
 being merely adjectival, but serving 
 as secondary predicates (Donalds. Gr, 
 % 436 sq.) to define the form and man- 
 
 ner of the 'oomparatum esse' involved 
 in lyeiiijSTifi.ey : see Winer, Gr. § 54- '< 
 p. 341, Krtlger, Sprachl. § 62. 2. 3. 
 The adverbs are grouped together 
 somewhat cumulatively, to express 
 both on' the positive and negative side 
 the complete faithfulness of the minis- 
 try. The ordinary distinction between 
 the two former (irepl fth avSpunrovs ri 
 wpoffiiKovTa irpiTTav SUai dv wpdrroi, 
 irtpi Sk Qkoiis Sirta, Plato, Gorg. p. 507 
 b; comp. Chariton, l. 10), urged Acre 
 with some plausibility (Theoph., Alf., 
 al.) on account of the preceding i/neTt 
 KCtl 6 Qeos, is still always precarious in 
 the N. T. ; see notes on Eph. iv. 24, 
 Tit. i. 8. Perhaps it is safer to say 
 that ijlws and SiKaLas form on the 
 positive side a compound idea of holy 
 purity and righteousness whether to- 
 wards God or towards men, while 
 dpAliirTUi (see Phil. ii. 15, iii. 6) gives 
 on the negative side the idea of gene- 
 ral blamelessness in both aspects and 
 relations. To refer ifii/iTTUS to Paul 
 and his companions ('respectu sui ip- 
 Borum,' Beng.), or to regard it as 
 merely the negative reiteration of St- 
 Koias in ref. to men (Olah.), seems too 
 restrictive ; eomp. Luke i. 6. 
 ijjitv Tots 1riOT«vov<ri.v] ' to you that 
 believe;' objects in whose interest the 
 behaviour was shown ; dative of in- 
 terest, see Kriiger, Sprachl. § 48. 4. 
 Liinem. and Alf., following QScum. 
 and Theoph., and swayed by the posi- 
 tion of the words and supposed passive 
 force of iyar^S, , regard i/uy as a dat. 
 judicii; comp. Winer, Gr, § 31. 3. b, 
 p. 345 (ed. 5, — omitted in ed. 6). This 
 however seems very doubtful ; the 
 Apostle would scarcely have appealed 
 to God in ref. to the judgment of the 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
II. 10, II, 12. 
 
 25 
 
 KW 
 
 Qavep oioare, wj eva eKacTTOv vfuSiv wy nraTtjo reKva H 
 vapaKaXovvreg v/xaj kui 'irapafi-vQoifxevoi koi 12 
 
 eavTOv 
 
 Theeaalonians ; nor wotild an allusion 
 to their estimate of a former line of 
 conduct have been bo pertinent as one 
 to their consciousness that they were 
 the interested objects of it. The ad- 
 dition Tois TTiffT. is not otiose ( Jowett), 
 nor suggestive of different relations 
 ■with unbelievers (comp. Theoph.), but 
 enhances the appeal to the conduct 
 displayed towards the Theas., by show- 
 ing that their spiritual state was such 
 as would naturally evoke it. 
 
 II. KaSiCirep otSarc] 'eten as ye 
 hnaa; ' confirmatory appeal to the in- 
 dividual experience of his hearers ; the 
 general offtoTij* xal Sinatoairii xal d/ie/i- 
 (fila of the Apostle and his companions 
 was verified by its strict accordance 
 {Kaffiiirep) with what was observable in 
 special cases. The genitine and ex- 
 pressive fonu' Kaddvep {KaO& marking 
 the comparison, WEp the latitude of 
 the application, 'ambitumreimajorem 
 vel quamviff maximum,' Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. f22) is only used in the 
 N. T. in St Paul's Epp. (ii times), 
 and in Hebrews (cb. iv. i, v. 4 Bee'.), 
 the later xadios (see notes on Gal. iii. 
 6) being the greatly predominant form. 
 The simple itaBd only oocurs once, 
 Matth. xxvii, io> tos iva 
 
 Jkoo-tov] ' how as regmrda each one ef 
 you,' 'unumquemque, nemine omisso,' 
 Schott; the ut referring to a finite 
 verb that has been omitted (see below)^ 
 and the accus. being governed by the 
 participles, and put prominently for- 
 ward to mark the individualizing re- 
 ference of the acts; pa^al, h> Toaoinif 
 ifklfia /itidiva irapaKiireiv, Chrys. The 
 collective i/tos follows, as serving stiU 
 more clearly to define that all were 
 included: it is thus not so much a 
 mere pleonastic Repetition of the pro- 
 noun (Col. ii. 13, comp. Bemhardy, 
 
 Synt. p. 175), as a defining and sup- 
 plementary accus. somewhat allied to 
 the use of that case in the cx^/J^ Kad* 
 oKov Kal /Jiipos, Jelf, Gr. § 584. 
 cus irttTiip] Appropriate change from 
 the image of a nursing-mother (ver. 7) 
 to that of a father ; the reference not 
 being here to the tenderness of the 
 love, but to its manifestation in in- 
 struction and education. The remark 
 of Theoph. (suggested by Chrys.), avia 
 liiv ovi> rpo^ifi eavriy arelKaae vSv Si 
 irarpl rijv iy&wriv daKvvuv Kal riji/ 
 irpouTaalav, is thus not wholly appro- 
 priate. irapOKaX. v|i,as Kal 
 irapa|iu9.] ' exhorting you and encou- 
 raging you;' more exact specification 
 of the behaviour previously described. 
 The participles are certainly not di- 
 rectly (Copt.), nor even indirectly (by 
 an' assumed omission of ■^/'■ep, Beza, 
 al.) equivalent to finite verbs, but are 
 either (a) dependent on iyfvriB'qp.ev 
 supplied from the preceding clause 
 (Lunem.> Alf.), or (6) are used avaxo- 
 \ov8as, as modal clauses to a, finite 
 verb {—■iyev'^B. i/up) that has been 
 omitted, but is readily suggested by 
 the context; 'ye know how we did so, 
 exhorting you, <S:c. ; ' ao appy. Theod., 
 ravra di iirolovv [^iJ] irporpiirav 
 K,T.\., and probably Goth., which 
 simply retains the participles. Between 
 (a) and (i) the difference is practically 
 not great ; in the former case the par- 
 ticiples form part of the primary, in 
 the latter of the modal and secondary 
 predication : (6) however seems pre- 
 ferable, both from the special consi- 
 deration that thus the secondary pre- 
 dications of manner in ver. 10 find 
 a parallelism in ver. 11, and from the 
 general consideration that these parti- 
 cipial auaoolutha are common in St 
 Paul's Epp.: comp. 2 Cor. vii. 5, and 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
26 nP02 GESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 fxapTvpofxevoi eis to vepfjraretv v/uas a^iwi toO Qeov 
 Tov KoXoui/TOi vfiui ets Ttjv eavTOv j3acri\eiau Kai 
 So^av. 
 
 Winer, Gr. § 45. 6, p. 313. The 
 
 verb Trapa/ivB. aeems here to imply 
 not so much direct ' consolation ' 
 (John xi. 19, 31), Vulg., comp. Syr. 
 
 n'~i«'>\«-i ■ \Vn [loquentes in 
 
 corde vestro], Copt., ^th., as 'encou- 
 ragement,' see ch. v. 14, yet not spe- 
 ciallytomeet dangers bravely (CEcum.), 
 but, as the context suggests, — to per- 
 form generally their duties as Chris- 
 tians. 
 
 12. |JLapTvpo|uvoi] 'charging' ' con- 
 jurinff,' ' quasi testibus adhibitis ' 
 (comp. Eph. iv. 17),— not however 
 =r SiafiapTvpoix.. (De Wette, Xjlinem.), 
 which is obviously a stronger form ; 
 see notes on i Tim. v. 12. This sense 
 of napTvp. is abundantly confirmed by 
 the use of the verb not only in later 
 (Polyb. Hist. XIII. 8. 6), but even in 
 earlier writers, e.g. Thucyd. VI. 80, 
 Seo/ieBa Bi Kal naprvpo/ieBa, and vill. 
 53, naprvpoiiivuv Kal imdeiai^ovTOjy 
 (Goell.), — and is similar to though, as 
 the context shows, not perfectly iden- 
 tical with (Koch) its use in Gal. v. 3, 
 Eph. iv. 1 7, where it approaches more 
 nearly to impTvpov/uu ; see notes in 
 locc. The reading is slightly 
 
 doubtful: Sec., Lachm., read piaprv- 
 poip,. with D^FG ; most msg.; Theod., 
 Theoph., al., but as the external evi- 
 dence in favour of liaprvpop,. [BC 
 (appy.) D'E (appy.)KLN; somas.; 
 Chrys., CEo. : A omits Kal ptapr., and 
 C is deficient] is of superior weight, 
 and as ptaprvpeiaBai. is always used 
 passively in the New Test., we adopt 
 IMpTvp6p,. with Tixch. and the majority 
 of modem critics ; see Blnck, Lucubr. 
 Crit. p. 91. At r6 k.t.X,] 'that 
 
 ye should walk worthy,' Col. i. 10 j de- 
 pendent on the preceding participles, 
 
 and indicating not merely the subject 
 (Liinem.) or direction (Alf.), but, as 
 els rh with the infin. nearly always 
 indicates, the purpose of the foregoing 
 exhortation and appeal : comp. Chrys., 
 who paraphrases by iva with the subj., 
 and contrast Theod. who paraphrases 
 with a simple infin. The form els rb 
 with the infin. is commonly used by 
 St Paul simply to denote the purpose 
 (comp. Winer, Gr. § 44. 6, p. 295, 
 Meyer, on Rom. i. 10, note), and pro- 
 bably in no instance is simply indica- 
 tive of result (ccbatic) ; still, as perhaps 
 in the present case, there appear to be 
 sev«ral passages in which the purpose 
 is 80 far blended with the subject of 
 the prayer, entreaty, (&c. or the isBues 
 of the action, that it may not be im- 
 proper to recognise a secondary and 
 weakened force in ref. to purpose, 
 analogous to that in the parallel use 
 of Xva; comp. notes on Eph. i. 17. 
 The present wcpiTarelr is rightly 
 adopted instead of the aor. TrepnraTrj- 
 aai {Bee.) by most modern editors on 
 preponderant uncial authority [ABC 
 FGN ; many mss.: C is deficient]. 
 ToB KaXoIvTOs] 'who is calling;' not 
 KoKiaavTos, as in Gal. i. 6, and here 
 in AK and 8 mss. . the calling was 
 still continuing as relating to some- 
 thing which in its fullest realization 
 was future. It has been before ob- 
 served that in the Epistles the gra- 
 cious work of calling is always ascribed 
 to the Father; comp. notes on Gal. 
 I. c, Eeuss, Th4ol. ChrSt. iv. 15, p. 
 144 sq., Uateri, Lehrb. u. 2. 3, p. 269 
 sq. On the ' vocatio externa ' and 
 ■'interna,' see the good distinctions of 
 Jackson, Creed, xii. 7. i, a. 
 Pao-iXiCav Kal SiS{av] 'kingdom and 
 glory;' not a e» Sii, Svdiv ioT ^aaiKelav 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
II. 13. 
 
 27 
 
 as the word of God. Ye suffered from 
 your own people as we did from the Jews. 
 
 T3. Aii toCto] So Rec. with DEFGKL; appy. all mss.; Syr., Vulg., 
 Clavom., Goth., ^th. (both) ; Chrys., Theod., Theoph., CEoum. (Be W., iMnem,., 
 Wordsw. ). Tisch. and Lachm. prefix Kal with ABN ; Copt., Syr.-Phil. ; Theod. 
 (ms. B), Ambrosiaster (Alf.). The reading is thus very doubtful, as the addi- 
 tion of K (C is here deficient) must justly be considered of great weight. I 
 do not however at present reverse the readiiig of ed. i, 2, till the peculiarities 
 of J5 (which is of very unequal weight in different portions of the N.T.) are 
 more fully known to us; especially as it is by no means unreasonable to sup- 
 pose that the koI was prefixed to help out the diflBoulty of connexion. 
 
 (vSo^ov (Olsh.), but, as all the Vv. 
 rightly maintain (Syr., Cbpt., .^th., 
 even repeat the pronoun), two separate 
 substantives, the common article being 
 accounted for by the inserted geni- 
 tive; see Winer, Qr. § 19. 4. d, p. 116. 
 The ^afftXela tou Geou is the kingdom 
 of His Sod, the ^atriKeia tiSv odpavuv 
 (Chrys. ), of which even while here on 
 earth the true Christian is a subject, 
 but the full privileges and blessedness 
 of which are to be enjoyed hereafter; 
 comp. Beuss, ThM. ChrU. TV. 21, 
 Vol. II. p. 244 sq,, and the long trea- 
 tise of C. G. Bauer in Comment. Theol. 
 Part II. p. ro7 — 172. The 56|a to 
 which He calls Ub is Hi° own eternal 
 glory, of which all the true members 
 of the Messianic kingdom shall be 
 partakers ; comp. Rom. v. 2, and see 
 Keuss, I.e. p. 453, Usteri, Lehrb. 11. 
 ■i. B, p. 351. 
 
 13. Aid TovTo] 'For this cause;' 
 as we have displayed this zeal and 
 earnestness, we thank God that ye 
 received our message in an accordant 
 spirit: see note on ver. i. The exact 
 reference of these words is somewhat 
 doubtful. Schott and others refer the 
 words to the ' effectum admonitionis ' 
 implied in els rb irepnr. k.t.\, (comp, 
 Jowett); De W., al., to the purpose 
 and object of the preaching which the 
 same words seem to imply, but thus 
 
 introduce a greater or less amount of 
 tautology which it seems impossible 
 to explain away. It would seem then, 
 as Lllnem. correctly observes, that we 
 can only logically refer them (a) to the 
 specifie declaration involved in the 
 clause immediately preceding, soil, art 
 KoKei v/ias 6 Geis els k.t.\. Olsh., Lil- 
 nem,-, Alf. ; or (6) to the general sub- 
 ject of the preceding verses, — ^the 
 earnestness and zeal of the Apostle 
 and his associates. Of these (a) de- 
 serves consideration, but is open to 
 the grave objection that thus Sid. tovto 
 is made to refer to a mere appended 
 clause rather than, as usual, to the 
 tenor of the whole preceding sentence. 
 We therefore, it would seem with the 
 Greek expositors, adopt (6) ; cix Istiv 
 eliretjf oVt T^fieis iikv TrdvTa dfUfiTTUs 
 TTpdrrofiev vfieis Si Audita ttjs ^fier^pas 
 6,va(!Tpotj>fis iiroi-liiiaTe, Chrys. 
 Kal iQ|i<eis] 'we also,' not, as Alf. and 
 Ltinem., ' we as well as irivres ol m- 
 a-TevovTes' (ch. i. 7), — a reference far 
 too remote, — but ' we as well as you 
 who have so much to be thankful for ; ' 
 the Kal involving some degree of con- 
 trast (see notes on Phil. iv. 12), and 
 delicately marking the reciprocity of 
 the feeling between oE irepl rbv IIau\oi» 
 and the twice repeated ineis in the 
 preceding verse; see esp. notes on, Eph. 
 i. ig. De W. and Koch (bo also Auth.) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
28 
 
 nPOS eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 TOO Qe(p aSiahelTTTOii, on vapaXa^ovres Xojov aKoijt 
 vap" ^fJLWu rod QeoO eSe^aa-de oC Xoyov avQpwTTutv 
 
 refer iciil to Sii tovto, — a- connexion 
 decidedly at variance with the uBage 
 of the particle in demonstrative clauses, 
 but involving a. less error than the 
 counter-aesertioD of Ltinem., that we 
 should then expect Sict koX tcvto : such 
 collocations are very rare; see notes 
 o» Phil. iv. 3, and comp. Hartung, 
 Fartih. xal, 4. 3, Vol. i. p. 143. 
 rfXttpi.0T0i!|i6V T^ 0eu] ' we give 
 tkanix to Ood,' On the meaoing and 
 usages of eix<tp. see notes on Phil. 1. 
 3, and esp. on Col. i. I4. 
 8ti irapaXapdvm] ' that when ye re- 
 ceived;' objective sentence (Donalds; 
 Or. § 584 sq.) defining the matter and 
 grounds of the (ixapurria. The par- 
 ticiple is here temporal, and specifies 
 the more external act that was either 
 contemporaneous with, or rather im- 
 mediately prior to the more internal 
 idi^aaBe; comp. notes on Eph. iv. 8. 
 The distinction between irapaXa/ipdveiv 
 and SixeffBai stated by Liin^m. and 
 Koch, viz. that irapaXa/ipdveip points 
 rather to au objective (Gal. i, 12, see 
 notes), S^effOai to a siibjectiee recep- 
 tion (2 Cor. viii. 17), seems substan- 
 tially Correct, but must be applied 
 with caution ; see notes on Col. ii. 6. 
 \6yov aKOTJs] ' the word of hearing; ' 
 i.e. 'the word which was heard,' or 
 'the word of preaching,' dxo^ being 
 used in its passive sense which pre- 
 vails in the N.T. (see notes on Gat. 
 iii. 2 ; comp. Heb. iv. 1, and the Heb. 
 njJIDB' 7ipj Jer. x. 42, ^wv^ &ko7J!, 
 LXX,), and the gen. being that of ap- 
 position or identity; Winer, Gr. § 59. 
 8, p. 470, Scheuerl. Synt. § 12. i, p. 
 82, 83. The gen. (i/co^s is probably 
 here subjoined to \ltyot to introduce a 
 slight contrast between the \byoi in 
 its first state as heard by the ear and 
 the same \ir/oi in its subsequent state 
 
 as ivepyoi/iepoi in the hearts of be- 
 lievers; comp. Kom. x. 17. 
 trap' ij)ii(DV thus naturally belongs to 
 ■irapaKa§6vTet (ch. iv. I, 2 Thess. iiL 
 6, comp. Gal. i. 12), from which it is 
 only separated by the somewhat em- 
 phatic object-accusative ; so Vulg., 
 Syr., Copt., Goth. (.^th. omits iro/j 
 ^p.Civ), CEcum., and a few modern com- 
 mentators. The construction adopted 
 by the majority of expositors, and 
 perhaps Clarom., Syr.-Phil., oko^s 
 Itap iip.ijiv is defensible, — but harsh 
 and unnatural, and probably only sug- 
 gested by the unusual but significant 
 position of the following rou 8eo5, 
 On the force of itapi, as denoting the 
 more immediate source, see notes on 
 6al, i. 12, and esp. Schulz, Abendm. 
 p. 218 sq. 
 
 tbv @EOv] 'of God,' aa. ' which cometh 
 from God ;' eeoO not being a gen. 08- 
 jecti ('de Deo;' Grot.), nor the pos- 
 sessive gen. ('belonging to,' Alf. i), 
 but a gen. of the author (De Wette, 
 *■ coming from,' Alf. 2), or even more 
 simply of the sov/rce from which the 
 \6yos oKo^s really and' primarily came ; 
 See notes on ch. i, 6. The unusually 
 placed Tou 6eoD seems added correct- 
 ively, the words being appended al- 
 most ' extra stru'cturam,' to mark that 
 though the ^/let: were the immediate 
 hitman source of the aKoj) its real and 
 proper source Was divine. 
 ov \6y6v <iv6p.] ' not the word of men,' 
 i. e. whifih cometh from them, and of 
 which they are the true source ; see 
 above. It is incorrect to supply ta- 
 citly us : the Apostle, as Lilnem. ob- 
 serves, is not stating how the Thes- 
 salonlans regal'ded the message, but, 
 as the next clause still more clearly 
 shows, what it was as a matter of 
 fact. The importance of this clause 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
11. 14. 
 
 29 
 
 aXXa Ka6wi ecTTiv oXi;0«9 Xoyov Qeov, os koi evepyeiTai 
 ev vfiiv Toti iricTTevovartv. vfiei^ yap /iifjitiTai eyevriQr)re, 1 4 
 aoe\(f>oi, Tuiv eKKXijeriwv tov Qeov t(6V ovcrwv ev t^ 
 'lovoala ev Xpi(TT(p ^lijaoO, on ra avra eTrdBere koi 
 
 as aBserting tbe direct Inspiration of 
 the spoken words must not be orer- 
 looked. 8s Kal EVEpycirai] 
 
 'which aho viorheth,' 'is operative,' 
 Boil, the X670S GeoS (Clarom., Syr., 
 Goth., Thecph., CEoum.), not QeSs 
 (Vulg., Theod.),— which in St Paul's 
 Epp. is never found with the middle 
 ivepySaBoi, but always with the act. ; 
 see I Cor. xii. 6, 11, Gal. ii. 8, iii. j, 
 Eph. i. 1 1, al. On the constructions 
 of ivepy., see notes o» Gal. U. 8, and 
 on the distinction between the active 
 ('vim exercere') and the intensive 
 middle (' ex se vim suam exercere '), 
 see notes on Gal. v. 6, Winey, Gr. 
 % 38. 6, p. 231, and comp. Kiflger, 
 Sprachl. § 52. 8. i sq. The xal must 
 not be omitted in transl. (Alf.), or as- 
 sociated with the relative (De W„ 
 Koch), but connected with irepy., 
 which it enhances by suggesting a 
 farther property or characteristic of 
 the Inspired Word, and perhaps a con- 
 traxt .with its inoperative nature when 
 merely heard and not believed. On 
 .this use of Kal, see notes on Eph. i. 1 1, 
 £lotz, Deva«: Vol. 11. p. 636, and 
 comp. Kruger, Sprachl. § 69. 32. 12. 
 Iv ijiiv Tofe TrKTT.] 'in you that he- 
 lieue,' not 'in vobis qui credidistis, ' 
 Vulg., which would require toTs iri- 
 areiaaaw, Jior ' propterea quod fidem 
 habetis,' Schott (comp. Olsh., Koch), 
 which would require the omission of 
 the article (conjp. Donalds. Gr. § 492), 
 but '.vobis .gui creditis,' Goth., Syr.- 
 Fhil., Tois iriffTevovffi.v adding a spi- 
 ritual , oharaoteristio .that serves indi- 
 rectly to illustrate and verify the pre- 
 ceding declarations of the verse. 
 14. v.fie?s,Yc£p] Confirmation, not of 
 
 their reception of the word (CEoum.), 
 nor of the predication of their belief 
 (Olsh.), but of the ivipyeia displayed 
 in them by the \(r/os Qeov: 'your 
 imitation of the churches of Judaea in 
 your sufferings is a distinct evidence 
 of the ivipyeia of the word within 
 you.' On the words lunryral iyev-fjd., 
 see notes on ch. i. 6. 
 Ttov o4(r<3v Iv T'g 'Io«8.] ' which are in 
 Judaea;' not 'prsesens pro prseterito,' 
 Grot., but with a direct reference to 
 the churches that were still existing 
 in .Judsea; comp. throughout Gal. i. 
 22. Why the Apostle peculiarly 
 specifies these churches has been very 
 differently explained. The most pro- 
 bable J'eason seems to be that as the 
 Jews were, at present the most active 
 adversaries of Christianity, he specifies 
 that .locality where this opposition 
 would be shown in its most determined 
 aspects, and under circumstances of 
 the greatest social trial: see Words w. 
 in he. kv Xp. 'I.] 'm Chmt 
 
 Jesus;' 'in union and communion 
 with Him ; ' ' incorporated with Him 
 who is the Head.' JBoth here and in 
 Gal, i. 2:2 this spiritual definition is 
 suitably subjoined, asstill more clearly 
 separating them even in thought from 
 the avvaywyaX tQv 'lovSaiav (CEcum.), 
 which might be iv OcQ, but were far in- 
 deed from being^cXpio-T^i. For ri, airi, 
 See. reads toCto with AD ;.mo3t mss. 
 vir& T«v l8C»v orv|<.<|)uX.] 'at the ha/nda 
 of yowr own countrymen;' closely de- 
 pendent on iwdSere — inri being used 
 correctly with neuter verbs which in- 
 volve a passive reference, see Winer, 
 Gr. § 47. b, p. 330 : the reading dir6 
 [D^FG ; Orig, ( r) in some ed.] is pro- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
30 
 
 IIPOZ eESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 Kai avTOi 
 
 vfieii virb twv iSlwv crvftcfivXeTmv, Kudwv 
 
 15 viro TWV 'lovSalwv twv kuI tov Kvpiov avoKTeivdvTWv 
 
 'ln<rovv KUi TOW irpocp^Ta?, kui ^fiat eKSiw^dvToiv, koI 
 
 bably only due to a grammatical cor- 
 rector. The supererogatory compound 
 avfupvX. (' contribulibus,' Vulg., i/io- 
 eSr^s, Hesych.) is a citt. XeTo/i. in the 
 N.T.; it is not found in earlier wi iters 
 (iro\lT7is, STj/iOTijs, (pvXiTiis, avev rris 
 aiv, Herodian.'p. 471, ed. Lobeck), 
 and is an instance of the noticeable 
 tendency in later Greek to compound 
 forms without corresponding increase 
 of meaning: comp. avvirM.Ti)':, Eph. 
 ii. rg, and see Thiersch, d& PerUat. n. 
 I, p. 83. These avutpvKeral, as the 
 contrast requires, must have been 
 Gentiles; it is however not unreason- 
 able to suppose that they were insti- 
 gated by Jews (De W.); corap. Acts 
 xvii. s, 13. KoBws Kol 
 
 avToC] ' even as they also; ' not agram- 
 matically exact, though a perfectly 
 intelligible apodosis ; comp. Demosth. 
 Phil. I. p. 51, and Heindorf on Plato, 
 Phmdo, % 79 (p. 86 a), Jelf, Gr.%86g. 
 1. On the repetition of Koi in both 
 members of the sentence, by which 
 ' per aliquam cogitandi celeritatem ' a 
 double and reciprocal comparison is 
 instituted, see Fritz. Bom. i. 13, Yol. 
 I. p. 37, 38, and notes on Eph. v. 23. 
 The airol obviously does not refer to 
 the Apostle and his helpers [60th., 
 ^th.-Pol. (but not Piatt), Copt.], but 
 by a 'constructio ad sensum' to the 
 persons included in the more abstract 
 iKK\riaiQv [Syr., Vulg., Clarom., 
 Arm.] ; comp. Gal. i. 22, 23, and 
 Winer, Gr. § 12. 3, p. 131. 
 
 15. TwvKoWAvKip. K.T.X.] 'who 
 slew both the Lord Jesus and, &c. : ' 
 warning notice of the true character 
 of the unbelieving Jews, suggested 
 probably by recent experiences ; comp. 
 Acts xvii. 5, 13, xviii. 6. The particle 
 
 Koi is not ascensive, ' qui ipsum Do- 
 minum oociderunt,' Clarom., nor con- 
 nected with TUK (Liinem.),— a most 
 questionable connexion, as rwv pro- 
 perly considered has no relatival force, 
 but simply correlative to the follow- 
 ing Kol, 'et Dbminum...et prophetas' 
 (Vulg. ; Copt, omits first <toi), and in- 
 troductory of the first of two similar 
 and co-ordinate members ; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 53. 4, p- 389, and notes on i Tim. 
 iv. 10. The position of tJc KiJpiov 
 is obviously emphatic, and serves more 
 forcibly to evince the heinous nature 
 of their sin. Kai tows irpoi^*]Tos] 
 ' and the prophets ; ' clearly governed 
 by the preceding diroKTeLv. (Chrys., 
 Theoph., (Ecum. ), not by the succeed- 
 ing kKSvu^iiiTwv (De W., Koch). The 
 counter-argum^t that all the prophets 
 were not killed is of little weight, as 
 'mutatis mutandis' it can be nearly 
 as stronglyurged against the connexion 
 .with kKStw^ivTUV. The addition of 
 this second member serves indirectly 
 to weaken the force of the plea of 
 ignorance (coii^p. Acts iii. 17): .aXV 
 •q-yvoriaav airiv.tirios. MdXuTTa /lip ovv 
 ^deaav. !Sl Sal; oixi Kai to6s ISlovs 
 ir/)o0^Tos ajriKTewav ; Chrys. 
 There is here a variety of reading: 
 idlovs is inserted before irpoip. by Sec. 
 with D^D'ESKL ; appy. Syr., Goth., 
 al. ; Chrys., Theod., aL, but is not 
 found in ABDiE^FGN; 7mss.;Vulg., 
 Clarom., Copt., Orig. (2), TertuU. (who 
 aaoribea the insertion to Maroion); C is 
 deficient. It was perhaps suggested 
 by the preceding ISluv in ver. 14. It 
 is thus rightly omitted by nearly all 
 modern editors. 
 
 Kai ij|i,as IkSiwI.] ' and drove us out;' 
 i.e. not merely St Paul and his helpers. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
II. 15, 1 6. 
 
 31 
 
 ©ew M apeerKovraiv koI iraaiv ai/QpooTroig evavTicDv, 
 Koeikvovrwv ^/icii Toz'y eOveatv XaX^crat Iva a-wOSxriv, ek 1 6 
 
 but the Apostles generally. The force 
 of the compound iKSiuiKetv is somewhat 
 doabtful : ix does not seem otiose 
 (De W.), nor even simply intensive 
 (Liinem.), but has appy, a semiloeal 
 reference, 'qui persequendo ejecerunt,' 
 Beng., Alf. ; comp. Luke xi. 49, and 
 consider Acts xviil 6. This meaning 
 of iKSiiaKetv does not seem to have 
 been clearly recognised either by 
 Chrys., al., or any of the best Vv., 
 but is somewhat strongly supported 
 by the prevailing use of the verb in 
 the LXX. ; see Deut. vi. 19, i Chron. 
 viii. 13, xii. 15, Joel ii. 20, al. For 
 TJfiSs Sleph. 1550 (not Mec.) reads 
 v/ias probably by an error. 
 @e(a |iT| (ipRTK,] 'do not please God;' 
 not ' placere non quserentium,' Beng. 
 nor aoristio 'non placuerunt,' Clarom., 
 but, with the proper force of the tense, 
 'are not pleasing,' are ^pursuing a 
 course displeasing to, — the present 
 marking the result of a regular and 
 continuing course of behaviour ; comp. 
 Winer, Or. § 45. i, tp. 304. The /»■)) 
 here does not seem to imply so much 
 as 'Deo placere non curantium,' Alf., 
 but is simply used to mark the aspects 
 under which their conduct caused them 
 to be presented to the reader ; comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 55. S, p. 429, and esp. 
 Gayler, 'de Part. Neg. cap. ix. p. 27s 
 sq. In estimating the force of 
 
 Uri Vfith a participle in the N. T. two 
 things should always be borne in mind, 
 (i) that iirj with the participle is so 
 decidedlyithe prevailing combination, 
 that while the force of oi with the 
 part. will. commonly admit of being 
 pressed, that of /41} will not ; see Green, 
 Qr. p. 122 ; (2) that it is not correct 
 always to find in the iit) (as Alf. here) 
 a reference to the feelings or views of 
 the aulyeat connected with the partici- 
 
 ple) comp. notes on Gal. iv. 8), but 
 that it sometimes refers to the aspect 
 in which the facts are presented by the 
 writer, and regarded by the reader ; 
 see esp. Winer, Gr. I.e., and Herm. 
 Viger, No. 267. irdo-iv dvflp. 
 
 ivavriav] ' contrary to all mm ; ' soil, 
 'quia saluti generis humani per in- 
 vidiam et malitiam obsistebant,' Est. 
 2, and in effect Chrys. and the Greek 
 commentators. The usual reference 
 of the ri Ivavriov to the ' adversus 
 omnes alios hostile odium ' entertained 
 by Jews, Tacit. Hist. v. 5 (Olsh., De 
 W., Jowett), has been recently called 
 in question by Liinem., and satisfac- 
 torily refuted, (i) on the ground that 
 thisexolusivenesB, which had originally 
 a monotheistic reference, would hardly 
 have received from the Apostle such 
 ■unqualified censure ; (2) on the gram- 
 matical principle that the causal par- 
 ticiple Kw\v6vrtiip does not add any 
 ■new fact, but explains the meaning of 
 what is appy. ' generaliter dictum ' in 
 the preceding words; so also Schott 
 land Alford. 
 
 16. KoiXvovTuv] ' seeing they hinder ;' 
 not ■ N*^' [qui prohibent] Syr., 
 
 comp. De W., but ■ \*^ ^ 
 
 1. '9 
 [dum prohibent] Syr. -Phil., 'prohi- 
 bentes,' "Vulg., the participle being 
 anarthrous, and supplying the causal 
 explanation of the foregoing asser- 
 tion ; comp. Donalds. Gr. § 492 sq. 
 There is no idea of ' conatus ' (De W.) 
 involved in Ka\v6vTWv; the present 
 simply states what they were actually 
 doing, as far as circumstances permit- 
 ted them ; comp. Liinem. 
 XaXijcrai tva o-uOuo-iv] ' to speak that 
 they might be saved; ' not ' evangelium 
 prffidicare ut ('qua,' Erasm.) salvse 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
82 
 
 nP02 eE2SAA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 TO avairXijpaiaai avTwv ray d/xaprlas iravTore. ecjiOairev 
 oe CTT auTony ti opytj eit reAoy. 
 
 fiant,' Menooh. ap. Pol. Syn., but 
 simply, 'gentlbus loqui ut serventur,' 
 Beza, — \a.\T](rai preservingits ordinary 
 meaning, and appy. coalescing with 
 Iva truS&aiv to form an emphatic peri- 
 phrasis of eioyycXffeo-flat (Olsh.). "Iva 
 will perhaps thus have a, somewhat 
 weakened force (see notes on Eph. i. 
 17), and the final sentence will to 
 some extent merge into the objective. 
 On the nature of these forms of sen- 
 tence, see Donalds. Or. § 584 sq. and 
 605 sq. els TJ dvan-Xiip. 
 
 K.T.X.] 'in order to fill up (the measwre 
 of) their dns;' final clause. appended, 
 not merely to Kii)\v6vT<iit>, but to the 
 whole preceding verse, and marking 
 with the full force of els rb (see notes 
 on ver. 12) the purpose contemplated 
 in their course of action. This pur- 
 pose, viewed grammatically, must be 
 ascribed to the Jews, —whether as 
 conscious and wilful {ctkot^ t,ov d/iap- 
 Tafcic iirolovv, CEcum.), or as blinded 
 and unconscious agents (De W.) : con- 
 sidered however theologically, it main- 
 ly refers to the eternal purpose of God 
 which unfolded itself in this wilful 
 and at last judicial blindness on the 
 part of His chosen people ; comp. 
 Olsh. and Lunem. in loc. The 
 
 compound dvairT^, is not synonymous 
 with irXripoSv, but marks the esistence 
 of a pa/rtial rather than an entire 
 vacuum ; the Jews were always blind 
 and stubborn, but when they slew 
 their Lord and drove forth His Apo- 
 stles they filled up (supplebant) the 
 measure of their iniquities ; see notes 
 on Phil. ii. 30, and Winer, de Verb. 
 Comp. III. p. II sq. 
 
 iravTOTe] 'at all times,' »^^1\>^«^ 
 
 [nmni tempore] Syr., not only in the 
 imes before Christ (M run wpo^ii- 
 
 Twv), but when He came, and after 
 He left them (ivl tup dirotrToXuv). 
 There is no exegetical necessity for 
 assuming that irdi'TOTe = TraiTeXus 
 (Bretschn., Olsh.): the Jews were 
 always in all periods of their history 
 acting in a manner that tended to fill 
 upthe continuallydiminishingvacuam. 
 i^airfv Sk eir avTo<is] ' £ut there ia 
 come upon them;' contrast between 
 their course of evil and its sequel of 
 punishment. It is scarcely necessary 
 to say that 5* is not equivalent to ydp 
 Cenim,' Vulg.), but with its usual 
 
 and proper force (_. j, Syj., 'autem, 
 
 Clarom.) marks the antithesis between 
 the procedure and its issue ; ' alii rei 
 aliam adjicit, ut tamen ubivis qusa- 
 dam oppositio declaretur,' Klotz, De- 
 var. Vol. II. p. 362. On the meaning 
 of the verb ipBivav in later Greek (not 
 'prcswenit,' Clarom., Vulg. [Ajniat.], 
 
 but *i ■ 5*^ [advenit] Syr., and with 
 
 I 7 
 els 'pervenit,' Vulg.), jee notes on 
 Phil. iii. 16, and Pdtz. Rontt. ix. 31, 
 Vol n. pp. 35^, 3S7. The aorist 
 lip$a<rev 'came' ,(but see notes to 
 Transl.) is certainly not equivalent 
 either to a present (Grot.) or to a 
 future (Sohott), but .marks the event 
 as an historical fact that .belongs to 
 the past, without however further spe- 
 cifying 'guam latepateat id quod actum 
 est;' see esp. Fritz, de Aor. .Fj, p. 17. 
 The perfect (<l>8aK£v [Lachm. (non 
 marg.) withBD^] was appy. an interpr. 
 suggested by a supposed inappropriate- 
 jiess in the use of the aorist. The 
 j>erf. contemplates an endurance in 
 the present, the aorist leaves this fact 
 unnoticed but does not exclude it. 
 ij opY>i] ' '^« anger,' scU. tov Qeov, — 
 which is actually added in DEFG; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
11. 17. 
 
 83 
 
 r «nd«avoure4 to see 
 you. but was hindered 
 hy Satan. Ye truly are our crown and gloty. 
 
 'JJ-fieii Si, aSe\<p<>if airopcpavttTOei'Tei IJ 
 
 Vulg., Clarom., Goth. ; comp. Eom. 
 V. g. The article either marks the 
 ipyil as irpoufiurnivT) Kni Trpo0T)Tewo- 
 //^ini (Chiya. i, 3), or perhaps rather 
 as dtpeiXo/i^iir) (Chrys. i, CEcum.), or 
 even simply ^PXOM^"'? ) comp. ch. i. 10. 
 dSTiXos] 'to the end,' 'to the utter- 
 most;' 'usque ad finem,' Clarom,; in 
 close connexion -with kipBaaer, not 
 with ipyil, — * construction that would 
 certainly require the insertion of the 
 article. E/s t^Xos is not used adver- 
 bially (Jowett, — comp. Job xx. 7), 
 whether in the sense of ' postremo ' 
 (Wahl, comp. Beng. 'tandem') or 
 'penitus ' (Homh.), but, in accordance 
 with the ordinary construct, of tpBineai 
 els tL, marks the issue to which the 
 ipyil had arrived : it had reached its 
 extreme bound, and would at once 
 ^ass into inflictive judgments. As the 
 cup of the ap-aprla. had been gradually 
 filling, so had the measures of the 
 divine ifr/ii. It can scarcely be 
 
 doubted that in these words the Apo- 
 stle is pointing prophetically to the 
 misery and destruction which in less 
 than fifteen years came upon the whole 
 Jewish nation. To regard the present 
 clause as specifying what had already 
 taken place (Baur, Paulus, p. 483) is 
 wholly inconsistent with the context : 
 see Liinem. in toe., who has well re- 
 futed the arguments urged by Baur, 
 I.e. against the genuineness of the 
 Ep., derived from this and the pre- 
 ceding verses. 
 
 17. 'Hjieis 8^] 'But we;' return 
 after the digression to the subjects and 
 leading thought of ver. 13, the di not 
 being simply resumptive, but reintro- 
 ducing -the Apostle and his associates 
 with coiUrasted reference to the Jewish 
 persecutors just alluded to : comp. the 
 remarks on this particle in notes on 
 
 E. T. 
 
 Oal. iii. S. dirop^xiviirS^vTcs 
 
 d<|>' v)iov] 'bereaved in our eepwration 
 from, you,' 'desolati a vobis,' Vulg., 
 
 ^QJSjJLO |LdA.j [ipij)avol a vobis] 
 
 Syr., temporal not concessive (Theod.) 
 use of the participle, marking an ac- 
 tion prior to that of the finite verb ; 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 45. 6. b, p. 315. 
 In this expressive compound the diri 
 (reiterated before the pronoun) serves 
 to mark the idea of separation (Winer, 
 Cf»*- § 47, p. 331)1 and the term op0a- 
 yis, iptfiavl^, the feeling of desolation 
 and herea/sement which the separation 
 involved. The further idea iraiSar 
 Traripai fijToiJiTuj', Chrys. (iSlsch. 
 Choeph, 249), or conversely, 'orbatiut 
 parentes Uberis absentibus,' Beng., is 
 not necessarily involved in the term, 
 as op^avis [cognate with ' orbus,' and 
 perhaps derived from Sanscr. raih, the 
 radical idea of which is ' seizing,' dtc. ; 
 see Pott, Etyra. Forsch. Vol. I. p. 259] 
 is not unfrequently used with some 
 latitude of reference ; comp. Find. 
 Isthm. TII. 16, 6p<t>aiibv iripwr, Plato, 
 RepvM. VI. p. 495 c, optpaviiv ^vyyevQv, 
 and the good collection of exx. in 
 Eostu. Palm, Leso. s.v. Vol. 11. p. 541. 
 The idea of separation from those we 
 love seems however to be always in- 
 volved in the term, when used in re- 
 ference to persons ; comp. Plato, 
 Phoedr. p. 139 E, tuv <PCKt&tiisv...kt'ii- 
 /idrap opipamv. irpis KOipAv 
 
 iSpas] 'for the season of an hour;' 
 more emphatic expression than the 
 usual irpis upav (2 Cor. vii. 8, Gal. ii. 
 5, Philem. 15), or the less defined 
 TTpis Kaipbv (Luke viii. 13, i Cor. vii. 
 5), serving to mark the shortness of 
 the time that elapsed between the 
 bereavement and the longing expecta- 
 tion of return ; comp. the Latin 'horse 
 
 D 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
34 
 
 nPOS eE22AA0NIKEIS A. 
 
 a(p' ifiwv TTjOoy Kaipov wpai irpoaanrm ov KupSioi, vepifr- 
 
 arorepwi ea-TrovSdarafxev to Trpoa-wirov vfAwv iSeiv eu ttoX- 
 
 l8 X^ eTTidv/Ai^. StoTt ^QeXria-anev eXQelv irpoi v/*aj eyla 
 
 momento,' Hor. Sat. I. i. 7. On the 
 use of irpbi in these temporal fonnulse, 
 as properly eerving to mark motion 
 toward an epoch conceived as before 
 the subject, see notes ore Pkilem. 15 
 (where see also on the derivation of 
 iSpa), and compare Donalds. Cratyl. 
 § 177. irpoiruirtji ov KapSCij] 
 
 'in face not in heart; ' scil. t^i alffBrj- 
 T^s i/iHv icrripijiuu 64as, rrjs Sk coijt^s 
 diroKava SirjveKas, Theod. : datives, 
 certainly not of manner (Alf.), but of 
 relation ('of reference'), markirgwith 
 the true limiting power of the case 
 the metaphorical place to which the 
 action is restricted ; comp. i Cor. v. 
 3, Col. ii. 5, see notes on Oal. i. 22, 
 and esp. Soheuerl. %n(. § 22, p. 1 79 sq., 
 where the distinctions between the 
 local, modal, and instrumental, uses 
 of this case are well illustrated. 
 irepio-o-OT. linrovS.] 'were the more 
 abundamtly zealous,' ' eo amplius [ma- 
 gis] studuimus,' Beza, — viz. because 
 our heart was with you, and our long- 
 ing consequently greater. The exact 
 reference of the comparative is some- 
 what doubtful. It is certainly not 
 merely an intensified positive (Olsh., 
 Just. 2, comp. Goth.) ; for though fre- 
 quently used by St Paul (2 Cor. i. 12, 
 ii. 4, vii. 13, IS, xi. 23, xii. 15, Gal. 
 i. 14, Phil. i. 14; comp. Heb. ii. 1, 
 xiii.. 19), it has appy. in every case its 
 proper comparative force ; see Winer, 
 <^''- § 35- 4> V- 2i7- The most plau- 
 sible ref. is not to the mere fact of the 
 airop<j>avi,ap,bi (Winer, I. c), nor to the 
 briefness of the time as suggestive of 
 a less obliterated remembrance (Lii- 
 nem., comp. Alf., Jowett), still less to 
 the comparative length of it {vepuT(roT. 
 ^ iis ekbs ijv Toii vpbs wpav djroXef- 
 
 4>d4vTas, Theoph., comp. Chrys.), but 
 to the fact that the separation was 
 irpoaiiTif oi KapSlif, "quo magis corde 
 prssens vobiscum fui, hoc abundan- 
 tiu3 faciem vestram videre studui,' 
 Muse. The form repuraoTipas (irfpur- 
 cbrepov, Mark vii. 36, I Cor. xv. 10, 
 Heb. vi. 17, vii. 15 only) is appy. rare 
 in classical Greek, comp. however 
 Isocr. p. 35 E. Td irpoo-uirov 
 
 4|ui)V ISetv] 'to see your face;' not 
 'exquisite positum' for ijiat ISeiv, 
 with reference to the preceding irpoau- 
 TTip (Schott, Jowett), but appy. an ex- 
 pressive Hebraistic periphrasis (niK"} 
 'JSTIK), marking the personal face- 
 to-face nature of the meeting ; comp. 
 ch, iii. 10, Col. ii. i . 
 Iv iroW'g 6iri6.] 'with great desire;' 
 appended clause specifying the ethi- 
 cal sphere in which the (titouSt) was 
 evinced ('in multo desiderio,' Clarom., 
 Copt., Goth.), or perhaps more simply 
 the concomitant feeling (' cum multo 
 desiderio,' Vulg., comp. Arm.) wUh 
 which it was associated ; see notes on 
 Col. iv. 2, and comp. above on ver. 3. 
 'Eirid. is seldom in the N. T. used as 
 here in a good sense: see Trench, 
 Synon. Part 11. § 37. 
 
 18. Siiri] ' Ore which account,' scil. 
 of our longing to come and see yon. 
 The particle Sion is here used in a 
 sense little different from S1.6 (comp. 
 Lat. ' quare '), and stands at the be- 
 ginning of the period, — a usage in 
 which Jowett and Lachm. appear to 
 have felt a difficulty, as they place 
 only a comma after imdvixlq,. Lachm. 
 and Tisch. (ed. i, 7) read Siori with 
 ABDiFGN; 9 mss. (LUnem., Alf). 
 Tisch. has here rightly returned to the 
 reading of his first edition, as the ex- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
II. i8, 19. 
 
 85 
 
 juee IIai;\o? /cat aTra^ Kal §U, Koi eveKO-^ev ^fi.ai 6 
 
 ternal authority for 8ii (iJec, Z>e W., 
 Tisck. ed. j)— viz. (DM)D»EKL ; great 
 majority o{ mss. ; Chiys., Theod. , 
 Dam., al. (C is deficient) is not strong, 
 and, owing to the unusual position of 
 Sibn, the temptation to correct was 
 very great. ^6eXi]<ra|jiev] ' we 
 
 wished,' ' waald fain ;' noi Ti^ovK'qBij- 
 fiev, which would have expressed ' ip- 
 sam animi propensioriem ' (Tittm.) 
 with a greater force than would be 
 consistent with the context ; comp. 
 Philem. rj, 14. On the distinction 
 between $4\o) and /SovXo/uii, see notes 
 OH I Tim. y. 14, and Donalds. Cratyl. 
 § 463, but in applying it in St Paul's 
 Epp. observe that 6i\a is used 7 times 
 to ^oiXo/iai once. This perhaps sug- 
 gests that we may commonly with 
 safety press the latter, bat must be 
 cautious with regard to the former. 
 eyu |i^v rtavXos] ' even I Paul,' 'ipse 
 ego Paulus,' /Eth. The iiiv 'solita- 
 rium' serves to enhance the distinctive 
 use of the personal pronoun (Hartung, 
 Partik. iiiv, 3. 3, Vol. Ii. p. 413) by 
 faintly hinting at the others from 
 whom for the sake of emphasis — ^not 
 of contrast in conduct {ko-kCwqi fikv ydp 
 ^6e\ov fiovou, iydj' 5^ Kal inexe^pv^^y 
 Chrys.) — he is here detaching himself ; 
 comp. Devar. de Parlic. Vol. i. p. 1 22 
 (ed. Klotz). On the proper force of 
 lih (incorrectly derived by Klotz and 
 Hartung from fiAfi), and its connexion 
 with the first numeral, see Donalds. 
 Cratyl. § 154, and comp. Pott, Mym. 
 Povseli. Vol. ir. p. 324. 
 Kal dirog Kol 8Cs] 'both once aiid 
 twice,' i.e. 'not once only, but twice;' 
 see Phil. iv. 16, and notes in he. The 
 first Kal is not otiose (Raphel, Annot. 
 Vol. II. p. 522), but adds an emphasis 
 to the enumeration ; contrast Nehem. 
 xiii. 20, I Mace. iii. 30, where the 
 
 omission of the /col leaves the formula 
 scarcely stronger in meaning than ' ali- 
 quoties.' Kol ev^K0<|/ev k.t.X.] 
 
 ' and Satan hindered us.' The itoi has 
 not here an adversative force ('sed,' 
 Vulg., De W.), but simply places in 
 juxtaposition with the intention the 
 actual issue ('et impedivit,' Clarom., 
 and all the other Vv.), the opposition 
 lying really in the conteoU. On this 
 practically contrasting use of koI, see 
 notes on Phil. iv. 12, and Winer, Gr. 
 § S3- 3i P- 388- On the primary mean- 
 ing of the verb iDKoirretv (Hesych. 
 iveKOTTTofiTiv' ij/eTToSii^fiTip) 'to hinder 
 by breaking up a road,' see notes on 
 Gal. V. 7. 6 Saravas] 
 
 ' Satan,' Heb. \Ci}^, the personal evil 
 Spirit, the 'adversary' kAt i^oxw (o* 
 ix6pos, Luke i. ig) ; comp. notes on 
 Eph. vi. 27. To refer this term to 
 human adversaries (DeW.), or to some 
 inward impediment (Jowett, who 
 most inaptly compares Acts xvi. 7), 
 is in a high degree doubtful and pre- 
 carious : St Paul here plainly says that 
 the Devil was the hindrance ; what 
 peculiar agencies he used are not re- 
 vealed. Without here entering into 
 controversy, it seems not out of place 
 to remark that the language of the 
 N. T., if words mean anything, does 
 ascribe a personality to the Tempter 
 BO distinct and unmistakeable, that a 
 denial of it can be only compatible 
 with a. practical denial of Scripture 
 inspiration. To the so-called charge 
 of Manioheism, it is enough to answer 
 that if an inspired Apostle scruples 
 not to call this fearful Being o fleos 
 Tov altivos Toifou (2 Cor. iv. 4), no 
 sober thinker can feel any difficulty 
 in ascribing to him permissive powers 
 and agencies of a frightful extent and 
 multiplicity; see Hofmann, Schriftb. 
 
 D2 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
36 
 
 nPOS GESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 Kav)(^tTea)s *] ovxt fat vfjieli e/xTrpocrOev tov Kvpiov finwv 
 20 ^Irjcrov ev r^ avrov vapovcrioL ; vfteii yap ia-re ij oo^a 
 rifj.wv Kai J] X<ipa. 
 
 VoL I. p. 389 aq., Bbraid, Dogmatih, 
 % 240, Vol. I. p. 290, and Plitt, Evang. 
 Glavhensl. § 31, Vol. i. p. 245 sq. 
 
 19. tCs Ydp ^|i.uv] Interrogative 
 confirmation of the Apostle's earnest 
 desire to see his converts ; ' who is so 
 if ye are not so!' Olsh., 'quid mirum 
 si tanto teneav vestri desideiio? nam 
 quid aliud est in hoc mundo quo mihi 
 placeam, quo me jactem, quo fretus 
 mihi promittam felicitatem % ' Calv. 
 ■ii[i. cXirVs ■^ X^'P'^] ' "'"' T'^op^ 0^ joy;' 
 not exactly ' causa spei et materies Ise- 
 tandi,' Schott, but the subject and 
 substratum of both one and the other, 
 — the subject in whom both reside ; 
 oomp. Phil. iv. i, and i Tim. i. i (see 
 also notes) where this form of expres- 
 sion is used with the highest emphasis. 
 Examples of similar uses in pagan 
 writers are collected by Wetst. m loc. ; 
 the most pertinent ia Livy, XXVIIJ. 39, 
 ' Scipionem...spem omuem salutemque 
 nostram.' 
 
 irT^()>avos Kovxljcreas] ' crown of boast- 
 ing;' comp. Prov, xvi. 31, Ezek. xvi. 
 12, ITItJSri np^JI [<rT4^. Kavx^<Tem, 
 LXX], and Isaiah Ixii. 3 [o-t-^^. /ciX- 
 Xoi/s, LXX]: the Thessalonians were 
 to the Apostle as it were a chaplet of 
 victory, of which he might justly make 
 his boast in the day of the Lord. It 
 is scarcely necessary to add that xav- 
 X/l<reus not merely ^ SoJtjs Xafiirpas 
 (TheopU.), but implies ^^' y dydXXo- 
 lidi [(couxw/tai], Chrys,, the genitive 
 being not the gen. ' appositionis ' 
 (Koch), nor even of the metaphorical 
 substance (comp. Eev. xii. j), but, as 
 the termination in -iris seems to re- 
 quire, that of the ' remoter object ; ' 
 see exx, in Winer, Gr. § 30. 2. ft 
 P- 170. <j ovxX Kal 
 
 ■ijieis] 'or is it not alio youl' not 
 'nonne,' Vulg., but 'aut [an] non,' 
 
 Clarom., ^^ °l Syr.-Phil., the 
 
 7 y 
 particle ^ retaining its proper disjimc- 
 tive force (see Devar. de Part. Vol. I. 
 p. loi, ed. Klotz), and introducing a 
 second and negative interrogatioUj ex- 
 planatory and confirmatory of what is 
 implied in the first; comp. Winer, Gr. 
 § 57. I, p. 451, and esp. compare the 
 good remarks of Hand, Tursell. Vol. 
 1. p. 349. The asoensive Kal serves to 
 place the Thessalonians in gentle con- 
 trast with other converts, ' you as well 
 as my other converts;' oi) 70^ cTvev 
 v/ieTs ottXiSs, dWd Kal v/iets /urd 
 rSy aXXoic, Chrys. [How accurate is 
 this great commentator's observation 
 of the details of language.] 
 ifuirpoa-div TOV Kvptov k.t.X.] 'in 
 the presence of our Lord Jesvs at Hia 
 coming V There is some little diffi- 
 culty in the connexion of this mem- 
 ber with what precedes. We clearly 
 must not assume a transposition, and 
 connect it with t(s yap — Kavxtiaem 
 (Grot.), nor again closely and exclu- 
 sively unite it with v ovyl koX i/ius 
 (Olsh.), but, as the context seems to 
 require, append it to the whole fore- 
 going double question, to which it im- 
 parts its specifically Christian aspect. 
 The Apostle might have paused at Kal 
 v/AeTs, and proceeded with ver. 20, but 
 feeling that the iXnls, x^Mi k.t.\. 
 needed characterizing, he subjoins the 
 circumstances of place and time. 'Ex 
 7-^ wapovalf obviously refers to the 
 Lord's second coming, — not merely 
 and exclusively ' to establish his Mes- 
 sianic kingdom' (Liinem., compare the 
 objectionable remarks ofUsteri, Lehrb. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
II. 20, III. I, 2. 
 
 37 
 
 As we COTild not forbear AlO fiyiKeTl (TTeyOVTef evdoKr](Tati.ev 
 
 any longer, we sent Ti- ,>»/«, 
 
 ta°yoJrSucao™" ^"^ KaToXeKpd^vai eu Adrivan ft-ovot, Kai 2 
 
 III. 
 
 1 your a 
 
 P- 352)1 but — to judgment; comp. ch. 
 iii. 13, iv. 15, V. 23. The addition 
 X/JwrroC [Sec. withFGL; Vulg. (not 
 Amiat.), Goth., Copt.] is rightly re- 
 jected by Lachm., Tisch., and most 
 modern editors. 
 
 20. vjieis ■ydp K.T.X.] ' Tea verily 
 ye are our glory and our joy.' The 
 7A/) does not appear here to be argu- 
 mentatiTu, — i.e. it does not subjoin a 
 reason of greater universality (AU., 
 citing Soph. Philoct. 756, but see 
 Bnttm. in loc), but seems rather con- 
 firmatory and explanatory (' confirmat 
 superiorem versum serid asseveratione,' 
 Calv.), the 7^ element having here the 
 predominance ; see notes on Gal. ii. 6, 
 and Winer, Gi; § 53. 8. b, p. 396. 
 For » complete investigation of the 
 primary -meaning and principal uses 
 of this particle, the student is espe- 
 cially referred to Klotz, Devar. Vol. 
 II. p. 231 sq. 
 
 Chaptee III. I. Au5] 'On which 
 account;' not exactly 5i4 rb dvai v/ias 
 T^y 56^av ijfiwv Kal t^v xapti*' (Liinem.), 
 which seems too restricted, but on 
 account of the affectionate but abor- 
 tive desire expressed in the three 
 preceding verses ; iireiS^ i)/(ei! Spa/ieiv 
 ■n-pbs i/ids iKuXiBriiiev iireffTeiKa/ici' 
 TifibBeov, Theod. On the use of di6, 
 see notes on Oal. iv. 31, and gram- 
 matical reff. on Philem. 8, 
 |i,T|K^Ti (rT^YOvTcs] 'no longer able to 
 forbear;' ' no longer able to control 
 my longing to see or at least hear 
 about you ;' ' cum desiderio vestri im- 
 pares essemus,' Just. Liinemann (ap- 
 proved by Winer, Gr. § 55. 5, P- 4' 9) 
 rightly objects to the assertion of 
 Kuckert that ftrjKiri is here incorrectly 
 used for oiiKin, as jMiKiri. can be pro- 
 . perly and accurately explained as in- 
 
 volving the subjective feelings of the 
 writer (' being in a state that I could 
 not,' ' as one that could not ') ; still, 
 as has been before said (notes on ch. ii. 
 15), the tendency of later Greek to 
 adopt the subjective form of negation 
 with participles is very noticeable, and 
 must always be borne in mind ; comp. 
 Madvig, Synt. § 207, and see also notes 
 and reff. on ch. ii. 15. The verb 
 
 ffriyeiv (/SaffTcifew, inro/iiveiv, Hesych. ; 
 (jtipeaif vTTO/ihetv, Kaprepeiv, Chrys. on 
 I Cor. ix. 12) is only used in the N.T. 
 by St Paul, twice with an accus. ob- 
 ject! (l Cor. ix. 12, xiii. 7, in both 
 cases Tivra), and twice without (here 
 and ver. 5) : see however the list of 
 exx. in Wetst. on ' Cor. ix. 12, and 
 those in Kypke, Annot. Vol. 11. p. 
 213, the most pertinent of which in 
 ref. to this place is Philo, m Place. 
 § 9, Vol. II. p. 527 (ed. Mang.), mI- 
 K^i ar^yeiv dvvdfisvoL ris ^vSetai, 
 «ijSoKijo-a|i.Ev] 'we thought it good;' 
 Auth., comp. Arm. 'placuit nobis,' 
 Vulg., Clarom,, 'galeikaidauns,' Goth., 
 not 'enize voluimus' [aie(2(zr>ia]^th., 
 comp. Syr. [__i.a»], as the idea 
 
 of a 'libera' {elKb/JteBa, vpoeKpivafi,ev, 
 Theoph.) rather than a 'propensa vo- 
 luntas' seems here more suitable to 
 the context ; see notes and reff. given 
 on ch. ii. 8. The plural here seems 
 clearly to refer, not to St Paul and 
 Silas (Beng.), but to St Paul alone, 
 the subject of the verse being in close 
 connexion with the concluding verses 
 of ch. ii., where (ver. 18) the Apostla 
 expressly limits the reference to him- 
 self. On the form eiS. not tjiS. see 
 notes on ch. ii. 8, KaTaXci.<|>9. 
 
 4v 'A611V. novoi] 'to be left behind 
 at Athens alone,' — alone, not without 
 .some emphasis, as its position seems to 
 indicate; alone, and that at Athens, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
38 
 
 nP02-eE22AA0NIKEIS A. 
 
 e'7re/u\f/-a/*ei/ Tt/nodeov rov aSe\<pov jj/nZv koi avvepyav 
 
 Tov Qeov iv Tw evayyeXlw tov Xpta-rov eit to crTtjpi- 
 
 3 ^ai vfias Ka\ vapuKoXeaat virep t?? ■KtaTeios vfiwv to 
 
 ' in nrbe videlicet a Deo alienissimS.,' 
 Beng. There is some little difficulty 
 in reconciling this passage with Acts 
 xvii. 14 sq. From the latter passage 
 compared with xvii. 5, it would seem 
 that Timothy and Silas first rejoined 
 St Paul at Corinth, and so that the 
 former was not with the Apostle at 
 Athens ; from the present words (koto- 
 \euj>69)vai, iviiiijiafiev, ver. 2 ; Sire/i'pa, 
 ver. 5) however it seems almost cer- 
 tain that Timothy was despatched 
 from Athens. Omitting all untenable 
 assumptions — such as that a second 
 visit was paid to Athens (Scbrader), 
 or that St Luke was ignorant of the 
 circumstances, or ' that only Silas was 
 left behind' (Jowett), — we must either 
 suppose (a) that St Paul despatched 
 Timothy before his own arrival at 
 Athens (Wieaeler, Ohronol. p. 246 sq.), 
 or perhaps more naturally (5) that 
 Timothy, having been able to obey 
 the Apostle's order (Acts xvii. 15) 
 more qpickly than Silas, did actually 
 come to Athens, and was at once 
 despatched to Theasalonioa. The 
 Apostle then continued waiting for 
 both where he was (Acts xvii. 16), but 
 ultimately left the city, and was re- 
 joined by them both after his arrival 
 at Corinth ; see Neander, Planting, 
 Vol. I. p. 196, note (Bohn). 
 
 2. mivepyAv rov 0coi)] 'fellow- 
 worJcer with God,' ' adjutorem Dei,' 
 Clarom. ; comp. i Cor. iii. 9. The aip 
 does not refer to others not named, 
 but, in accordance with the regular 
 construction of the word in the N. T. 
 (Rom. xvi. 3, 9, 21, Phil. ii. 25, iv. 3, 
 comp. 2 Cor. i, 24), to the expressed 
 -and associated genitive, Geou ; comp. 
 ,Bernhardy, iS^^n*. iii. 49, p. 171, Jelf, 
 
 Gr. § 507. The reading is 
 
 somewhat doubtful, and the variations 
 very numerous, but all may probably 
 be referred to the supposed difficulty 
 of the expression. Sec. reads Kcd 
 SmKovov TOV 9eo5 Kal ffvvepybv ijiiMv 
 with D'E (confusedly) KL ; most 
 mss.; Syr. (omitting Koi 1), Syr. -Phil, 
 (but with asterisk to Kal aw. ^/t.), 
 al. ; Chrys., Theod. The text as it 
 stands [Griesb., Lachm. (text), Titch., 
 and most modem editors] is only 
 found in D^; Clarom., Sangerm., Am- 
 brosiEist., but is supported indirectly, 
 (i) by AX; some mss.; and several 
 Vv. (Vulg., Copt., Goth., ^th.), 
 which have 8l6,kovov instead of ffvvep- 
 ydv (so Lachm. in marg.), (2) by FG; 
 Aug., Boern., which have Si4k. koJ 
 cvv. ToO GeoO, and also (3) to some 
 extent by B, which gives /cai awepy. 
 omitting tov QeoO. 
 
 cv Tu cva^Y^^fp defines more precisely 
 the sphere in which his co-operation 
 was exhibited ; see Horn. i. g, 2 Cor. 
 X. 14, PhU. iv. 3. 
 
 els t6 a-TT]pC|ai, k.t.X.] ' to establish you 
 and to exhort in beHialf of your faith 
 that, &o.:' purpose of Timothy's mis- 
 sion; in the unavoidable absence of 
 the Apostle, he was to strengthen 
 them, and to exhort them to be stead- 
 fast ; comp. itnarriplieui joined with 
 irapaK. Acts xiv. 22, xv. 32, 2 Thess. 
 ii. 17. These expressions do not seem 
 in accordance with the timid cha- 
 racter which Alf. (in notes in loc. and 
 on I Tim. v. 23, 2 Tim. i. 7, 8) as- 
 cribes to the Apostle's faithful fullow- 
 worker. 
 
 irapaKoX^o-ai] ' to exhort, ' ' ad . . .exhor- 
 tandos,' Vulg. ; not here 'to comfort,' 
 Auth., Syr.-Phil., al. (Eph. vi. 22, Col. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
III. 3. 
 
 39 
 
 /Mijoiva (ralvetrOai iv to?? OXiy^ecriv Tavrais' avroi yap 
 
 iv. 8), still less ,aiiiLD ^v^i 
 __ ^ It * i» 
 
 ^\i, [roget Toa de] Syr. {and so in 
 
 7 
 
 2 Cor. viii. 6, <l!C.), but, as the next 
 verse seems to require, in the more usual 
 sense of 'encouraging' or 'exhorting;' 
 tva TrapaKoK^aru xpipnv yevvaibJS rets tQv 
 iuavrluv inpovXiis, Theod. The se- 
 cond i/ias which Sec. adds after vapax. 
 with D'KL; moat mss.; Syr., is 
 rightly rejected by Lachm., Tisch., 
 with distinctly preponderant external 
 evidence tABDiPGS ; 15 mss. ; Cla- 
 rom., Vulg., Goth., Copt. ; Chrys., 
 Theod. ; C is deficient], 
 •uirip Ttjs vCa-Ttai] Not identical in 
 meaning with irepl TTJi vlareai (De 
 W.), which Rec. here adopts on weak 
 external authority [D'E^L ; mss.], but 
 ^ppy. more distinctly expressive of the 
 benefit to, and furtherance of the 
 faith, which was contemplated in the 
 3ro/)(£(cXi70-is ; see Winer, Gr. % 47. 1, 
 p. 343, and comp. notes on Phil, 
 ii. 13. 
 
 3. TO fiilS^va K.T.X.] 'that no one,'' 
 &c. : objective sentence (Donalds. Gr. 
 § 584) dependent on irapaKoKiaai, ex- 
 plaining and specifying the subject- 
 matter of the exhortation; comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 44. 5, p. 294 (ed. 6), bat 
 more fully p. 375 (ed. 5). Of the dif- 
 ferent explanations of this infinitival 
 clause, this seems far the most simple 
 and grammatically tenable. That of 
 Schott, according to which tA /iijS^ra 
 K.T.X. is an accus. of ' refereiice to,' is 
 defensible (see Kriiger, Sprachl. § 50. 
 6. 8, comp. notes on Phil. iv. 10), but 
 in the case of transitive verbs like 
 irapaKoXeiv of precarious application : 
 that of Llinem. and Alf., according 
 to which rb ni]d. is in apposition to 
 the whole preceding sentence and de- 
 pendent on the preceding els, more 
 
 than doubtful ; the regimen is remote, 
 and the asaumption that TouT^ffri might 
 have been written for tA (Llinem.) or 
 that it ia nearly equivalent to it (Alf.) 
 extremely questionable, if not incon- 
 sistent with the assumed dependence 
 on els. The only objection to the con- 
 struction here advocated — that irapa- 
 Ka\^<rai, would thus be associated with 
 a simple accus. rd — is of no real 
 weight ; for (i) such a construction is 
 possible (comp. i Tim. vi. 1), and {2) 
 the dependence of such explanatory 
 or aecusatival infinitives on thegovem- 
 ing verb is appy. not so definite and 
 immediate as that of simple substan- 
 tives; comp. Matth. Gr. § 543, obs. 
 2, 3, Soheuerl. Synt. § 45. 4, p. 478. 
 The only real difficulty in these and 
 similar constructions is correctly to 
 define the difference between the infin. 
 with and without the article : perhaps 
 it amounts to no more than this that 
 in the former case the infinitival clause 
 ia more emphatic, aggregated, and 
 substantival, in the latter more merged 
 in the general structure of the sentence; 
 see Winer, Gr. § 44. 2, p. 286, Kruger, 
 Sprachl. § 50. 6. 3, Matth. Gr. I. c. 
 obs. 2. The reading of Mec. rip 
 
 lifiSiva K.T.'K. is not either exegetically 
 or grammatically admissible (opp. to 
 Green, Gr. p. 277; ^^® Winer, I. c. p. 
 294), and is wholly unsupported by 
 uncial authority. The text has the 
 support of all MSS. except FG which 
 give iva (in the place of t6) with the 
 infin. 
 
 <ra,ivt(r9ai] ' be disturbed,' 'he disquiet- 
 ed.' This verb (a air. XeyS/i. in the 
 N.T.) properly signifies 'to be fawned 
 on' {(ratveiv, iirl iiiuv dXiyuc, S ian 
 aeUiv Tipi oip&ii, Eustath. p. 393, 9), 
 and metaphorically 'soothed' (^sch. 
 Choeph. 194), bat is occasionally found 
 in later writers in the stronger sense 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
40 
 
 nPOS GESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 4 o'lSate 8ti eli tovto KelfieQa- koL yap ore vpos v^ias 
 ^fi.ev irpoeXiyofxev vfiiv on fieWofAev OXt^ea-Oai, KaOwi 
 
 5 Kul iyevero kui o'lSare. Sia tovto Kuyoo ntjKe-i 
 
 of KiveTaBai, troKfiieffSai (Hesyob,); 
 comp. Diog. Laert. viil. 41 (cited by 
 Eisner), aaivo/jievoi ™s '\eyoftivms iSA- 
 Kpvoif Kal ifiiuiov. So rightly Clirys. 
 {eopv^eiffSai.), Theod., Zonaras, Lex, 
 p. 1632 (/cXomo-Soi), al., most of the 
 ancient Vt. (Syr. ^l^Xjll. [succi- 
 
 Y 7 -n 
 
 deretur], Vulg. 'moveatur'), and near- 
 ly all modern commentators. Wolf, 
 Tittmann (Synaa. I. p. 189), andappy. 
 Jowett, retain the more usual sense 
 'pellioi,' Bcil. 'ad officium deaeren- 
 dum, ' but with little plausibility, and 
 in opposition to the consent of both 
 Ff. and Vv. The derivation, it need 
 scarcely be said, is not from ZAN- or 
 SAN- (Benfey, Wnrsellex. Vol. I. p. 
 181), but from adu; comp. Donalds. 
 Cratyl. § 473. iv rats 
 
 6\it|(Eoriv Tavrais] 'in these afflictions;^ 
 not merely those endured by the Apo- 
 stle (comp. CEoum.), but those in 
 which both he and his readers had 
 recently shared, and which, though 
 appy. over for a time (ver. 4), would 
 be almost certain to recur. The iv is 
 certainly not instrumental, nor even 
 temporal (Liinem.), but merely local, 
 with ref. to the circumstances m which 
 they were, and by which they were 
 (so to say) environed; comp. Winer, 
 Gr. § 48. a, p. 34S. ovtoI 
 
 ■ydp olSare] 'for yourselves know ;' 
 reason for the foregoing exhortation 
 t6 M'? cairKTBai k.t.X.: both their 
 own experiences and the Apostle's 
 words (ver. 4) taught them this prac- 
 tical lesson. els touto 
 KcC|ie6a] 'we are appointed thereunto;' 
 soil. t6 6\ipea 0ai (comp. ver. 4), notri 
 viroiiiKiv $\i\j/cis, Koch i, the toCto 
 referring laxly to the preceding 6\l<l/e- 
 
 fftv. On the meaning of Kcl/ieBa (Vulg. 
 'positi sumus,' Syr. r ^^ » V> 1 fT) 
 Goth, 'ratidai,' but?), see notes on, 
 Phil. i. 16, and with respect to the 
 sentiment, which is here perfectly ge- 
 neral (]repi irdfTav Xiyei. twc vurrap, 
 Chrys.), see 2 Tim. iii. 12 (notes), and 
 comp. Eeuss, Thiol. Chret. IV. 20, 
 Vol. II. p. 224 sq. 
 
 4. Kol vdp OTC K.T.V] 'for verily 
 when we were with you,' 'nam et cum,' 
 
 Vulg., Clarom., ;_L.^...r2 %£i\ 
 
 Syr. ; proof of the preceding assertion, 
 y&p introducing the reason, xal throw- 
 ing stress upon it; see Winer, Gr. § 
 53. 8, p. 397, and notes on Phil. ii. 27, 
 where this formula is briefly discussed. 
 On the use of wpbs with ace. with 
 verbs implying rest, &c, see notes on 
 Gal. i. 18, iv. 18. 
 
 )i,^XXo|jiev 6\CpEo-6(u] ' we were to suffer 
 affliction;' here not merely a peri- 
 phrasis of the future, but an induect 
 statement of the fixed and appointed 
 decree of God ; comp. ver. 3. The 
 verb ii.4W<ji has three constructions in 
 the N. T. ; (a) with the present, — in 
 the Gospels and the majority of pas- 
 sages in the N. T. ; (6) with the aor., 
 Kom. viii. 18, Gal. iii. 23, Rev. iii. 2, 
 16, xii. 4, — a construction found also 
 in Attic Greek (Plato, Crilias, p. 108 
 B, Gorg. p. 525 A, al.) ; (c) with a fu- 
 ture, — only in a few passages (Acts 
 xi. 28, xxiv. 15, xxvii. 10, in all three 
 cases with (aeaSai), though the use is 
 the prevailing one in earlier Greek: 
 see Winer, Gr. § 44. 7, p. 29?, Kriiger, 
 SpracM. § 53. 8. 3 sq. 
 Kttl olSare] ' and ye Mow, ' scil. from 
 your own experiences. The first nai 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
in. 4, 5, 6. 
 
 41 
 
 (TTeymv eirefjL-^a ezj to yvwvai rrju ir'icrriv vfxuiv, /tiyTrw? 
 
 evelpaaev vficii 6 ireipa^wv koI eij Kevov yivtirai o 
 
 KOTO'S rifkSiv. 
 
 When he came to U8 and "AoTl Se iXdoVTOi TilfJloOioV TpOi 6 
 
 reported your faith, we ' , ^ ^' 
 
 rnd^de^JiythiSSd: "^Moy ctfp "/*"" ««' evayyeXitrafxevov vf^iv 
 
 does not here seem to be correlative 
 to the second, Kal...Kal (see notes on i 
 Tim. iv. lo), but appears rather to have 
 an ascensive force, while the second is 
 simply copulative; oix'oTilyhcTo toOto 
 X^7« libvor, dXX' on TroXXd koX SXKa 
 irpoetire, Kal i^i^rj, Chrys. 
 
 5. 8id toCto] 'For this cause;' 
 soil, because the foretold tribulation 
 had now actually come upon you. 
 In the follovdng xdyia the xal does 
 not belong to the sentence (the argu- 
 ment of Liinem. however that it would 
 then be Sid Kal tovto is of no weight, 
 see notes on Phil. iv. 3) but to the 
 pronoun, which it puts in gentle con- 
 trast with the v/Mis twice expressed 
 in the preceding verse: as they had 
 felt for the Apostle (more fully alluded 
 to in ver. 6), so he on his part felt for 
 them; comp. notes on ch. ii. 13. 
 |i,T|K^Ti o-TeY«>v] 'no longer forbear- 
 ing, able to contain;' see notes on 
 ver. I. 
 
 cis TO Yvwvoi] ' vnth a view of Teno-m- 
 ing;' design of the lire/iif'a, comp. 
 ver. i. It does not seem right to 
 supply mentally airbv (Olsh. ; ' ut 
 oognoscerd,' ^th.-Platt, sim. Pol.); 
 the subject of the principal verb is 
 naturally the subject of the infinitive. 
 
 So rightly Syr. ^?l? [ut oognoscer- 
 
 em]: the other Vv. adopt the inf., 
 or an equivalent (' ad cognoscendam 
 fidem vestram,' Vulg., Clarom.), and 
 are thus equally indeterminate with 
 the ori^nal. (iijirws €ir«£po<r6V 
 
 K.T.X.] 'lest ha/ply the tempter have 
 tempted you; ' aor. indio. specifying a 
 fact regarded as having actually taken 
 
 place already: the temptation was a 
 fact, its results however were uncer- 
 tain (comp. Chrys.) ; see Winer, Gr. 
 § 56. i, p. 448, and comp. notes on 
 the very similar passage Gal. ii. 2. It 
 may be observed that Green (Gr. p. 
 81), Fritzsche (Fritz. Opusc. p. 176 
 note), and Scholef. (Hints, p. 114) re- 
 gard lir/Tiiis as dubitative in the first 
 clause, and expressive of apprehen- 
 sion in the second, ' an forte Satanas 
 tentasset...ne forte labores irriti es- 
 sent,' — but with little plausibility. The 
 argument of Fritz, that the /iTjTTus 
 (metuentis) in the first clause would 
 have required yevijaeraL in the second 
 (' atque ita labores initi essent fu- 
 turi ') is certainly not valid : the future 
 would have represented something to 
 occur at some indefinite future time, 
 the aor. subj. is properly used of a, 
 transient state occurring in particular 
 cases; see Matth, 6r. § 519. 7, and 
 comp. Madvig, Synt. § 134. i, who 
 correctly observes that juij with fut. 
 after verbs of fearing, <tc. always 
 gives a prominence to the notion of 
 futurity. On the substantival 
 
 form wapdiav, see exx. in Winer, 
 Or. § 45- 7; P- 316. =o™P' Bernhardy, 
 Synt. VI. 22, p. 316. 
 els KevAv Y^vtjToi] 'prove to beinvain;' 
 comp. Gal. ii. 2, and the exx. collected 
 by Kypke, OJs. Vol. 11. p. 275. The 
 primary force of the prep, is somewhat 
 similarly obscured in the adverbial 
 formulae, els Koaiiv, els Kaipbv, k.t.\.; 
 see Bernhardy, Synt. v. 11, p. 221. 
 On the meaning of Kkvos, see notes on 
 cb. ii. 9. 
 6. "Apri Zk is most naturally eon- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
42 
 
 nP02 BESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 Trjv irla-Tiv Ku) Ttiv ayairriv vfiwv, Kai on e'xere fivetav 
 tlfiuiv ay,a,Qriv iravTOTe, eirtiroOovPTei ^fjiois iSeiv KaOaitep 
 
 nected with the participle (^th.-Pol. 
 distinctly), not with the remote verb 
 irapeK\TJ8ri/iev, ver. 7 (Liinem.,Kooh), 
 which has its own adjunct Sia toSto ; 
 80 appy. Syr., and probably all the 
 other Yv., but the uncertainty as to 
 punctuation precludes their being con- 
 fidently cited on either side. The 
 adverb dpri. [apa, connected with &p- 
 rlui, dp/iol], which properly stands in 
 opp. as well to immediately present 
 (mi>, Plato, Meno, p. 89 o) as to re- 
 motely past time (iraXai, Plato, Orito, 
 p. 43 a), is often used in the N.T. and 
 in later writers in reference to purely 
 present time; see esp. Lobeck, Phryn. 
 p. 18 sq. cva7Ye\icra|j,lvov] 
 
 ' having told the good tidings of; ' 
 comp. Luke i. 19 : oi5/f elwev dTrayyei- 
 Xacros, dXV eOa'yyeKiO'afi^j'ov' tocovtov 
 dyadbif "qyeiTO riji/ iKeivwv ^e^aicactv 
 Kal TT)V iriaviiv, Chrys. The verb 
 eiayyeK. is used in the N. T. both in 
 the active (Eev. x. 7, xiv. 6, only), 
 passive (Matt. xi. 5, Gal. i. 11, Heb. 
 iv. 6, al.), and middle. In the. last 
 form its constructions in the N.T. are 
 singularly varied ; it is used (a) abso- 
 lutely, Bom. XV. 20, I Cor. i. 1 7 ; (i) 
 with a dat. personcB, Eom. i. 15 ; (c) 
 with an accus. personw, Acts xvi. 10, 
 I Pet. i. 12; (d) with an acous. m, 
 Eom. X. 15, Gal. i. 23; («) with a 
 double acoua., personiE and m, Acts 
 'xiii. 32 ; and lastly (/) — the most 
 common construction — ^with a dat. 
 personce and ace. rei, Luke i. 19, al. 
 Of these (A) and occasionally (c) are the 
 forms used by the earlier writers ; see 
 Lobeck, Phryn. p. 267, Thom.-Mag. 
 p. 379, ed. Bern. ti\v itCotiv 
 
 Kal Ti[v iy. if..] 'your faith and your 
 love,' the faith which you have, and 
 .the love which you evince to oile an- 
 
 other (ver. 12) ; SijXo? 9; ptiv vlam t^s 
 eiirfpelas rb ^paiov, t) Si ayiiri) ttJx 
 irpaKTiK^v aperi^v, Theod. The third 
 Christian virtue, iXirls, is not here 
 specified (comp. i Tim. i. 14, 2 Tim. 
 i. 13, al.), but obviously is included; 
 comp. Usteri, Zehrb. 11. 1.4, p. 241, 
 Keuss, TMol. Chrit. iv. 22, Vol. 11. 
 p. 259, 260. Sti i\en 
 
 IxvcCav K.T.\.] ' that ye have good re- 
 membrance of us always;' not exactly 
 p.^'tl/iopeiere rip.wv /ueri iiralvuv Kol ei- 
 <j>Tlpdas, Theoph. (comp. Chrys.), but 
 simply ' that ye retain a good, i. e. as 
 the following words more fully specify, 
 a faithful (/SejSalac, CEcum.) and affec- 
 tionate remembrance of us,' ' ut nostra 
 memoria bona sit in vobis,' Copt., 
 comp. Syr. On laiela, see notes on ch. 
 i. 2. The p.v(ia 070^17 formed the 
 third item in the good tidings; rpla 
 riBuKev aiiipatrra, tt]V vl<mv, ripi 
 aydirriii, Kal toS S^^aa•KaKov TTpi piv^- 
 p,i)v, Theod. irdvTore seems 
 
 -here more naturally joined with the 
 preceding verb (Syr., ^th.), as in 
 ch. i. 2, I Cor. i. 4, 2 Thess. i. 3, al., 
 than with the participle (Copt.) : the 
 p,vela was not only dyaSri, but dSid- 
 XetjTTos ; see 2 Tim. i. 3. So Auth., 
 Arm., and appy. the majority of mo- 
 dern commentators. 
 ^iriiro8. ijiias ISetv] ' longing to see 
 us:' further expansion of the preceding 
 words ; comp. 2 Tim. i. 4. On the 
 force of the iirl, here not intensive 
 but directive, see Fritz. Som. i. 11, 
 Vol. I. p. 31, and notes on 2 Tim. I.e. 
 KaOdirep Kal ijiicis i))i.as] 'even as we 
 also are longing to see you;' rb yap 
 ftaBeiv Tie ^iXoSi'rii on tovto oISeK 6 
 ^t\o6pi.evos OTi, ^iXetrttt troW^ irapa- 
 livBla Kal irapd.KKiiai.i, Chrys. On the 
 meaning and use of KaBirep, see notes 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
III. 7, 8. 
 
 43 
 
 KOI riixelq Vfi^di' Sia tovto vapeKX^Oij/ji.ev, a§e\(f)oi, icp' J 
 vfiiv evi ■jtatrri r^ dvdyK^ Kai OXiy^ei ^ftuiu Stu riji vfxwv 
 via-rewr on vvv ^w/uei/ eav vfxeli (TT^KtjTe ev Kvpto), 8 
 
 8. oTiiKijre] So iJcc, Lachm., and Tiseh. ed. •/, with BDEN^; many mss. : 
 Tisch. ed. 7 adopts the soleoiatio o-TiiKere with AFGKLS*; mss.; Chrys. (ms.), 
 which is maintained by Koch. The authority however is insufficient, as such 
 permutations of vowels are found occasionally even in the best MSS. ; comp. 
 Scrivener, Introd. to N. T. p. lo. 
 
 on ch. ii. ii, and on the use of koI 
 with comparative adverbs, notes on 
 Eph. V. 23. 
 
 7. Sid ToiiTo] 'for this cause:' in 
 reference to the three preceding speci- 
 fications, which are here grouped to- 
 gether in one view. The resumed SA 
 TOVTO is not superfluous (comp. De 
 W.): the length of the preceding sen- 
 tence, and the fact that dpri, i\S6pTos 
 involved mainly the predication of 
 time, make the occurrence of a re- 
 capitulatory and causal formula here 
 . by no means inappropriate. 
 irapEKX...I(|> vfiXv] ' we were comforted 
 over you; ' you were the objects which 
 formed the substratum of our com- 
 fort ; comp. 2 Cor. vii. 7. The prep. 
 iTl is not exactly equivalent to 'in,' 
 Vulg., 'ex,' [frara] Goth., or even 
 'propter,' .^th.-Pol., — still less to 
 'quod attinet ad,' Liinem., — ^but with 
 its usual and proper force points to 
 the basis <m which the tto/kIkXtjo-is 
 rested, 'fundamentum cui veluti su- 
 perstructa est,' Schott; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 48. 0, p. 351. The reading ira- 
 paKeKkfifieBa, though found only in A 
 and 3 mss., has been adopted by Koch, 
 as according better with his connexion 
 of ifm with the finite verb. Surely 
 this is most rash criticism. 
 eiri irdo"{| k,t.X.]: 'in all our necessity 
 and tribulation; ' certainly not ' in 
 qu^vis angusti^ et afflictione,' Schott, 
 — a translation distinctly precluded 
 by the presence of the article, which 
 
 here represents the ivdyKri xal 8\t\j/is 
 as a collective whole ; comp. 2 Cor. i. 
 4, vii. 4. The use of iirl is here only 
 slightly different from that above; it 
 bas appy. neither a temporal (liiinem.) 
 nor a causal (2 Cor. i. 4, but obs. the 
 accompanying iv ir. 0\.), but a semi- 
 local force (comp. 2 Cor. vii. 4, and 
 Mey. in loc), marking that with 
 which the irapdKKriais stands in im- 
 mediate contact and connexion ; comp. 
 Bernhardy, Synt. v. 24. b, p. 248 sq., 
 and notes on Phil. i. 3. In the 
 former use the idea of ethical super- 
 position seems mainly predominant, 
 in this latter that of ethical contact; 
 comp. KrUger, Sprachl. § 68. 41. 5. 
 It is somewhat doubtful to what 
 the ivdyKr) koI BXltpis should be re- 
 ferred. On the whole, the force of 
 avdyKti [connected with AFX-, Pott, 
 Etym, Forsch. Vol. i. p. 184 ; ' vim 
 omnem notat quas evitari non potest,' 
 Herm. Soph. Track. 823] and the 
 tenor of the context seem to imply 
 not any inward distress (De W.), but 
 rather some outward trial and trouble 
 (Alf. compares Acts xviii. 5 — 10) 
 under which the Apostle was then 
 suffering ; see Liinem. in loo. 
 The order of the words is inverted in 
 Bee. {6\l\j/. K. dvdyK'd), but only on the 
 authority of KL ; mss. ; several Ff. 
 Sid Ttis v(i,Mv irCo-Ttus] ' through your 
 faith:' the medium by which this 
 comfort was realized by the Apostle 
 was the faith on the part of the Thes- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
44 
 
 nPOS GE22AA0NIKEIS A. 
 
 9 Tiva yap ev-j^apitrTiav Svva/xeOa t$ Oe<p avrairooovvat 
 
 salouians of \rhich he had received 
 tidings; outt; dirdXeuT-os jielyaaa t%v 
 wap&KXijffiv Tj/xtv elpydtraro, (Ecum. 
 
 8. oTi vvv Ja|i,cv] 'tecause now we 
 live;' reason for the preceding state- 
 ment of the comfort which he re- 
 ceived from hearing of the faith of 
 his converts. The contrast shows that 
 the Apostle regards the dvayXTi (toi 
 6\t\lns as a kind of death, from which 
 he is raised to the fuU powers of life 
 (comp. Bom. viii. 6) by the knowledge 
 of the firm posture of the Thess. ; tV 
 yap ipxripav §e^alwcri.v fajfjc '^/ieri- 
 pay iiroKaijpdyoiiey, Theod. ; compare 
 Pearson, Creed, Vol. ii. p. 319 (ed. 
 Burt.). The conditional member, iav 
 i;;u«s K.r.X., shows that vOv (like the 
 Lat. 'nunc') is not here used in n, 
 purely temporal (comp. Jowett), hut 
 in a logical and argumentative sense, 
 approaching in meaning to 'in hoc 
 rerum statu,' 'rebus sic se habenti- 
 bus;' see Hartung, Partik. vvv, l. i, 
 Vol. n. p. 25, Jelf, Gr. § 719. z. 
 The true principle of the usage is well 
 explained by Hand; 'ssepe in his 
 dusB rerum conditiones coUocantur, 
 quarum altera aut prsecessit, aut cogi- 
 tatur esse posse, eique ex adverse op- 
 ponitur ea quae vera ac proeeens adest 
 et valet,' TurseU. Vol. iv. p. 340. 
 4dv i|uts oTiJKTjTe] 'if ye stand, 
 {fast);' hypothetically stated, as the 
 faith of the Thessalonians was not yet 
 complete (comp. ver. 10); experience 
 was yet to show whether the assump- 
 tion was correct. On the force of idv 
 with the subj. ('sumo hoc, et potest 
 omnino ita se habere, sed utrum vere 
 futurum sit neone id nesoio, verum 
 experientia cognoscam,' Herm.), and 
 on its general distinction from ei with 
 the indie, see notes on Qal. i. 9, 
 
 Winer, Gr. § 41. -z, p. 260, and 
 Herm. Fijer, No. 312. On the mean- 
 ing of this late form arriKuv, not per 
 se 'to stand /osi' (comp. Eom. xiv. 4), 
 see notes on Phil. i. 27. In the N.T. 
 it occurs only in St Paul's Epp. and 
 Mark iii. 31 (Tisch.), xi. 25; and in 
 the LXX in Exod. xiv. 13 (Alex.). 
 Iv KvpCi^] 'in the Lord,' — in Him aa 
 the element of their true life, and the 
 sphere of its practical manifestations ; 
 so with ariiKav in Phil. iv. i ; see 
 notes on Eph. iv. 17, vl. i. 
 
 9. rCva ^dp k.t.X.] Confirmation 
 of the preceding conditioned declara- 
 tion Sri vvv j^w/iev k.t.\.; 'we live, I 
 say, for what sufficient thanks can be 
 rendered to God for our plenitude of 
 joy on your account?' Toaavrij, ^ijalv, 
 ri Si vfiSs xapd, oVi oiSi eirxapuTTeiv 
 tear i^tav cvp'uTKo/iev, CEcum., comp. 
 Theoph. For Beifi V^VGH^ read Kv 
 ptip, and N^ also gives Kvplou for Geou 
 at the end of the verse. dvToiro- 
 
 Sovvai] 'render,' — ^properly 'in return,' 
 
 'retribuere,' Vulg., VV; tyiVnX Syr.; 
 
 •n 
 
 eixapurrla is regarded as a kind of 
 return for the mercies and blessings 
 of God: Grot, aptly compares Psalm 
 cxvi. 12, nin'^ a^SyS-nD. The hi- 
 
 ' T '^ • T T 
 
 nary compound avrairoSMvai is used 
 by the Apostle both 'in bonam' and 
 ' in malam partem ' (2 Thess. i. 6, 
 comp. Kom. xii. 19) in the sense of 
 rendering back a due ; the dvrl mark- 
 ing the idea of return, the a7ro hinting 
 at that of the debt previously in- 
 curred, 'ubi daudo te exsolvis debito,' 
 Winer, de Verb. Comp. iv. p. 12. 
 irepl i|iuv] 'concerning you,' 'for 
 you;' comp. ch. i. 2 (and notes), i Cor. 
 i. 4, 2 Thess. i. 3, ii. 13. The diflfer- 
 enoe between irepl and vwip (Eph. i. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
III. 9, 10. 
 
 45 
 
 trpocrBev tow Qeov tifkwv', vvKTOi koJ ^/xipas virepeK- lO 
 •Kepicrcrov ceofievoi ejy to ISeiv vfJLwv to vpoa-wirov koI 
 KarapTia-ai to vcrTep^ftwra t?? vlarewi vftZv. 
 
 i6, comp. Phil. i. 4) in Buoh combina- 
 tions as the present is scarcely appre- 
 ciable; see notes on Col. iv. 3, and 
 comp. on Phil. i. 7. 
 eirl wdoTi rfj xopf] 'on aaxnmt of, 
 fm; all Oiejoy;' iirl having here more 
 of its causal and derivative sense, and 
 marking the ground and reason of the 
 avTair6So<rK eixtpurrCas: comp. i Cor. 
 i. 4, 2 Cor. ix. 15, Polyb. Sist. xvill. 
 26. 4, see notes on Phil. i. 5, and 
 Kruger, Sprackl. § 68. 41. 6. The 
 present use of iirl is nearly allied to 
 the common use of the prep, with 
 verbs denoting affections of the mind, 
 6avfidl^eiy, dYaXXiax, k.t.X., but per- 
 haps recedes a shade farther from the 
 idea of 'ethical basis,' to which both 
 this and all similar uses of the prep, 
 are to be ultimately referred ; see 
 nptes on ver. 7, and Winer, Gr. § 48. 
 "1 V- 35 '• I* '3 scarcely necessary to 
 say that vatra ri x<>/>& is not, except 
 by inference, 'summa laetitia' (Schott, 
 — who however fails to observe the 
 article), but 'all the joy,' Copt., — 
 ' the joy taken in its whole extent ;' 
 see Winer, 6t. % 18. 4, p. loi : the 
 Apostle's joy wanted nothing to make 
 it full and complete, 
 ■jl xatpoiuv] 'which wejoy;^ attraction 
 for ■Ijiv xcdpo/iev (Winer, Or. § 24. i, 
 p. 147), the construction being appy. 
 here x<*f/>eu< x^M'' (Matth. ii. 10), not 
 Xatpew X*?? (John iii. 29), which, 
 though analogous, would be scarcely 
 so natural with the simple relative. 
 On these intensive forms, see Winer, 
 Gr. § 32. -i, p. 201, § 54. 3. P- 413. 
 Iiobeck, Pa/ralipom. p. 224 sq. 
 ^Iiirpoo-Bev k.t.X.] 'before our God;' 
 farther definition of the pure nature 
 of the joy : it was such as could bear 
 
 the scrutiny of the eye of God, 'illo 
 videlicet teste atque inspectore et nt 
 arbitror probatore,' Just., comp. Calv. 
 On the formula IfiTpoffffev rov GeoC, 
 only used by St Paul in this Ep. , see 
 notes on ch. i. 3. The clause ob- 
 viously belongs not to xap^ (Pelt), 
 still less to ver. 10 (Syr., but not Syr.- 
 Phil.), but to the verb xo'poA""- 
 
 10. vvKT^s KaV i^|j,lpas] 'night and 
 day;' Kal tovto t^s, xapSs aiiiieiov, 
 Cbrys. On this formula, see notes on 
 ch. ii. 9, and on i Tim. v. 5. 
 VTrepEKirepurcroS Sc(S|ievoi.] ' above mea- 
 sure praying;' participial adjunct, 
 not to xalpoiiev, which is only part 
 of a subordinate clause, but to the 
 leading thought rlva — ■AvTawoSovvai 
 (Lunem., Alf., Jowett), the participle 
 not having so much a causal (Liinem.) 
 as a circumstantial ('praying as we 
 do,' Alf.), or perhaps rather a simply 
 temporal reference ; compare Kriiger, 
 Sprackl. § 56. 10. I. On the rare cu- 
 mulative form virepeKir. (ch. v. 13 [-fis], 
 Eph. iii. 20, Clem.-Rom. r Cor. 20 
 [-fis]) and St Paul's noticeable use of 
 compounds of virip, see notes on Eph, 
 I.e. tls ri, 18. K.T.X.] 
 
 'that we may tee your face;' 'ut vi- 
 deamus,' Vulg. , Clarom. ; purpose and 
 object (foo IS^ airois, Theoph.) of the 
 prayer, with perhaps an included re- 
 ference to the subject of it ; comp. 
 2 Thess. ii. 2, and see notes on ch. ii. 
 12, and on in. t6 Trpba., notes on ch. 
 ii. 17. KaraprCcrai] 'make 
 
 complete,' 'nt suppleamus,' Clarom. 
 The verb Kwraprl^uv (Hesych. Kara- 
 ffxeva^ciy, crepeoSv, Zonar. dfluofeic) 
 properly signifies ' to make aprios' — 
 the kot4 having appy. a slightly in- 
 tensive force (see Bast u. Palm, Lex. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
46 
 
 nPOS GESZAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 II 
 
 AuTOJ Se 6 Geo? Kai Trarhp VULUIV May God direct my way ' 
 
 'to you. May He make 
 
 Koi 6 Kipioi ^fxHv ln<Tovi KarevBivai atryoainho&«f 
 
 B.v. Kari,, IV. 4), — thence 'to re-ad- 
 juat and restore,' whether in a simple 
 (Matth. Iv. 21) or an ethical sense 
 (Gal. vi; i), what had been preyiously 
 out of order; and thence, with a some- 
 what more derivative sense (as here), 
 'to supply what is lacking or defi- 
 cient, V\i;/)wira(, Tbeod., ivarXTipuaai, 
 Q3oum. For exx. see Wetst. Vol. I. 
 p. ■278, Eisner, Obe. Vol. 11. p. 70, and 
 notes on Gal. I. c. 
 
 rd v<rTcpi]|iaTa k.t.X.] 'the lacking 
 measures of yowr faith,' ' that in which 
 your faith is yet deficient;' comp. 
 Phil. ii. 30, Col. i. 24. These defects 
 are referred by Olsh. to their faith not 
 on the side of its power but of its 
 knowledge. This seems substantially 
 true (oi Trdffijs arlKauaav t^s SiSaaKa- 
 \las, oiSi offa ixpTJ' liaSeTv iimSov, 
 Chrys., comp. ch. iv. 13) ; it does not 
 however seem correct to exclude de- 
 fects on the side of practice, which ch. 
 iv. I sq. seems mainly intended to 
 supply ; see LUnem. in loc, 
 
 II. Ailris 8^ K.T.X.] 'Now may 
 Ood Himself and our Father;' transi- 
 tion by the Si nera^wnKhv (see notes 
 on Gal, iii. 8) to good wishes and 
 prayers for their progress in holiness. 
 The airbs does not seem here to sug- 
 gest any antithesis between God and 
 the Seo/ievoi, ver. 10 (Do W.), but 
 merely to enhance the power of God 
 in respect of the KarevBiivetv r^v oS6v 
 (Ltinem.), and to place in contrast 
 the human agent with his earnest but 
 foiled efforts (oh. ii. 18), and God 
 who if He willed could instantly and 
 surely accomplish all ; litrei (\eyg/ '0 
 GeJs iKKb\jiM rir "Lartu/av rhv iroj/Ta- 
 XoB ijjKii' 8i4 Ti3i» irapaaiiuv i/iToSl- 
 iovra, ii/a 6pSi]ii idii> jrpbs vfias iroLifiriii' 
 lieBa, CBoum. On the meaning 
 
 of. the august title i 0e6j Kal Trarip, 
 
 and the probable connexion of ijjuun 
 with the latter snbst. only (so also 
 Liinem.), see notes on Gal. i. 4. It 
 may be remarked that the copula is 
 omitted in Syr., Copt., ^th. (both), 
 and retained in Vulg., Clarom.,Goth., 
 Arm., Syr.-Phil., but that in these 
 latter Vv. where it thus occurs there is 
 no trace of the explanatory force here 
 ascribed to it by many modern com- 
 mentators. Kol 6 Kdpios K.T.X.] 
 Union of the Son with the Father in 
 the Apostle's prayer. The language 
 of some of the German expositors is 
 here neither clear nor satisfactory : 
 we do not say with Liinem., that 
 Christ as sitting at the right hand of 
 God has a part in the government of 
 the world ' nach paulinischer An- 
 schauung' (compare Usteri, Lehrh. ir. 
 1. 4, p. 315), still less with Eoch, that 
 the Apostle regards Christ 'als die 
 Weisheit uud Maoht Gottes,' — but 
 assert simply and plainly that the 
 Eternal Son is here distinguished from 
 the Father in respect of His Person- 
 ality, but mystically united with Him 
 (observe the significant singular kot- 
 evBivai) in respect of his Godhead, 
 and as God rightly and duly address- 
 ed in the language of direct prayer; 
 see eap. Athan. conlr. Arian. in. 11, 
 Waterl. Defence, Qu. xvii. Vol. I. p. 
 423, Qu. XXII. p. 467. 
 The addition after 'Itjo-. of Xpi.irr6s 
 (Rec), though supported by D'EFGK 
 L; DISS. ; Vv.; Ath., and many Ff., 
 is rightly rejected by most modern 
 editors with ABD=X (D^ omits 'Iijir. 
 as well); 5 mss.; Olarom., Sangerm., 
 Vulg. (Amiat.), Mih. (Pol.,— but not ■ 
 Flatt), al., as a conformation to the 
 more usual formula. 
 KarcvB^vai] 'direct;' optative, not in- 
 finitive, — which, though occasionally 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
III. II, 12, 13. 
 
 47 
 
 Tr/v oaov r\fxwv vpoi Vficii. vnai Se 6 K.vpioi v\€Ovd<rai 12 
 Kai Trepicra-evarai. rrj ayairrj eh aW^Xovi koi ej't Travra?, 
 KaQairep Koi ijfieis els vfji.ai, ei's to crTtjpl^ai Vfiwv ray 1 3 
 
 found in older and esp. poetical writer* 
 in ref. to wiBheB and prayers (Apollon. 
 de Synt. ni. 14, Bemhardy, Synt. IX. 
 3) P- 35 7) J Jiaa no place in the lan- 
 guage of the N.T, ; see Winer, Or, § 
 43- 5i p. 2S3. The singular is cer- 
 tainly very noticeable both here and 
 in 2 Thess. ii. 17: no reasons except 
 those founded on the true relations of 
 the Father and Son seem in any way 
 to account for the enallage of number. 
 The verb KarevBii/eLV (Luke i. 79, 2 
 Thess. iii. 5) properly signifies 'to 
 make straight,' thence (as here) 'to 
 
 direct' ('dirigat,' Vulg., .o5Aj 
 ■J 1. 
 Syr.), the xarct being appy, not so 
 much intensive (Koch) as directive, 
 and the appended irphs specifying the 
 terminus ad quem; comp. Winer, Or. 
 §.52. 4. 9, p. 383. 
 
 12. i(j.as S^] ' Sut yarn,' — you — 
 whatever it may please God to ap- 
 point with respect to us and our 
 coming : ' altera precatio ut interea 
 dum obstructum illi est iter se tamen 
 absente DominusThessalouicenses con- 
 firmet in sanetitate et caritate im- 
 pleat,' Calv. 6 Kupios] 
 
 Not the First Person of the blessed 
 Trinity (All),— still less the Third 
 (Basil, ap. Pearson, Creed, Vol, II. p. 
 265, ed. Burt.), but, in accordance* 
 with the application of the title both 
 in ver. 11 and ver.. 13, and the pre- 
 vailing usage in St Paul's Epp., the 
 Second; eomp. Winer, Or. § ig. i, p.. 
 113. The subject 6 Ki5/Jios. [so BD^K 
 LX; Augiens. : 6eos, A; 73; 6 Kii/wos 
 'iTiffoSs, D^E^FG; Clarom., Sangenn., 
 al.]. is omitted in Syr., Arab.. (Erp.), 
 Vvdg. (Amiat.), and is rejected by 
 Mill {Pvolegorn. p. oxxx.),. De W., 
 
 Eoch, al., as an interpolation. The 
 external authority for its insertion is 
 too preponderant to be safely set 
 aside ; Leushm. and Tisch. retain it. 
 n-Xcovcio'ai Kal irEpurir£i)(riu] 'make 
 to increase and abound,' 'multiplioet 
 et abundare faoiat,' Vulg., Clarom.; 
 both verba transitive, and nearly 
 synonymous ; the former referring not 
 to mere numerical increase (ry dpiSfiQ 
 irXeovdffai, Theod.) but to spiritual en- 
 largement, the second to spiritual 
 abundance, and having more of a 
 superlative meaning ; comp. Fritz. 
 Horn. Vol. I. p. 351. II^eoy(if64y is 
 not transitive elsewhere in the K. T., 
 see however Psalm Ixxi. 21, KrXco'- 
 vaaas t^ hmaiosivr/v ami, i Mace. iv. 
 35, 5r\eo»[i(ros rhi yerniBivra HTpwrov ; 
 the verb irepiaa. is also commonly in- 
 trans., but see 2 Cor, iv. 15, ix. 8,and 
 notes on Eph. i. 8. 
 
 TTJ a.fi,tcr\ K.T.X,.] ' in your love to- ■ 
 ward one another and towco'd all;' in- 
 strumental or rather ablatival dative 
 specifying that luith which they were 
 to be enlarged and to abound; see 
 Hartung, Casus, p. 94, Scheuerl. Synt. 
 § 22, p. 1.78, 182. This love was to 
 be shown both in the form of brotherly 
 love (0t\oSeX0la; ch. iv. 9) and in its ' 
 more extended form to all mankind 
 whether i/imiaTOi. (Theod.) or not; 
 ToOra yb.p rfjs KarcL Qehv &yi/iFiii tSiov 
 rb irdjrras ireptTrXiKeaffai, Theopb. 
 KaSairep Kal ij|xets els if-} 'even as 
 we also abound toward you;' oomp. 
 ver. 6; soil. irXeovd^op.ev xal irepur- 
 aeioiJ,£ir T17 d^ciTTj; [ir-epl i/ms< SteridTi- 
 p,^v, Theod.]j. the verbs which were 
 previously transitive now relapsing in- 
 to their usual intransitive meaning: 
 t6 p.iv Tip.iTepov riSi) iarL' rb Sk i/ii-; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
48 
 
 nP02 OEZSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 KapSlai UfAefiiTTOvs ev dytoacrvp^ e/iTrpocrOev tov QeoO 
 Kal "Trarpoi ^fiwv ev r^ Trapova-la tov K.vplov iifutSv 
 ^IijaroS //.era irdvTWV rwv dyiwv aurov. 
 
 npov d|toS/i6i> Ycc^ir^ai, Chrys. This 
 mode of supplying the ellipsis, though 
 open to the objection of causing two 
 different meanings to be assigned to 
 irXeoK. and jrepurj. ^in the same verse, 
 seems less arbitrary than that of Syr. 
 ( omp. Copt.), alp, &yiT7]i> Ixo/iev, 
 Urot. 'sumus, more Hebraeo,' <fcc., 
 and is supported by the analogy of 
 simple verbs being supplied from com- 
 pound verbs, afiirmative from nega- 
 tive ; oomp. Jelf, Gr. § 895. I. b. 
 On the meaning of Kaddirep, see notes 
 on ch. ii. 11, and on the use of Kal, 
 notes on ch. iv. 5. 
 
 13. els tA (TTTipCgai] 'in order to 
 establish,' ' to the end he may slablish,' 
 Auth. ; not the result (Baumg.-Crus.) 
 but the end and aim of the ir\eo;<. xal 
 irtpura. tj iyinrrg ; av yh,p 01)7-)) wepij- 
 fftiij, ffrripiynos iffri tOui KeKTrj/ihav 
 airipi, CBcum. ; love being, as De W. 
 observes, 'the filling up of the law' 
 (Bom. xiii. 10) and ' the bond of per- 
 fectness' (Col. iii. 14). The subject of 
 the inf., it need scarcely be said, is 
 not ^/las (Corn, a Lap. i), nor i,y6^ 
 ■mill (CEcum.), nor even Qeov (a Lap. 
 1), but the subject of the foregoing 
 verse, rbp 'Kipiov, d|t^|JiirTovs 
 
 iy dYUiKrvvil] ' so as to be unblameable 
 in holiness;' proleptic use of the ad- 
 jective; comp. I Cor. i. 8, Phil. iii. 21, 
 see Winer, Gr. % 66. 3, p. 550, Jelf, 
 Gr. § 439. 2, Sohaefer, Demosth. Vol. 
 I. p. 239, and the long and elaborate 
 note of Koch in loc. The hearts {(k 
 rrjs KapSlas i^ipxovTM SiaXoyur/iol iro- 
 vripol, Chrys.) were to be blameless, 
 and that not simply, but in a, sphere 
 and element of holiness. On the 
 orthographically correct but late form 
 iyuixrifii (Rom. i. 4, 2 Cor. vii, i, as 
 
 N, not ir/iO(ripri, as B'DEFa (A has 
 SiKaiotrivri), see Fritz. Som. Vol. i. p. 
 
 10, Buttm. Or. § 118. ir. In mean- 
 ing it differs but little from 07167171 
 (2 Oor. i. 12 [not Mec.}, Heb. xii. 10), 
 except perhaps that it represents more 
 the condition than the abstract quality, 
 while ayiacr/juis, as its termination 
 shows, points primarily to the process 
 (2 Thess. ii. 13,1 Pet. i. 2), and thence, 
 with that gradual approach of the ter- 
 mination in -/;ios to that in -trwij which 
 is so characteristic of the N. T., the 
 state (oh. iv. 4, i Tim. ii. 15), frame 
 of mind, or holy disposition (Water- 
 land, on Justif. Vol. VI. p. 7), in 
 which the action of the verb is evinced 
 and exemplified ; see TJsteri, Lehrb. n. 
 I. 3, p. 226, and comp. ayaBwaivni, 
 ayaSoTijS, and notes on Gal. v. 22. 
 i|i,irpo(rS(v K.T.\. does not belong ex- 
 clusively either to ii> aytu(7iji/y (Pelt) 
 or to dfii/iTTovs (De W.), but to both 
 (Lilnem.) : their dfie/j^la iv dytuff. 
 was to be such as could bear the 
 searching eye of God; see notes on 
 ver. 9, and on ch. i. 3. 
 
 TOV 0. Kol IT. ij)!..] See notes on ver. 
 
 11, and on Gal. i. 4. Iv rj 
 ^apovo-Cfi K.T.X.] 'at the coming of 
 ow Lord Jesus;' Kal yip vir' airoS 
 Kpivo/ieBa IfiwpotrBai toO Hot/jos, 
 Theoph. ; see notes on ch. ii. ig. The 
 addition XpiaToB is rightly rejected 
 hy Lachm. and Tiseh., with ABDEKN ; 
 20 mss. ; Clarom. , Sangerm., Vulg. 
 (Amiat.), ^th. (Pol. ,— but not Piatt) ; 
 Dam., Ambr, : the appearance of '!);- 
 ffoOs without Xpiaris seems somewhat 
 noticeably frequent in this Epistle (9 
 times out of 16); comp. ver. 11, ch. i. 
 10, ii. IS, 19, iv. I, i, 14 (bis). 
 
 |j.(tA irdvTwv K.T.K.] ' aceompanied 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
IV. I, 
 
 49 
 
 Abound'ye, according to A ' f 
 
 my precepts. God's will IVonroV OVV, 
 
 is your sanctification ,„ , >~ 'IT'it 
 
 wherefore bo chaste and VflUi KUl irapaKoXoVfiev ev J\.vpia) ItjaoO 
 
 aSe\(f) 
 
 01, epwTWfiev 
 
 IV. 
 
 v>ith all JJis Saints;' not aiv but 
 /ierd; they are here represented not 
 so much as united with Him as at- 
 tending on Him and swelling the 
 majesty of His train; comp. notes an 
 Epli. vi. 23, and contrast Col. iii. 4, 
 where on the contrary the context 
 shows that the idea ia mainly that of 
 coherence. It is very doubtful whe- 
 ther o2 aymi are, with Pearson (Creed, 
 Vol. II. p. ig6), to be referred to the 
 Holy Angels (see 2 Thess. i. 7, Matth. 
 xvi. 27, XXV. 3t, al. ; comp. Heb. 
 D'Sf*!!"? Psalm Ixxxix. 6, Zech. xiv. 5, 
 al.), or, with Hofmann (Schri/tb. Vol. 
 II. 3, p. 595), to the Saiuts in their 
 more inclusive sense (see ch. iv. 14, 
 comp. I Cor. vi. 2) : perhaps the addi- 
 tion jrivTes may justify us in referring 
 the term to both ; so Beng., Alf. 
 The &/iiiv at the end of the verse [insert- 
 ed by AD'EN'; mss. ; Clarom., Sang., 
 ViJg., and by Lachm. in brackets] 
 seems to be a liturgical addition. 
 
 Chaptbe IV. I. AoiTTov oJv] 'Fur- 
 thermore then,' in consequence of, and 
 in accordance with the issue prayed 
 for in the preceding verse; the ouv 
 having here its coUeclive force, and 
 introducing an appeal to the Thessa- 
 lonians on their side, grounded on 
 what the Apostla bad asked in prayer 
 for them from God ; they were to do 
 their part, Olsh. On the two uses of 
 OVV (the collective and r^fleme), see 
 Klofcz, Heuar. Vol. 11. p. 717, com- 
 pared with Hartuug, Pwrtih. Vol. II. 
 p. g. The transl. of Vulg., ' ergo ' 
 (Clarom. less correctly ' autem '), is 
 judiciously altered by Beza to 'igitur ;' 
 the former being properly used only 
 'in graviore argumentatione,' Hand, 
 Tursell. Vol. m. p. 187, The exact 
 meaning of Xoin'6;> has been somewhat 
 E. T. 
 
 contested. By observing its use {2 
 Cor. 3dii. 11) and that of the more 
 specific rb XoiTrJc (Eph. vi. 10, Phil, 
 iii. I, iv. 8, 1 Thess. iii. i) in St 
 Paul's Epp., we see that it is neither 
 simply temporal (dei /iiy Kal eli ri 
 SiriiieKh, Chrys., Theoph.), nor simply 
 ethical {AiroxpiiTus, CEoum. 2), but 
 rather marks the transition to the 
 close of the Ep. and to what remains 
 yet to be said ('de caetero,' Vulg.), 
 whether much (Phil. iii. i) or little 
 (2 Cor. xiii. 11); t6 els wapabeatv 
 iXBety, CEoum, i : comp, notes on 
 Phil, iii, I. The omission of 
 
 rb (inserted by Rec.) is here supported 
 by all MSS, except B' [mss. ; Chrys., 
 Theod.], and acquiesced in by Laehm., 
 Tiach,, and appy. all modern editors : 
 that of ouy [omitted by B'; 10 mas. ; 
 Syr., Copt. ; Chrys.], though approved 
 by Mill (ProUgom. p. xov) and Tisch. 
 ed. i, is on the contrary by no means 
 probable. ipaTaf.ev\ ' we 
 
 beseech;' comp, oh, v. 12, Phil, iv, 3, 2 
 Thess. ii. i, where alone it is used by 
 St Paul : a derivative and non-classi- 
 cal use of ipoirav, perhaps suggested 
 by the double use of ^^SB' (Sohott), 
 of which in the LXX it is not un- 
 commonly a translation; see Psalm 
 cxxii. 6, ipunii^aTe (•I7SB') 5^ rb. els 
 elpyfiriv Tr)v 'Iepov<rd\i/i/j,. 
 irapaKoXoviJicv ev Kup. 'Itjo-.] ' exhort 
 you in the Zord Jesus;' our vap&KKii- 
 ai.s is in Him alone (see Phil, ii, i,and 
 notes) ; He is the sphere and element 
 in which alone all we say and do has 
 its proper existence and efficacy: see 
 notes on Eph. iv. 17, vi. i. The gloss 
 S(d ToO Beoi;, Chrys. (rbv Xpiarbv irapa- 
 Xo/i/SoKH, Theoph., 'per Christum 
 rogat et obseorat,' Schott 2), involves 
 a needless departure from the almost 
 regular meaning of this significant 
 E 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
50 
 
 nP02 eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 'Iva Kadcoi TrapeXd^ere ■Trap ^uSiv to xtSy Sei vptcii vepnra- 
 Tetv Kal apea-Kuv Qew, Kadoof Koi wepnrareiTe, "iva -nepia- 
 
 2 atiriTe ixaXKov. oiSaTe yap rivai 'irapayyeXiai eSdiKafnev 
 
 3 v/uttf Sia Tov K.vpiov 'IrjcTov. toOto yap ea-riv diX^/ia 
 
 formula: all the ancient Vv. retain 
 the simple and primary ineaning of 
 the preposition. tva Ka6<6s 
 
 K.T.X.] ' that even as ye received from 
 ns;' subject of the prayer blended 
 with the purpose of making it, intro- 
 duced by the partially final Ua; see 
 notes on Eph. i. 1 7. On the meaning 
 of TrapeXd^ere, here unduly extended 
 by Chrys., Theopfi., to the teaching 
 of example's {oixi pruMTav jiivov larlv 
 dXXa Kal TpayimTUv), see notes oh oh. 
 ii. 13. This ha is omitted by Eec. 
 with Ab'E^KLN; great majority of 
 mss. ; Syr. -Phil., jEth. -Piatt (appy.) ; 
 Chrys., Theod., al. (TiacTi. ed. 2); but 
 is rightly retained by Lachm., Tisch. 
 ed. 7. C is deficient. 
 tA ttws 8«i K.T.X.] ' how ye ought to 
 walJe;' literally 'the how, die.,' the 
 t6 giving to the whole clause a sub- 
 stantival character, and bringing the 
 two members into a single point of 
 view; comp. Lube ix. 46, Rom. iv. 
 J 3, viii. 26, see Winer, Gr. § 20. 3, 
 p. 162, ed. 5 (omitted or placed else- 
 where ined. 6), Fritz, on Mark, p. 372, 
 Jelf, Gr. § 457. 3, and the numerous 
 exx. in Matlh. Gr. § 280. 
 Kal dp^o-KCiv 0e^] ' amd {by so doing) 
 to please God.' The xal does not seem 
 to be either explanatory (Schott 2) or 
 Hebraistic ('vim consilii aut effeotus 
 desoribens,' Storr, cited by Schott), 
 but with its not uncommon consecu- 
 tive force marks the ApiaKuv as the 
 result of the vepnraTeiv; comp. notes 
 o» Phil. iv. 12. The words Kadii^ Kal 
 irepnraTetTe are omitted by Sec., Tisch. 
 ed. 2, but only on the authority of 
 D3E«KL; most mss.; Syr., Chrys., 
 Theod., Dam.: they are rightly in- 
 
 serted by Lachm., Tisch. ed. 7, on 
 greatly preponderant authority. We 
 Can hardly say that the words are in- 
 serted ' vitiose et parum ad rem ' 
 (Just.); the terms of the concluding 
 exhortation seem to render an allusion 
 to their present state, if not necessary, 
 yet certainly natural and appropriate. 
 For a jBoahd sermon on this text, 
 see Beveridge, Serm. cxxiii. Vol. v. 
 p. 347 sq. irepur(rEtii)rc 
 
 jiaXXov] ' ye may abound still more ,' 
 sell, in your walking and pleasing 
 God: the expression occurs again in 
 ver. 10 and Phil. i. g. The omission 
 of a oufus corresponding to the first 
 Kaffiis, and the conclusion of the sen- 
 tence in terms not wholly symmetrical 
 with what had preceded, involvfe no 
 real difEculty, and are characteristic 
 of the Apostle's style. 
 
 2. otSaTC Yop] 'For ye lenow.^ 
 Appeal to the memory of the Thea- 
 salonians in confirmation of the fore- 
 going declaration Ka0i>s TrapeXo/Sere, 
 'quasi dicat Accepisse yos a nobis 
 dico,' Est.; comp. i Cor. xv. 1, 2, 
 Gal. iv. 13. rCvas iropaYy.] 
 
 ' what commands;' not 'evangelii prse- 
 dicationem,' Pelt, — ^but, in accordance 
 with the regular meaning of the word 
 and the tenor of the context, ' prae- 
 cepta,' soil, 'bene sancteque vivendi,' 
 Eat., 'vivendi regula,' Calv. ; comp. 
 Acts V. 28, xvi. 24, I Tim. i. 5, 18, 
 and see notes in locc. The emphasis, 
 as Liinem. observes, rests on rlras, and 
 prepares the reader for the following 
 toOto, ver. 3. Sid toi! 
 
 K.vp, 'Irjir.] ' by the Lord Jesus' ' per 
 Dominum Jesum,' Vulg., Clarom., 
 'Jjairh,' Goth.; not equivalent to ii/ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
lY. 2, 3. 51 
 
 Toy Qeov, 6 dyiaa/JLOi ii/j,wv, aTrej(«r0at i//*ay djro t5? 
 
 Ku/af^ (Pelt), but ootrectly designating 
 the Lord as the 'causa medians' 
 through which the vapayyeKlai were 
 declared : they were not the Apostle's 
 own commands, but Christ's (oiix ^/ti 
 ydp, <tyt)<rlv, a vap-^yeiKa, dX\' iKeleov 
 raCra, Theoph.), by whose blessed in- 
 fluence he was moved to deliver them ; 
 comp. 1 Cor. i. 5, and see Winer, Gr. 
 % 47. i, p. 339 note 2. The addition 
 does not then seem designed so much 
 to vindicate the authoiity of the Apo- 
 stle (Olsh.) as to enhance the impor- 
 tance of the commands; comp. i Cor. 
 vii. 10. 
 
 3. toJto ■yip K.T.\.] ' For this is 
 the mil of God,' — 'this that follows, 
 this that I am about to declare to 
 yon;' further explanation of the rlmt 
 vapayyeMas, y&p having here more of 
 its explanatory (' quippe h^c,' Schott) 
 than its argumentative force; see 
 notes on Gal. ii. 6. ToOro is obviously 
 not the predicate (De W.), but the 
 subject, placed somewhat emphatically 
 forward to echo the preceding Huas 
 and direct the reader's attention to 
 the noun in apposition that follows. 
 Luaem. and Alf. compare Bom. ix. 8, 
 Gal. iii. 7; but the passages are not 
 perfectly analogous, as there the de- 
 monstrative pronoun is retrospective, 
 here mainly prospective ; comp. notes 
 on Gal. I. c. 6£Xi)|ia rov 0cov] 
 
 'the will of God;' 'id quod Deus 
 Tult,' Fritz. Som. Vol. m. p. 33. The 
 omission of ri before $4X. [inserted by 
 AFGr, and by Lachm. in brackets] is 
 not to be accounted for by the ' non- 
 distribution of the predicate 9i\. roC 
 QeoO ' (Alf. ; but with ?), nor because 
 what follows does not exhaust the con- 
 ception (Lftnem.), but simply on the 
 principle noticed by the Greek gram- 
 marians (ApoUon. deSynt. i. 31, p. 64, 
 ed. Bekk.) that 'after verbs substantive 
 
 or nuncupative' the article is fre- 
 quently omitted: see Middleton, Gr. 
 Art. III. 3. 2, p. 43 (ed. Eose), but 
 observe that the rule is by no means 
 so universal as Middl. seems to think ; 
 see Winer, Gr. § 18. 7j p. 104. When 
 the subject is a demonstrative pro- 
 noun and the verb is omitted (Bom, ix. 
 8), the exceptions are naturally fewer, 
 as the insertion of the article might 
 often leave it uncertain whether the 
 demonstr. pronoun was intended to be 
 predicative or no ; see Stallb. on Plato, 
 Apol. p. 18 A, and Sngelhart on Plato, 
 Loch. § t. It may be noticed 
 
 that the useful and common form 
 8i\riiw, is appy. confined to the LXX, 
 N. T., and late writers ; comp. Lo- 
 beck, Phryn. p. 7. 
 
 6 (iYia(r)i.os v|u!iv] 'your aanctifica- 
 tion;' appositional member to the 
 preceding Oi\ijpu tov Geoff, farther 
 defined both negatively and positively 
 in the following clauses, and more 
 specially exemplified in the subsequent 
 appositional member ri p,^ iiirep^ai- 
 vem, ver. 6. The late substantive 
 ayia(rp.6s, — which, as the defining 
 clauses seem to show, has here some- 
 what of a special meaning (Beng.), — 
 is not equivalent to &yiaa-ipii (comp. 
 Olsh., Usteri, Lehri. p. 226, note), but 
 in accordance with its termination 
 ('action of verb proceeding from sub- 
 ject,' Donalds. Cratyl. § 253) still re- 
 tains its active force, iiiiSv being a 
 simple gen. oijecti, ' sanetifioatio ves- 
 tri,' i.e. ' ut sanctitati studeatis,' Me- 
 noch. ap. Pol. Syn.; comp. Kruger, 
 Sprachl. § 47. 7. i sq., and see note 
 on ch. iii. 13. 
 
 dir^X*""^"''' ^l*** K.T.X.] 'to wit that 
 ye abstain from fornication;' explana- 
 tory infinitive, defining on the nega- 
 tive side the preceding term 6 dyio- 
 cp,&s, which otherwise miist have been 
 
 E2 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
52 
 
 nPOS OESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 4 "TTopveias, elSevai eKaarov v/jloov to eavTOV axevoi KTatrdai 
 
 regarded as simply general in its sig- 
 nification; see Kruger, Sprachl. § S7. 
 10. 6 sq., Winer, Gr. § 44. i, p. 284, 
 and corap. Madvig, Synt. § 153, who 
 however has not sufficiently illustrated 
 this not uncommon use of the infini- 
 tive. Even Winer (Gr. § 44. 2) seems 
 to regard the inf. here as a subject-inf. 
 in apposition to diXtjfia. tov 0eou (comp. 
 too Syr., j^th.), but appy. with but 
 little plausibility. The insertion (oh. 
 v. 22) or omission (r Tim. iv. 3) of 
 oVi after the compound drix^<^9a.t 
 involves no real change of meaning 
 (compare Acts xv. 20, ag), but differs 
 at most only thus much, — 'ut in priori 
 formula [with ottiS] sejunctionis cogi- 
 tatio ad rem, in posteriore autem ad 
 nos ipsos referatur,' Tittmann, Synon. 
 I. p. 225. Tiis iropvetas] 
 
 'Fornication;' abstract, and perhaps 
 here with a somewhat comprehensive 
 meaning [F reads wa<rt Trjs, and 31 
 TToo-jjf Tijs: K''; a few mss. ; Syr., 
 Chrys., Theod., al. substitute irdo-ris 
 for the art.], 'quioquid est rerum 
 venerearum,' Calv., or more suitably to 
 the present context ' omnem illicitum 
 concubitum' (comp. Est.). It must 
 be always remembered that the deadly 
 sin of vopvda in its usual and general 
 sense ever formed the subject of 
 special prohibition, as being one of 
 those things which the Gentile world 
 regarded as diiaipopa; see Meyer on 
 Acts XV. 20. 
 
 4. clS^vai ^Kao-Tov i|i«v] 'that 
 jeach one of you know how &c, ; ' ex- 
 planatory infinitive, parallel to oV^- 
 Xwflai, defining on the positive side 
 the preceding iyiairnoi : so (as far as 
 can be inferred from the collocation 
 of words and form of expression), 
 Copt., Goth., Arm,, and Viilg. in 
 spite of modern punctuation, Alford 
 .and others (comp. Clarom, 'abstinere 
 
 ...ut sciat...ut nequis') regard the 
 whole elSivai — Siefmprvpd/ieBa aa a 
 further specification of what imme- 
 diately precedes ; this however tends 
 to obscure the distinction between the 
 infinitival clauses with and without 
 the article (see below on ver. 6), and 
 exegetically considered has nothing 
 particularly to recommend it. For a 
 similar comprehen^ve force of dihai, 
 see Phil. iv. 12; ScUvvsi Sri aaiii]aeuit 
 Kal fiaS-liseiis iari t4 ffa^poveiVjTheoph. 
 For iKasTov AFG read iKaffros, so 
 Zachm. in marg. 
 
 TO lavTov (TKevos KTao-Sai] ' to get 
 himself his own vessel : ' so it would 
 seem Syr., Copt, {e-chphof naf), Ar- 
 men. [sddndl) ; — ^but as in these and 
 other languages the ideas of acquisi- 
 tion and possession are expressed by 
 the same word, discrimination is not 
 easy. The meaning of the clause, 
 
 and especially of the word okivos, has 
 been much debated. Setting aside all 
 arbitrary and untenable interpreta- 
 tions, we have two explanations of rd 
 ^aurou (TKWos; (a) 'his body;' trKevos 
 rt> (F&im ijiTinv, Theoph., CEcum. ; so 
 Chrys., Theod. (who notices and re- 
 jects the other expl.), TertuU. (de 
 Eesurr. 16), Ambrosiast., Olsh., and 
 some modern commentators; (6) 'hie 
 wife;' ffxeuos rV ISlar ixiaTov ya/iirriv 
 ivopA^ei, TUeod.-Mops., August, con- 
 tra Jvl. IV. 36 [x] — or more generally 
 (De W.) his lawful 'copartner and 
 recipient' in fulfilling the divine ordi- 
 nance (Gen. i. 28), with a reference to 
 a similar use of the Heb. *53 (see the 
 pertinent example from Megill. Est. i. 
 II, ' vas meum quo ego utor,' cited by 
 Schoettg. Hor. Hebr, Vol. i, p. 727, 
 and most commentators) and the gene- 
 rally appropriate nature of the trope 
 (see Sohar Zemt. xxxviii, 152, cited 
 by Schoettg.): so Aquin., Est., more 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
IV. 4, 5, 6. 
 
 53 
 
 ev dytaa-fiw koi Tifi^, ^ ev itaQei eiriQvuiai KaOdwep Kal 5 
 TO. edi/ti ra M eiSoTU rov Qeov to fxr/ vTrep^alveiv /cat 6 
 
 recently Schott, De W., and appy.the 
 majority of modem expositors. Of 
 these two interpretations (a) is plaus- 
 ible, but open, as Liiuem. clearly 
 states, to four objections, — (a) the in- 
 accurate meaning ' possidere ' ( Vulg. ) 
 thus assigned to KrairOat ; (;8) the ab- 
 sence of any adj. (2 Cor. iv. 7) or de- 
 fining gen. (Bamab. Epist. § 7, 11) 
 which might warrant such a meaning 
 being assigned to tr/ceOos,— unsuccess- 
 fully evaded (Olsh.) by the assump- 
 tion that iavToS practically =^i;xfis; 
 (7) the emphatic position of cavToS 
 (eomp. 1 Cor. vii, 2), which is hardly 
 to be explained away as a mere equi- 
 valent of a possess, pronoun; (S) the 
 context, which seems naturally to sug- 
 gest, not a mere periphrasis of what 
 had preceded, but a statement on the 
 positive and permitted side antitheti- 
 cal to the prohibition on the negative. 
 These objections are so strong that 
 we can scarcely hesitate in adopting 
 (6), towards which both lexical usage 
 [KToffBai yvvcuKa, Ecclus. xxxvi, 29 
 [24], Xen. Symp. 11. 10) and exegetical 
 arguments very distinctly converge. 
 While iropveia is prohibited on the 
 negative side, chastity and holiness in 
 respect of the primal ordinance are 
 equally clearly inculcated on the posi- 
 tive. For further details see the ela- 
 borate notes of De W. , Koch, and 
 LUnem. in loc. kv a.yiaa'^ 
 
 KaV Tt(i|j] 'in sanctification and ho- 
 nour;' ethical element in which ri 
 KT&trSai was to take place : the union 
 of man and woman was to be in 
 sanctification and honour, not, as in 
 the case of iropveta, in sin and shame. 
 Here, as the associated abstr. subst. 
 suggests, aymaixif passes from its act. 
 into its neutral meaning; comp. notes 
 on ch, iii. 13. 
 
 5- y,T\ Iv irdSei liriS.] 'not in the 
 lustfidness of desire;' not in that sin- 
 ful and morbid state (comp. Oicero, 
 Tusc. JDisp. III. 4. to) in which iin- 
 Bv/da becomes the ruling and prevail- 
 ing principle, and the koIti) ceases to 
 be dfilavTos (Heb. xiii. 4). On the 
 meaning of irdSos, see Trench, Synon. 
 Part II. § 37, and notes on Col, iii. 5. 
 Ka6dircp Kal rd !6vr]] ' even as tJte 
 Gentiles also;' the Kal having here its 
 comparative force, and instituting a 
 comparison between the Gentiles and 
 the class implied in the iKaarov ifiuv ; 
 comp. ch. iii. 6, and see notes on Bph. 
 V. 23, where this usage is fully dis- 
 cussed. Alford cites Xen. Anai. II. 
 I. 22, Stl Kcd riiuv raiiTb, doKei direp 
 Kal ^ainXei, but not with complete 
 pertinence, as there the koX appears in 
 both clauses, here only in the relative 
 clause; see Klotz, Z>eva/r. Vol. 11. p« 
 635. The remark of Fritz. {Mom. 
 Vol. I. p. 1 14) on the presence or ab- 
 sence of the article with IBpti, ' ubi de 
 paganis in universum loquitur aiiicu- 
 lum addit, ubi de gentilium parte agit 
 eundem omittit,' is substantially cor- 
 rect, but must not be over-pressed; 
 comp. I Cor. i. 23 (not Rec.). 
 T(J f,'r\ (ISora tAv 0£6v] ' which Jcn-ow 
 not God;' who as a class are so 
 characterized, the subjective negation 
 /tij being rightly used as being in har- 
 mony both with the oblique and in- 
 finitival character of the preceding 
 clauses, and with the fact that the 
 Gentiles are here not historically de- 
 scribed as ' ignorantes Denm ' (see 
 notes on Gal. iv. 8) but only regarded 
 as such by the writer ; see Winer, Gr, 
 § 55- 5) P- 4'28 sq. The article is here 
 appropriately added to 6e6», but this 
 is one of the many words in the N.T. 
 for which no 'precise rules can be 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
54 
 
 nP02 eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 irXeoveKTeh ev t(S irpayixaTi rov aSeX<pov ayrov, ciort 
 
 laid down; see Winer, Gr, § 19. i, 
 p. 110. 
 
 6, TO f.i[ vTrepPaCvEiv] 'thai no 
 one go b$yond,' 'that there be no 
 going beyond, ' — the subjeot-aoous. not 
 being (xaaTOv (Alf.); but tixo (comp. 
 Krtiger, Sprachl. § 55. a. 6) supplied 
 from the follomng airoO, and sug- 
 gested by the general character of the 
 prohibition. The clause is thus not 
 merely parallel to the anarthrous el- 
 Shai (Alf.), but reverts to the preced- 
 ing dyMtr/i6s, of which it presents a 
 specific exemplification (comp. Kriiger, 
 Sprachl. % 50. 6. 3) more immediately 
 suggested by the second part of ver. 4. 
 First Topvela is prohibited ; then a, 
 holy use of its natural remedy affirm- 
 atively inculcated ; and lastly the 
 heinous sin of fiovxfla, especially as 
 regarded in its social aspects, formally 
 denounced. , So rightly Chrys. (^i*- 
 ravBa irepl fioix^las (prjcrlv ivaripa Si 
 Kal irepl Tropvetas 7ra(n;s), and after him 
 Theod., Theoph., CEoum., and the 
 majority of modern commentators. To 
 regard the verse with Calv., Grot., and 
 recently De W., Liinem., Koch, as 
 referring to fraud and covetousness in 
 the general affairs of life, is (a) to in- 
 fringe on the plain meaning of ry 
 Trpayiian, see below ; (/3) to obscure the 
 ref. to the key-word of the paragraph 
 aKaBapffta, ver. 7 ; (7) to mar the con- 
 textual symmetry of the verses ; and 
 (S) to introduce an exegesis so frigid 
 and unnatural, as to make us wonder 
 that such good names should be as- 
 sociated with an interpretation seem- 
 ingly so improbable. 
 iSircp^aCvciv Kal irXcovcKrciv] 'go be- 
 yond and over-reach,' ' supergrediatur 
 neque circumveniat,' Vulg., both 
 words associated with the following 
 accus.,— and both of them significant- 
 ly and appositely chosen. 'Trep^alvetii 
 
 (a air. \ey6ii. in the N.T.) with an 
 accus. personce properly signifies a 
 ' passing beyond,' thence derivatively 
 a 'leaving unnoticed,' whether simply 
 (Isaeus, p. 38. 6, and 43. 34) or con- 
 temptuously (Plutarch, de A more Prol. 
 § 3 ; comp. Kypke, Obe. Vol. 11. 337), 
 as appy. ^th. taahaja [eztulit se], — 
 with which perhaps in the present case 
 there may be associated a reference to 
 a iripPaai! of another in respect of 
 the opoi appointed by Grod and by 
 nature ; see Chrys. and the Greek 
 commentators, who however seem to 
 have taken vnep^aLveiv absolutely; 
 comp. Eaphel, Annot. Vol. 11. 542, 
 IlkeoveKTeiv with an accus. personcB 
 properly signifies ' lucri causS, f raudem 
 facere alicui' (2 Cor. vii. 2, xii. 17, 18), 
 thence with a slightly more general 
 reference ' ciroumvenire aliquem ' 
 (comp. 2Cor. ii. 11), 'bifaih(o),'6oth., 
 the idea of selfish and self-seeking 
 fraud rather than mere wrong or in- 
 jury (comp. Syr., Copt., Arm.) being 
 always involved in the word ; see Sui-. 
 cer, Thesaur. s.v. Vol. 11. p. 746, and 
 comp. Meyer on 2 Cor. vii. 2. 
 iv T^ irpdYiiari.] 'in the matter,'' 
 Copt, (definitely expressing the art.), 
 and similarly, but too strongly, Syr, 
 
 ]Zci2. IjOliD [in hoc uegotio], 
 
 — not exactly iv rg /i/Jet, Theoph., 
 CEcum., but more generally, in the 
 matter of which we are now speaking 
 (comp. 2 Cor. vii. 11), which however 
 obviously involves reference to deed? 
 of carnality and adultery; see Middle- 
 ton, Qr. Art. p. 377 (ed. Rose), Green, 
 Gram. p. 156. To regard TO as en. 
 clitic (Auth., Koppe) is contrary to 
 the usage of the N. T. ; and to as- 
 sume that TV TpAyp.aTi=To'is irpiy- 
 liaaw (De W., comp. Winer, Gr. % :8. 
 8, p. 105), or that it can imply 'the 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
IV. 7, 8. 
 
 55 
 
 eKSiKOi KujQto? irepi -Travrosv tovtwv, Kadm ica) irpoel- 
 irafieu iifJiiv Koi oiefiaprvpafjieQa. ov yap eKoXeaev ^/xag J 
 6 Qeos eiri aKadaperia ciXAo iv djiavfjiw, rotyapovv 6 8 
 
 business iu question' (Lunem.) when 
 nothing has preceded sufficient to msirk 
 what the Tpay/ia really is, must re- 
 spectively on grammatical and logical 
 grounds be pronounced wholly unten- 
 able. Tov aScXcjiov avTov] 'his 
 brother,^ — not merely ' his neighbour ' 
 (Schott), but ' his Christian brother, ' 
 him whom so to wrong and defraud 
 is doubly flagitious ; dSe\<pbv KoKels 
 Koi irXcoceKT-eiS, Koi iv ots oi x/ii), Chrys. 
 SioTi ^kSikos Kvpios] ' because that the 
 Lord is the avenger;' oi5i yhp wniuii- 
 prirl radra wpi^oiiev, Chrys.; see Eph. 
 V. 6, Col. iii. 6, where similar prohi- 
 bitions are accompanied by a similar 
 warning reason. The term IkSiicos, a 
 Sis Xeyd/i. in the N.T. (here and Bom. 
 xiii. 4), primarily denotes Tbv ?|w toO 
 SiKalov ovra (Suid. s. v., Zonar. Lex. 
 p. 651), 'lawless,' 'unjust' (comp. 
 Soph. (Ed. Col. 917) ; thence in later 
 writers it passes over to the meaning 
 of ' an avenger ; ' comp. Suid . s.v. "I/3u- 
 Kos (iSe aX '1§6kov (kSikoi.), Wisdom 
 xii. 12, Ecclus. XXX. 6. On the still 
 later use in ecch writers to denote 
 ' Defensores ' or ' Syndics ' of the 
 church, see Suicer, Thesaur. s.v. Vol. 
 I. p. 1045, Bingham, Antiq. m. 11. 5. 
 On SihTi, comp. note and reff. on ch. 
 ii. 8. Eec. reads 6 Kip., but the arti- 
 cle is rightly omitted by iacAm., Tuch., 
 with ABD'N ; al. irepl irovruv 
 ToiiTuv] 'concerning, in the matter of, 
 all these things, ' — not merely cases of 
 virep^aala and irXeovt^la (Alf.), but, 
 as the comprehensive expression seems 
 to require, all the sins of the ilesh 
 previously mentioned ; see Chrys., 
 Theoph., CEoum., who from the inclu- 
 sive nature of their language seem to 
 adopt the latl^er view. As illustrative 
 
 of the use of IkSikos with vepi, comp. 
 I Mace. xiii. 6, ixSiK'qtra irepl toO (Svovs 
 fiov. KaScis Kal irpocCir. k.t.X.] 
 
 'as also we before told you qnd solemnly/ 
 testified;' the fir^t rai being compara- 
 tive and associated with KaBiis (see on 
 ver. 5), the second simply copulative. 
 The Ttpb appears merely to point to a 
 time prior to the ixBlKtiffis taking place : 
 comp. Gal. v. 21, and notes in loc. 
 On the stronger and more emphatic 
 Siu/Mprip. (not simply=(iiapTi}po/aai, 
 Olsh.), see notes on i Tim. v. 21, and 
 on the form etwaiiey [Griesb. and Scholz 
 here -o/iev, with AKL ; most mss.; 
 Chrys., Theod.], comp. Winer, Gr. 
 § 15, p. 78. In the N.T. the ist aor. 
 form seems to prevail in the 2nd per- 
 son (Matth. xxvi. 25, 64, Mark xii. 
 32, Luke XX. 39, John iv. 17), the 
 2nd aor. forms in the other persons, 
 but in the latter instances, esp, in the 
 case of the 3rd peis. plural, there is 
 much difference of reading. 
 
 7. ov yap K.T.X.] ' For God called 
 us not; ' confirmation of the preceding 
 statement Sibn hStKps k.t.\., derived 
 from the object contemplated in the 
 kX'Jo-is. On the act of calling, soil. 
 ets rfiv iavToS ^aaiKdav xal Sb^av (ch. 
 ii. 12), as specially attributed to God 
 the F?ither, see notes on Gal. i. 6. 
 Iirl dK^6ap(rC^] 'for imcleam/iiess ;' ob- 
 ject or purpose for which they were 
 (not) called, the primary meaning of 
 the prep, ('nearness or approxima- 
 tion,' Donalds. Crat. § 172) not being 
 wholly obliterated ; see Gal. v. 13 ; 
 Kriiger, Sprachl. § 68. 41. 7, Jelf, Gr. 
 § 634- 3. Winer, Gr. § 48. c, p. 351, and 
 exx. in Eaphel, Annot Vol. 11. p. 546. 
 EV dYiaorpiu] 'in sanctifkation ;' not 'in 
 sanctificationem,' Vulg., but ' in sanc- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
56 
 
 nP02 0E22AAONIKEIS A. 
 
 oooTTOV aOerei aX\a tov Qeov Tov Kai 
 
 aOeTwv ovK avi_ 
 
 Sovra TO Uvevfia avTOU to ajiov eij vfias. 
 
 tifioatione,' Clarom., Vulg. (Amiat.); 
 fr beingneither equivalent to els (Pise), 
 not yet used brachylogically, soil. iSffre 
 elvai ■^nas iv (Winer, Gr. § go. 5, p. 
 370), but simply marking the sphere 
 in which Christians were called to 
 move ; see notes on Gal, i. 6, on Eph. 
 iv. 4, and compare Green, Gr. p. igi. 
 On dyia<Tii6s, see notes on ch. iii. 13: 
 it here retains its active meaning. 
 
 8. ToiYOpoiiv] ' Wherefore then;' 
 logical conclusion from the preceding 
 verse. The compound particle roijap- 
 our (only found here and Heb. xii. i ) 
 is not simply synonymous with toi- 
 ydproi (Hartung, Pwrtik. s.v. toI, 3. 
 5, Vol. I. p. 354), but while differing 
 from the simpler rpiyhp ' htc de caus& 
 igitur ' (Xlotz) in imparting a more 
 syllogistic and ratiocinative character 
 to the sentence, differs also from roi- 
 ydprot, 'qua propter sane ' in having 
 not an affirmative (to/) but a collective 
 and retrospective (oSv) force; see 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 738. 
 d aSeravJ ' the despiser' ' the rejecter; ' 
 substantival use of the present parti- 
 ciple ; see Winer, Gr. § 45. 7, p. 316, 
 and Middleton, Gr. Art. p. 159. Any 
 definite insertions after aBerwv, e. g. 
 Vnlg. 'haec,' Arm. i!/iSs, Beza 'hsec, 
 soil, praeoepta,' are wholly unneces- 
 sary. It is clear that the commands 
 recently given must form the objects 
 of the d04Tri<ris ; these however the 
 Apostle does not specify, his object 
 being to call attention not so much to 
 what is set at naught as to the person 
 who sets at naught, and the personal 
 risk that he incurs. On the verb 
 dSerelv, used in the N. T. both with 
 persons (Mark vi. 26, Luke x. 16, 
 John xii. 48) and things (Mark vii. 9, 
 Gal. iii. 15, al.), comp. notes on Gal. 
 ii. 21. OVK dIvSpuirov k.t.X.] 
 
 'rejecteih not man hut God,' not one 
 whom it might be thought in some 
 degree excusable to despise — but riv 
 Qebv. The antithesis oi5K...aAXdisthua 
 not to be explained away, 'non tam 
 
 hominem quam Deum,' Est., but 
 
 retained with its usual and proper 
 
 force, 'non hominem sed deum,' 
 
 Vulg. ; see esp. Winer, Gr. § 55. 8, 
 p. 439 sq., and notes on Eph. vi. 11. 
 On the exact difference between this 
 formula ('ubi prior notio tota tolUtur, 
 et in ejus locum posterior notio sub- 
 stituitur'), oi7yUoi'Oc...aX\ii, andoO/ioVoi" 
 ...dXXoi Kal, see Kiihner on Xen. Mem. 
 I. 6. 2, comp. also notes on ch. i. 8. 
 The omission of the article before 
 ivBpunrov, 'a man,' 'any man,' — with 
 a latent reference to the Apostle, not 
 to TOV ifKeoveKTTiBevTa (CEcum.), — and 
 its insertion [it is however omitted by 
 D^FG] before Qe6v (almost 'ipsura 
 Deum '), though not capable of being 
 conveyed in translation, must not be 
 overlooked. t4v Kal Sovra] 
 
 ^ who also gave;' who in addition to 
 having called us iy &yia<rij,(p has also 
 been pleased to furnish us with the 
 blessed means of realizing it; comp. 
 Eeuss, Th4ol. ChrH. iv. 15, Vol. II. 
 p. 150. The only difficulty is the 
 reading : Kal is omitted by Lachm. 
 with ABD^E; lo mss. ; Clarom., San- 
 germ., Syr., Goth., al. ; Athan., Did., 
 Chrys., Theod. (ms.), Theoph., al., — 
 but, as the insertion is well supported 
 [D^FGKLK ; most mss. ; Augiens., 
 Boern., Vulg., Syr.-Phil., al.; Clem., 
 Theod., Dam., CEoum.], and far less 
 easy to be accounted for than the 
 omission, we retain kbI with Rec., 
 Tiach,, Alf., and the bulk of recent 
 editors. It is much more difficult to 
 decide between dovTa [Rec, Lachm. in 
 marg., 2'isc^.,withAKLN^; most mss.; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
IV. 9- 
 
 57 
 
 On brotherly love I need 
 say nothing. I beseech 
 you to be quiet, indus- 
 trious, and orderly. 
 
 E;(eT( 
 
 Tlepl Se rrjs (piXaSeXipiaf ov ^pelav 9 
 ypacpea 
 
 IV VfXtV' 
 
 avTot yap vfien 
 
 appy. all Vv.; Clem., Chrys., Theod.] 
 and SiSon-a [Lachm. text, with BDE 
 FGNi; lo mss.; Ath., Did.]. The 
 latter deserves great consideration as 
 having such very strong uncial autho- 
 rity, still as the Vv. appear all to 
 favour the aorist, and as it also cer- 
 tainly does seem probable that the 
 correction might have arisen from a 
 desire to represent that the gift of the 
 Spirit vfas still going on (comp. Luke 
 xi. 13), vre retain S6irra. 
 t6 Tlv. oirov TO ciYiov] Not without 
 great emphasis and solemnity (comp, 
 Eph. iv. 30),— 'His Holy Spirit,' the 
 blessed Spirit which proceeds from 
 Him (see notes on Phil, i. 19), whose 
 attribute is holiness, and whose office 
 especially ' consists in the sanctifying 
 of the servants of God,' Pearson, 
 Creed, Vol. i. p. 387 (ed. Burt.). To 
 dilute this distinct personal expression 
 into 'the gift of spiritual insight, <&c.' 
 (Olsh.), is by no means satisfactory; 
 see notes on Gal. iv. 6. 
 eIs vfids] 'unto you;' not merely equi- 
 valent to a transmissive dative, nor 
 yet with any idea of diffiision (Alf, — 
 see notes on ch. ii. 9), but, with the 
 usual and proper meaning of local 
 direction, 'in vos,' Clarom., Copt. 
 {ekhrei): they were the objects to 
 whom that blessed gift was directed ; 
 comp. Gal. iv. 6. The reading of Sec. 
 ■q/ias has but weak external support 
 [A; some mss.; Augiens., Vulg., Syr.- 
 Phil., .ffith. (Pol., but not Piatt); 
 Chrys., al.), and on internal grounds 
 is not free from some suspicion!. 
 
 9. Ilepl 8^ K.T.\.] ' Now concerning 
 &c. ;' transition by means of the Si 
 liera^anKiv to a fresh exhortation. On 
 this force of 5^, see notes on Gal. iii. 8. 
 TTJs <|>iXaS£Xi|>Cas] 'brotherly love,' love 
 to their fellow-Christians; Bom. xii. 
 
 10, Heb. xiii. i, i Pet. i. 22, 2 Pet. 
 i. 7, comp. I Pet. iii. 8. This love 
 was to be no passive virtue, but, as 
 verse 10 suggests, was to display itself 
 in acts of liberality and benevolence 
 towards their poorer and suffering 
 brethren: so Theod., though perhaps 
 a little too definitely, tpiXaSeKiplav iv 
 TavBa TTpi rCiv ■xpr\\i.i,Tav ^uXort/ilav 
 ixAX^aev. It is unnecessary to exclude 
 wholly a reference to a love eis irdvTas 
 (Theoph.): the Christian dSeX^oJ were 
 the primary objects (comp. 2 Pet. i. 7, 
 where 0iXaSeX0£a is distinguished from, 
 and precedes the general dvdirij), but 
 the great brotherhood of mankind was 
 still not to be forgotten ; comp. Gal. 
 vi. 10. ou xpc'O'V 8j4«Tc 7pd<^Eiv 
 
 ■u(i.iv] 'ye have no need that I write to 
 you;' rhetorical turn, technically 
 termed 'prseteritio,' or irapiiXei^is, in 
 which what might be said is partly 
 suppressed, to conciliate a more loving 
 acceptance of the implied command; 
 KOTct irapaKti^^iv Si tt;v irapalveaiv H- 
 6riiri, Siio toOtb KarajKevi^uV in /iiv 
 &n ovTus dvayKoiov rb vpayfJia lis fiijdi 
 StSaffKdXou deiadai' erspov Si fiaWov 
 airois ivrpiirei, Suyelpuv Xva ja] Seire- 
 poi ^\0taffi TTjs UTToX^^ews "^v ^x" ^^P^ 
 aiiTiav, vofd^uv airois ijStj KariapdwKi' 
 vai, Theoph. On this rhetorical form, 
 see notes on Philem. 19, and Wilke, 
 N. T. Rhetorih, p. 365. The reading 
 is doubtful : Lachm. adopts ^o/ieK 
 with D'EGK* [B; Vulg. (Amiat.) 
 give rfxo/jff/]; 6 mss. ; Vulg., Clarom., 
 Goth., Syr.-Phil.; Chrys., Theoph., 
 but though the external authority 
 for the first person is strong, yet the 
 probability of a correction to obviate 
 the difficulty of construction is very 
 great. yp&^w'l ' that I write.' 
 
 The object-inf. has here practically 
 the sense of a passive (comp, ch. v. i), 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
58 
 
 nPOS GEZZAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 lO QeoSlSaKToi ea-re eit to ayairav aW^Xovi' Kai yap 
 iroietTe avrb eli iravTas Toyj aoeK(poui Tovi ev oXij 
 Tt] M.aKe§ovla. ■TrapaKaXov/j.ev Se v/jLoit, aSeXcpot^ vepitr- 
 
 but differs from it in suggesting the 
 supplement of some accusative, — ' that 
 I or any one should write to yon;' see 
 Winer, Gr. § 44. 8, note I, p. 303, 
 Jelf, Gr. § 667. obs. 3. To deny this 
 on the ground that the context pre- 
 cludes an inde€nite reference, and 
 practically limits the supplied aceus. 
 to the Apostle (Liinem.)) seems dis- 
 tinctly hypercritical. avTol ydp 
 i|i,6ts] 'for you yourselves; not 'vos 
 ipai sponte,' Schott, but 'jomselvei,' 
 — in sharp contrast to the subject in- 
 volved in the infinitive ; comp. I John 
 ii. 20. SEoSfSaKToi] ' taitght 
 of God,' — not in marked opposition to 
 any other form of teaching (ov SeiaBe, 
 </>iil<ri, Trapi, auBpiiirov fiaSeiv, Chrys., 
 comp. Olsh.), but with the principal 
 emphasis on the fact of their being 
 already taught, and with only a subor- 
 dinate emphasis on the source of the 
 teaching. The chief moment of thought, 
 as Liinem. well observes, rests on the 
 second and not on the first half of the 
 compound verbal BeoSlSaKToi. The 
 form itself is a a7ro| Xeyi/t. in the 
 N. T. ; comp. however John vi. 45, 
 StSaKTol 6eoO, and add Barnab. Epist. 
 § 21, yiveaOe S^ BeodidaKTOij iK^TjTovvTes 
 
 cls t6 dyairav aWijXovs] ' to love one 
 a/nother,' 'ut diligatis invicem,' Vulg.; 
 practical tendency and purpose of the 
 StSaxfl, with perhaps an included re- 
 ference to the purport and subject of 
 it; see notes on ch. ii. 12. 
 
 10. KoV 7<ip K.T.X.] 'for indeed ye 
 do it;' confirmatory explanation of the 
 preceding clause ; yip introducing the 
 historical fact on which the confir- 
 mation rested {dtSa &4I Hi) Troieire, 
 Theoph.), Kal enhancing the TouXre, 
 
 and putting it in gentle contrast with 
 the SeoStSaKToC iare. Thus neither 
 the Kal nor the yhp (Syr., .^Eth.-Pol., 
 —but not Syr.-Phil. and .5;th. -Piatt) 
 is otiose : both fully retain their proper 
 force (Copt., Goth., Arm.), their asso- 
 ciation being due to the early position 
 which 7ct/) regularly assumes in the 
 sentence ; see not£;B and reff. on Phil. 
 ii. 27, and comp. Winer, Gr. §53. 8. b, 
 p. 397. avTiS] 'it' soil. t4 
 
 dLyairav dXXijXous (Lunera., Alf.), not 
 rb T^s <pi\ade\^as (Koch), — a refer- 
 ence needlessly remote, 
 cls udvTas Toits dSeXi^.] 'toward all 
 the brethren;' direction and destination 
 of the action; not, observe, with any 
 marked universality, els irdvTas rois 
 dyiovs, but, — eU wdvras rpiis aS. Toits 
 iv o\7j Tij MaKfS., the last definition 
 fairly justifying the remark of Liinem. 
 (opp. to Eaur, Paulvs, p. 484) that 
 there is no reason for assuming any 
 longer period between the conversion 
 of the Thessalonians and the time of 
 writing the Epistle (i^ or 2 years) 
 than is assumed in the ordinary chro- 
 nology. The arguments of Baur, ac- 
 cording to which this beautiful and 
 most genuine Ep. is to be considered 
 as a 'matte Naohbild' of i Cor., have 
 been recently reiterated in Zeller, 
 Theol. Jahrh. for 1855, p. 151, but it 
 is not too much to say that they lack 
 even plausibility. The second 
 
 and definitive toi>! (Winer, Gr. § 20. I, 
 p. iiq) is omitted by Lachm. with 
 AD'FG; Chrys. (ms.), butappy. right- 
 ly retained by Tisch. with BD^D^EK 
 LK-" ; all msB. ; many Ff. : S' reads 
 d&. viiSav iv o\. iropaKoXoviicv 
 
 Si 4|J.as] 'hut we exhort you;' con- 
 tinuation of the implied command in 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
IV. 10, II. 
 
 59 
 
 a-evew fiaWov KOi (piXoTifieiarOai ^o-i/^a^e/i/ Kal Trpda-- II 
 cretv ra 'iSia Koi epyd^eaOai rati ■)(epa]i' vfxwv Kadwg 
 
 ver. 9 in a slightly antithetical form ; 
 not only is the duty of 4>i\aSe\^la 
 tacitly and delicately inculcated, and 
 an expansion of it in the form of 
 general dTrii-yi) (ver. 9) distinctly sug- 
 gested, but further an increase in the 
 same is set forth as the subject of 
 direct hortatory entreaty. On the 
 pres. infin. after Tapa«a\S, which is 
 here rightly used as marking the con- 
 tinuance and permanence of the act, 
 see Winer, Gr. § 44. 7, p. ■297, but 
 observe that the use of the pres. inf. or 
 aor. inf. after commands, dec., depends 
 much on the habit of the vfriter, and 
 on the subjective aspects under which 
 the command was contemplated; comp. 
 Bernhardy, Synt. X. 9, p. 383, and the 
 good note and distinctions of Matzner 
 on Antiphon, p. 153 sq. 
 irtpura-. piaXXov] Comp. ver. i, Phil. 
 1.9. 
 
 II. KaC K.T.X.] 'and &c. ;' exhor- 
 tation in close grammatical though 
 somewhat more lax logical connexion 
 with what immediately precedes. The 
 close union of these appy. different 
 subjects of exhortation has been va- 
 riously explained. On the whole it 
 seems most natural to suppose that 
 their liberality involved some elements 
 of a restless, meddling, and practically 
 idle spirit, that exposed them to the 
 comments of 0! i^ta. It is perhaps 
 not wholly improbable that mistaken 
 expectations in respect of the day of 
 the Lord had led them into a neglect 
 of their regular duties and occupations, 
 and was marring a liberality of which 
 the true essence was ipyaiiiiaxa, iri- 
 poLs Tro/f^x^ic, Chrys. 
 i|iiXoTi|i«t<r6ai i]o-ii\a£»v] ' to make it 
 your aim to he quiet,' 'et operam delis 
 ut quieti sitis/ Vulg. (sim. Clarom.), 
 ' biaAaidjan anaqal,' Goth. It is some- 
 
 what doubtful whether (a) the primary 
 meaning of ^iXovi/i. with iniin., ' glo- 
 riee cupiditate accensus aliquid facere' 
 (compare Copt., .(Eth.-Pol.), or (6) the 
 secondary meaning, ' magno studio 
 anniti,' 'operam dare' (Vulg., Clarom., 
 Syr., Goth., Arm. ), is here to be adopt- 
 ed. As both meanings rest on good 
 lexical authority (comp. Xen. Mem. 11. 
 9. 3, with (Eeon. iv. 24, in which 
 latter passage <t>i,\oTifieT(r$al ti is asso- 
 ciated with fieXeTm), the context will 
 be our safest guide. Of the three 
 passages in which it is used in the 
 N. T., Rom. XV. 20, 2 Cor. v. 9, and 
 here, the first alone seems to require 
 (a) ; comp. Fritz. Mom,. I. c. Vol. iii. 
 p. 277, and even Meyer, on 2 Cor. I.e., 
 who, while affecting to retain (a), 
 translates in accordance with (b) 'beei- 
 fem wir uns u.s.w.' In all perhaps 
 some idea of ri/t^) may be recognised, 
 but in 2 Cor. I.e. and here that mean- 
 ing recedes into the background; see 
 the nmnerous exx. in Wetst. Vol. 11. 
 p. 94, 9S, and Kypke, Obs. Vol. 11. 
 p. 189. To consider 0i\ot. an inde- 
 pendent inf. (Copt., Theoph. i; comp. 
 Theod., Calv.) seems to be very un- 
 satisfactory, ijo-v^d^eiv marks 
 the sedate and tranquil spirit (comp. 
 I Tim. ii. 2) which stands in contrast 
 to the excited and unquiet bustle 
 (icepapyi^iffBai, 2 Theas. iii. 11) that 
 often marks ill-defined or mistaken 
 reli^ous expectation ; see esp. 2 Thess. 
 I. c. which forms an instructive parallel 
 to the present exhortations. 
 irpao-crciv to, tSia] 'to do your own 
 business,' 'to confine yourselves to the 
 sphere of your own proper duties. ' The 
 correct formula according to Phiyni- 
 chus is tA ifMVTou . . .irpaTTetv, or ret 
 idia ip.avTOu...TrpaTTeiv', see exx. col- 
 lected by Lobeck, p. 441, and Kypke, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
60 
 
 nP02 eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 12 iifxlv ■jrapfi'yyelXafiev, Iva ■jrepivar^re eiKrj^riixovwi vpoi 
 Tovs e^co Kal fji.t]Sev6s ■)(^peLav ej(i]Te. 
 
 Oirt/v (Hf'^t - '9\ Do not grieve for those 
 
 U 6£\0fJt.eV 06 VfJLat ayvoeiv, aOeA- that sleep. We shall 
 ^ not anticipate them, but 
 
 at the last trOmp they will be raised^ and we translated. ' 
 
 Obs. Vol. n. p. 338. The form Idio- 
 rpayeiv occurs in Polyb. Sist. VIII. 
 %8. 9, and later writers. 
 ipydi. Tats X'P''^'' v(i,«»v] ' to work with 
 yow hands,^ i.e.' follow your earthly 
 callings,' which, as the words imply, 
 were those of handicraftsmen and ai"- 
 tificers; 'ad populum scribit, in quo 
 plurimorum est ea quae manibus fiunt 
 opera exercere,' Eat. The numbers en- 
 gaged in mercantile and industrial call- 
 ings at Thessalonica are alluded to by 
 Tafel, Hist. Thessal. p. 9. The insert- 
 ed ISlui [Eec. with AD'KLNi; most 
 mss. ; Theod., Dam. ] after rais is rightly 
 struck out by Lachm., Tisch., and most 
 modem editors, on the preponderant 
 authority of BDiE(?)F&S<*; 10 mas. ; 
 appy. all Vv. ; Bas., Chrys., Theoph., 
 and Latin Ff. KaOws v|i.iv 
 
 iropT|YY'] ' according as we commanded 
 yott,' soil, when personally present with 
 you ; with reference not merely to the 
 last, but to all the preceding clauses. 
 The very first publication of Chris- 
 tianity in Thessalonica seems to have 
 been attended with some manifesta- 
 tions of restlessness and feverish ex- 
 pectation. 
 
 12. tva TrepiiroT. evo-XT||ji(Sv(os] 'in 
 order that ye may walk seemly, ' Rom. 
 xiii. 13, of. I Cor. xiv. 40; purpose of 
 the foregoing irapaKXriJis, the present 
 member referring mainly to ^iri/x<4f«i> 
 Kal irpiiraeiv t4 i'5io, the following to 
 ipyd^. Tail xe/'O'l'' ilMv. The adverb 
 eiaxriii. (aasociated with Karoi rajm 
 I Cor. I. c.) stands in partial contrast 
 to draKTUs, ■•- ThesB. iii. 6 (Ltinem. ) ; 
 thegeneralideahowever of that decent 
 gravity and seemly deportment (ciSXa- 
 /Sis' «/i:/ffls, Zonar. S.V.), which should 
 
 ever be the oharaoteristio of the true 
 Christian, ought not to be excluded. 
 On the use of TrepmaTeiv as commonly 
 implying the 'agendi vivendique ra- 
 tionem quam quis continentur et ex 
 animo sequitur,' see Winer, Carnment, 
 on Mph. iv. I, p. 5 (cited by Koch), 
 Fritz. Rom. xiii. 13, Vol. Iii. p. 140 
 sq., Suioer, Thesaur. a. v. Vol. n. p. 
 679, and corap. notes on Phil. iii. 18. . 
 irpis Tovs S|<o] ' toward them that are 
 without;'' irpbi pointing to the social 
 relation in which they were to stand, . 
 or the general demeanour they were 
 to assume, toward those who were 
 not Christians. On this use of irpis, 
 in which the primary meaning of 
 ethical direction is still apparent, sea 
 reff. in notes on Col. iv. 5, where the 
 same expression occurs. 02 ^|(ii is the 
 regular designation of those who were 
 not Christians ; see i Cor v. 12, 13, 
 Col. I.C., and notes on i Tim. iii. 7. 
 |jiT|SEvis XP''*'' ^X-] 'have need of no 
 man ;' the contrast being iwatTciy Kal 
 iripoiv Seiaffcu, Chrys., comp. Theod. 
 It is somewhat doubtful whether /ii;- 
 Sevis is here to be regarded as masc. 
 with Syr.jVulg. (appy.),^th., and the 
 Greek commentators, or neuter with 
 Copt, (appy.; Goth., Clarom. uncer- 
 tain) and several modern commenta- 
 tors. On the whole the masc. seems 
 most in accordance with the context ; 
 they were not by the neglect of their 
 proper occupations to live depend- 
 ent upon others, whether heathens 
 or more probably fellow-Christians; 
 comp. Chrys., Theod. The argument 
 of Liinem. repeated by Alf., that 'to 
 stand in need of no man is for man an 
 impossibility,' is not of much weight, 
 
IV, 12, 13. 
 
 61 
 
 (f>ot, irepi Twv KOifJLMfiivwv, 'Iva fxtj Xvir^crBe KaQws Koi oi 
 
 13. KOL/iitsiiivoivl So Lachm., Tisch. ed. 2, with ABj^i; 10 mss. In ed. 7 
 however Tisch. has returned to the reading of Bee. KeKot/iiifihuy, whioh has the 
 support of DE(FG KeKoiymjxMi/jKL ; most mss. C is deficient. As the present 
 part, is not used elsewhere in this sense it is certainly to be retained here. 
 
 XvTTTJffSe] So Lachm. (text), Tisch. ed. 2, with BD'BKS ; most mss.; many 
 Pf. : here also Tisch. ed. 7, has departed from his former reading and with 
 Lachm. in marg. reads XweiaBe, on the authority of AD'D^FGL ; many msa. 
 The weight of evidence is hardly sufficient to justify us in adopting here the 
 harsh and unusual construction. 
 
 as the general statement will naturally 
 receive its proper limitations from the 
 context. 
 
 13. Oi 64\ofii€v K.T.X.] 'Now we 
 would not have you to be ignorant:' 
 .transition by means of the S^ /ieTa^a- 
 TiKbv (Hartung, Partik. Vol. I. p. 165, 
 notes on Gal. iii. 8), and the impressive 
 ov d^Xofiev iifias dyvoecjf (Bom. i. 13, 
 xi. 25, t Cor. X. I, xii. i, 2 Cor. i. 8) 
 to a new and important subject, the 
 state of the departed. Most modern 
 expositors seem rightly to coincide in 
 the opinion that in the infant Church 
 of Thessalonica there had prevailed, 
 appy. from the very first, a feverish 
 anxiety about the state of those who 
 had departed, and about the time and 
 circumstances of the Lord's coming. 
 They seem especially to have feared 
 that those of their brethren who had 
 fallen on sleep before the expected 
 advent of the Lord would not partici- 
 pate in its blessings and glories (ver. 
 15). Thus their apprehensions did 
 not so much relate to the resurrection 
 generally (Chrys., Theod., Theoph.), 
 as to the share which the departed 
 were to have in the irapoucia too Kv- 
 plov; see Hofmann, Schrifti. Vol. 11. 
 2, p. 596, oomp. Wieseler, Ohronol. 
 p. 249. The reading BiXoiiev has 
 
 the support of all MSS. ; nearly all 
 mss.; all Vv. except Copt., Syr. 
 (both), and most Ff., and is rightly 
 adopted by Lachm., Tisch., and all 
 
 modem editors; See. gives ffe'Xu. 
 irepX T«v KOL|ji,(i>fi^vii)v] ' concermnif 
 those that are sleeping;' i. e. those that 
 are dead, according to the significant 
 expression found not only in Scripture 
 (1 Kings ii. 10, John xi. 11, Acts vii. 
 60, I Cor. xi. 30, al.) but in Pagan 
 writers (Callim. Fragm. X. i), yet here, 
 as the following verses clearly show, 
 to be specially restricted to the Chris- 
 tian dead ; comp. ol penpol iv X/jiitt^, 
 ver. 16, and see Suicer, Thesaw. s. v. 
 Vol. II, p. izi. All special doctrinal 
 deductions however from this general 
 term (Weizel, Stud. ■«. Krii. 1836, p. 
 916 sq., comp. Eeuss, ThSol. Chr'et. 
 IV. 21, Vol. II. p. 239) must be regarded 
 as extremely precarious, especially 
 those that favour the idea of a ^v^o- 
 TracTOX'a in the intermediate state; 
 see esp. Bull, Serm. iii. p. 41 (Oxf. 
 1844), Delitzsoh, Sibl. Psychol, vi. 4, 
 p. 360 sq., Zeller, Theol. Jahrb. for 
 1847, p. 390—409, and a long and 
 careful article by West, Stud. u. Krit. 
 for 1858, esp. p. 278, 290; coniip, also 
 Burnet, State of Departed, ch. iii. p. 
 49 sq. (Transl.), and notes on Phil. i. 
 23, Death is rightly called sleep as 
 involving the ideas of continued exist- 
 ence (Chrys.), repose, and iypijyopffii 
 (Theod.) ; comp. Theoph. on John xi. 
 1 1, and the eloquent sermon of Man- 
 ning, Serm. xxi. Vol. i. p. 308 sq. 
 iva, [«) Xuiri)(r6e] ' that ye sorrow not;' 
 purpose and object of the ou SiKoiifv 
 
62 
 
 nP02 GESZAAONIKEIZ A. 
 
 OTl 
 
 14 "Koivoi 01 /xri 6)(0VTes eXTrlSa. ei yap tnarrevonev 
 'I^aovi awidavev Koi avetrrtj, ovtws kuI 6 Geo? rovi koi 
 
 \j/iS,s dyvociv. The Xiiirj) in this parti- 
 cular case was called out not merely 
 by the feeling of having lost their de- 
 parted brethren, but by anxifety in re- 
 gard to their participation in Christ's 
 advent. xaSus Kal 01 XoiiroC] 
 
 'even as the rest also,' soil. XwoSprai. 
 The Kofliis [for which D^FeS* here 
 give us] does not introduce any com- 
 parison between the sorrow of Chris- 
 tians and that of ol XoiTrof, as if a cer- 
 tain amount of sorrow vistn permissible 
 (01! jrovTeXu! KaXicL rrjv \iiri\v aXXi 
 Tiji* d/ierplav eKjSaXXei, Theod.), but 
 sihiply contrasts with Christians thoSe 
 in whom XiiTri; might naturally find a 
 place, ol yni) ?x<""''' i\irlda. Christians, 
 as the antithesis implies, were not to 
 mourn at all; ffb Si 6 TpoaSoKwn dvA- 
 craCLV TlmscveKcv 6Sipi[i; Chrys. The 
 oi XoiTTol (Eph. ii. 3) obviously includes 
 all, whether sceptical Jews or unen- 
 lightened heathen (Chrys.), who had 
 no sure hope in any future resurrec- 
 tion. On the use of Kal with adverbs 
 of comparison, see notes on Eph. v. 23. 
 ol [iij ^xovTes eXir£8a] 'wAo hwve no 
 hope, ' who form a class (/i^) that is so 
 characterized ; comp. notes on ver. 5, 
 and Winer, Gr. § 55. 5, p. 428 sq., but 
 observe also that the comparative 
 member is in a dependent clause 
 under the vinculum of the iva. The 
 hope here alluded to is obviously in 
 reference to the Resurrection; tIvos 
 ihTrlSa; dvajriiffeus' ol ydp /iTJ lx'»'''fs 
 iXvlSa dvaaTaaeui ouTot 6<t>el\ovtn Tev 
 Seiv, Theoph, The true hopelessness 
 of the old heathen world finds its sad- 
 dest expression in ^soh. Eumen. 648, 
 dwa^ 6av6vTos oStis ^(Tt dvoffraffts ; see 
 fuller details in Lttnera. and Jowett, 
 and in answer to the quotation of the 
 latter from the 0. T., the pertinent 
 remarks of Alford in loo. 
 
 14. A yip irio-T«<lo|iev] ' Fur if we 
 believe;' reason for the purpose ex- 
 pressed in the preceding verse, tva ptii 
 XuB-ijcrffi; K.T.\., based on the funda- 
 mental truth that as Christ the Head 
 died and rose again, even so shall all 
 the members of His body ; comp. Pear- 
 son, Creed, Art. xi. Vol. I. p. 450 (ed. 
 Burt.), Jackson, Creed, XI. 16. 8 sq. 
 The t( here obviously involves no ele- 
 ment of doubt, but is simply logical ( ' el 
 particu1aestplanelogica,'Herm. Yiget, 
 No. 31 2) and virtually assertory; comp. 
 Phil. i. 22, and notes on Col. iii.i. 
 dir^Sav£V Kal d.vi<m\\ 'dAed and rose 
 again;'' the two foundations of Chris- 
 tian faith united in one enunciation; 
 comp. Kom. xiv. 9 (not Rec). It is 
 noticeable that the Apostle here as 
 always uses the direct term dTiSavev 
 in reference to our Lord, to obviate all 
 possible misconception ; in reference 
 to the faithful he appropriately uses 
 the consolatory term KoijidaBai ; see 
 esp. Theod. in loc. ovtus k.t.X.] 
 
 '80 also shall God;' slightly inex&ct 
 apodosis: the rigidly correct sequel 
 would be ouTUs Kal inaTtietv Sei on 
 K.i.\. (Liinem., Jowett), or some 
 similar formula. The ovtus is not 
 pleonastic (Olsh.), but, as Liinem. 
 correctly observes, marks the com- 
 plete accordance of the lot of Chris- 
 tians with that voluntarily assumed 
 by their Lord, while the Kal serves to 
 enhance and to give force to the com- 
 parison ; see Winer, Gr. § 60. 5, p. 478, 
 and on this use of Kal after relative or 
 demonstrative particles, Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. n. p. 636. Toils 
 
 Koi|i,T|6{vTas Std Tov 'Ii)(r.] ' those laid 
 to sleep through Jesus;' certainly not 
 equiv. to Iv'Itjit. (Auth., Jowett), but, 
 with the usual and proper force of the 
 prep., those who through His media- 
 
IV. 14, 15- 
 
 63 
 
 //ijOevray Sia toO 'Ij/o-ov a^ei tri/v avrwt tovto yup 1 5 
 vfjitv Xiyofiev iv Xoyw H-vpiov, on ^fiets oi ^wi/res ol 
 
 tion are now rightly accounted as 
 'sleeping.' It must remain to the last 
 an open question whether Sii toC 'Iijer. 
 is to he connected (a) with the finite 
 Terb df«, or (6) with the participle. 
 Chrysostom and the Greelt commfenta- 
 tors (silet Theod.) admit both, but 
 prefer the latter; modern writers 
 mainly adopt the former. There is 
 confessedly a difficulty in (b) which 
 the exx. adduced by Alf. scarcely 
 tend to diminish ; for the meaning th 
 ■jriffTSL ToO 'lijaov KOL/jLTjd. (Chrys.), or 
 the more exact meaning advocated 
 above, is but in lax parallelism with 
 etp-^viiv ^x^"* 5'* a^ToO (Rom. v. l), 
 Kavxoirffai SC airov (Kom. v. ii), al. 
 Still the arguments against (a) — viz. 
 (i) that thus d^ei would have two 
 participial members, (2) that the na- 
 tural emphasis would then suggest 
 the order Sia tou 'Irjo'. rois Koi/iriB., 
 (3) that the sentence would thus be 
 harsh (De W.) and awkward in the 
 extreme — seem so unanswerable, that 
 with the earlier interpreters, .^th., 
 and appy. (as the rigid preservation of 
 the order seems to hint) the remaining 
 Vv., we adopt the more simple and 
 logical connexion KOiiirjOioTas Sia tou 
 'Iil(r. The two contrasted subjects 
 I))<roCs and KoiiiifiBivTas Sia toC 'Iijo'oO 
 thus stand in clear and illustrative 
 antithesis, and the fundamental decla- 
 ration of the sentence a|ei aiii air^ 
 remains distinct and prominent, undi- 
 luted by any addititious clause, 
 &%a (r«v axTia] 'bring with Him,.'' 
 The more natural word would have 
 been i-^epii (comp. i Cor. iv. 14), but 
 the Apostle probably uses the more 
 significant a|e4 to mark that blessed 
 association of departed Christians with 
 their Lord at His rapovata, in which 
 the TheSsalonians feared their sleeping 
 
 brethren would have no part; see 
 above on ver. 13. 
 
 15. TOVTO K.T.X.] ' For thii we say 
 to you;' confirmation, not (by an 
 'setiologia duplex') of the foregoing 
 Iva nil \\nrii<t6e (Koch), but of the 
 words immediately preceding. The 
 relation of the faithful living to the 
 faithful dead is explained, first nega- 
 tively in this verse, then positively in 
 ver. 16, 17. Iv \6y<1) KupCou] 
 
 'in the word of the Lord,' in coinci- 
 dence with a declaration received di- 
 rectly from Him, 'quasi Eo ipso lo- 
 quente,' Eeza. The prep, is here 
 neither equivalent to Kara, (Zanch.) 
 nor to 5ia (Auth., comp. De W.), but 
 has appy. its usual and prevalent 
 meaning ' in the sphere of ;' the decla- 
 ration was couched in the language of 
 the Lord Himself, and gained all its 
 force from coincidence with His words; 
 see Winer, Or. § 48. a, p. 345, who 
 however by comparing i Cor ii. 7, 
 \a\ov/j,ev . . .iv p.vo'Triplif, i Cor. xiv. 6, 
 \aKii<riD...ii> KiroKoKiij/a, gives Iv more 
 of a reference to the form or natwre 
 of the revelation than seems fully in 
 accordance with the context. The 
 meaning is simply 'edioo Domini man- 
 datu,' Fritz. Earn. Vol. III. p. 34; so 
 LXX for nin» n3n3 l Kings XX. 35. 
 This revelation is certainly not to be 
 referred to Matth. xxiv. 31 (Schott i, 
 comp. TJsteri, Lehrb. 11. 2. B, p. 325) 
 nor to any traditional 'effatum Christi' 
 (Schott 2, and appy. Jowett), but was 
 directly received by the Apostle from 
 the Lord himself; oix dip' iavrwv 
 dWd Trapa tou XpiffToO iM66vTes X^70- 
 ftev, Chrys.; see Gal. i. 12 and notes, 
 ii. 2, Eph. iii. 3, and comp. 2 Cor. xii. 
 1. With these passages before us can 
 we say with Jowett that ' St Paul no- 
 where speaks of any special truths or 
 
64 
 
 nPOS GESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 irepiXeiirofievoi eis rhv irapovalav rou K.vpiov ov /n!] 
 10 (pdda-wfiev Toiii KOifiijOevrat, on avros 6 K.vpios ev 
 
 doctrines as imparted to himself! 
 The language of Usteri, I.e. is equally 
 unsatisfactory ; not so that of De W. 
 in loc. i]|iels k. t. X.] ' we 
 
 the living who are remaining.' The 
 deduction from these words that St 
 Paul 'himself expected to be alive,' 
 Alf. , with Jowett, Liiuem., Koch, and 
 the majority of German commentators, 
 must fairly be pronounced more than 
 doubtful. Without giving any undue 
 latitude to ^/nefs (oi! Trepi iavrov <pr;alv 
 ...ciXXd Tois TTKTTois \4yei, Chrys.), to 
 tuvres (fwyras ras ^uxas Koi/iiiBii'T as 
 Si TO triiiicLTa \iyei, Method, de Reiurr. 
 ap. CEoum.), or to ■irepi\eLir6ftemi. 
 (' tempus prsesens loco futuri more 
 Hebraico usurpat,' Calv., 'superstites,' 
 Bretsch.), it seems just and correct to 
 gay that irepiXetTdfi^voi is simply and 
 purely present, and that St Paul is to 
 be understood as classing himself with 
 'those who are being left on earth' 
 (comp. Acts ii. 47), without being 
 conceived to imply that he had any 
 precise or definite expectations as to 
 his own case. At the time of writing 
 these words he was one of the j^avres 
 and ■irepi\cnr6ii,ei'oi, and as such he 
 distinguishes himself and them from 
 the KotfiriBivTcs, and naturally identi- 
 fies himself with the class to which be 
 then belonged. It does not 
 
 seem improper to admit that in their 
 ignorance of the day of the Lord 
 (Mark xiii. 32) the Apostles might have 
 imagined that He who was coming 
 would come speedily, but it does seem 
 overhasty to ascribe to inspired men 
 definite expectations proved since to 
 be unfounded, when the context calm- 
 ly weighed and accurately interpreted 
 supplies no certain elements for such 
 extreme deductions ; see notes on 
 t Tim, vi. 14, and comp, the long 
 
 note of Wordsw. on ver. 17. On the 
 verb TrepiXelirejdai, see note on ver. 1 7 
 (Transl.). ov )i,i) if>6i{o-«)|ji,cv] 
 
 'shall not prevent,' Auth. i.e. shall not 
 arrive into the presence of the Lord, 
 and share the blessings and glories of 
 His advent, before others. The verb 
 <l>B6.veiv (Hesyoh. vpo^Keiv, rpoXa/i^a- 
 veiv) has here its regular meaning of 
 'prsevenire,' involving the idea of a 
 priority in respect of time, and thence 
 derivatively of privilege ; oi/Vw, ifrrialv, 
 6^^as Kal TOX^uS /to! iv ixapcZ oi rrre- 
 \evT7jK6res airavres Ai^atTT-^ffovTai, «j 
 Toils ^Ti /COT inetvov rbv Katphv irept- 
 6pTas irpoKa^eiv, Kal TrpoairavTTJjat r0 
 ffWTTJpi TUP SXum, Theod. On the 
 
 strengthened negation ov /ii] with the 
 aor. Bubj. see Winer, Gr. § 56. 3, p. 450; 
 and observe that the usually recog- 
 nised distinction between these par- 
 ticles with the fut. and with the aor. 
 (Herm.inn on Soph. CEd. Col. 853) 
 must not be pressed in the N.T. (opp. 
 to Koch), the prevalence of 01) //.^ with 
 the subj. being much too decided to 
 justify a rigorous application of the 
 rule ; see notes on Gal. iv. 30. 
 
 16. Sti] 'because,' j ' X |\^f> [prop- 
 
 terea quod] Sjr., 'quia,' Clarom., 
 'quoniam,' Vulg., ' unte,' Goth., sim. 
 JEtb. (Piatt, — Pol. omits). Arm.; rea- 
 son for the declarationimmediately pre- 
 ceding, derived from the circumstances 
 of detaU, To regard Sti as ' that ' 
 (Koch), and as dependent on the pre- 
 ceding TouTO i/itv \iyojitv (ver. 15), 
 mars the logical evolution of the pas- 
 sage, and is opposed to the opinion 
 of the Greek expositors {yap, Theod., 
 Theoph.) and, as is shown above, of 
 the best ancient Versions. 
 avTos o Kiupios] ' the Lord Himself;' 
 obviously not 'He the Lord' (De W.), 
 
IV. 1 6. 
 
 60 
 
 irtAey<r/x«Tt ei> (pwvTj ap^^ayyeXov Ka\ iv <raXtnyyi Qeov 
 
 nor yet 'Himself with ref. to His 
 glorified body (Olsh.), but simply with 
 ref. to His own august personal pre- 
 sence, auros yafy Tr/xuros tmj/ o\(0v 6 
 Kvpias ix tSiv ovpavav ^Trt^axijireTOi 
 KariiJy, Theod. iv K«Xeio-(»<iTi] 
 
 ' with a shoiU of cominand,' 'injussu,' 
 Vulg., Clarom., Goth., sim. Copt. 
 l<yuaksahm], Syr., Arm. The word 
 KiXevfffM (sometimes, though question- 
 ably, (rfXeu/io, Lobeck on Soph. Ajax, 
 704, p. 333), a air Xe-yd/i. in the 
 N. T., occurs frequently in classical 
 Greek as denoting the command or 
 signal given by a general (admiral, or 
 captain of rowers, Thucyd. 11. 93), the 
 encouraging shout of the charioteer 
 (Plato, Phcedr. p. 253 d) or the hunts- 
 man (Xeu. Cyneget. vi. 20), or more 
 technically the cry of the iceXeuirTijs to 
 the rowers (Eurip. Iph. T. 1405), but 
 in moat cases has some ref. more or 
 less distinct to the prevailing meaning 
 of the verb: comp. Prov. xxx. 3 7 [xxiv. 
 62], orpaTfiet d<p' ins /ceXti'irjctaTos eu- 
 Ta/crus, and Philo, de Prcem. § 19, 
 Vol. II. p. 427 (ed. Mang.), avdparom 
 ...aTTaKur/ihovs pfSlas av hi /ceXeu- 
 trftan amiaydyoi 6eds. To whom, 
 
 the Ki\ev<rfui is to be referred is somu- 
 What doubtful. The Greek expositors 
 (Chrys.?) seem to refer it directly to 
 Christ ; it appears however more plau- 
 sible to refer it immediately to the 
 dpxayye^os as Christ's minister, and 
 to regard it as a general expression of 
 what is afterwards more distinctly 
 specified by the substantives which 
 follow. The purport of the K^Xeva/ia 
 it is idle to guess at : it may perhaps 
 be iyelpea$e, ^Bev vv/iiplos (Chrys. 1), 
 or more naturally, dyouTTUini' ol i/eKpol 
 (Chrys. 2y Theod.), or perhaps, still 
 more probably, with a strict preserva- 
 tion of the current use of the word, 
 the shout of oommahd of the Arch- 
 E. T. 
 
 angeli to the attendant angelical hosts, 
 iroL^ovs iroieiTe Trdyras, vdpeaTL yap 
 KptT^!, Chrys. 3 ; comp. Matth. xiii. 
 41. On the use of 4i> to denote 
 
 the concomitant circumstances (Arm. 
 uses its 'instrumental' case), see notes 
 on Col. ii. 7, and comp. Eph. v. 26, die.. 
 Though, with the Aramaic jQ before 
 us, it is not always desirable to over- 
 press ir, yet in the present case it 
 may be used as serving to hint at the 
 /fara/Sairts taking place during the 
 K^Xevir/ia, in the sphere of its occur- 
 rence; comp, notes on ch. ii. 3. 
 Iv <|>(i>vf dpxaYY^^o"] 'loith, the voice 
 of the Archangel;' more specific ex- 
 planation of the circumstances and 
 concomitants. To refer apxiyy. to 
 Christ (Olsh.) or the Holy Spirit (see 
 in Wolf) is obviously wrong : the term 
 is a Sis A670(U. (here and Jude g) in 
 the N. T. , and designates' a leader of 
 the angelical hosts by whom the Lord 
 shall be attended on His second com- 
 ing; compare Matth. xxiv. 31, xxvi 
 31, 2 Thess. i. 7. With regard to the 
 oblique references of some of the' 
 German commefltators to the 'jiidis- 
 cher nachexilischer Vorstellung ' ( Liin. 
 comp. Winer, EWB, Vol. II. p. 329, 
 ed. 3), it seems enough to say that the 
 Apostle elsewhere distinctly alludes to> 
 separate orders of angels (see notes 
 and reff. on Sph. i. 21, Col. i. 16), and 
 that he here as distinctly speaks of a 
 leader of such heavenly Beings : to 
 inquire further is idle and presump- 
 tuous. trdXiri77i @co3] ' the 
 trumpet of God;' not ' tuba Dei, adeo- 
 que magna,' Beng., — such a form of 
 Hebraistic superl. not occurring in the 
 N. T., but simply 'the trumpet per- 
 taining to God' (gen. possess.), the 
 trumpet used in His service; comp. 
 Rev. XV. 2, and see Winer, 6r. § 36. 
 3, p. 221. The Greek expositors ap- 
 F 
 
66 
 
 nP02 eESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 Kora^^a-eTai air qvpavov, kol ol veKpoi iv Xpicrrcp ava-i 
 
 17 (TT^a-ovrai irpwrov, evetTa ^fAetf 01 ^wvrei ol irepiKei- 
 
 TTofAevoi a/na avv avroii dpirayija-ofteda ev ve(peXaii eis 
 
 propriately allude to the line of the 
 trumpet when God appeared on Sinai, 
 Bxod. xix, 16 ; comp. also Psalm 
 xlvii. 5, Isaiah xxvii. 13, Zech. ix. 14. 
 With the Jewish use of the trumpet 
 to call assemblies (Numbers x. 2, 
 zxxi. 6, Joel ii. i) we have here 
 nothing to do, still less with the spe- 
 culations of later Judaism as to God's 
 W3e of a trumpet to awaken the dead 
 (Eisenmenger, Entd. Jud. Yol. 11. p. 
 929 ; adduced by Lllnem.) : the Apo- 
 stle twice in one verse definitely states 
 that the trumpet will sound at Christ's 
 advent (i Oor. xv. 52), and it infallibly 
 will be BO. 
 
 dir oipavov] 'from, heaven,' — where 
 He now sits enthroned at the right 
 hand of God ; see esp. Acts i. 11. 
 Kal 01 V€KpoC K.r.X.] 'and the dead in 
 Christ, &o. ;' consequence and sequel of 
 ie KcXevfffiaTt — KarajSiJtrerat, the Kal 
 having here a slightly consecutive force ; 
 comp. notes on Phil, iv. 12. The 
 words iy Xpiarif are clearly to be 
 joined with vexpol, as more specifically 
 designating those about whose share 
 in the irapowLa the Thessalonian con- 
 verts were disquieted : the general re- 
 surrection of all men does not here 
 come into consideration ; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 20. -2, p. 123. Comp. West, 
 Stud. u. Krit. for 1858, p. 283, and 
 on the omission of the art., notes on 
 Eph. i. 15, and Fritz. Rom. iii. 25, 
 Vol. I. p. 195. The connexion with 
 di/affTiyffoKTai (Schott) would indirectly 
 assign an undue emphasis to iv Xp. 
 (Liin.), and introduce a specification 
 out of harmony witli the context: 
 the subject of the passage is not 
 the means by which (2 Cor. iv. 14) 
 or element in which the resurrectiou 
 
 is to take place, but the respective 
 shares of the holy dead and holy liv- 
 ing in the Trapovala of the Lord, con- 
 sidered in relation to time. 
 irpMTov] 'first;' not with any re- 
 ference to the irpurrri dyaaratris, Kev. 
 XX. 5 (Theod., Theoph., CEk;um., al.), 
 but, as the following lircira sug- 
 gests, only to the fact that the resur- 
 rection of the dead in Christ shall be 
 prior to the assumption of the living. 
 The reading irpuroi is found in D'FG ; 
 Vulg., Clarom. ; Cyr., Theod. (i), aL, 
 and was perhaps suggested by the 
 supposed dogmatical ref. to the first 
 resurrectiou. 
 
 1 7. isireiTaJ ' then,' — immediately 
 after the dvac^Taffi^ of ol iv Xptar^', 
 second act in the mighty drama. The 
 particle iTrcira, as its derivation \iif 
 etra, Hartung, Pwrtik. Vol. 1. p. 302] 
 and the following ana (see below) both 
 seem to suggest, marks the second 
 event as speedily following on the 
 first, and, like 'deinde' ('de rebus in 
 temporis tracta continuis et proximis,' 
 Hand, Tunell. Vol. n. p. 240), speci- 
 fies not only the continuity but the 
 proximity of the two events ; comp. 
 Erfurdt, Soph. Antig. 607. 
 'qiJ.ets ol ^uvrcs ot ircpi\eiir.] 'we the 
 living who are remaining,' 'we who 
 are being left behind ;' see notes on 
 ver. 15. a|JM. <ri)v airois] 'at the 
 
 same time together with them,' 'simul... 
 cum illis,' Vulg., Copt. [euton\; i.e. 
 we shall be caught up with them at 
 the same time that they shall be 
 caught up, a/xa appy. not marking 
 the mere local coherence, 'all to- 
 gether,' Alf., but, as usual, connexion 
 in point of itme ('res duas vel plurea 
 una vel nmvl aut esse aut fieri signi't 
 
IV. 17. 
 
 67 
 
 'avavTicriv tov J^upiov eiy aepa' Koi ouTCoy iravTOTe arvi> 
 
 «oat,' Klot*, Bevar. Vol. n. p. 95): 
 comp. Ammon. o. v., d>o niv l<rn 
 Xporucor irt^^ri/ia, ifi.ov Si ToiriKav, 
 and Tittm. Symm. i. p. 156, who how- 
 ever remarks that in Rom. iii. 12 (from 
 the LXX) this distinction is not main- 
 tained. See notes on chap. v. 10. 
 dpiraYTi<r6neeo iv v«(}>Aois] •shall he 
 caught up in clouds;' certainly not 'in 
 nube.i,' Beza, nor even 'iM/Wolken,' 
 DeW., Lun., but, 'innubibus,' Vulg., 
 Clarom., i.e. ' tanquam in curru trium- 
 phali,' Grot. — the clouds forming the 
 element with which they would be 
 surrounded, and in whicliThey would 
 he borne up to meet their coming 
 Lord : irl (!) tov oxijliaros ^epo/neda 
 ToO IlaTpoi, Kal yap airos ir ye(pi\ai,s 
 vwiXa^ey airov [Acts i. 9J, koX ij,ttf?s 
 iv vetpiXaa ipTrayri<ro/ji,e8a, Chrys, Th? 
 transformation specified in i Cor. xr. 
 S't 53 ('compendium mortis per de- 
 inutationem expunctse,' TertuU. de 
 Beaurr. oh. 48, compare Delitzsch, 
 Psychol. VII. 5, p. 368 sq.), will neces- 
 sarily first take place (comp. Pearson, 
 Creed, Vol. i. p. 357), upon which the 
 glorified and luciform body will be 
 caught up in the enveloping and up- 
 bearing clouds. On the nature of the 
 resurrection body, compare Burnet, 
 State of Dep. ch, Vil. viil., and the 
 curious and learned investigations of 
 Cudwortb, Intellect. Syst. oh. v. 3, Vol. 
 II[. p. 310 sq. (ed. Harrison). 
 The forms ypTrdytiv and apray^(ro/iai 
 appear to be later forms (Thom.-Mag. 
 p. 411) ; but the 'librariorum arbi- 
 trium' often leaves it uncertain whe- 
 ther the first or second aor. was the 
 original reading ; comp. Fierson, Maer. 
 p. 168 (ed. Koch). 
 
 cls diravTi]<riv tov Kvp.] 'to meet the 
 Lord, ' as He is coming down to earth ; 
 Kol yap ^acriK^ots eU iroKiv elffekavvov- 
 Tos ol fih IvTi/ioi wpos airivTriau' i^la- 
 
 ffiv, ol SI KardSiKoi tvSov iiivovai-r&v 
 KpiTTiv, Chrys. The expression els 
 cl7rdi'Ti)(ric (Matth.xxv. i [BCN viri.vT.\ 
 6, Acts itxviii. 15) seems to have been 
 derived from the JJXX, where it com- 
 monly answers tp the Hebrew nX"3|57 j 
 as I Sam. ix. 14, a1. It may be 
 associated ei^iher as here with a de- 
 fining gen., or with a dative (Acts 
 xxviii, 15), tlie verbal subst. preserv- 
 ing in the latter case the government 
 of the verb from which it Is derived ; 
 see Pemhardy, Synt. III. 10, comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 31. 3, p. 189. Some au- 
 thorities [Di(EM)FG] read eh Wav- 
 Ti/ffiv and the same [with the addition 
 pf Vulg. (not Amiat.), Clarom.; Tert., 
 Jer., Hil.] give t$ Xpiarif, but with 
 every appearance of correction in both 
 cases. els d^pa] 'into the 
 
 air,' 'in aera,' Vulg., Clarom., 'in 
 luftan,' Goth., and sim. the other Vv. 
 except ..SIth. (Pol.), 'in nube;' de- 
 pendent on apvayri(^. Efs (Upa is 
 certainly not 'in coelum' (Piatt), but, 
 as the regular meaning of the word, 
 requires, 'into the air,' — though per- 
 haps not necessarily (comp. Wordsw.) 
 with any precise limitation to the ter- 
 rene atmosphere. The a^p, as De W. 
 well observes, marks the way to hea- 
 ven, and includes the interspace be- 
 tween earth and heaven, with greater 
 or less latitude according to the con- 
 text ; see notes on Eph. ii. i. To 
 question whether the air is here re- 
 presented as the final realm of the 
 faithful (Usteri, Lehrb. 11. 2. B, p. 338, 
 441) is surely monstrous : the Apostle 
 makes here a pause, simply because 
 his design of clearing up the anxieties 
 which his converts entertain is accom- 
 plished when he declares that the holy 
 quick and holy dead shall be caught 
 up into the air simultaneously to meet 
 the ^ord. The great events imme- 
 F2 
 
68 
 
 IIPOS eE22AA0NIKEIS A. 
 
 1 8 Kvpla) iffofieOa. ware irapaKoKelre aXX^JXoi/j ev toTs 
 Xoyoti rovToii. 
 
 V . Tleol Se TOOV ■ypovaiV Koi t5>V KUI- Ye know that the day 
 
 r Ar of the Lord cometb sua- 
 
 pwv, aSeXcpol, od x/)«a. e^x^re ificu ypi- ^^^^rJ^.Zf^if^^ 
 
 I /\ i \ \ ^ ■ o^ J/? ef appointed us not for 
 
 2 <pe(TOai' aVTOl yap aKpipmi OlOUTe on wrath, but for salvation. 
 
 diately following Christ's descent to 
 judgment (see Jackson, Creed, xi. I2. 
 i, 2) and His final and eternal union 
 with His Saints in the heavenly Jerusa- 
 lem (Rev. xxi. xxii.) are to be collected 
 from other passages (see Alf. in loc). 
 Kal oiiTus K.T.X.] 'and so shall we be 
 ever together with the Lord;' so, in 
 consequence of this dpirdt^ecrdat, — ^the 
 subject of the i(r6/u8a (Heaych. /SiciJ- 
 ffofieii) being clearly both classes pre- 
 viously mentioned. The force of the 
 ffvv, as implying not merely an accom-! 
 panying (/xerd) but a coherence with, 
 should not be left unnoticed; see notes 
 on Eph. vi. 23. 
 
 i8. <5o-T«] 'So then," Consequently;' 
 in consequence of the foregoing reve- 
 lation. On the force of iSirre and its 
 connexion with the imperative mood, 
 see notes on Phil. ii. 12. 
 irapaKoXeCTE] 'console;' not here 
 'exhort,' 'teach,' ^th. (both), but, in 
 accordance with the preceding tm /x^ 
 XvirTJaOe (ver. 13), 'consolammi,' Vulg., 
 
 Clarom., Goth., ^ ] ..i nV) Syr., and 
 
 I 7 
 similarly the remaining Vv. ; see notes 
 on ch, V. II, and on Eph. iv. i. 
 iv Tots X(5yois TouTois] 'with these 
 words;' not 'words of faith' (Olsh.), 
 but simply 'these words' {^Tiiiroi.% not 
 without emphasie), — the words in 
 which the Apostle here delivers to them 
 his inspired message; touto Sk S X^-yet 
 vCii Kal priTiSs TJKovffe vapd rov Geoi/, 
 Chrys. on ver, 15. The ei> is here used 
 in that species of instrumental sense 
 in which the action, t&c, of the verb 
 is conceived as existing in the means; 
 
 ' Solent Grseci pro Latiuorum ablativo 
 instrumenti ssepe iv prsepositionem po- 
 nere, significaturi in e& re cujus nomini 
 praepositio adjuncta est vim aut facul- 
 tatem alicujus rei agendse sitam esse,' 
 Wunder, Soph. Philoct. 60, see exx. 
 inEaphel, Annot.Yol. u. p. 549. Thus 
 in the present case the TrapcJuXijiru 
 may be conceived as contained in the 
 divinely inspired words themselves ; 
 comp. Jelf, Or. §622. 3 b. 
 
 Chapter V. i. n«pl Si k.t.X.] 
 'But concerning the times and the 
 seasons,' soil, of the Lord's coming, 
 TTJs ffurreXe^aj, Theoph, The terms 
 Xpovoi and Koipbs are not synonymous: 
 the former denotes time indefinitely, 
 the latter a definite period of time 
 {/iipos xpovov, t) fiefierprifUiiav Tj/upuf 
 avarriiia, Thorn. -M. p. 489, ed. Bern.), 
 and thence derivatively the right or 
 fitting time ; comp. Ammon. de Diff. 
 Toe. p. 80, nh Kaipbs StjXoZ TroiorijTa 
 ...Xpoyos Bk TToffdri^To, and see Titt- 
 mann, St/non. 1. p. 41, where the 
 meaning of xaipos is carefully investi- 
 gated, and Trench, Synon. Part 11. 
 § 7. The force of the plural has 
 been somewhat differently estimated. 
 On the whole, it seems most natural 
 to refer it, not to the length of the 
 periods (Dorner, de Orat, Christ.Eschat. 
 p. 73), but simply to the plurality 
 either of the acts or of the moments of 
 the time (Liinem.). There 
 
 appears no reason to take Kal here as 
 explanatory (Koch): the two words 
 are simply connected by the copula; 
 comp. Acts i. 7, xpoyous v Kaipovs, 
 
IV. i8— V. 3. 
 
 69 
 
 »IHepa Ki/jO(ou wj KXe7rT»7? iv vvktI oJ/tw? ep')(eTat. ornv 3 
 
 Eccles. iii. i, 6 xp^'os. fil xmpSs, Dan. 
 ii. •21, Kaipois Kal ■/j)6vovs. Wisdom 
 Viii. 8, Ktupwv Kal ■xpbvuv. 
 ov xpeCav ^x'Ts] 'ye have no need;'' a 
 ■trapoKeiij/K, see notes on ch. iv. 9. The 
 reason why there was no need does 
 not seem here to be due to any diriS/i- 
 <popov (CEoum., compare Chrys., and 
 Acta i. 7) in the Apostle here writing 
 to them on the subject, but, as the 
 next verse auggests, because they had 
 been accurately informed by him by 
 word of mouth of all that it was ne- 
 cessary for them to know. On the 
 qualifying and explanatory object-infi- 
 nitive, see Krilger, Sprachl. § 55. 3, 
 comp. § 50. 6. 4, 5. 
 
 i. (xKpiPusJ ' accwrately ;' only used 
 once again by the Apostle, in Eph. v. 
 15. The use of this adverb, considered 
 exegetically, is very striking. It cer- 
 tainly seems to point to special and 
 definite information on the subject ; 
 but whether this was derived from a 
 written Gospel (Wordsw.) or from the 
 oral communications of the Apostle 
 cannot possibly be determined. The 
 latter seems much the most probable ; 
 comp. 2 Thess. ii. 5. The derivation 
 of ixp. is alightly doubtful ; most pro- 
 bably from aKpos in a locative form 
 {aKpi), and a root BA-, Benfey, Wur- 
 mllex. Vol. I. p. 158. i]|t^pa 
 
 Kvp(ov] 'the day of the Lord,' soil. 
 TTJs SeaironKrjs ijrupavelas, Theod. ; the 
 day of ou/r Lord's coming to judgment 
 (comp. Eeuas, Thiol. ChrSt. iv. 21, 
 Vol. II. p. 243), J 6 uiAs To3 dvBpdnrov 
 airoKaMTTeTai, Luke xvii. 30 ; comp. 
 I Cor. i. 8, T. 5, i Cor. i. 14, Phil. i. 
 6, and for the some^what similar D1* 
 njn^, Joel i. 15, ii. I, Bzek. xiii. 5, al. 
 To refer it to the de.structiou of Jeru- 
 salem (Hamm.), or to include in it 
 rilV ISiav iKisTov rnUpav (Theoph., 
 omp. notes on Phil. i. 6), is here dis- 
 
 tinctly at variance with the context, 
 which treats solely and entirely of the 
 Lord's vapovffta. The reading is 
 
 hardly doubtful. Bee. gives 1} ^iit. with 
 AKL ; most mss. ; many Ff. ; but 
 though the ■q might have been absorbed 
 in the 1; of the following Tiiiipa, the 
 probability of insertion (as more defi- 
 nitive) and the preponderance of un- 
 cial authority [BDEFGK] are in 
 favour of the omission : so Lachm., 
 Tt'sch. <us KX4im)S Iv vuktC] 
 
 ' as a thief cometh in the night,' soil. 
 (pX^Toi ; iv vvktI not being added as a 
 quasi-epithettoKX^TTTijs, but belonging 
 to an unexpressed ?/)Xfai ; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 20. 4, p. 126, note. This solemn 
 and regular Scripture simile (comp. 
 Matth. xxiv. 43, Luke xii. 39, 2 Pet. 
 iii. 10, Eev. iii. 3, xvi. 15) does not 
 contain any reference to the dread felt 
 with regard to the coming (Schott, 
 compare Alf.), but simply to the t4 
 al<pvlSiov (Theod.) : see esp. Kev. iii. 3, 
 ^'|u ti5s kXiirTifii Kal oi /irj yvQs irolav 
 iSpav fi^ia iirl ai, and comp. TJsteri, 
 Lehrh. II. i. B, p. 337. The addition 
 iv vuktI (comp. however Matth. xxiv. 
 43, irolfi tfivKaK'S) is peculiar to this 
 place, and (combined with Matth. I. c. 
 and XXV. 6) may have given rise to the 
 ancient tradition of the early Church 
 (noticed by Liinem.) that Christ was 
 to come at night on Easter Eve ; 
 compare Lact. Inst. tec. 19 (' intem- 
 pesta et tenebrosS, nocte'), and Jerome 
 on Matth. xxv. 6. oiirais 
 
 ^pXtToi] ' so it comes ; ' the oiVws being 
 added to give force and emphasis to 
 the comparison. The pres. Ipxcrai is 
 not for a future (Pelt, al.), nor yet to 
 mark the suddenness of the event 
 (Bengal,. Koch), but its fixed nature 
 and prophetic certainty; see Winer, 
 6r. § 40. 2, p. 237, comp. Bernhardy, 
 Synt.x. 2, p. 371. 
 
70 
 
 nPOS eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 "Keyaa-ii/ Elp^vtj ku) acrcpaXeta, tote a7(f)viSios avroi^ 
 ecpla-Tarat oXedpos ojcnrep ^ wSlv r^ ev yaa-rpl eypvcrri. 
 
 3. oTttv \^7<i)(riv] ' When they may 
 say; ' certainly not the Jews (Hamm.)> 
 nor even their persecutors generally 
 (Chrys.), but all unbelieving and un- 
 thinking men ; comp. Matth.xxiv. 38, 
 39, Luke xvii. 26 — 30. The true be- 
 lievers were always watching and wait- 
 ing, knowing the uncertainty and un- 
 expectedness of the hour of the Lord's 
 coming ; comp. Matth. xxiv. 44, xxv. 
 13, Luke xii. 35—40. After Srav Bee, 
 inserts ydp with KL ; most mss. ; 
 Vulg. ; al. : Laohm. after Srav inserts 
 6^ in brackets , as it is found in BDEN* ; 
 Copt., Syr.-Phil. ; Chrys., Theod. 
 Though Si is well supported, and not 
 uncommonly exchanged with ydp (see 
 notes on Gal. i. 11), stiU the tendency 
 to supply expletives is so very decided 
 (Mill, Prolegom. p. clvi.) that we are 
 justified in reading simply Stoh with 
 AFGKi; 4mss.; Clarom., Syr., Goth., 
 ^th. (both) ; many Lat. Pf. So 
 Tisch., Oriesb., Schok, De W., Limem., 
 Alf. 
 
 Elpijvri Kttl dp(|>d\aa] 'Peace and 
 safety,' soil, iarlv, — is everywhere pre- 
 sent; comp. Ezek. xiii. 10, \iyovTes 
 Wpiivri, Kal oiK i<TTa> elp'^vij. The 
 distinction between these words is ob- 
 vious : the first [c?/)ai, necto, or more 
 probably Ep-, eipia, dioo; comp. Ben- 
 fey, Wurzellex. Vol. 11. p. 7] betokens 
 an inward repose and security ; the 
 latter [a, <T-^aKKu ; comp. Sanscr. root 
 phal, Heb. 73"J, Pott, Mym. Forsch. 
 Vol. I. p. 238, Donalds. Crat. § 209] 
 a sureness and safety that is not in- 
 terfered with or compromised by out- 
 ward obstacles. rin al(j>vt- 
 810s K.T.X.] ' then with suddenness does 
 destruction come npon them,;' alipvlSios 
 not being a mere epithet (adjectivum 
 attributum), 'sudden destr.,' Auth., 
 
 ' plotzliches Verderben,' De W., but a 
 secondary predication of manner (ad- 
 jectivum appositnm), soil. ' repentinus 
 eis superveniet,' Vulg., Syr., Copt. 
 [chen ou-exapina], al., and fully em- 
 phatic ; see esp. Donalds. Cralyl. % 303, 
 and MiiUer, Kleine Schriften, Vol. I. 
 p. 310; comp. Winer, Gr. § 54. 2, p. 
 412, and notes on Col. ii. 3. The 
 verb i^laraTai, may be either simply 
 'imminet,' Beza, or more derivatively 
 'superveniet,' Vulg. (but not fut.), 
 being a ' verbum solemne de rebus 
 hominibusve citius quam quis existi- 
 maverit adstantibus,' Schott ; see esp. 
 Luke xxi. 34, /ti)7roTe...^7ri(rTg iip' 
 ifias al^ptSios ij -^p-ipa (al4>. does not 
 occur elsewhere in the N. T.). On 
 &\e8pos, comp. notes on i Tim. vi. 9. 
 (So-ircp ■{[ uSCv] 'as the iirlh-pang.' 
 The true point of the appropriate 
 comparison ('vip vim earn compara- 
 tivam quam habet (is usitato more 
 auget atque effert,' Klotz, J)evar. Vol., 
 II. p. 768) is neither the knowledge 
 that the event is to come (Theod.), 
 nor its nearness (De W.), but, as the 
 context seems clearly to suggest, its 
 suddenness and uncertainty ; ' mulier 
 
 doloris materiam gestat absque 
 
 sensu, donee inter epulas et risus vel 
 in medio somnio corripitur,' Calv. 
 The form uSlv, like the form SeX^fK, 
 belongs to later Greek ; comp. Winer, 
 Gr. § 9. 2, p. 61. 
 
 T^ 4v 7ao-Tpl ^X"""!!] ^''® regular 
 formula in the N. T., Matth. i. 18, 
 23. xxiv. 19, Mark xiii. 17, Luke xxi. 
 23, Rev. xii. 2. The more usual ex- 
 prvssion in earlier Greek appears to 
 have been iv yaarpl <p4peiv (Plato, 
 Legg. vii. p. 792 B, comp. Horn. II. 
 VI. 58), or iyKtiprnv elcoi or ylyveaBaif 
 as in Plato, Spin. p. 979 A, al. 
 
V. 
 
 71 
 
 Kai ov fxr] eKtpuyma-tv. vfieii Se, aSeXcpoi, ovk etr-e 4 
 ev (TKOTet, Iva vfiai ^ ^fJLepa wj K\iirTi]i KaraXdjSrf 
 
 4. v/iSi ^ iiiUpa] So Lachm. with ADEFG ; Vulg., Clarom., appy. M,th. 
 (both) ; many Lat. Ff. {Tisch. ed. i, Schott, Likiem., Koch). C is here deficient. 
 The simpler order of Sec. ij iifUpa i/uis is retained by TiscJi. ed. ■/, 7, with 
 BKLN ; appy. all mas. ; Goth., al. ; Chrys., Theod., Dam., al. {Griesb., Alf.) ; 
 but appy. with less probability, as the uncial authority is rot decisive, and the 
 change is just as likely to have been owing to a conformation to the more 
 natural order, as a transposition for the sake of throwing emphasis on the v/ias. 
 
 ov |t^ 4K(t>v7U(riv] 'they shall in no 
 tcise escape,' not t6v re iriroy Kai 6\e- 
 6pov, CEcum., but simply and abso- 
 lutely; comp. Heb. ii. 3, xii. 25, 
 Eeclus. rvi. 13. On the strengthened 
 negation oi nil with the subjunctive, 
 see notes and reff. on ch. iv. 15. 
 
 4. 4(ji€ts 8^] 'But ye;' in opposi- 
 tion to the unthinking and unbelieving 
 noticed in the preceding verse : 'occa- 
 sione accepts ex superioribus adhor- 
 tatur Christianos ad vigilantiam, so- 
 brietatem, et sanctimoniam,' Calv. 
 In the following words it is scarcely 
 necessary to say that iirri cannot pos- 
 sibly be imperatival (Flatt) : both the 
 negative and the non-occurrence of 
 the imper. lare in the N. T. utterly 
 preclude such a translation. 
 h o-KOT€t] 'in darkness,' in the ele- 
 ment or region of it. The (Tkotos here 
 mentioned seems to have been sug- 
 gested by the preceding h vvktI (ver. 
 ■2): it does not mark exclusively either 
 rbv aKOTeivbv Kol dxiiSapTov ^lov 
 (Chrys., Theoph., CEcum.), as might 
 seem suggested by the succeeding 
 verse, or riiv ayvoiav (Theod.), as is 
 partially suggested by the preceding 
 verse, but, as the general context re- 
 quires, hoth, — 'statum iguorantiie et 
 vitii,' Turretin. It was a darkness 
 not only of the mind and understand- 
 ing (Eph. iv. 18) but of the heart and 
 will (i John ii. 9) ; see Andrewes, 
 Serm. xiv. Vol. in. p. 371. 
 
 tva v|ias K.T.X.] 'in order that the 
 day should surprise you; ' not merely 
 a statement of result, but of the pur- 
 pose contemplated by God in His mer- 
 ciful dispensation implied in oi5/c iari 
 iv dKorei. See Winer, Or. § 53. 6, 
 p. 408. It may be doubted however 
 whether we have not here some trace 
 of a secondary force of tva (see notes 
 an Eph. i. 17), the eventual conclu- 
 sion being in some degree mixed up 
 with and obscuring the idea of finality; 
 comp. Gal. v. 17. Considering the 
 numerous instances of a secondary 
 final use of tva which the writings of 
 the N. T. (esp. those of St John, 
 Winer, Gr. § 44. 8, p. 303) distinctly 
 supply, and a remembrance of the 
 ultimate decline of the particle into 
 the va of modern Greek (Corpe, Gr. p. 
 1 29), it is prudent to beware of over- 
 pressing the final force in all cases ; 
 comp. Winer, Gr. I. c. p. 299 sq. 
 The ' day ' here specified is not speci- 
 fically the day of judgment [1; yfjUpa 
 ^/cefoijFG; Vulg., Clarom., Syr.], but, 
 as the context seems to require, the 
 period of light (De W.), which indeed 
 becomes practically synonymous with 
 the day of the Lord, as bearing salva- 
 tion (comp. Bom. xiii. 12), and bring- 
 ing to light the hidden things of dark- 
 ness (i Cor. iv. 5). Kara- 
 
 XiCPi]] 'overtake,' 'mrprise,' >*-'!-' 
 
 Syr., 'adprebeudat,' Clarom., 'gafa- 
 
72 
 
 nP02 GEZSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 5 Trdvret yap vfxeU viol ^cotoj eare Kai vloi rifxepai. ovk 
 
 6 eaf/.\v vvKTOf cvSe (tkotovs. "Apa ovv nh Ka9ev§u/J.ev 
 
 7 wy Kai 01 XotTTol, aWa ypriyopZiJ.ev /cat v^cpwfiev. oi 
 
 hai,' Goth. ; the kotA here not intro- 
 ducing any definite sense of hostility 
 (comp. Koch), but, as usual, being 
 simply intensive, and deriving its fur- 
 ther shades of meaning from the con- 
 , text : see the good collection of exam- 
 ples in Kost u. Palm, Lex. s.v. Vol. i. 
 p. 1623. The reading kX^tttos 
 
 [Lachm. with AB ; Copt.] has cer- 
 tainly not sufficient critical support. 
 
 5. irdvTes vdp v|jiris] 'for ye all ; ' 
 confirmation of the preceding negative 
 statement by a more specific positive 
 declaration. The particle yap, which 
 we can hardly say with Schott is 
 'baud necessaria ad sententiam,' is 
 omitted by Sec, but on authority 
 [K (e sil. ) ; majority of mss. ; Vulg. 
 ( Amiat. )] decidedly insufficient. 
 iitol (JKOTos] ' sons of light;' a Hebra- 
 istic formula (comp. Ewald, Gr. § 287) 
 expressing with considerable emphasis 
 and siguifioance, not merely that they 
 ' belonged to the Ught ' (Alf.), but that 
 they belonged to it in the intimate 
 way that children belong to a parent, 
 — almost ol Tct tov tpiaros TpdrTovres, 
 Chrys., Theoph. : see Winer, Gr. § 34. 
 3. b. note 2, p. 213, Steiger on i Pet. 
 i. 14, p. 153, and notes on Eph. ii. 2, 
 Somewhat analogous expressions are 
 found in classical Greek, iraiSes ao- 
 tfidv, iraiScs Upiuv k.t.X., but appy. 
 never (as here) in connexion with 
 abstract substantives ; comp. Blomf. 
 on JEsoh. Pers. 408. 
 OVK lo-piiv vuKTos] ' We lelang not to 
 night;' the genitive idiomatically spe- 
 cifying the domain to which the sub- 
 jects belong ; comp. Acta ix. 2, and see 
 Winer,, Gr. § 30. 5, p. 176. On the 
 ■various meanings in which this pos- 
 sessive gen. is connected with elmt 
 
 and ylyveffSai, see Kriiger, SpracM. 
 § 47. 6. I sq., Bemhardy, Synt. III. 46, 
 p. 165, and on the very intelligible 
 XcaiT/ios [0ffls, 7iiUpa...vi^, <rKOToi\, see 
 Jelf, Gr. § 904. 3, Madvig, Lat. Gr. 
 § 473. a. The reading ((Tt^ [D'FG ; 
 Syr. (not Phil.), Clarom., Goth., al.] 
 is obviously a conformation to the 
 preceding iari. 
 
 6. "Apa odv] ' Accordingly then ;' 
 exhortation following on the preceding 
 declaration, the illative apa being sup- 
 ported and enhanced by the collective 
 and retrospective oSc; see notes on 
 Gal. vi. 10. In Attic Greek this com- 
 bination is only found in the case of 
 the interrogative apa, comp. Klntz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 181, Herm. Yiger, 
 Ko. 292, and Stallb. on Plato, Sepuil. 
 V. p. 462 A. p.i\ Ka6cv8u)i.€v] 
 
 ' let us not sleep,' i. e. be careless and 
 indifferent, fi-q A-fxeKuJ^^ev rwv Koktop 
 ipyuv, Theoph. ; comp. Eph. v. 14, and 
 the very pertinent remarks of Beck, 
 Christ. Lehrwiss. Vol. I. p. 299 (cited 
 by Koch), on the deepening sleep of 
 the soul under the influence of sin ; 
 see also Beck, Seelenl. i. 8, p. 18. 
 ot XonroC] 'the rest;' here obviously 
 unbelievers, whether careless Jews or 
 ignorant heathens ; comp. notes on ch. 
 iv. 13. Lachm. omita the Kai before 
 ol XoiTToi with ABS ; 2 mss. ; Augiens., 
 Vulg. (Amiat.), Syr.; al., but appy. in 
 opposition to St Paul's prevailing 
 usage ; comp. 1 Cor. ix. 5, Eph. ii. 3, 
 and above, ch. iv. 13. vi^()>ci>|uv] 
 
 'be sober;' comp. i Pet. v. 8. The 
 v/i(j>u)ii€i> enhances the preceding ypriyo- 
 pS/ieii; Christians were not only to be 
 wakeful, but have all their senses and 
 capacities in full exercise : iv ■hli.ipf av 
 yp'Oyop'S Tis jttij Kii^j; Si fivplois vepiTC- 
 
V. 5-8. 
 
 73 
 
 yap KaOevSovTei vvktos KaOeiSovaiv, Koi ol fteOviTKOfievoi 
 vvKTog fiedvovcriv ^fieii Se ^ftipa? ovrtf vijdxefiev, ev- 8 
 Svcrd/ievoi OwpaKU irlcTTewi /cat ayaTrtji koi irepiKecpa- 
 
 aeiTai Seivois, Chrya. On the regular 
 meaning of this verb, which appears 
 to be always that of 'sobriety,' not of 
 'watchfulness' or 'wakefulness' (as 
 perhaps CEcum., iirlraffis iypiiyopaeus), 
 see notes on 2 !Km. iv. 5, and i Tim. 
 iii. 2. 
 
 7. ot 7dp KaSeiiSovTes] 'For they 
 that sleep,' 'sleepers,' Winer, Gr. § 45. 
 7, p- 316 ; coofirmatory explanation of 
 the preceding exhortation by a refer- 
 ence to the prevailing habits of non- 
 Christian life. At first sight it might 
 seem plausible to give all the words in 
 this verse a spiritual reference (Chrys., 
 Tbeoph., Koch) : as however vvktos 
 seems only to mark the period when 
 the actions referred to usually took 
 place, the literal and proper meaning 
 is distinctly to be preferred : ' quem- 
 admodum in hoc versu dormire ita 
 etiam ebrium esse dicitur proprie, tan- 
 quam exemplum ejusmodi sentiendi 
 ageudique rationis quae nonnisi homi- 
 num sit in caligine nocturn^ lubenter 
 versantium,' Scbott; so Liinem. and 
 Alf. 01 |u6va-Kd|iEvoi] 'they 
 that are dmnhen.' The distinction ad- 
 vocated by Beng., * fieduffKofiai notat 
 actum, iic$iu statum' (comp. Clarom. 
 'inebriantur...ebrii sunt'), seems here 
 more than doubtful. The transition 
 from 'being made drunk' to 'being 
 actually drunk' is so slight (in Eost 
 u. Palm, Lex. s. vv. both are translated 
 'berauscht seyn'), that with the pre- 
 ceding Ka$eiSovT€S...Ka8eiSov(!i,v before 
 us it seems best to regard them here 
 as simply synonymous. 
 
 8. '^(i.Ets S^ K.T.X.] ' lut let us, as 
 we aire of the day :' not exactly ' qui 
 dieisumus.'Vulg., Clarom., but 'quum 
 .pimus,' JEth. (Piatt.), Arm., camp. 
 
 Goth, 'visandans;' the participle not 
 being here used predicatively, but with 
 a slightly causal, or combined 'tem- 
 poral-causal ' force ; see Schmalfeld, 
 Synt.des Gr. Yerh. § 207, comp. Do- 
 nalds. Gr. §615. On the connexion of 
 the gen. with ei/ii, see notes on ver. 5, 
 lv8v(rd|iiEVoi] 'having put on;' tempo- 
 ral participle defining the action con- 
 temporaneous with or perhaps, more 
 probably, immediately preceding the 
 vii<j>eai. The Apostle now passes into 
 his favourite metaphor of the Christian 
 soldier; comp. Kom. xiii. 12, 2 Cor, 
 X. 4, and esp. Eph. vi. 1 1, where nut 
 only (as here) the defensive, but the 
 offensive portions of the equipment 
 are described. The 'armatura' here 
 consists of the three great Christian 
 virtues, Faith, Love, and Hope, the 
 first and second forming the breast- 
 plate (alitor Eph. vi. 14, 16), the third 
 (similarly Eph. vi. 17, see notes) the 
 helmet ; comp. Beuss, Thiol. Chrit. 
 IV. 22, Vol. II. p. 259, 260. 
 iiapaxo. irtoTeios] 'a shield of faith,' 
 or more probably 'the shield, &c.,' 
 the second and third substantives, as 
 well known terms, here dispensing 
 with the article. (Winer, Gr. § 19. i, 
 p. 109), and causing the governing 
 noun to be also anarthrous on the 
 principle of correlation (Middl. Or. 
 Art. III. 3. 6). The gen. is that of 
 ' apposition ;' see notes and reff. ore 
 Eph. vi. 14. KaX inpiKi^. k.t.X.] 
 'and asahelmet the hope of aalmalion ;' 
 a defence that can never fail. With 
 hope fixed on the IvrfyyeKiiiin) trariiipia 
 (Theod. ) all the dangers and trials of 
 the present seem light and endurable ; 
 KaSajrep yap ■}} ■irepiKetj>a\ala to Kcdpiov 
 ffii^et T(5c iv ^/iu', T^y ke^aKrjv irepii- 
 
nP02 eESZAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 9 \aiav eXTTiSa (josrripla^, on ovk edero fjfia^ 6 Qeof 
 
 e(\' opyhv aXXa eis irepnroltjcnv awTripiai Sia tou 
 
 10 K.uplov rj(i.u>v ^Irjcrov Xpia-Tou, tou aTToOavovroi virep 
 
 rifum 'iva e'lre yptjyopuinev e'lre KadeuSwfxeu ana crvv 
 
 piWovaa Kal irdvToBei' crTeydt^owra' 
 ovToi Kal )j iXwh riv \oyuriiiv oix 
 iiplriffi SiaTetretv, dXV dpBiv tirTT]ffiv 
 <S<rTep Ke^aX'fiv, oiSiv rac l^aBev els 
 airbv Treaetv luffa, Chrys. The gen. 
 e-UTTjplas is the gen. objecti, that to 
 which it is directed and on which it is 
 fixed, comp. ch. i. 3 (toS Kup.), Rom. 
 V. 2, and, if necessary, Winer, Gr. 
 §30. i,p. 167. 
 
 9. oTi K.T.V] 'Jeco'Msej&c.;' reason 
 for the use of the foregoing words 
 iXirlda ffUTTiplas, expressed both nega- 
 tively {oiK IBeTo K.T.X) and positively 
 '(aXXA els irepiTT. k.t.\.) : oi irpos toSto 
 iKdXeffei' els to awokiffCLi dXX* els to 
 ffwo-ai, Clirys. ovk SOcto i]pas 
 
 K.T.\.] 'appointed us not unto anger' 
 i, e. to become the subjects of it, to 
 fall under its punitive action. The 
 form TiWcai (Acts xiii. 47) or diffBai 
 els tI (r Tim. i. 12) appears to have a 
 pwtially Hebraistic tinge and to answer 
 to Mb, lOJ, or n»B' followed by ^ ; 
 comp. for example Fsalm Ixvi. 9, Je- 
 rem. ix. ir, xiii. 16. On dpyli, see 
 notes on ch. 1. lo. €U ir€pL- 
 
 iroCit|o-iv cr(i)Ti]p£as] 'unto obtaining of 
 salvation,' >-uo) (l i 1 D^ [ad 
 
 acquisitionem vit^], sim. Vulg., Cla- 
 rom., Copt, [tancho, — here needlessly 
 rendered ' vivifioatio ;' comp. Mai. iii. 
 1 7], ' du gafreideinai ganistais,,' Goth. ; 
 comp. 2 Thess. ii. 14, els vepeirolriaai 
 Sijijs. Neither here, Heb. x. 39, nor 
 1 Thess. I. c, is there any reason for 
 departing from this simple and pri- 
 mary meaning of irepiTolrfais ; Hesyoh. 
 TrX£oi'aff/i6s" xr^iris, Suid. Krijirts. Both 
 in Eph. i. 14 (see notes) and i Pet. ii, 
 9, as the context shows, the use is 
 
 wholly different, and appy. a reflection 
 of the rhip of the 0. T. (comp. Acts 
 XX. 28) : in 2 Chron. xiv. 13 (Heb. 
 n^nip), Pseud.-Plato, i)«/. p.4i5C(see 
 Eost u. Palm, Lex. s.v.), the meaning 
 seems to be rather 'conservatio ;' but 
 neither tlie one (appy. favoured by 
 OEcum., comp. Theod., ha olnetovs 
 diroipifivri) nor the other is here either 
 natural or suitable. 
 Sid Tov KvpCov K.T.X] Dependent, not 
 on ISeto, but on the preceding irepi- 
 wolyjaiv ffUT-qplas, and specifying the 
 medium by which the awriipla was to 
 be obtained. This medium is certainly 
 not ' doctrinam eam quam Ghristus 
 nobis attulit' (Grot.), nor, in this 
 passage, 'faith in Him' (Liinem ), but, 
 as the next verse seems to show. His 
 atoning death ; comp. Eph. i. 7, and 
 notes in loc, 
 
 10. ToB duoB. virlp r{|juSv] 'who 
 died for as;' specification of the bless- 
 ed act of redeeming love by which the 
 Trepiirolrins ffaTifplas has become as- 
 sured to us ; comp. ch. iv. 14. The 
 clause, as Liinem. properly observes, 
 is not causal {airod. would then be 
 anarthrous, comp. Schmalfeld, Synt. 
 1 222, 225 note, and Donalds. Gr. § 492), 
 but relative and assertory ; ' ne quid 
 de salutis certitudine dubitemus aut 
 de satisfactione soliciti essemus, dicit 
 Christum pro nobis mortuum esse, et 
 pro peocatis nostris satisfeoisse, Ut 
 salutem consequeremur,' Calv. 
 On the meaning of iirip in dogmatical 
 passages, — not exclusively ' in our 
 stead' (Waterl. FSerm. xxxi. Vol. v. 
 p. 740), see notes and reff. on Goel. iii. 
 13. For irip, BN^ ; 17, here read 
 ■irepl. tva eUre K.T.X.] 'in order 
 
V. 9. 10, II. 75 
 
 avTM Cijcrw/uei/. oto irapaKaXeire aXX^Xovi /cat oIkoSo- 1 1 
 fieiTe et? tov eva, fcadw; Kai Toietre. 
 
 that whether we wake or sleep;' holy 
 purpose of the Lord's redeeming death. 
 There is some little doubt as to the 
 exact meaning of the terms Ka.$eiSei,ti 
 and ypifyopelf. It seems clear that 
 they cannot he understood in a simple 
 physical sense (comp. Fell), still less 
 in an ethical sense, as to Ka8eiSeiv was 
 described (ver. 6) as a state incompa- 
 tible with Christianity. There remains 
 then only the supposition that they 
 are used in a metaphorical sense (comp. 
 Psalm Ixxxviii. 6, Dan. xii. ■/, al.), to 
 ■which also the following fijo-u/iej' seems 
 very distinctly to guide us. The mean- 
 ing then is substantially the same as 
 Bom. xiv. 8, iiv re ovv fu/tev idi/ re 
 aToBii-ZiffKOj/iev rod Kvplov iapiiv. 
 It is not exact to say that the sub- 
 junctive with dTC.itTe as here is not 
 classical (Alf.), for seePlatciicjrj'. XII. 
 p. 958 D (v. 1.). As a general rule dre 
 is associated with the same moods as 
 el (Klotz, Devar. Vol. II. p. 633) ; as 
 however there are cases in which it 
 is now admitted that d can be asso- 
 ciated with the subj. ('el cum conjunct, 
 respectum oomprehendit experientise, 
 expectandumque esse indicat ut fiat 
 aut non fiat,' Herm. de Part, av, II. 7, 
 see Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 500 aq.), 
 a similar latitude may rightly be as- 
 signed to etre. It seems probable here 
 that the subj. is used in the dependent 
 clause by way of conformity with the 
 subj. in the principal clause ; comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 41- ■'• ''• P- 263 (note). 
 clua <rvv avT<J Sij<r.] 'we should together 
 live with Eim,' not 'together with 
 him,' Auth. ; the irjv aip Xpiarv form- 
 ing the principal idea, while the o>a 
 (Heb. nn^) subjoins the further no- 
 tion of aggregation ; comp. Horn. iii. 
 12, and see notes on ch. iv. 17, where 
 the previous specifications of time 
 
 make the temporal meaning the 
 more plausible. The l^ri<ru/iev is both 
 more emphatic than iao/ieOa (ch. iv. 
 17), and also serves slightly to eluci- 
 date the metaphorical use of the pre- 
 ceding words. 
 
 II. 810] ' Whertfore,' 'On which 
 account;' not exactly 'quae cum ita 
 sint ' (Alf.), but ' quamobrern ' (see 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. II. p. 173, who cor- 
 rectly assigns the foimer meaning to 
 ovv), thereby serving to place in closer 
 logical connexion the foregoing decla- 
 ration and the present exhortation. 
 On the uses of this particle by St Paul, 
 see notes on Gal. iv. 31. 
 irapaKaXeiTc] 'comfort' 'console,' 
 n" ) . «~| Syr., ' consolamini,' Vulg., 
 
 not ' exhortamini, ' Clarom. : the ana- 
 logy of this verse to ch. iv. 1 7 (where 
 the contextual argument for the pre- 
 sent sense is very strong) appears to 
 require a similarity of translation,' 
 more especially as the hortatory tone 
 (ver. 6) seems now to have merged into 
 the consolatory. The exact meaning 
 of this word is frequently somewhat 
 doubtful: it is used more than fifty 
 times in St Paul's Epp. , with several 
 varieties of meaning which can only 
 be decided on by a careful considera- 
 tion of the context ; comp. notes on 
 Col. ii. i. €ts Tiv ?va] 'one the 
 
 other;' equivalent in meaning to aXXi^- 
 Xous ; see exx. in Kypke, Annot. Vol. 
 II. p. 339, all of which however, except 
 Theocr. Idyll, xxil. 65, are from late 
 authors. Compare oi KaB' ha, Eph. 
 V. 33, and the somewhat analogous 
 eh irpoi ha, Plato, Legg. i. p. 626 0, 
 al. ; see Winer, Gr. § 26. 2, p. 156. 
 To regard eis as a prep., and to refer 
 rhv ha to Christ, is in the highest 
 degree forced and improbable ; see 
 
76 
 
 nP02 GEZSAAONIKEIZ A. 
 
 12 'EpciOTchfJLev §6 vfiai, aSeXtpol, eloivai 
 
 Toiis KOTmvTa? ev v/iiv Kai irpoicTTa- 
 K.vplw Koi voudeTOvv- 
 
 fievovt vfjitev ev 
 
 'piw 
 
 Eeverence your spin- 
 tual rulers; be peace- 
 ful and prayerful and 
 thankfuL Quencli not 
 theSplrit: andmayGod 
 sanctify and preserve 
 you. 
 
 Liinem. in, loc. The metaphorical 
 
 term oIkoSoixuv (i Cor. Tiii. i, a. 23, 
 al.) is derived from the idea, elsewhere 
 both expressed and implied in St Paul's 
 Epp., that Christians form a cajs or 
 olKoSo/i^ QeoS ; see i Cor. iii. 9, 16, 
 2 Cor. vi. 16, Eph. ii. 20, al., andcomp. 
 Andrewes, Serm. vi. Vol. II. p. 273. 
 KaOus Ktil iroietre] 'even as ye also 
 are doing; ' praise and encouragement 
 founded on the actual state of the 
 Thessalonian church; comp. ch. iv. i, 
 10. On the force of xal in compara- 
 tive sentences of this kind, see notes 
 on Eph. V. 23. 
 
 12. 'Bp(iiTtti|JLEV 8e] ' Now we beseech 
 you;' transition, by means of the hi 
 fierafiaTiKov (see notes on Oal. iii. 8), 
 to their duties towards the rulers of 
 the church, — a subject not improbably 
 suggested by the words immediately 
 preceding. In no case could the pre- 
 cept olKodo/j-eLTe els Thv ^va be carried 
 out with greater practical benefit to 
 themselves and to the church at large 
 than by showing respect to their ap- 
 pointed spiritual teachers. On the 
 meaning of ipwrdVf see notes on ch. 
 iv. I. 
 
 elSlvoi] 'to 'know,'' 'to regard' ' ut 
 rationem ac respectum habeatis,' Est. ; 
 not ' to show (by deeds) that you 
 loiow' (Koch), but simply 'to know,' 
 i.e. ' not to be ignorant of, ' ' to recog- 
 nise fully;' this somewhat unusual 
 meaning of e/5. being analogous to 
 that of the Heb. SJnj (see Gesen. Lex. 
 B. V. 8), and here approximating in 
 meaning to iinyaitlxTKeiv, i Cor. xvi. 
 1 8. No instance of a similar or even 
 analogous usage has as yet been ad- 
 duced from classical Greek. 
 To4s KOTTifflVTos Iv 4[i,tv] 'thou who- 
 
 are labouring among you,' 'those who 
 are engaged in sacred and ministerial 
 duties;' comp. i Tim. v. 17, where 
 the more specific ev \6yif is supplied. 
 On the meaning and derivation of 
 KOTOS, Kowi&a, see notes on i Tim. iv. 
 10. This general designation, as the 
 following explanatory terms seem to 
 suggest, is to be referred to the Pres- 
 byters of the Church of Thessalonica 
 (Thomdike, Prim. Gov. oh. IJI. Vol. i. 
 p. 8, A.-C. Libr.), h> i/uv obviously 
 having no ethical reference, ^v reus 
 KapS. v/iuv (Flatt), still less 'in vobis 
 doceudis' (Zanch.), but simply imply- 
 ing 'in vestro ccetu' (Schott), 'inter 
 vos,' Vnlg., — with mere local refer- 
 ence to the sphere of the kowos. 
 KaV 7rpourTa|ji.€vovs k.t.X.] 'and are 
 presiding over you in the Lord ; ' fur- 
 ther explanation and specification of 
 the generic KonUvTas. The omission 
 of the article plainly precludes any 
 reference of the three participles to 
 three different ministerial classes : the 
 KOTTiSiVTes are simply regarded uuder 
 two forms of their spiritual labour, as 
 rulers and practical teachers, ajid as 
 'morum magistri,' Grot. Whether 
 these duties were executed by the 
 same or different persons cannot be 
 determined; at this early period of 
 the existence of the Church of Thess. 
 the first supposition seems much the 
 most probable ; contrast Eph. iv. 11, 
 I Tim. V. 1 7. The sphere of the 
 
 irpatcTaaOai was to be iv Kvplifi: oix 
 iv ToU KO(riUKots dX\' iv toIs KaT& 
 Kipiov, Theoph. Kal vovSc- 
 
 Tovvras v|i,as] 'and admonishing you,' 
 ' et monent vos,' Vulg. ; not simply 
 
 V' '^^^ [docentes] Syr., . but 
 
V. 12, 13, 14- 
 
 77 
 
 Tay 5/xay, Ka\ ^yeicrdai avroiif virepeKTrepia-criJii ei' i3 
 ayairij Sta to epyov avTwv. eip^veuere iv eavroh. 
 TlapaKa\ov/ji.ev Se uyuay, a§e\(pol, vovOeretTe to J? ard- 1 4 
 
 ^Z.}iiO [admonentes] Syr.-Phil., 
 
 with reference to the ' exhortationes 
 et correptimes' (Eat.) which it might 
 be their duty to administer. On the 
 .proper meaning of ;'ov6ereiv, — pri- 
 marily ' to correct by word ' {vovBiTiiaiv 
 X67OS iltl,Tl.ll.TfnKb% iveKO, ijroTpoiTTJs 
 afuifrrlas, Zonar. Lex. p. 1406), and 
 then derivatively by deed — see Trench, 
 Synan. § 32, and the numerous exx. 
 collected by Kyplte, Obs. Vol. II. p. 
 339- 
 
 13. Kal i]7ei;o-8ai k.t.X.] 'and to 
 esteem them in love very highly.' These 
 words appear to admit of two trans- 
 lations according as iv dyd-n-g is con- 
 nected (a) loosely with all the fore- 
 going words, marking the element 
 (certainly not the cause, Schott, 2, i) 
 in which the iJ7et<r9ot airois virepeK- 
 vepiirtrGis is to be put iu force, — or (6) 
 closely with the preceding ^7«<rffat 
 as specifying and enhancing the gene- 
 ral duty implied in the preceding 
 elSivai, ver. 12. Both involve some 
 lexical difficulties, as in (a) TiyeiaBaA. 
 must be regarded as equivalent to 
 vXelovoi i^ioSv (Theod.), and in (6) 
 ■^eurBai iv dydvn must be taken as 
 riyeiffBaL a^roiJy d^lovs tov ayaircurdai 
 (Chrys., Theoph., CEcum.), — solutions 
 neither of them very strictly defen- 
 sible. On the whole, the context, the 
 appy. similar ijyeiaBal ti iv xpiaet, 
 Job XXXV. 2 (Schott), and perhaps the 
 analogous iv opyj) ^x^i-v rwd, Thucyd, 
 II. 18 (Liinem.), seem to preponderate 
 in favour of (6) : in ver. la the Thess. 
 are exhorted to respect their spiritual 
 rulers, in the present verse also to 
 love them. So Schott, Olsh,, and 
 Ltinem. The Vv. by pressrving care- 
 
 fully the order deprive us of all clue 
 to the exact construction they adopt- 
 ed. On the cumulative word 
 vTrepeKirepKraai, eomp. ch. iii. 10, and 
 notes on Eph. iii. 20. The form iirep- 
 eKTepiiTcroO is here given by Bee. with 
 AD'EKLN; appy. all mss. ; many 
 Ff. Si& r& if^ov airav] 
 'for their work's sake;' on account 
 both of the importance of the work 
 (Heb. xiii. 17) and the earnest and 
 laborious manner in which it was per- 
 formed; comp. Phil. i. 22, ii. 30. 
 AfnpeieTi ev eavrots] 'Be at peace 
 among yowrselves ;' comp. Mark ix. 50, 
 Bom. xii. 18, 2 Cor. xiii. 11. Onthij 
 not uncommon use of the reflexive for 
 the reciprocal pronoun (dXX^Xois), see 
 Jelf, Gr. § 6^54. 2, Apollon. de Synt. 
 II. 27, and for the general principle 
 and limits of the permutation, Kiihner 
 nn Xen. Mem. II. 6. 20. Of the con- 
 verse use (reeipr. for refl.) there is no 
 distinct trace found; see Bernbardy, 
 Synt. VI. 2, p. 273. The reading ai- 
 Tots [D'FGK ; many mss. ; Augiens. , 
 Vulg., Syr. (both), al. ; Chrys.,Theod.], 
 though distinguished by Grieeiach's 
 highest commendatory mark (' indicat 
 lectionem supparem aut sequalem, im- 
 mo forsitan prseferendam receptse lec- 
 tioni'), certainly does not seem to 
 deserve it, as it arose in all probability 
 from the feeling that the short admo- 
 nition was out of place between the 
 longer ipiiiT&p^ev Si k.t.\. (ver. 12) and 
 irapaKaX. Si k.t.X. (ver. 14). Under 
 any circumstances it can scarcely bear 
 the meaning 'pacem habete cum eis,' 
 Vulg., Syr. (comp. Chrys., Theod.), as 
 this would so much more naturally 
 have been expressed by elprjveieTe (lei' 
 airuy, as in Kom. xii. 181 
 
78 
 
 nP02 GESSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 KTovi, TrapafAvOetade tovs oXiyoyl^v-^ovi;, avTe)(ear6e 
 15 Twi/ aa-Oevwv, fxaKpoOtifieire vpos irai/rai, opare firj 
 
 14. napaKttXov|i«v SJ if..] 'Now 
 we beseech yoii ;' address, neither vrpds 
 Toi)! tt/PXoi'Tas (Chrya.), nor irpos rois 
 SidaffKaXovs (Theopli., CEoum,), but, as 
 the dSeX0oi suggests, to all (Pseud.- 
 Ambr., Justin.). The Christian bre- 
 thren at Thessalonica were not only 
 to be at peace with one another, but 
 also to do their best to cause peace 
 to be maintained by others. 
 vovSeteite tovs ciTiiKTovs] ' admomsk 
 the unruly;' those who do not pre- 
 serve their ri^ai, 'iuordiuatos,' Eeza, 
 ' ungatassans, ' Gtoth. The term ara- 
 KTos, somewhat laxly rendered by Syr. 
 
 j < N'^mVn [offendentes], is prima- 
 
 rily and properly, as Chrys. suggests, 
 a 'vox militaris' (Xen. Mem. iii. 1. 
 7, where it ia opp. to Terayfihos), and 
 thence derivatively a general epithet 
 .to denote a dissolute (Plato, Legg. vil. 
 p. 806 0), ill ordered (irepUp-yoi xal 
 irapb. rb irpotTTJKOv ttoiouvtc^, Bekker, 
 Anecd. p. 216), and unruly way of 
 living ; Hves Se duiv ol otoktoi ; war- 
 Tws ol irapk rb t^ Qetp boKovv irparroV' 
 res' Td^eus yap iari tijs aTpaTiariKTJs 
 ipiioSiurepa aiiTrj 7/ rd^is T^s iKKXrjHas, 
 Chrys. Here the precise reference is 
 probably to the neglect of duties and 
 callings into which the Thessalouians 
 had lapsed owing to their mistaken 
 viewa of the time of the Lord's com- 
 ing; comp.'ch. iv. 10, 11, and 2 Thess. 
 iii. 6, II, where alone draKTiiis occurs. 
 'Ara/tTos is a dVaf Xeydp,., of. aT-oKreu', 
 2 Thess. iii. 7. On the meaning of 
 vovdeTfiv, see notes and refif. on ver 1 2. 
 ■irapa|iiv6.] See note on ch. ii. 11. 
 Toils dXi70i|/uxovs] 'the feeble-minded 1' 
 .perhaps mainly (as the wapa/iuS. seems 
 to suggest) in reference to those who 
 Vvere unduly anxious and sorrowful 
 about the st^,te of the Koi/uiiiepot, ch. 
 
 iv. 13; (SXiyo^iixoi'S ''"''S ^"'^ '"''"' ''*" 
 6vew(ja> afiirpijis oBv/ioOi'Ta.i uaibpiaaev, 
 Theod. , — who however not injudi- 
 ciously also includes rois p,^ avdpeias 
 (j>epovTa.s TiJ^v ivavrltav rds 7r/)Off/3oXds, 
 oump. Theoph. SKiybij/. o iii) (pipav 
 ■ireipa(rpJ>v. The word b\iyo\(i. is a 
 OTT. 'Kiybp,. in the N. T., and appy. of 
 rare occurrence elsewhere except in 
 the LXX (Isaiah Ivii. 15, Prov. xviii. 
 14, al. ; comp. Artemid. Oneirocr. III. 
 5) ; the more correct and usual term 
 being p,tKp6^vxos, Aristot. 'Ethic. Ni- 
 com. IV. 7, laoor. Panegyr. p. 76 D. 
 dvT«'x£<r96 T<5v dirBevwv] ' support the 
 weak;' clearly not the weak in body 
 (Luke X. 9, Acts iv. 9, v. 15, i Cor. 
 xi. 30), but the weak in faith, toDs yufj 
 iSpalav KeKTriiuvovs vlffTU', Theod. ; 
 comp. I Cor. viii. 7, 10, so Chrys., 
 Theoph., (Eoum., and nearly all mo- 
 dern commentators. In Kom. v. 6, 
 and appy. r Cor. ix. 22, the reference 
 seems to be more inclusive, as marking 
 those who were not Christiars, who 
 had not yet received the strength im- 
 parted by the Holy Spirit. The verb 
 dmix^BSai (comp. Matth. vi. 24, Luke 
 xvi. 1 3, and more generically Tit. i. 9) 
 does not so much seem to imply ' ob- 
 servare,' Beng., as iwepelSeii', Theod., 
 liToaTripl^av, Theoph., avTCKap^amrBu 
 (Bekker, Anecd. p. 408), or perhaps 
 more exactly 'sustinere,' Clarom. 
 (comp. Goth., .^th.), with a more 
 direct allusion to the primary and 
 physical meaning of the word ; comp. 
 notes on Tit. I. c, and see Suicer, 
 Thesaur. s.v. Vol. i. p. 371. 
 (laKpoOvfi. irpos ir^vTOs] ' be long-tuf- 
 fering to all;' not merely to the three 
 classes just mentioned (Theoph.), but 
 to all, Koi Tois oUelovs Ktd Tois dXXo- 
 Tplov!, Theod.; comp. ver. 15. On 
 the term liaKpoBv/uui opp. to b^vBvuttv 
 
V. 15, i6. 
 
 79 
 
 TJ? icuKov avxt Kaicou tivi airoSw, aWa TravTore to 
 ayaOov otwKeTe ety aW^Xovi kqI «y irdvTai. irdvTOTe 1 6 
 
 15. els dXA^Xout] So LacJtm., Scholz, Tisch. (ed. i), wilh ADEFGK' ; 15 
 mas.; Syr., Copt., Goth., Clarom.,al. (De W., Koch, ZUnem., Griesb. marking 
 it with""). In ed. 3, 7, Tiech. inserts koX before cis with BKLK*; great 
 majority of mss. ; Syr. -Phil., Vulg. (Amiat.); Chrys., Theod., al. {Rec.,Alf., 
 Wordew.); but not on satisfactory ground:), as the external authority seems to 
 prepoLderate for the omission, and the internal arguments (opp. to Alf.) would 
 certainly seem rather in favour of its being an interpolation for the Bake of 
 specification, than of its being omitted as unnecessary. 
 
 (Eurip. Androm. 689), which here 
 serves to mark that gentle and for- 
 bearing patience which is so essentially 
 a characteristic of dyawrj ( i Oor. xiii. 
 4), seeesp. Basil, Serm. [Sym. metaphr.] 
 XIII. Vol. III. p. 784 (ed. Bened. 1839), 
 the good notice in Suicer, Thesaur. 
 s.v. Vol. II. p. 2g3 sq., Eothe, Theol. 
 Ethik, § 1056 sq.. Vol. II. p. 518 sq., 
 and comp. ^ Tim. iii. 10, and notes 
 and reff. on Eph. iv. i. Lastly, 
 
 ■n-pii is not merely ' in regard to,' ' ad 
 omnes,' Vulg., Clarom., ' cum omni- 
 bus,' Copt., but more precisely and 
 definitely, erga: comp. the Goth. 
 ' vijjra,' and see notes on Gal. vi. 10. 
 
 15. opare (iij tis k.t.X.] ' See that 
 no man render evil, &o. ;' warning 
 against revenge, — yet surely not in 
 the sense that the better among them 
 were to check its outbreaks in others 
 (De W.), but simply that all were to 
 abstain from it; see Liinem. in loc. 
 The usual and correct statement that 
 Christianity was the first system de- 
 finitely to forbid the returning evil for 
 evil (see Fritz. Rom. xii. 17, Vol. iii. 
 p. 91) is called in question by Jowett 
 on the ground that ' Plato knew that 
 it was not the true definition of jus- 
 tice to do harm to one's enemies.' Not 
 to multiply quotations, can we sustain 
 this opinion against deLegg. ix. p. 868 B, 
 p. 882, al., where vengeance rather 
 than punishment seems certainly con- 
 templated by the legislator! Indivi- 
 
 dual instances of the recognition of 
 this precept may be found in hea- 
 thenism (see Pfanner, Theol. Gentil, 
 ch, XI. § 23, comp. Basil, de Legend. 
 Gent. Libr. § 5, Vol. II. p. 251, ed, 
 Bened.), but as a general statement 
 the remark of Hermann seems to be 
 perfectly correct ; ' nee laudant Qrseci si 
 quis ioiquis Eequus est, sed virtutem 
 esse censent aequis eequum, iniquum 
 autem iniquis esse,' on Soph. Philoct. 
 679. The formula opav n^i (Matlh, 
 xviii. 10, Mark i. 44) is of less frequent 
 occurrence than ^XiTteiv iii] (Mark 
 xiii. 5, Acts xiii. 40, i Cor. x. 12, al.), 
 but is more classical and correct : for 
 exx. of it ia combination with the 
 pres. and aor. subj., see, if necessary, 
 the coUeotion in Gayler, Partik. Neg. 
 p. 316 sq. diroS^] ' render,' 
 
 'usgildai,' Goth. The primary idea 
 conveyed by airoiMvai,, soil, 'ubi 
 quid de aliquot copi^ das ' and thence 
 ' ubi dando te exsolvis debito ' (Winer) 
 here naturally passes into that of ' re- 
 tribuere,' the imKiv being represented 
 as something stored up, out of which 
 and with which payment would be 
 made; see Winer, de Verb. Comp. iv, 
 p. 13, 13, where this verb ia well dis- 
 cussed. The opt. oTroSo? is found 
 in D'' (appy.) FGK', and diroSoiqin D', 
 rd d'yaOiv SwuKere] 'follow after that 
 which it good;^ not here what is 
 ' morally good' (Liinem ), but, as the 
 antithesis seems rather to require, 
 
80 
 
 nPOS eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 ts X'"'/'^''^' aSiaXeiTTTUif irpoaevyeade' iv iravri evyapi- 
 
 ■what is ' beneficial,' what proves good 
 to him who receives it : ouk apxel tA 
 /it) airoiovvai Kaxi, avrl KaxiSv, dXXi 
 X/"7> ^Iff'i Kal dyaSois dfiel^eaBai rbv 
 )caKOTroiTitra,PTa, Theoph., comp. Chrys. 
 Some shade of the same meaning is 
 perhaps apparent in Gal. vi. lo, Eph. 
 iv. 28 (see notes) : here however it 
 seems to be more decidedly brought 
 out by the preceding KdKbv. On the 
 use of iiiixav (iirtTeTaixivas dTrovSa^eiv 
 Ti, Theoph.) with abstract substan- 
 tives or their equivalents, see notes 
 and reff. on 2 Tim. ii. 12, and for exx. 
 of the same use in classical Greek, see 
 Ast, Lex. Platon. s.v. Vol. i. p. 548 
 sq. The correlative term is KoraXa/i- 
 §lweai, Phil. iii. 12, and the antithesis 
 ^eiyeiv, Plato, Gorg. p. 507 B. 
 
 t6. iravTOTS xoCpere] ' Rejoice al- 
 may i' Phil. iii. i, iv. 4, comp. 2 Cor. 
 vi. 10 ; not merely nav ireipaa/iots 
 ireptiriariTe (Theoph.), — a limitation 
 not inappropi'iate in reference to the 
 recent troubles at Thessalonica, but 
 at all times — under all circumstances 
 and in all dispensations. To the en- 
 quiry 'Why should this be a duty!' 
 (comp. Jowett) it seems sufficient to 
 say with Barrow, in his good sermon 
 on this text, — 'if we scan all the doc- 
 trines, all the institutions, all the pre- 
 cepts, all the promises of Christianity, 
 will not each appear pregnant with 
 matter of joy, will not each yield great 
 reason and strong obligation to this 
 duty of rejoicing evermore?' Serm. 
 XHII. Vol. II. p. 557 ; see also sound 
 and comprehensive sermons by Beve- 
 ridge, Serm. ov. Vol. v. p. 62 sq. 
 (A.-C. Libr.), and Donne, Serm. oxxxi. 
 Vol. V. p. 344 sq. (ed. Alf.). The tiue 
 originating cause (ch. i. 6) and true 
 sphere (Rum. xiv. 17) of this joy is the 
 Holy Spirit, and its more immediate 
 source is Faith ; see notes on Phil.i. 25. 
 
 17. dSutXetirrws irpo(rti!x.] 'pray 
 without ceasing ;' a precept naturally 
 following on and suggested by the 
 foregoing words; t^v oSop (Sei^e tou 
 ael xaip^^"! Ti)v dBidKarrov irpoa^evx^" 
 Kai evxaptirriap' 6 yip i6itr$els i/uXetv 
 rip Qe(p Kal evxapurretv avr$ iwl Trdnv 
 ws o'v/x^epSpTus avfi^aivovffif irphbrrlKop 
 in xo/)4j' ?|6i SiTiveKij, Theoph. This 
 exhortation to unceasing prayer is dis- 
 tinctly urged by the Apostle in other 
 passages (comp. Eph. vi. 18, Col. iv. 2), 
 and is certainly neither to be explained 
 away as ' a precept capable of fulfil- 
 ment in idea rather than in fact' 
 (Jowett), nor yet, with Bp. Andrewes, 
 to be referred to appointed hours of 
 prayer {Serm. vi. Vol. v. p. 354, A.-C. 
 Libr.), but is to be accepted in the 
 simple and plain meaning of the words, 
 and obeyed, as Barrow has well shown, 
 by cherishing a spirit of prayer, and 
 by making devotion the real and true 
 business of life : see Wordsw. in loc., 
 who appositely cites Barrow, Serm. 
 Vol. 1. p. 107 sq. Surely the to 0^1- 
 \etp Tip 9c$ (Theoph.) is one of those 
 things which is real and actual; oiSi 
 rovTO Twv aSwartav, ^^Slov yap Kal t(^ 
 iadlovTL rbv Qeov dwiiveiv, koX T<f ^o5i- 
 j^ovTi Trfv Tov Qeov ffvfifiaj^av alTeiv, 
 Theod. ; compare Hofmann, Schriftb. 
 Vol. II. 2, p. 335. On the duty of 
 constant prayer, see the sound remarks 
 of Hammond, Pract. Catech. ill. 2, p. 
 224 (not quite decided on this text), 
 and on the power of it, compare the 
 noble epilogue of Tertullian, de Oral. 
 cap. 29. 
 
 18. 4y irovrl cvxapurrftrc] 'In 
 every thing give thanks;' not iv iravrl 
 sell. Kaipf, Flatt (comp. Chrys. del), 
 BtiU less 'in Us quee vobia bona sunt,' 
 Est., but iv iro^'Ti acil. x/'WOTt, Chrys. 
 
 on Phil. iv. 6, v<5^ W-^o Syr., 
 
V. 17— 20. 81 
 
 iTTeire' tovto yap BeXrj/xa Oeov ei> Xdi&tk 'lijaQv 
 eii vfiai. to Tlvevfia fxt] a-^evvvTS'- '7rpo(pi]Teiai jmi] „ 
 
 'in omnibus,' Vulg., Copt.; comp. 
 2 Cor. ix. 8, ^i* irarrl iravroTe, which 
 seems to fix the interpretation, and 
 contrast in /i-riSevi, Phil. i. 28. On the 
 .duty of eixapuTTia, so often dwelt on 
 by St Paul (comp. notes on Col. iii. 15), 
 see Beveridge, Serm. evil. Vol, v. p. 
 76 sq., and on this and on the preced- 
 ing verses Basil's homily de Grot. Act. 
 Vol. 11. p. 34 (ed. Bened. 1839). 
 TouTo 7cip] 'for this' soil, rb iv iravrl 
 evxap. (Theoph., CEcum.); not with 
 reference to it and ver. 17 (Grot.), nor 
 to it and the two preceding verses 
 (Alf.), for though the three precepts 
 Xaipere, irporcixecrBe, cixapidTUTe — 
 especially the two latter — are suffi- 
 ciently homogeneous in character to 
 be included in the singular roSro, yet 
 the peculiar stress which the Apostle 
 always seems to lay on (ixap. (see 
 above) renders the single reference to 
 (ixapiaHa apparently more probable ; 
 ' gratiee sunt in omni re agendse, quia 
 scimus omnia nobis cooperare ad bo- 
 num, Kom. viii. 28,' Cocoeius; see 
 Hofmann, Schrifib. Vol. II. 2, p. 335. 
 So also Olsh., Bisping, and Liinem., 
 and appy. the majority of recent ex- 
 positors. After yiip LacAm. adds 
 i<mi' with D^E^FG ; several Vv. ; and 
 Lat, Ff., but on insufficient external, 
 and appy. opposing internal evidence. 
 The possible doubt caused by the 
 juxtaposition of tovto and BiXtrma 
 would naturally suggest the interpola- 
 tion of the verb subst. 
 iv Xp.'Iijo-. tls ijias] 'in Christ Jesus 
 toward you:' Christ is here represented 
 not exactly as the medium by which 
 (Theoph., CEcum.) but as the sphere 
 in which the SAij/uais evinced and has 
 its manifestation ; iv (f Kal to Si^avra 
 irotel Kai dvaycpv^, A,tha,n.conir. Arian. 
 
 E. T. 
 
 III. 61, Vol. I. p. 610 (ed. Bened. 1698). 
 The objects towwrds whom 'ad vos' 
 (Clarom.)— not 'in vobis' (Vulg., 
 Copt.), nor 'in reference to whom' 
 (De W.) — it was so evinced, and to 
 whom it was designed to apply, were 
 the converts of Thessalonica. The 
 reference of 8i\rip.ci, to the 'decretum 
 divinum de salute generis humani per 
 Cliristum reparanda' (see Schott) is 
 grammatically doubtful on account of 
 the omission of the article, and by no 
 means exegetically plausible. The 
 64XriiJM seems here suitably anarthrous-, 
 as marking eix'''P- ^^ °^^ V^^^ ^^^ 
 portion out of many contemplated in 
 the collective BiXij/M 6eou; see Lii- 
 nem. in loc. 
 
 19. t4 nvcv))i,a] ' the {Holy) Spirit;' 
 not merely 'vim divinam Christianis 
 propriam ' (Noesselt ; comp. Beek, 
 Seelenl. p: 37), nor even the gifts of 
 the Spirit as evinced in prophecy 
 (Theod.), nor, more generally, t'^v h> 
 aiiToh dvatpdeiffav tov TLveufiaTos X'^P^^ 
 (Athan. ad Scrap, i. 4 ; see Chrys.), but 
 simply the Holy Spirit, which dwells 
 within in association with our spirit, 
 and evinces His presence by varied 
 spiritual gifts and manifestations ; 
 comp. I Cor. xii. 8 sq., and see Waterl. 
 Serm. rxi. Vol. v. p. 641. The sub- 
 ject of prayer leads naturally to the 
 mention of the Holy Inspirer of it 
 (comp. Kom. viii. 26, Gal. iv. 6), and 
 thence to the specification of other 
 gifts (ir/)o07)re(o!, ver. 20) which ema- 
 nate from the same blessed Source. 
 (jlt) o-pivvure] 'quench not,' whether in 
 yourselves or in others; contrast 2 Tim. 
 i. 6. The Eternal Spirit is represented 
 as a fire (comp. Andrewes, Serm. Vol. 
 III. p. 124, A.iC. Libr.) which it was 
 regarded as possible to extinguish,— 
 G 
 
82 
 
 nPOS eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 21 i^oveevehe- vdvra Se SoKt/xdl^eTe, to KaXhv Karexere- 
 
 not however in the present case by a 
 ploi draffapros (Chryii.), but, in accord- 
 ance with the context, — by a studied 
 repression and disregard of its mani- 
 festation, arising from erroneous per- 
 ceptions and a mistaken dread of en- 
 thusiasm; comp. Neander, Planting, 
 Vol. I. p. 202 (Bohn). This is more 
 distinctly specified in what follows. 
 For several illustrations of the ex- 
 pression, see exx. in Wetst., the most 
 pertinent of which is Galen, de Tkeriac. 
 I. 17, TO <t>6.piiaKov...Tb ii),(p\)Tov irvcO/ia 
 fiaSlas (T^hmaiv. Plutarch, de Defect. 
 Orac. § 17, p. 419 B, iiroapTimi rh 
 vvev/ia. Tisch. ed. 7 gives ^h- 
 
 vvTc on the authority of B'D^FG. 
 
 20. irpo<|>i|T«£os] 'prophecies;' not 
 merely announcements of what was to 
 come to pass, but, in accordance with 
 the more extended meaning of ir/jo^ij- 
 TTjs in the N. T. (see notes onEph. iv. 
 1 1), varied declarations of the divine 
 counsels and expositions of God's ora- 
 cles, immediately inspired by and 
 emanating from the Holy Spirit ; see 
 Meyer on i Cor, xii. 10, and Fritz. 
 Rom. xii. 6, Vol. iii. p. 55 — 59. The 
 difference then between ordinary 8t- 
 Sax4 and irpo^iiTeLa consisted in this, 
 that the latter was due to the imme- 
 diate influence of the Spirit, the former 
 to an i( oUetas Sid\4yeir0ai., Chrys. ; 
 see Neander, Planting, Vol. I. p. 133 
 (Bohn), and for a comparison between 
 prophecy and speaking with tongues, 
 Thomdike, Relig. Assemblies, oh. v. 
 Vol. I. p. 182 sq. (A.-C. Libr.). 
 l|ov8evclT€] 'despise,' ' set at naught ;' 
 a word used in the N. T. both by St 
 Paul (Eom. xiv. 3, 10, i Cor. i. 28, 
 al.) and St Luke (xviii. 9, xxiii. 11, 
 Acts iv. 11), and found also in the 
 LXX and later writers. On this word, 
 and also the more orthographically 
 correct but apparently less usual i^ov- 
 
 devetv (Markix. 12, Lackm.) and i^ov- 
 Bevovv (Mark ix. 12; LXX; al. : 
 Hesych. avoioKtii&^av), compare Lo- 
 beck, Phrynichus, p. 182. The habit 
 of despising prophecies, here expressly 
 forbidden, most probably arose from 
 instances of irKavQivTa and ifKav&iJ.evoi 
 in the Church of Thessalonica, who 
 had brought discredit on this spiritual 
 gift. The deduction of Olsh., that 
 
 up to the present time St Paul had no 
 apprehensions of any of the fanaticism 
 which afterwards showed itself among 
 the Thesaalonians (see 2 Thess.), seems 
 in every way questionable ; contrast 
 Neander, Planting, Vol. i. p. 203 sq. 
 (Bohn). They were even now in a 
 state of unrest and disquietude (ch. 
 iv. 1 1 sq.) ; nay, the very exhortation 
 before us gains all its point from the 
 fact that the more sober thinkers had 
 been probably led by the present state 
 of things to undervalue and unduly 
 reject all the less usual manifestations 
 of the Spirit. 
 
 21. irdvTa 81 8oki)i,.] 'hut prove (M 
 things ;' antithetical exhortation to the 
 foregoing: 'instead of despising and 
 seeking to repress spiritual gifts, let 
 them be manifested, but be careful to 
 prove them.' Xlivra must thus have 
 a restricted sense, and be limited to 
 the X'*/''''/""''* previously alluded to ; 
 Trdi'Ta, 0ij7{, SoKt/idfere TOvriiyn t4s 
 ivras irpo<j)riTelas, Chrys. A more 
 precise exhortation is given to the Co- 
 rinthians (i Cor. xiv. 29), from which, 
 observing the similar and peculiar 
 subject (Trpo^TjTtlo) here in question, 
 we must conclude that the present 
 precept to exercise spiritual discern- 
 ment applied not so much to the 
 Church at large (Neander, Planting, 
 Vol. I. p. 1 38, Bohn) as more restrict- 
 edly to those who had the special gift 
 of SiaKpla-eu irvevnATUv, i Cor. xii. 10. 
 
V. 21, 22, 23- 
 
 83 
 
 avo iravTos e'lSovi vovijpov aTreyea-Oe^ 
 
 AuToy ^6 o 
 
 .23 
 
 In I John iv. i (see Waterl. Serm. 
 XXVII.) the exhortation is appy. more 
 general, but the points to be tried are 
 more elementary, and more easy to be 
 decided on. On the meaning of the 
 verb SoKt/idtew, see notes on Phil. i. 
 10, Trench, S^non. Part 11. § 24 ; and 
 for an ingenious but improbable expla- 
 nation both of the word [to test as a 
 coin] and the following verse. Hansel, 
 Stud. u. Krit, 1836, p. 170 sq. The 
 5^ is omitted by Rec, and by Tisch. 
 ed. 2, bat only on the authority of 
 AN^; appy. many mss. ; Syr., Copt., 
 al. ; Orig., Chrys. (often), Theod., al. 
 On the one hand there is only the in- 
 ternal argument that Sk was interpo- 
 lated to help out the connexion ; on 
 the other hand there is the strong ex- 
 ternal support, the ' paradiplomatic ' 
 argument (oomp. Pref. to Gai. p. xvii, 
 Scrivener, Introd. to Criticism of N. T. 
 p. 376) of the AE having fallen out 
 before the ^O, and lastly the plausible 
 internal argument that Sk was omitted 
 to make this sentence equally uncon- 
 nected with what precedes and follows. 
 tS KoXdv Kar^.] 'holdfast that which 
 is good;' precept naturally and im- 
 mediately following on the foregoing : 
 'exercise the gift of biixpian, and 
 having found what is really good hold 
 to it ;' ri ^euS^ Koi ri, d\ri$fj /iera So- 
 Ki/ia(rlas Kplvere, Kal'rlyre to Sb^ar ifitv 
 KoXoi' Tovriari rets d\ijfle<s jrpo<f>riTelas 
 Korixere, Tovrian nuare, SiA <f>povTl- 
 Sos TTotscffdef Theoph. On the primary 
 meaning and derivation of Ka\6s [kuJ- 
 Xis], see Donalds. Cratyl. § 334 ; but 
 observe that in the N. T. it seems 
 equally co-extensive in meaning with 
 dyoflos.and frequently, as here, denotes 
 what is simply and morally good ; see 
 notes on AyaBbs on Gal. vi. 10, and 
 comp. Aristot. Ehetor.l. 9 (init. ), KoKhv 
 Hiv ovv larlv i av SC airb aiperiv or 
 
 iiraiverbv J. On this whole 
 
 verse, see an excellent practical ser- 
 mon by Waterland, Serm. XXIII. Vol. 
 V. p. 655 sq. 
 
 22. ctiro iravTos k.t.X.] 'abstain 
 from every form, of evil ;' general exhor- 
 tation appended to and suggested by, 
 but not closely connected (De W.) 
 with what precedes ; comp. Neand. 
 Planting, Vol. I. p. 204, note (Bohn). 
 In this verse there is some little diffi- 
 culty, depending first on the meaning 
 of etSovs, and secondly on the con- 
 struction of TTovTjpov. We will notice 
 these separately. EtSos cannot 
 
 here be 'appearance,' Auth., Calv. 
 (both probably misled by Vulg. ' spe- 
 cie'),, as this meaning is more than 
 lexically doubtful (comp. Luke iii. 22, 
 ix. 29, John V. 37, 2 Cor. v. 7), and, 
 even if it could be substantiated, would 
 here be inappropriate, since the anti- 
 thesis seems plainly to lie not between 
 rb Ka\bi> and any semblance of evil, 
 ' quod malum etiamsi non sit apparet ' 
 (Calv., comp. Wordsw. in loc), but 
 what is actually and distinctly such. 
 We therefore adopt the more technical 
 meaning 'species,' 'sort' (Plato, Epin. 
 p. 990 E, etdos Kal yhos, Parmen. p. 
 129 0, rb, yhri re xal eWi)), which is 
 supported by abundant lexical autho- 
 rity (see Rost u. Palm, Lex. s. v., and 
 the numerous exx. in Wetstein in loc), 
 and is exegetically clear and forcible ; 
 they were to hold fast rb xaXbv and 
 avoid every sort and species (/*<) To&rov 
 Jj iKelvov, dXX dirXws wavrbs, Theoph.) 
 of the contrary. So probably Vulg., 
 Clarom., 'specie,' and more plainly 
 
 Syr. 0X5 1 [negotio], Copt, hob [re], 
 
 .31th. mcgbar [agendi ratione], Goth., 
 al., appy. the Greek Ft, and nearly 
 all modern commentators. It is 
 
 more difficult to decide whether irovrj- 
 G2 
 
84 
 
 nP02 eE22AA0NIKEI2 A. 
 
 Geo? T?? elp^vtit djia&ai vfAcxi oXoreXeti,' kui oXo-, 
 Kkripov V/J.WV TO TTi/evfxa /cat ^ ■>|'i'X^ '^''" ''"" "■'^Z'" 
 
 poG is an adjective or substantive. 
 Most of the ancient Vv. (Syr., Vulg., 
 Copt., .^th.) adopt the former, and 
 so possibly the Greek commentators ; 
 the latter however preserves more 
 correctly the antithesis, and infringes 
 less (comp. Syr., Copt., al.) on the 
 technical meaning of elSos. So De 
 Wette, Liinem., Koch, Alf., and the 
 majority of modem commentators. 
 The absence of the article (Bengel, 
 Middl. Gr. Art. p. 378) does not con- 
 tribute to the decision ; as abstract 
 adjectives can certainly have this con- 
 struction, when it is not necessary to 
 mark the wholeness or entirety of what 
 is specified ; comp. Heb, v. 14, Plato, 
 JlepuU. II. p. 357 c, TplTov...ctdos dyo- 
 Bov, and see Jelf, Gr. § 451. 1. 
 The artificial interpretation of Hansel 
 {Stud. u. Krit. 1836, p.- 180 sq.), elS. 
 TTOv. = Kl§SyjKov vd/iiff/ia, founded on 
 the association of this text in several 
 patristic citations with our Lord's tra- 
 ditional saying ylvecrBe T/soirefiTai 
 Sixt/ioi (see Suicer,, Thesaur. Vol. 11. 
 p. 1281 sq.),is here adopted by Baumg.- 
 Crus., but rightly rejected by most 
 subsequent expositors. Even if we 
 admit the very doubtful assumption 
 that the simple eI5os might gain from 
 the context the more definite meaning 
 etSos mfdffiiaTOS, the use of drrix^o-Be 
 in such a form of expression would 
 still be, as De W. observes, appy. un- 
 precedented. 
 
 23. AvTJs 8^] 'But may He;' He 
 on whom all depends, — in contrast to 
 them and the efforts they might be 
 enabled to make ; comp. ch. iii. 12, 
 where however the emphasis is some- 
 what different, and the contrast less 
 definitely marked, i Q^ 
 
 Ttjs «lpiivris] 'the God of peace;' the 
 God of whom peace is a characterizing 
 
 attribute ; the gen. falling under the 
 general category of the gen. of content 
 (Scheuerl. Spit. § 16. 3, p. 115, comp. 
 notes on Phil. iv. 9), and the subst. 
 elfy^vT} marking the deep inward peace 
 and tranquillity which is God's espe- 
 cial gift, and which stands in closest 
 alliance with that holiness which the 
 preceding clauses inculcate. On this 
 meaning of elpiivi], see notes on Phil. 
 iv. 7, and on the various meanings 
 which it may assume in this and 
 similar collocations, see Beuss, Thiol. 
 ChrSt. IV. 18, Vol. II. p. 201. 
 oXoTcXcis] 'wholly;' 'per omnia,' 
 Vulg., — in your collective powers and 
 parts ; 6\ot. marking more emphati- 
 cally than 8X0VS that thoroughness and 
 pervasive nature of holiness (SXoi/s St 
 Skuv, CEcumen., 'secundum omnes 
 partes,' Cocceius) which the following 
 words specify with further exactness : 
 so distinctly Theoph., bXot. Si H iaH; 
 
 TOUT ^OTl ffCifJUTi Koi ^VXV' 'f'^i ^0C^^S 
 
 Si /loS^ffj;. This seems preferable to 
 the qualitative interpretation ' ad perfec- 
 tum,' Clarora., -.?Eth. (Syr. unites both 
 
 giving ^"^'snN ZuI^-lIQ^, 
 
 according to which iXorcKeis would be 
 used proleptioally (Syr.-Phil. ; comp. 
 reff. on A/iipiirTOVs, ch. iii. 13), but in 
 which the connexion between the sub- 
 stance of the first and second portions of 
 the prayer is less close and self-explana- 
 tory. The form bXareXii! is a ott. \ey6ii. 
 in the N. T., but occurs occasionally 
 in later Greek ; comp. Plutarch, de 
 Placitis Philos. § 2 1 , p. 909 B. 
 KaC] ' and '—to specify more exactly ; 
 the copula appending to the general 
 prayer one of more special details ; 
 see Winer, Gr. § 53. 3, p. 388, and 
 comp. notes on Phil. iv. 1 2. 
 6X6kXi]pov K.T.X.] 'may your spirit 
 
V. 23. 85 
 
 afJtefiTTWs iv r^ 7rapoval(ii rod Yiuplov ^/xwv 'Xijctom 
 
 ...be preserved entire; ' ^ot ' your whole 
 spirit. ..be preserved,' Auth., Wordsw., 
 comp. ' Syr. ; SKokK., as its position " 
 shows, not being an epithet but a 
 secondary predicate ; see Donalds. 
 Cratyl. § 302, and comp. notes on Col. 
 ii. 3. This distinction seems to be 
 clearly maintained by all the ancient 
 Vv. (except appy. Syr.) ; some, as 
 Vulg., al., preserving the order of the 
 Greek, others, as .^th., rendering 
 oXokA. by an adverb placed at the end 
 of the clause. The adj. oKaK\Tipos is 
 a Sis 'Keyiii.. in the N. T. (here and 
 James i. 4), and serves to mark that 
 which is ' entire in all its parts ' (iv /irj- 
 Sevl yLeiTo/ievoL, James I. c), differing 
 from T^Xetos as defining rather what is 
 complete, while the latter marks what 
 has reached its proper end and ma- 
 turity. In a word, the aspect of the 
 former word is (here especially) mainly 
 guantitcUive, of the latter mainly quali- 
 tative j comp. Trench, Synon. § 22, 
 and for exx. see the large collection of 
 Wetst. in loc., one of the most per- 
 tinent of which is Lucian, Macrob. § 2, 
 els yijpas d^iiceaSai iv vyLacvoicrjj t^ 
 
 yj/VXV KO'l 0\0K\ljp<l) TIfi O'li/mTi. SoB 
 
 also Eisner, Obs. Vol. n. p. 278. 
 The predicate clearly belongs to all 
 three substantives, though structurally 
 connected with the first. vfiiSv 
 
 t6 irvevjjia k.t.X.] 'your spirit and 
 soul and body ;' distinct enunciation 
 of the three component parts of the 
 nature of man : the irveOfia, the higher 
 of the two united immaterial parts, 
 being the ' vis superior, agena, impe- 
 rans in homine ' (Olsh. ) ; the tfivxn, 
 ' vis inferior qase agitur, movetur, in 
 imperio tenetur' (ib.), the sphere of 
 the will and the affections, and the 
 true centre of the personality; see 
 Olsha'usen, Opusc. p. 154, Beek, Seelenl. 
 II. 12, 13, p. 30 8(1., Schubert, Geich. 
 
 der Seele, § 48, Vol. 11. 495 sq.,comp. 
 Vitringa, Obs. Safr. p. 549 sq., and 
 more especially Destiny of the Crea- 
 ture, Serm. v., where this text is con- 
 sidered at length, and the scriptural 
 distinction between the vvevfia and 
 'f'ux'l discussed and substantiated. It 
 may be remarked that we frequently 
 find instances of an apparent dichoto- 
 my, 'body and soul' (Matth. vi. 25, 
 X. 28, Luke xii. 22, 23), or ' body and 
 spirit' (i Oor. v. 3, vii. 34, cf. Kom. 
 viii. 10), but such passages will be 
 found to be only accommodations to 
 the popular division into a material 
 and immaterial part ; the ^vxh in the 
 former of the exceptional cases includ- 
 ing also the irveO/jia, just as in the 
 latter case the Trvevfia. also compre- 
 hends the ^vxfi; see Olsh. I. c, p. 
 153 note, and contrast the ineffectual 
 denial of Loeaner, 06s. p. 381. To 
 assert that enumerations like the pre- 
 sent are rhetorical (De W.), or worse, 
 that the Apostle probably attached 
 ' no distinct thought to each of these 
 words ' (Jowett), is plainly to set aside 
 all sound rules of scriptural exegesis. 
 Again to admit the distinctions but 
 refer them to Platonism (Liinem.) is 
 equally unsatisfactory, and equally 
 calculated to throw doubt on the truth 
 of the teaching. If St Paul's words 
 do here imply the trichotomy above 
 described (comp. TJsteri, Lehrb. p. 
 384 sq.), then such a, trichotomy is 
 infallibly real and true. And if Plato 
 or Philo have maintained (as appears 
 demonstrable) substantially the samp 
 views, then God has permitted a hea- 
 then and a Jewish philosopher to ad- 
 vance conjectural opinions which have 
 been since confirmed by the independ- 
 ent teaching of an inspired Apostle. 
 d|ie|i.irTtt>s] ' blamelessly ; ' the adver- 
 bial predication of quality appended to 
 
86 
 
 nP02 GEZSAAONIKEIS A. 
 
 24 Upto'ToS Tt]pt]6e[t]. TrierTOi 6 koXoiv vfiai, ot KUi 
 irot^a-et. 
 
 6t r n <i?-\^^ ' » Epistle to be read be- 
 
 aiT-Kaaav^^ TOVi aoeA(povi Trai/Tay ev fore the chuxch. 
 
 TfipiiBelri, oKoKKiipov (see above) involv- 
 ing that of quantity. On the meaning 
 of afiefiVTOs, ' is in quo nihil desiderari 
 potest,' and its distinction from d/juii- 
 Hos, see notes on ch, ii. 10, and Tittm. 
 Synon. I. p 29. 
 
 €V T'g irapovir^ k.t.X.] Time — the 
 coming of Christ to judgment — when 
 the preservation of the oKoKKripla is 
 especially to be evinced and found to 
 be realized : comp. notes on ch. ii. 19. 
 On the more exact way in which this 
 oKoKlKyipla. may be ascribed to bodyi 
 soul, and spirit, see Destiny of the 
 Creature, p. 107. 
 
 24. irioTos K T.X.] ' Faithful is 
 He who calleth you,' 'qui vocat,' Cla- 
 rom., BcU. God the Father; comp. 
 
 1 Cor. i. 9, and see notes on Gal. i. 6. 
 The tense is neither to be pressed as 
 implying an enduring act (Baumg.- 
 Crus., Bisp.), nor to be regarded as 
 identical with the aor. 'qui vocavit,' 
 Vulg., Goth., but simply to be con- 
 sidered as timeless, and as equivalent 
 to a substantive, ' your Caller ; ' see 
 notes on Qal. v. 8, and Winer, Gr. § 
 45- 7> P- 316. IIi(7t4s here in ref. to 
 God implies a faithfulness and trueness 
 to His nature and promises (i Cor. i. 
 9, inirThs 9. Si o5 ikX'^BTyre, x. 13, 
 
 2 Cor. i. 18, 2 Tim. ii. 13), and hence 
 becomes practically synonymous with 
 dXjjfliis, Chrys., Theod. ; ir ykp T<fi 
 iroietv d IvayyiWerai vurrds iffri Aa- 
 \uv, Athanas. coMr. Arian, II. 10, 
 Vol. I. p. 478 (ed. Bened.), see Keuss, 
 ThM. ChrU. iv. 13, Vol. 11. p. 124. 
 fis Kal iroitja-Ei] ' who- also will dn,' not 
 exactly ' what I wish' (De W.), nor 
 ^1^' $ iKi.\ec{ev sc. ffciirei (CEcum., 
 Theoph.), but simply ' that same thing 
 
 (Arm.), Bcil. ri dfti/iTTUS vims rripi]- 
 Bfivat, (Bisp., Lilnem), or, as the iden- 
 tity of subject suggests, t4 ir/iiirai 
 and t4 Trip^Sipiai, — ^in a word, the 
 substance of the prayer expressed in 
 the preceding verse. In such cases 
 there is really no ellipse of any pro- 
 noun ; iroietv is merely ' nude positnm,' 
 receiving its more exact explanation 
 from the context ; comp. Koch in loc. , 
 and Schomann on Isseus, de ApoU. 
 Seer. § 35, p. 372. 
 
 25. irpo<rcir\ccr6c xtpX i])iuv] 'pray 
 for us;' comp. Eph. vi. 19, Col. iv. 3, 
 2 Thess. iii. i, Heb. xiii. 18. De 
 Wette and Alf. remark that irepl is 
 here less definite than ivip ; but it is 
 very doubtful whether in this and 
 similar formulae in the N. T. the differ- 
 ence is really appreciable; see notes 
 on Eph. vi. 19, Fritz. Horn. i. 8, Vol. 
 I. p. 26, and for the general distinction 
 between the prepositions, notes on Gal. 
 i. 4, and on Phil. i. 7. The prayer 
 was doubtless intended to include re- 
 ference both to bis own personal state 
 and to the general success of his Apo- 
 stolic work ; comp. Cocceius in loc. 
 Whether Silvanus and Timothy are 
 included in rjiiSp is perhaps doubtful : 
 Lachm, inserts in brackets koI before 
 vepl rip,av, but on authority [BD'; a 
 few mss. ; Clarom., Sangerm., Syr.- 
 Phil., Goth.] scarcely sufBcient. 
 
 16. d<nrd<rair8c K.T.X.] ' iSa2ute a22 
 the brethren;' concluding exhortation, 
 apparently addressed to the Elders of 
 the Church (consider ver. 27). In the 
 parallel passages, Eom. xvi. 16, i Cor. 
 xvi. 20, and 2 Cor. xiii. 12 (iv i.yl(f 
 ^t\., see Fritz. Som. I. c), comp. i 
 Pet, V. 14, the exhortation is irwd- 
 
"V. 24 — 27- 
 
 87 
 
 (f)i\i^fiaTi ay'i.(f. evooKil^a) vfxa^ tov }\.vptov avayvta- 27 
 trQrjvai rrjv ein<TToKriv iraaiv TOii [dyLotfj aoeXcjiois, , 
 
 •27. {ayiois] a5eX0ois] The reading ia very doubtful. JRec., Scholz, and 
 Tisch. ed. 7, insert aylon with AKL ; moat msa. ; Syr. (both), Vulg., Copt., 
 Goth., ^th. (Piatt), Arm.; Chrys., Theod. {J)e Wette, Koch). It ia omitted by 
 Lachm. and Tisch. ed. i, 2, with BDEFGX ; 6 mas. ; Clarom., jEth. (Pol.) ; 
 Ambrst. (Liinem., Alf.). Though the uncial authoiitiea strongly preponderate 
 for the omiasion, still the almost unanimous testimony of the Vv., and the 
 probability that a word, here used somewhat uniquely by St Paul in adjectival 
 connexion with aSeX^ois, should be omitted as superfluous, prevent our ex- 
 cluding it altogether from the text : comp. Heb. iii. i. The epithet ia certainly 
 not without pertinence in reference to the adjuration and strength of language 
 which marks the veraea : all the brethren, viewed generally as Christians, were 
 holy (comp. Numb. xvi. 3), and would especially profit by having this letter 
 read to them. 
 
 fftiffde aXXiJXous: ixeibrj ^iKTjfiaTi 
 airais itrirdffaffdai oOk '/jSOvaTo, Airiiv 
 bi eripbtv aitroiis dtTTrdfeTai, Chrys. 
 The Oriental custom of kissing in their 
 greetings (Winer, BWB. a. v. 'Kuss,' 
 Vol. I. p. 688) is here enhanced with 
 Christian characteristics : it is to be a 
 ^iXijfia ciyiov, a ^LXTjfta dydTnjs, I Pet. 
 v. 14, an 'osculum pacis,' Tertull. de 
 Oral. cap. 14, a <f)l\7jfia fivariKdy, 
 Clem. -Alex. Pcedag. III. 11, Vol. I. p. 
 301 (ed. Potter), — whether as given 
 after prayer (Just. M. Apol. I. 65 ; 
 comp. Const. Apost. 11. 57, rb ii> Kvplif 
 <j>L\rina), or more probably aa a token 
 of brotherly love and holy affection, — 
 no idle, nieaningleas, and merely pagan 
 custom of salutation. On this custom, 
 see more in Bingham, Antiq. iir. 3. 3, 
 Augusti, Archaol. Vol. II. p. 718 sq., 
 Coteler on Const. Apost, I, c, and 
 Fritz. Jlom. xvi. 16, Vol. in. p. 310. 
 The prep, iv may here possibly mark 
 the accompaniment (see notes on Col. 
 iv. 2), but is more naturally taken as 
 simply instrumental ; the <j)i\rilJi.a being 
 that in which, so to say, the dffracrfiAs 
 was involved; see notes on ch. iv. 18. 
 27. ivopKO[,ia ifiSs K.T.X.'i ' I adjure 
 you, by the Lord.^ This very strong 
 
 form of entreaty has been differently 
 explained. There does not seem suf- 
 ficient reason for concluding from ver. 
 12, 13, with Olsh., that there had been 
 such differences between the Elders and 
 the Church of Thesaalonica as to sug- 
 gest a fear that the Epistle might not 
 be communicated to the church at 
 large ; as the language of those verses 
 is admirably calculated both to be- 
 apeak reapect for the Elders, and to 
 conciliate the Church. That the ex- 
 pression aroae from slight distrust com- 
 bined with a BtpjiTj Sidyoia towards his 
 converts (Chrys., Theoph.) is impro- 
 bable ; that it was u customary form 
 with St Paul (Jowett i) is indemon- 
 strable ; that the inspired Apostle was 
 not maater of his words or did not 
 know their value (Jowett 2) is mon- 
 strous. We therefore may perhapa 
 fall back on the reason hinted by 
 Theodoret and expanded by recent 
 expositors, — that a deep sense of the 
 great spiritual importance of this Ep., 
 not merely to those who were anxious 
 about the Koinii/ievoi (ch. iv. 13) but 
 to all without exceptiorl, suggested the 
 unusual adjuration ; SpKov irpoHTiBaKe, 
 iraat, rriv ix Trjs Karayviiceus U(pi\ciar 
 
88 
 
 IIP02 eE22AAONIKBI2 A. 
 
 28 'H X°/"f '^°'^ J^uplou flfMWV 'lijtroy Benediction- 
 
 "ji-piCTTOV fJLed VfxSlV. 
 
 irpayiMTiimi, Tlieod. The objections 
 of Baur are briefly but satisfactorily 
 answered by Neander, Planting, Vol. 
 II. p. 136 (Bohn). The verb 
 
 ivopK. [Rec. has the more usual d/julfw 
 with D^iD'FGKLN ; mss.] is appy. 
 not found elsewhere, and is even 
 omitted in the best modem lexicons. 
 Tov KiJpiov] Aocus. of the person ; 
 oomp. Mark v. 7, Acts xix. 13, and 
 for the similar construction of opKda, 
 see Jelf, Gr. § 583. 140. On the two 
 forma opKovv3,nd opKlt^eiv, and the pre- 
 valence of the former in Attic writers, 
 see Lobeck, Phryn. p. 360, 361. 
 dvaYvucrSiivai] ' be read — as the con- 
 text suggests — ^uUicly ; ' comp. Luke 
 iv. 16, Acts XV. 3 1, 2 Cor. iii. 15, Col. 
 iv. 16. This meaning (' palam prsele- 
 gatur,' Schott) is however not specially 
 due to the prep, avd, as dvayv. is 
 frequently used without any accessory 
 notion of publicity, but is reflected on 
 the verb by the general tenor of the 
 sentence. The aor. infin. perhaps re- 
 fers to the single act (Alf.), but must 
 ■certainly not be pressed, as this tense 
 in the infinitive, especially after verbs 
 of 'hoping,' 'commanding,' <fcc. (see 
 notes on ch. iv. 10), is often used in 
 Reference not merely to single acts, but 
 to what is either timeless (' ab omni 
 temporis definiti conditione libera et 
 immunis' Stallb. on Plato, Evihyd. p. 
 140), or Am^Xy eventual, and dependent 
 on the action expressed by the finite 
 verb; see Scheuerl. Syni. § 31. 2 b. 
 
 p. 320 sq., Winer, Gr. § 44. 7. b, 
 p. 296, and esp. Schmalfeld, Syntax, 
 § 173. 4, p. 346, — where the diflferent 
 moods of the infin. are carefully con- 
 sidered and contrasted. 
 
 28. 'HxapisK.T.X.] The concluding 
 benedictions of St Paul's Epp. are 
 somewhat noticeably varied. Adopt- 
 ing the best attested readings, we may 
 observe that the shortest form is 17 
 Xii/J's iJ.iB' viJ,S)v, Col. iv. 18, 2 Tim. iv. 
 22 (preceded by KiJ/kos 'I. X. lurk 
 TOV irveiix. <rov), and similarly ^ %• M^^ 
 tAvtuv i/iSv, Tit. iii. 15, [Heb. xiii. 
 25,] and ij X- j"fi <">''> I Tim. vi. 21 ; 
 the longest being the familiar benedic- 
 tion in 2 Coi-. xiii. 13. Of the rest we 
 have first, r/ x- roO Kvptov ^ii(Si>'I. X. 
 /lefl' i/iwy, as here and Eom. xvi. 20 ; 
 2 Thess. iii. 18 and Eom. xvi. 24 (a 
 doubtful verse) give irdtTav i/i. ; i Cor. 
 xvi. 23 omits ■^fiwv and probably Xpicr- 
 Tou, and appends Tj Aydinj fwv jwcri 
 ircivT. iii. h X. 'I. Secondly, ^ x- '^"^ 
 Kvplov iifuSv 'I. X. /leri, tov jryeii/ioTos 
 vfiuv, as Philem. 25, Gal. vi. 18 (add- 
 ing dSeXipoC), Phil. iv. 23 (onl. injuSv). 
 And lastly, 1} x- Mf4 irivruv tUv 
 iyaifiivTOiv riv Kvpiov Tifjiwii 'I. X. h 
 i,(p8apaLi}, Eph. vi. 24. See Koch on 
 Philem. 25, p. 135 sq. The diirjv [Eeo. 
 with AD^iD'EKLN; mss.] is appy. 
 rightly omitted by Lachm. and Tisch'. 
 with BD^FG ; mss. ; Clarom., San- 
 germ., Vulg. (Amiat.), al., being very 
 probably a liturgical addition. 
 
nPOS 0ESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THIS short but important Epistle was written by the Apostle 
 to his converts at Thessalonica a short time after his First 
 Epistle, and apparently from the same place. If, as seems highly 
 probable, Corinth be regarded as the place from which the First 
 Epistle was written (see Introd. to the First Ep.), we may reason- 
 ably suppose the present Epistle to have been written from the 
 same city: the same companions (ch. i. i, comp. i Thess. i. i) were 
 still with the Apostle (contrast Acts xviii. i8); similar forms and 
 circumstances of trial appear to have been surrounding him (ch. 
 iiL 2, compared with i Thess. ii. i6, Acts xviii. 6). 
 
 The exact time at which the Epistle was written cannot be 
 determined. If the First Epistle was written soon after the arrival 
 of Timothy from Macedonia (ch. iii. 6), and towards the commence- 
 ment of the Apostle's eighteenth-month stay at Corinth (Acts xviii. 
 ii), we shall probably not be far wrong in placing the date of 
 the Second Epistle towards the end of the first twelve months of 
 the Apostle's residence there (comp. ch. iii. 2 with Acts xviii. 12, 
 and consider ver. 18, eri ■jrpotrit.etvws Tjfiipa^ iKavdi), and thus 
 but a few months after that of the First Epistle. "We may then 
 specify the autumn of a.d. 53 as an approximately correct date: 
 see Davidson, Introd. Vol. 11. p. 449. 
 
 The circumstances which gave rise to the Epistle seem clearly 
 to have been some additional information which the Apostle had 
 received concerning the disquieted state of the minds of his con- 
 verts. Whether this reached him through the bearer of the First 
 Epistle, or formed the substance of a letter from the elders of the 
 Church of Thessalonica, must remain, mere conjecture. This 
 much however seems to be certain, that some letter had been cir- 
 culated at Thessalonica purporting to come from the Apostle (ch. 
 ii. 2) which, combined probably with some teaching equally said 
 to be derived from St Paul (comp. notes on ch. ii. 2), had added 
 
92 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 greatly to the general excitement, and rendered it necessary for 
 this Second Epistle to be written, and to be vouched for by a clear 
 mark of genuineness (ch. iii. 17). The purport of the letter and 
 the teaching was clearly to the effect that the day of the Lord was 
 at hand; and it does not seem improbable that this might have 
 been based on some expressions in the First Epistle (ch. iv. 15, 16, 
 17, V. 2 sq.), which had been distorted or exaggerated so as better 
 to keep alive the feverish anxiety and iinregidated enthusiasm 
 of the converts in this busy city. We may thus perhaps, with 
 Davidson (Introd. Yol. 11. p. 448), consider it more probable that 
 the Second Epistle was an indirect than a direct result of the First. 
 It was apparently not so much designed to correct innocent mis- 
 apprehensions of the former Epistle (Paley, al.) as to remove a 
 positively false construction which had been put — whether with 
 a partly good or mainly bad intent we know not — ^both on that 
 Epistle and on the Apostle's general teaching. 
 
 The whole Epistle indeed is so clearly supplemental to the 
 First (comp. also ch. ii. 15) that we may without hesitation reject 
 the opinion of Grotius and Ewald, who reverse the order of the 
 two Epistles. 
 
 The main object of the Epistle then was to calm excitement, 
 and to make it perfectly plain that the Lord's second Advent was 
 not close at hand, nay, that a mysterious course of events pre- 
 viously alluded to (Ch. ii. 5), of which the beginning could con- 
 fessedly be already recognised (ver. 7), had first to be fully 
 developed. Corrective instruction is thus the chief subject; with 
 this however is associated cheering consolation under afflictions 
 (ch. i. 4 sq.), and direct, exhortation to orderly conduct (ch. iii. 6), 
 industry (ver^ 8sq.), and quietness (ver. 12). 
 
 The isbutjienticity and genuineness are supported by early and 
 explicit external testimonies (Irenseus c. Hmr. iii. 7. 2, Clem.- 
 Alex. Strom, v. p. 655,- ed. Pott., Tertullian de Resurr. Carn. cap. 
 24), and have never been called in question till recently. The 
 objections however are of a most arbitrary and subjective' character, 
 and do not deserve any serious consideration. Complete answers 
 will be found in Liinemann, Einhitung, p. 163 sq., and Davidson, 
 Introd, Vol. 11. p. 454 sq. 
 
nPOS 0ESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 Apostolic address and I I AYAOS Koi ^iXovavOS KOI lilflO- I. 
 
 JLpi 
 
 sail 
 
 salutation. 
 
 ' ' 6eoi Ty eKKXtjcria. QetraakoviKeafv 
 ev Qew -iraTpl ti/j-mv Koi J^vpi<p^It]trou Xoiittw. X'"/"^ ^ 
 vniv KOI eipj^vt] airo Qeov iraTpoi ^/j.ooi' koi Kvpiov 
 Ij/ctow XptcrroG. 
 
 2. varpiis ^Sk] The reading is doubtful. Tiscli. (ed. 2, 7) omits, and 
 Lachm. brackets thimv with BDE ; 5 mss. ; Claroiu., Sangenu. ; Theoph. ; 
 'Ambrst. (ed.), Pel. [Limem., Alf). C is deficient. The pronoun is retained 
 in Sec. with AFGKLX; appy. great majority of mas.; Syr. (both), Aug., 
 Vulg., Goth., .lEth. (both), Copt., Arm.; Chrys., Theod., al. {Griesb., but 
 marked with"),— and appy. rightly; for on the one hand the preponderance of 
 external authority is very debided, and on the other the probability of an 
 omission either accidentally or intentionally, owing to the ■^/liSv just preceding, 
 is not much less than the probability of an interpolation to conform with other 
 Epistles. 
 
 X. IlavXos Kal SiXovavis KaV T.] 
 
 The same form of salutation as in the 
 First Epistle ; see notes in lac. The 
 only difference lies in the addition of 
 riiiSv to irarpt, which, contrary to 
 what we might have expected, does 
 not appear to have suggested any 
 variety of reading. For a brief account 
 of SUvanus and Timothy, who are 
 here, as in the First Ep., associated 
 with the Apostle as having co-operated 
 with him in founding the Church of 
 Thessalonica, see notes on i Thess. i. i. 
 2. x&pis v)iXv KoX Apii^v>\] IRegalaT 
 form of salutation, uniting both the 
 
 Greek X'^^P"" ^^^ ^^^ Hebrew DIPB' 
 (Gen. xliii. 23, Judges vi. 23, al.); rb 
 Xdpis ii/iTv ovTui TI6711T1.V (Sffirep yfieU 
 T 6 X o (p e I V ^v Tofs iTcypa^'ats tiSuItl- 
 
 dToKGiv eluBajxev, Theod. -Mops. p. 145 
 (ed. Fritz.) : see more in notes on 
 Eph. i. 2, and in the long and labori- 
 ous note of Koch on i Thess. i. i. 
 The remark of Thorn. Aquin. is not 
 without point, ' xi^pts quas est princi- 
 pium omnia boni, elprjurj quse est finale 
 bonorum omnium ;' see also notes ori 
 Col. i. i. diri @£0v iraTpis 
 
 i]|t.] 'from God owr Father/ soil, as 
 the source from which it emanates! 
 In 2 John 3 we find irapa in the same 
 combination, but with a difference of 
 meaning that in the present case (in 
 ref. to God) is scarcely appreciable, 
 and depends perhaps entirely on the 
 usage and mode of conception of the 
 writer. St Jphn, for example, uses 
 rapci. (with gen.) and &ir6 in a proper- 
 
94 
 
 nPOS eESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 3 -Eixc^piaruv ScjielXo/^eu rw OeS -/raV- Sh*aS''p?t1?n'?e'7'SS 
 
 , , ^ '?^J.' a" ">• ' will recompense you 
 
 Tore Vepl V/IOOV, aoe\(pOl, KaOmi ai^lOV and avenge you. May 
 
 ' i- > t I « - ^ He count you worthy of 
 
 ea-Tiv OTt VTrepav^avei i] iriarrii vfiwv, Kai Hia calling. 
 
 tion rather more than i to 3, while 
 St Paul uses the same prepp. in a pro- 
 portion of I to nearly 10. The gene- 
 ral distinction between these prepp. 
 (avb, emanation simply ; wapi,, eman. 
 from a personal source) and the more 
 frequently used iK is well stated by 
 Winer, Gr. § 47. b, p. 326. 
 Kal ElvpCov K.T.X.] Scil. koI airh Kv- 
 plov K.T.'K, ; not Kai irarp&s Ki/p£ou 
 K.T.X., an interpretation rendered 
 highly improbable by the occurrence of 
 irariip without any gen. — ^here possibly 
 (see crit. note); with less doubt in Gal. 
 i. 3, I Tim. i. 1 ; and with no var. of 
 reading in 2 Tim. i. -i, Tit. i. 4 ; see 
 notes on, Eph. i. 3. 
 
 3 . Evxap. oif>cC\o|i,cv] ' We are hound 
 to give iJiMnks,' scil. St Paul, Silvanus, 
 and Timothy. Though we must be 
 cautious in pressing the plural in every 
 case, yet in the present, when we re- 
 member the relation in which Silvanus 
 and Timothy stood to the Church of 
 Theasalonica, it can hardly be over- 
 looked : see notes on i Theas. i. 2. On 
 this use of fixapiareiy in the sense of 
 X'i'Pi-v ^X^tv, see notes on, Phil. i. 3, 
 and for the constructions of eixap., 
 notes on Col. i. 12. The occurrence 
 in this connexion of so strong a word 
 as i4>el\av is well worthy of note. 
 TEplv|uSv] 'concerning you j' with no 
 very appreciable diflferenoe from tiWp 
 (Eph. i. 16) in the same formula ; see 
 notes on i Thess. i. 2, v. 25, and for 
 the distinction between these preposi- 
 tions in cases where they appear less 
 interchangeable, see on Gal. i. 4, and 
 on Phil. i. J. Kuecis^Siiv 
 
 loTiv] 'ap it is meet ;' not on the one 
 hand a mere parenthetical addition to 
 the preceding tiixap. iipeiX. (' ut par 
 
 est,' Beza), nor yet on the other an 
 emphatic statement of the ' modus 
 eximius' (Schott; Kal 81& '\6yui> Kal 
 Si' Ipyuv, Theoph. 2) in which such 
 a evxapiarla ought to be offered, but 
 simply a connecting clause between 
 the first member of the sentence and 
 the distinctly causal statement Srt 
 virepav^Avn k.t.X. which follows, and 
 with which xaBiis a^iov k.t.X. stands 
 in more immediate union. Thus, as 
 Lunem. well observes, while the o(j>d- 
 Xo/icv states the duty of the eixapurrla 
 on its svijective side, Koffis k.t.X. 
 subjoins the objective aspects. Few 
 probably will hesitate to prefer this 
 simple and logical explanation to any 
 assumption so injurious to the inspired 
 writer as that of a tautology design- 
 ed to supply the place of emphasis 
 (Jowett). oTi will thus be 
 
 not relatival, j [quod] Syr., but dis- 
 tinctly causal, * quoniam,' Vulg., 
 Clarom., ^th. (both), Goth., Syr.- 
 Phil., — in close union with the clause 
 immediately preceding. It may be 
 remarked that few particles in St 
 Paul's Epp. cause a more decided dis- 
 crepancy of interpretation than dri. 
 Bet wee the merely objective (Winer, 
 <?'■• § S3- 9, p. 398) and the strictly 
 causal force (id. 8. b, p. 395) of the 
 particle it is not only often very diffi- 
 cult to decide, but in several passages 
 (e.g. Bom. viii. 21) exegetical con- 
 siderations of some moment will be 
 found to depend on the decision. 
 virepavScCvci] ' inca-eaxeth above mea- 
 sure;' a OTT. \ey6it. in the N. T. and 
 not a very common word elsewhere, 
 comp, Andoc. contr. Aloib, p. 32 (ed. 
 Steph.), Tois iirepav(avon4i>ovs. The 
 predilection of St Paul for emphatic 
 
I. 3, 4- 
 
 95 
 
 wXeovaCei fj ayairtj evoy eKuarov iravrtov v/jlwv eig dXX^- 4 
 Xoyy, axrre ^/uay avToyj ev u/uFv evKav^a(T6ai ev rais ex- 
 
 compounds of iwip bas been noticed 
 and briefly illustrated on Eph. iii. 20 ; 
 see also Fritz. Bom. v. 20, Vol. i. 
 p. 35 r. It may be observed that 
 virepau^ivei appears to be associated 
 with iriffTis aa conveying more dis- 
 tinctly the idea of organic evolution 
 and growth (comp. Matth. xvii. 10, 
 Lake'xvii. 6), while with dydirTi a 
 term is used which expresses more 
 generally the idea of spiritual enlarge- 
 ment, and of extension toward others ; 
 comp. notes on i Thess. iii. 12. 
 evis cKaoTow k.t.X.] ' of every one of 
 you aU toward each other;' not with- 
 out distinctive emphasis, - — - first, in 
 Bpecifying that this dydirrj was not 
 merely general, but was individually 
 manifested {tffTj ^v iraph Tdvruv 'q 
 dyiini tit irdnras, Theoph.), and 
 secondly, in showing that it was not 
 restricted in its exhibitions to those 
 who loved them, but extended to all 
 their fellow-Christians at Thessalo- 
 nica ; STav /iepLKWs dyaTriSiiev, oiK dyd- 
 wii TovTO dXXa SiivTans' el yap Sii, rhv 
 Qedy dyaitfs Trdyras dyara, Theoph. 
 On this verse see five practical ser- 
 mons by Manton, Works, Vol. iv. p. 
 420 — ^458 (Lond. 1698). 
 
 4. ijiids avTovs] 'tue ourselves,' — 
 as well as others, whether among you 
 or elsewhere, who might call attention 
 to your Christian progress more natu- 
 rally and appropriately than those 
 who felt it to be humanly speaking 
 due to their own exertions,- but who 
 in the present case could not forbear. 
 De Wette compares i Thess. i. 8, but 
 it may be doubted whether St Paul 
 had here that passage very distinctly 
 in his thoughts. To refer iJ/tSs avrois 
 to St Paul himself, in contrast to his 
 associates included in the preceding 
 plural verbs (Sohott), seems distinctly 
 
 illogical : and to leave open the possi- 
 bility that this maybe only an instance 
 of ' false emphasis or awkwardness of 
 expression' (Jowett) can only be cha- 
 racterized as a subterfuge at variance 
 with all fair, sound, and reasonable 
 exegesis. The distinction between 
 i^/XfTs airol (in which the emphasis 
 falls on the rjiuU) and avrol rineU (in 
 which it falls more on the airol, 
 comp. 1 Thess. iv. 9) is illustrated by 
 Kriiger, Sprackl. § 51. i. 8. The 
 order airois iifias is here actually 
 given by BK ; 7 mss. cv ifXv 
 
 lvKavxa<r6ai] 'boast in you;' you 
 were the objects of it, and the sphere 
 or rather substratum of its manifesta- 
 tion ; comp. Winer, Gr. § 48. a. 3. », 
 p. 345, and see notes on Gal. i. 24. 
 The somewhat rare form ipKavxaaBai. 
 is found a few times in the LXX, 
 e.j^. Psalm Iii. i, cvi. 47, al.,ineccl. 
 writers, and in .i^sop. Fab. ccoxLn. 
 p. 139 (ed. Schneider). The reading 
 is not by any means certain : Rec. 
 with DE(FG Kavx^aanBaC) KL ; mss. ; 
 many Ff., reads Kavx.d<r8ai; but the 
 probability that the change to the 
 simpler and more common form is due 
 to a corrector is in this case so great 
 that the reading of Lachm. and Tisch., 
 supported by ABK; 17, must be con- 
 sidered to deserve the preference. C 
 is deficient. Iv raCs ixxk. tou 
 
 0cov] 'in the Churches of God,' scil. 
 in Corinth and its neighbourhood, 
 where the Apostle was at the time of 
 writing this Ep. ; comp. Acts xviii. 
 II, and see Wieseler, Chronol, p. 
 254 sq. The remark of Chrys., iv- 
 ravBa SeiKuvvi xal vdKbv Tape\86vTa 
 Xpbvov ij yhp inrofiovij dvo xp&vov 0ai- 
 yerai woWov, oix iv S60 xal rpurlv 
 Tjliipaa, — must be received with reser- 
 vation ; as there seems no reason for 
 
£>0 
 
 nP02 eESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 Kkyicrlaii tov- 9eoi5 virep rrji inro/xov^? vfiwv Kai vicrretai 
 
 ev iraaiv tois Siooynois 11/j.wv koi rats 6\iy^€a-iv aty 
 
 5 avexeff6e, evSeiy/Jia t?? SiKalas Kpiarew} rod Qeov, ejy to 
 
 thinking that the Epietle was written 
 any later than the spring of 54 A.D. , 
 probably a few months earlier; comp. 
 litlnem. Mnleii. p. 160. 
 TTJs ■uiron. v|j,uv KoV irCiTTtcos] ' your 
 patience and faith;' precise subjects 
 of the Apostle's boasting. There is 
 no III Sid Sudiv in these words, soil. 
 viro/JU)i>rJ5 iv wiffrei., Grot., — ever a 
 doubtful and precarious assumption 
 (see Fritz, on Matth.f. 853 ff. Exours. 
 IV. where this gramr^atical formula is 
 well considered), nor does irlffns here 
 imply 'fidelis constantia confessionis * 
 Beng., ' Treue,' Lunem., — a doubtful 
 meaning of wlaTu in the N. T., es- 
 pecially when the more usual meaning 
 has just preceded (Tcr. 3) in reference 
 to the same subjects. The Thessa- 
 lonians evinced faith in its proper and 
 usual sense, in bearing up under their 
 tribulations, and leUeving on Him 
 while they were bearing His cross. 
 On the meaning of iirofiovii (here al- 
 most taking the place of iXirh, Neand. 
 Planting, p. 479, Bohn), which in the 
 N. T. seems ever to imply not mere 
 ' endurance ' but ' brave patience,' see 
 notes and reff. on 1 Thess. i. 3. 
 irdo-iv seems clearly to belong only to 
 S11117/10TS ; the article would otherwise 
 have been omitted before 6\i\j/e<n.v. 
 The distinction between the two words 
 appears sufficiently obvious : Siuyfiot 
 is the, more special term ('injurias 
 complectitur quas Judaei et ethnicl 
 Chriatianis propter doctrinse Christi- 
 anseprofessionemimposuerunt,' Fritz.), 
 6\ltj/is the more general and compre- 
 hensive; see Fritz. Horn. viii. 35, Vol. 
 Ji. p. 221. atsciv^ 
 
 X«o-fle] ' which ye are enduring' ' quas 
 Bustinetis,' Vulg., Clarom.; ordinary 
 
 and regular attraction (Winer, Gr. 
 § 24. I, p. 147) — for av dvix-t '^ we 
 follow the analogy of 2 Cor. xi i, 
 2 Tim. iv. 3, — or for ai avix-, if we 
 follow the more usual structure of the 
 verb in olassical Grreek. In the N. T. 
 avixo/uu is associated most commonly 
 with persons, and but rarely with 
 things; in both cases however it is 
 followed by a gen., while in earher 
 Greek it generally, esp. with persons, 
 takes the accus. ; see Rost u. Palm, 
 Leoc. s. V. Vol. I. p. 227. The present 
 tense shows that the application is 
 still going on, and is in no way at 
 variance with i Thess. i. 6, ii. 14 
 (contrast Baur, Paulus, p. 488, notes), 
 which refer to an earlier persecution 
 that appears to have partially subr 
 sided before the first Epistle was writ- 
 ten. The present allusion, as LOnem. 
 rightly observes, is to some fresh out- 
 break. On this verse and on the 
 remaining verses of the chapter, see 
 sixteen practical sermons by Manton, 
 Woris, Vol. V, p. 393 — 514 (Lond, 
 1698). 
 
 5. SvSei'Ypia K.T.X.] '(which is) a 
 token or proof of the righteous judg- 
 ment, &c. ;' appositional clause to the 
 whole foregoing sentence, and practi- 
 cally equiyalent to S n iarai ipSeiynn, 
 K.T.\.; comp. Phil. i. 28 [whence ob- 
 serve the comparatively slight differ- 
 ence of meaning between the two 
 verbals], and see Fritz. Bom, xii. i. 
 Vol. III. p. 16, The apposition here 
 seems to be not accusatival (Bom. xii. 
 I, I Tim. ii. 6), but nominatival, 
 tvSuyim not referring merely to the 
 clause that more immediately involves 
 the verb, but to all the preceding 
 words, Trji uTO/ioc^ST— ox^eirSe : the 
 
I. 5- 97 
 
 KaTa^iuOtjvai vfiui t?? jSao-tXe/a? to5 Qeov, virep ?j koI 
 
 endurance of all their peraecutiona 
 and their af9ictlonB in patience and 
 faith formed the &5«7/ia t^s Smalas 
 Kplaewt rov 9cou; comp. Gom. viii. 3, 
 and see Winer, Gr. § 59. 9, p. 472. 
 The reference of hSeiyna to the 
 Thessalonians ('ipsi Thessal. adveraa 
 suBtinentes intelligi possunt ease ex- 
 emplum justi judicii Dei,' Est.) is 
 .grammatically plausible, but both 
 logically and exegetically improbable 
 and unsatisfactory: the proof of the 
 righteous judgment of. God was not 
 to be looked for in the Thessalonians 
 themselves, but in their acts and their 
 patient endurance. riis 81- 
 
 KaCas KpCa-c4)»| ' the jwst jitdgment,' 
 that will be- displayed at the Lord's 
 second coming (comp. ver. 7), when 
 they who hare suffered with and for 
 the Lor|d will also reign with Him ; 
 comp. 2 Tim. ii. 12. To refer the 
 diKala Kplaa solely to present suffer- 
 ings as perfecting and preparing the 
 Thessalonians for future glory (Olsh.) 
 is to miss the whole point of the 
 sentence : the Apostle's argument is 
 that their endurance of sufferings in 
 faith is a token of God's righteous 
 judgment and of a future reward, 
 which will display itself in rewarding 
 the patient sufferers, as surely as it 
 will inflict punishment on their perse- 
 cutors ; fore aaipwi t&v KoiSivuv tA 
 affKay Kol rijv tup oiptu/tav irpotrS^x^^'^^ 
 §aai\elav, rov iyavoBiTov t^i> SiKalav 
 imrTd/ievoi ^(j>ov, Theod. 
 A% rh KaTa|ui>8.] 'tTiat ye may ie 
 counted worthy;' general direction of 
 the SiKala xpiiris and object to which 
 it tended. This infinitival clause has 
 been associated with three different 
 portions of the preceding sentence ; 
 (o) with ofs ivix^irSe, scil. 'quas 
 afflictiones sustinetis eo fine et fnictu 
 ut...efficiamini digni regno Dei,' Est. ; 
 E. T. 
 
 (5) with luSeiy/ia — Geou, scil. 'quae 
 perseverautia vestra judicii divini jus- 
 tissimi olim futurl pignori inservit, 
 quod hoc attinet ut digni judicemini,' 
 Schott 2 ; (c) with Sixaias xplaeus, so 
 as to mark either (i) the result to 
 which it tended, Lunem., or (2) the 
 aim which it contemplated, De Wette. 
 Of these, while (a) causes the really 
 important member hSayiM k. t. X. to 
 relapse into a mere parenthesis, and 
 
 (b) infringes on the almost regular 
 meaning of eh tA with the infin., 
 
 (c) preserves the logical sequence of 
 clauses and the usual force of eis rb 
 with the infin. Whether however 
 the remit or the aim is here specified 
 is somewhat doubtful. The decidedly 
 predominant usage in St Paul's Epp. 
 of eis t6 with the inf. suggests the 
 latter (Winer, Gr. § 44. 6, p. 295, 
 Meyer on Som. i, 20, note) : as how- 
 ever there seems some reason for 
 recognising elsewhere in the N. T. a 
 secondary final force of els t6 (see 
 notes on 1 Thess. ii. 12), we may 
 perhaps most plausibly in the present 
 case regard the KaTo^iudTJvai k.t.X. 
 not purely as the purpose, ' in order 
 to,' Alf., but rather as the object to 
 which it tended : the general direction 
 and tendency of the xpins was that 
 patient and holy sufferers should be 
 accounted worthy of God's kingdom. 
 TTJs PcMTiXeCos Toi! 0Eov] 'the hmg- 
 dom of God;' His future kingdom in 
 heaven, of which the Christian here 
 on earth is a subject, but the full 
 privileges of which he is to enjoy 
 hereafter; see notes on i Thess. ii. 
 12, and comp. Bauer's treatise there 
 alluded to, de Notione Jftegni Div, in 
 N. T. in Comment. Theol. Part 11. 
 p. 120 sq. wlp ^s Kal ird- 
 ir\(Tt] 'for which ye are also suffering;' 
 not exactly ' pro quo consequendo,' 
 
 H 
 
98 
 
 EPOS GESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 6 -Traa-xeTe' elirep SUaiov irapa Qew avTairoSovvai rots 
 
 7 GKl^ovaw vfJ.oL'i QX'i^iv koI vfuv rols dXi^onevon avecriv 
 
 Eat., but, with a more general refer- 
 ence, 'in behalf of which,' 'for the 
 sake of which,' — the iirip marking 
 the object for which ('in commodum 
 cujuB,' Usteri, ZeJirb. II. i. i, p. Ii6) 
 the suffering was endured (oomp. 
 Acts V. 41, Eom. i. 5, see Winer, Gr. 
 § 48. 1, p. 343), while the Kal with a 
 species of consecutive force supplies a 
 renewed hint of the connexion be- 
 tween the suffering and the Karajiw- 
 6ijvai K.T. X. On this force of koX, see 
 Winer, Or. § 53. 3, p. 387, and comp. 
 notes on 1 Thess. iv, 1. The clause 
 thus contains no indirect assertion 
 that sufferings established a daim to 
 the kingdom of God (4x6 toO Titrxa' 
 irpmopl^Toi, Ti paaCKela tQiv oipav&v, 
 Theoph. ), but only confirms the idea 
 elsewhere expressed in Scripture that 
 they formed the avenue which led to 
 it (ouTU! iC els t^v paaiXelav elffihai, 
 ChryS.), and that the connexion b* 
 tween holy suffering and future bless- 
 edness was mystically close and indis- 
 soluble ; comp. Acts xiv. 22, Bom, 
 viii. 17. On the general aspects of 
 Buffering in the N. T., see Deaiiny of 
 the Creatwe, p. 36 — 43. 
 
 6. eWep SCxaLov] 'if to he that U 
 is righteous ;' confirmation, in a hypo- 
 thetical form, of the preceding decla- 
 ration of the justice of God, derived 
 from His dealings with their persecu- 
 tors. The etrep thus involves no doubt 
 {oOk M &ii<j>iPo\las TiBeiKtv, dXX' ivl 
 /3e/3ai[i(reu;, Theod.), but only, with a 
 species of rhetorical force, regards as 
 an assumption ('etwep usurpatur de re 
 quse esse sumiljur,' Hermann, Tiger, 
 No. 310) what is really felt to be a 
 certain and recognised verity; rlBrin 
 t4 etrep lis ivl T&v tiiiu>\oy7)nivur, 
 Ghrys. On the force of etrcp, see 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. n. p. 528, and on 
 
 its distinction from etye, comp. notes 
 on Gal. iii. 4. The word SiKaiov en- 
 .dently points back to the SiKala Kplats 
 in ver. 5, not with any antithetical 
 allusion to the grace of God (comp. 
 Pelt), but in simple and immediate 
 reference to His justice as regarded 
 under the analogies of strict human 
 justice (el y^p irapb. dfBpiinrots tovto 
 Slxaioy, voWip fiSWov irapi. t!J> Oef, 
 Ohrys.), and as inferred from His own 
 declarations : comp. Bom, ii. 5, Col, 
 iii. 24, 25, iropd 0£^] 'before 
 
 God,' 'with God,' 'apud Deum,' Vulg. 
 
 ^ iO_D [coram Deo] Syr,; the 
 
 secondary idea of locality ('motion 
 connected with that of closeness,' 
 Donalds. Oratyl. § 177) being still 
 faintly retained in the notion of judg- 
 ment as at a tribunal, e. g. Herod, ui. 
 160, irapi, Aapelip Kpiry ; comp. GaL 
 iii, II, and see Winer, Gr. § 48. d, 
 p. 352. On the meaning of doraTO- 
 SiS6vM, see notes on i Thess. iii, 9. 
 Tots SXCpovo-iv K.T.X.] 'to those that 
 affnct y(m affliction;'' the 'jus talionis' 
 exhibited in its clearest form : the 0X(- 
 jSoyrcs are requited with 6\i\pis, the 
 ffKi^bp-evoi with dvtais. Theoph. sub- 
 joins the further comparison ; ov% 
 wtrwep Si a! i7ray6iiaia.i i/un BXlrj/as 
 irpbaKaipoi, ovru Kai a! roi: ffKl^ovaiv 
 vfi&s avrewaxBriainevai rapit BeoO 
 lepbtiKaipoi ^(roi^at, dXX' aTcXei^rijTot ■ 
 Kal al aviaeis viiio Toiavrai. 
 
 7. Tots 6Xi.po)Uvoi.$] 'who are af- 
 flicted;' passive, clearly not middle, 
 'qui pressuram toleratia,' Beng., as 
 the antithesis would thus be marred, 
 and the illustration of the 'jus talionis' 
 rendered somewhat less distinct, 
 avio-iv )ic6' ijiuSv] 'rest with v^;' rest 
 in company with us who are writing 
 to you, and who like you have been 
 
I. 6, 7, 8. 
 
 99 
 
 fie&' ^/x5i/, ev T^ avoKoKv'^ei rod Kvplov ^lijtTov air 
 ovpavoS fuer ayyeXmv Svyafieag avTOv iv (pTioyl irvpoi, 8 
 
 8. 0X07! TTupis] So Lachm. (text) with BDEFG ; 71 ; Vulg., Clarom., 
 Syr., Goth., al.; Iren. (interpr.), Maced., Tbeod. (comment.?), (Ecum., Tertull. 
 {Scholz, Tisch. ed. i, lAlnem., Wordtw.). In ed. 2, 7, Tiach. adopts iri//)l 0X076; 
 with AKLK ; nearly all msa. ; Syr.-Phil. (marg.) ; Chiys., Theod. (text), Dam., 
 al. (Rec., Alf., Lachm. marg.) C is deficient. The expression adopted is here 
 on the whole the better supported, but both in Exod. iii. 2 and in Acts vii. 30 
 there is a similar variation of reading. 
 
 exposed to suffering; see ch. iii. 2. To 
 give rineU a general reference (De W.) 
 would not be strictly true, and would 
 impair the encouraging and consola- 
 tory character of the reference ; iviya 
 rb fie 8' ^/iiiv, tfa Koivunois a&rois 
 Xd^g Koi TiSv ayaviav /to! are^ivuv twv 
 AvooToXiKuii, CEcum. 'Aveffis is simi- 
 larly used in antithesis to B'hl^eaBai 
 and dX^^is in 2 Cor. vii. £, viii. 13 ; it 
 properly implies a relaxation, as of 
 strings, and in such, combinations 
 stands in opposition to Mracris ; comp. 
 Plato, Rvpvhl. I. p. 349 B, iv tJ ivi- 
 rdffa Koi aviaa tud xopSuy. It here 
 obviously refers to the final rest in the 
 kingdom of God; and forms one of 
 the elements of its blessedness consi- 
 dered under simply negative aspects ; 
 comp. Bev. xiv. 13. iv Tj 
 
 diroKoX. K.T.X.] 'at the revelcUion of 
 .the Iiord Jesus;' predication of time 
 when the duTardSoffiS shall take place. 
 The termdiroKiiXii^is (i Cor. i. 7, comp. 
 Luke xvii. 30) is here suitably used in 
 preference to the more usual irapovala, 
 as perhaps hinting that though now 
 hidden, our Lord's coming to judge 
 both the quick and dead will be some- 
 thing real, certain, and manifest ; mv 
 yip, ifvc^, KpijrTerai, dXX& /ij; iXiere' 
 oiroKoXu0tfi}(reTat yi,p Kal ws Seis xal 
 5e<rir6Tijs, Theoph. ctir" ovpavov] 
 
 Predication of place: it is from hea- 
 ven, from the right hand of God where 
 He is now sitting, that the Lord will 
 come; comp. x Thess. iv. 16, and 
 
 Pearson, Creed, Art. vil. Vol. I. p. 
 346 (ed. Burton). fur dyyS\.av 
 
 8iiva|(. avTov] ' accompanied with the 
 angels of Sis povier;' predication of 
 manner; the Lord will come accom- 
 panied with the hosts of heaven, who 
 shall be the ministers of His will and 
 the exponents and instruments of His 
 power. The. gloss of Theoph. and 
 CEcum. i, Sviid/ieus 0776X01, TouriaTi 
 SvvaToi, followed by Auth., al., but 
 found in none of the best Yv. of 
 antiquity, is now properly rejected by 
 appy. all modem commentators. The 
 gen. appears simply to fall under the 
 general head of the gen. possessiims, 
 and serves to mark that to which 
 the d!77eXo( appertained, and of 
 which they were the ministers ; comp. 
 Bernhardy, ^nt. ill. 44, p. 161, 
 Winer, Gr. § 34. 3. b, p. 211 (note). 
 The Syr. inverts the clause, sc. 
 
 ._>C7ia2]Ik}} Uj-kj :»aL [cum 
 
 "7 7 7 
 
 virtute Angelorum suorum], and may 
 have suggested the equally incorrect 
 and inverted paraphrase of Michaelis, 
 'das ganze Heer seiner Engel:' the 
 former however is corrected in Syr.- 
 Phil., and the latter has been pro- 
 perly rejected by all recent expositors. 
 On the force of imctA, in this combina- 
 tion, see notes on i Thess. iii. 13. 
 
 8. Iv c|>Xo7l inipiSs] ' j« aflame of 
 fire,' i. e. encircled by, encompassed 
 by a flame of fire ; continued predica- 
 tion of the manner of the aTroxiiXv^is ; 
 
 h2 
 
100 
 
 nP02 eESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 SiSoPTOi 6KSiKri(riv TOti fih eiSoa-tv Qeou Koi toU m 
 
 inraKovoveriv rw evayyeXia) roO Kvptov fip.wv 'Iiia-oO- 
 
 9 o^iTives StKtiv ri<TOV(Ttv oXedpov alwviov airo Trpoa-UTrov 
 
 ■in libris V. T. ssepenumero ignis et 
 flamma commemoratur, ubi de prsB- 
 sentia et efficacitate Numinis divini 
 singulari modo patefaoiend^, prseaer- 
 tim de judicio divino, sermo est, Exod. 
 iii. 2 sq., Malaoh. iv. i, Daniel vii. 9, 
 10,' Schott. The addition thus serves 
 not only to express the majesty of the 
 Lord's coming, but is noticeable as 
 ascribing to the Son the same glorious 
 manifestations that the Old Test, 
 ascribes to the Father. The Syr., 
 .aith. (Piatt), and, if the punctuation 
 can be trusted, some of the other Vv. 
 (oomp. Theoph. i) connect this clause 
 with SMvTos ixSlK. as an instrumental 
 clause (Jowett actually unites both 
 interpr.), but without plausibility; the 
 attendant heavenly hosts and the en- 
 circling fire seem naturally to be as- 
 sociated as the two symbols and ac- 
 companiments of the divine presence. 
 Si86vTos IkSCk.] 'cmwrding vengeance;' 
 scil. Tov Kvplov 'Iigir., not in connexion 
 with TTvpbs, which would not only be 
 a halting and unduly protracted struc- 
 ture, but would wholly mar the sym- 
 metry of the two clauses of manner. 
 The formula SiShvai ixSlx. only occurs 
 here in the N. T. , but is occasionally 
 found elsewhere; see Ezek. xxv. 14, 
 and comp. d7roSoC;'ai ixS. in Numb, 
 xxxi. 3. No exx. of its occurrence 
 have been adduced from dassical 
 Greek ; ^kSIk. voiiiaairBai is found in 
 Polyb. Hist. III. 8. 10. Tots |jli) 
 
 eIS^itiv @cov] ' to thote who Jmow not 
 God,' who belong to a claas marked by 
 this characteristic ; first of the two 
 classes who will be the future objects 
 of the divine wrath, 'qui in ethnicd 
 ignorantia de Deo versantur' (Beng.), 
 — in a word the Heathen. On the 
 
 peculiar force of the subjective nega- 
 tion, see notes on i Thess. iv. J, and 
 comp. Winer, Or. § 55. 5i P- 428 sq. 
 Tots fufi viraK. K.T.X.] 'thoee who obey 
 not the Gospel of our Lord Jemij' 
 second class of those who afflicted the 
 Thessalonian converts, those whose 
 characteristic was disobedience gene- 
 rally, and especially to the Gospel 
 (Kom. X. 16), — in a word, the unbe- 
 lieving Jews. It is somewhat singu- 
 lar that a scholar usually so sound as 
 Schott should have felt a difficulty at 
 the division into two classes : surely 
 the article before /i^ max. renders 
 such a view all but certain; see 
 Winer, Gr. § 19. 5, p. 117, Green, 
 Gr. p. 215. Even in seeming excep- 
 tions to the rule (Matth. zxvii. 3 
 [Rec], Luke xxii. 4 [liach.'], al.) it 
 may be fairly questioned whether the 
 writer did not in these particular cases 
 really intend the two classes to be 
 regarded as separate, though other- 
 wise commonly united. The 
 reading is slightly doubtful; Sec. 
 adds, and Lachm. inserts in brackets, 
 %puTToS with AP6N ; mss. ; Vulg., 
 Clarom., Syr., Goth., al. is defici- 
 ent. Though the omission of Xp, 
 does not characterize this Ep. as it 
 does the first (see notes on i Thiss. iii. 
 13), Tijtr. alone [with BDEKL; 25 
 mss.; Copt., Syr.-Phil., .^th.; many 
 Ff.] is on the whole the more probable 
 reading here. 
 
 9. otrivcs] 'men who;' reference 
 by means of the qualitative rel. pro- 
 noun to the two preceding classes. 
 If we revert to the distinctions stated 
 in the notes on Gal. iv. 24, it would 
 seem that iaru is here used, not in a 
 causal sense with ref. to the reason 
 
I. g, lo. 
 
 101 
 
 ToS Kvptov KOI airo t?? So^ijt Tiji icrj^yoi avrov, orav lO 
 
 for Tlaovnv (liiinem., Alf. — ^who how- 
 ever mix up two usages), but expli- 
 eatively ('who truly '), or even simply 
 dasiifically, with ref. to the class or 
 Qategory to which the antecedents are 
 referred, and to the characteristics 
 which mark them ; see notes on Gal. ii. 
 4, and on PhU. ii. 20. The brief dis- 
 tinction of Kruger {SpracM. § 50. 8), 
 that OS has simply an objective aspect, 
 Sorns one qualitative and generic, will 
 in most cases be found useful and 
 applicable, Por other and idiomatic 
 usages, see Elleudt, Lex. Sophocl. a. v. 
 Vol. II. p. 38isq.,andcomp. Sohaefer, 
 notes on Demosth. Vol. II. p. 531. 
 tCKr\vrC<rovinv]'sJuill pay tJie penalty.' 
 This formula does not occur elsewhere 
 in the N. T. (comp. however Sixriv 
 iir^x^iv, Jude 7), but is suflSciently 
 common in both earlier and later 
 Greek, and is copiously illustrated by 
 Wetst. in loc. o\c6pov 
 
 aUSviov] ' eternal destruction ; ' accus. 
 in apposition to the preceding Slxriv : 
 on JXe0/)as, comp. notes on 1 Tim. vi. 
 9. All the sounder commentators on 
 this text recognise in aliinos a refer- 
 ence to 'res in perpetuum futurse' 
 (Schott), and a testimony to the 
 eternity of future punishment that 
 cannot easily be explained away : 
 Troi? roivvv ol 'QpiyevuTTdi ol t4\os t^s 
 Ko\iffeo>s nvBoiSfievoi ; aliiviov TavTi)V 6 
 IlaSXos \iya, Theoph. j comp. Pear- 
 son, Creed, Art. xii. p. 465 (ed. 
 Burton). In answer to the efforts of 
 some writers of the present day to 
 give aliivtos a qualitative aspect, let it 
 briefly be said that the earliest Greek 
 expositors never appear to have lost 
 sight of its quantitative aspects ; dic/ii- 
 picrrepop ISet^e rijs n/iuplas ri /liye- 
 60s aliiviov TavTipi &iroKa\iaai, Theod. 
 For further remarks on this subject, 
 Bee notes and reff. in Deitim/ of the 
 
 Creatwre, Serm. IV., and for a dis- 
 cussion of the gi'ave question of 
 the eternity of divine punishments, 
 Erbkam, in Stud. u. Krit. for 1838, 
 p. 4^2 sq. The reading of 
 
 Lachm. (non marg.) oKidpiov [with A ; 
 2 mss.; Ephr., Chrys. (ms.)] is far too 
 feebly supported to deserve much con- 
 sideration. ctirS irpocro^irov 
 Tov Kvp.] ' removed from the presence 
 of the Lord.' These words have re- 
 ceived three different explanations, 
 corresponding to the three meanings, 
 temporal, causal, and local, which 
 may be assigned to the preposition. 
 Of these ttTra can scarcely be here (a) 
 temporal (ipxei TapayeviaOai fi6vov 
 Kal dipB^vai tov Qcov xal irtBres iv 
 Ko\6,aei KOi nuaplq, ylvovrai, Chrys., 
 comp. Theoph., (Ecum.), as thesubst. 
 with which it is associated (not Tap- 
 ovolas but vpoffiiirov) seems wholly 
 to preclude anything but a simple 
 and quasi-physical reference. Equally 
 doubtful is (A) the causal translation ; 
 for though aTra may be thus associated 
 with neuter and even passive verbs, 
 as marking the personal source whence 
 the action originates (see exx. in 
 Winer, Gr. § 47. a, p. 332, comp. 
 Thiersch, de Pentat. 11. 15, p. 106), 
 yet, on the other hand, such a con- 
 nexion in the present case would in- 
 volve the assumption that wpoiriivov 
 TOO Kvp. was a periphrasis for the 
 personj^l toO Kvplov (Acts iii. 19, cited 
 by De W., owing to the dissimilar 
 nature of the verbs, is no parallel), 
 and merely equivalent to 'praesente 
 Domino' (comp. Pelt), — ra resolution of 
 the words in a high degree precarious 
 and doubtful. We therefore adopt (c) 
 the simply local translation, according 
 to which &t6 marks the idea of 
 'separation &om' (Olsh., Liinem.), 
 emhedma ['de devant'] .iSth., while 
 
102 nPOS eE22AA0NIKEI2 B. 
 
 eX6^ evSo^acrOnvai ev rots ayioii avrov koi dav/iacrB^vai 
 ev iracriv roig iria-Teva-atriv, on evi(rrev6ij to fiapTvpiov 
 
 irpoffiiirou ToO Kup. retains its proper 
 
 meaning, and specifies that perennial 
 
 fountain of blessedness (comp. Psalm 
 
 xvi. II, Matth. xviii. lo, Kev.xxii.4), 
 
 to be separated from which will con- 
 
 stitate the true essence of the fearful 
 
 'poena damni' (Jackson, Creed, XI. 
 
 20. 9) : see further details in Schott 
 
 and Liinem. in loc, by both of whom 
 
 this view is well maintained. The 
 
 article before Kvplov is omitted by 
 
 DEFG ; 10 mas. dird ttjs 
 
 Sofrjs K.T.\.] 'from the glory of His 
 
 might;' not 'His mighty glory,' 
 
 Jowett, — a most doubtful paraphrase, 
 
 but the glory arising from, emanating 
 
 from His might (gen. originis, comp. 
 
 notes om i Thesa. i. 6), the S6|o being 
 
 regarded, so to speak, as the result of 
 
 the exercise of His l<rxvh and as that 
 
 sphere and halo which environs its 
 
 manifestations. The assumption of 
 
 De W. that in this clause dvo has 
 
 a causal force is perfectly gratuitous. 
 
 10. oTov 8X6xil ' when He shall have 
 come ; ' specific statement of the time 
 in which the preceding SIkijv Haouffiv 
 shall be brought about and accom- 
 plished; T0T«7ctp ToO KjOiToO tV SiKalav 
 ^^ipov Bav/idaovtriv airavres, Theod. 
 On the force of orav with the aor. 
 Bubj. as referring to an objectively 
 possible event, which is to, can, or 
 must, take place at some single point 
 of time distinct from the actual pre- 
 sent, but the exact epoch of which is 
 left uncertain, see Winer, Gr. % ^^. g, 
 p. 175, and esp. Schmalfeld, Synt. 
 § 121, where the nature of the con- 
 struction is well discussed. The most 
 natural and idiomatic mode of trans- 
 lation is briefly noticed in notes to 
 Tranal. ivSolao-Brjvai tv 
 
 K.T.X.] ' to le glorified im {th£ persons 
 of) His saints; ' infinitive of design or 
 
 purpose, — ^not equivalent to (uffre/c.T.X. 
 (Jowett), from which it is grammati- 
 cally distinguishable as involving no 
 reference to mode or degree ; see notes 
 on Col. i. 22, where both formulae are 
 briefly discussed. The verb itself is a Sis 
 \ey6iJi,. in the N.T. (here and ver. 12), 
 and, except in the LXX (Exod. xiv. 
 4, Isaiah xlv. 25, xlix. 3, al.) and 
 eccl. writers, is of rare occurrence. 
 The prep, seems here very distinctly to 
 mark — not the mere locality 'among 
 His saints' (Michael.), still less the 
 instruments or media of the glorifica- 
 tion {ii> Sti, iarl, Chrys., Beng.), but 
 the sxtbstraium of the action, the 
 mirror as it were (Alf.) in which and 
 on which the S6^a was reflected and 
 displayed ; comp. Exod. xiv. 4, Isaiah 
 xlix. 3, and see notes on Gal. i, 24. 
 Lastly, the ayioi do not here appear 
 to be the Holy Angels, but, as the 
 tacit contrasts and limitations of the 
 context suggest, the risen and glorified 
 company of believers; contrast i Thess. 
 iii. 13, where both vivres, and the 
 absence of all notice of the unholy, 
 suggest the more inclusive refer- 
 ence. 6av|ui<r6TJvai K.T.X.] 
 'to he wondered at in all them that 
 ielieved ; ' soil, owing to the reflection 
 of His glory and power which is dis- 
 played in those who believed on Him 
 while they were on earth ; 'obstupes- 
 cent Christum in credentibus tarn 
 magnum et gloriosum esse,' Gocceius. 
 The aor. iriirreiirairai [Rec. TurTeiovffiv, 
 but in opp. to all MSS. ; many Vv. 
 and Ff.] is here suitably used in con- 
 nexion with the period referred to : at 
 that time the belief of the faithful 
 would belong to the past; comp. 
 Wordsw, in loc. For exx. of this 
 pass, use of dav/uijti), see Kypke, Obs. 
 Vol. II. p. 341. 8ti fernrrrfOii 
 
II. 
 
 103 
 
 tjficov e(f> v/JLas, ev t? ^fi-epa eKelvri. EjV o koL vpocr- II 
 evj(o[i.eQa itavrore irepi vfiSiv Iva vfxas a^iwo'ij Tijs 
 
 K.T.X.] 'became our tettimony unto you 
 was bdieved ; ' parenthetical clause 
 taking up the preceding iruTfiaiuriv, 
 and giving it a more distinct reference 
 to those (i^' OyitSs) to whom he was 
 writing. The naprripiov iiiiuv is the 
 testimony relating to Christ {/iapr. 
 ToO Xp,, I Cor. i. 6), the message of 
 the Gospel {jiapriptov di x'^pvyfia vpoff- 
 ityipevae, Theod.), delivered by the 
 Apostle and his associates (gen. origi- 
 nia or causce effidentie, Scheuerl. Synt. 
 § 17, see notes on t These, i. 6), the 
 destination of which is specified in the 
 same enunciation ; comp. Ool. i. 8, 
 T^K ifiwr iyiirr/v iv Tlveifum, where, 
 as here, the anarthrous prepositional 
 member gives the whole clause a more 
 complete unity of conception ; see 
 notes I.e., and Winer, Gr. § 30. 2, 
 p. 123. On the prep, iwi, which here 
 seems to mark the mental direction of 
 the impTvpiov (comp. Luke ix, 5), and 
 commonly involves some idea of 'near- 
 ness or approximation' (Donalds, Crat. 
 § 172), see Winer, Gr. §49. 1, p. 363 aq. 
 Iv TJ ijl^p^i Ik. is most naturally 
 joined with BaviiaaB^vai K.r.X., to 
 which it is joined as a, predication of 
 time, reiterating and more precisely 
 defining the foregoing temporal clause 
 &rav i\6ji K.T.X. Some of the older 
 Vv., e.g. Syr., ^th., Goth., appear to 
 have joined these words with what 
 precedes, but are compelled either to 
 regard the aor, liriaT. as equivalent to 
 
 > future (^i^ljOlZZ, Syr., but not 
 7 7 * 
 
 Syr.-Phil.) or to assign meanings to h> 
 Ty rin. ix., soil, 'de illo die,' Menoch., 
 ' cum spe retributionis in illo die per- 
 cipiendee,' Est., that are neither gram- 
 matically nor exegetically defensible. 
 The position of ii> r$ Vl"^ ^k. is con- 
 
 fessedly somewhat unusual, but per- 
 haps may have been designed to im- 
 press still more on the readers the ex- 
 act and definite epoch when all was to 
 be realized. 
 
 II. Eis S] ' Whereunlo,' 'with ex- 
 pectations directed to which,' to its 
 realization and fruition ; not equiva- 
 lent to Bi' 8 (Auth,, Schott), nor even 
 to irip (comp. De W.), but simply, 
 with the primary force of the prep., 
 definitive of the direction taken, as it 
 were, by the longing prayers of the 
 Apostle and hia associates ; see Winer, 
 Or. § 49. a, p. 354, Donalds. Cratyl, 
 % 170, and comp. Col. L 29, but observe 
 that the verb with which it is there 
 associated (koviw) gives the prep, a 
 somewhat stronger and more definite 
 meaning. Kal irpoo-cvx^P^'Bo^] 
 
 • we aho pray ; ' besides merely longing 
 or merely directing your hopes, we also 
 avail ourselves of the definite accents 
 of prayer, the xal gently contrasting 
 the irpoffevx- with the infusion of con- 
 fidence and hope involved in th^ pre- 
 ceding words and especially echoed in 
 the parenthetical member. On this 
 use of Kat, see notes on Phil. iv. I2, 
 and on the use of irepl with irpotrevx., 
 see notes on i Thess, v. 2£, and on 
 Col. i, 3. iva. v|ias k.t.X.] 
 
 'that Ood may count you worthy of 
 your calling;' subject of the prayer 
 blended with the purpose of making it ; 
 iva having here, as not uncommonly 
 in this combination, its secondary and 
 weakened force ; comp. Col, iv. 3, 
 I Thess. iv, i, and notes on JEph, i. 17, 
 and on Phil, i, 9. The verb df(oCi» 
 occurs 7 times in the K, T, (Luke vii. 
 7, I Tim. V. 17, Heb,%ii, 3, al,), and 
 regularly in the sense of ' esteeming or 
 counting dittos ' ('dignari,' Vulg, here, 
 
104 
 
 nP02 GEZSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 *c^l5o■ewf o Geo? fifiwv ko.) irXtipuxri^ iraa-av evSoKtav aya- 
 12 6a)avvt]i Kat epyov irla-Tewi ii> Suva/iei, ottws evoo^aa-6^ 
 
 Clarom.),iiot of moiin^so(oomp. Syr. 
 
 ^o.n . 1 . Copt., al.), a meanii^ 
 
 not lexically demonstrable; compare 
 Eost u. Palm, Lex. b. v. The contrary 
 is urged by Olsh., on the ground that 
 the context shows that the call had 
 been already received: K\r}<rts how- 
 ever, though really the initial act 
 (comp. I Thess. ii. ii), includes the 
 Christian course which follows (Eph. 
 iv. i), and its issues in blessedness 
 hereafter ; K\rjtriv ovv ivravBa Xiya t^jk 
 Sii TUP Tpd^eav Pe^aioviUvTpi, (jTis KoX 
 Kvplus KKijak ian, Theoph., see notes 
 on Phil. iii. 14, and comp. Beuss, 
 TUol. CkrSt. IV. 15, Vol. II. p. 14S. 
 ir\i]p(uoT] irdirav k.t.X.] 'fulfil, bring 
 to completion, every good pleasure of 
 goodness,' 'ut expleat omnem duloe- 
 dinem honestatis, h. e. ut plenam et 
 perfectam, qui recreemini, honestatem 
 vobis impeitiat,' Fritz. Som. x. i, Vol. 
 II. p. 372, note. The meaning of these 
 words is not perfectly clear. The 
 familiar use of eiSoKeiv, eiSoitta, in ref. 
 to God (Eph. i. 5, 9, Fhil. ii. 13), sug- 
 gests a similar reference in the present 
 case (CEcum., Theoph. in part, Beng., 
 al.); to this however there is (i) the 
 exegetical objection that dyaSaaivri, 
 though occurring 4 times in St FauFs 
 Epp., is never applied to God, and (2) 
 the more grave contextual objection 
 that the second member (pymi Tlareus, 
 equally undefined by any pronoun, 
 certainly refers to those whom the 
 Apostle is addressing. It seems safest 
 then to refer the present member to 
 the Thessalonians ; eiSoxla marking 
 the good pleasure they evinced, and 
 the defining gen. dyaSuiriptis (gen. ob- 
 jecti, Krilger, Sprachl. § 47. 7. i, — not 
 of apposition, Alt) the element in 
 which it was so manifested, or more 
 
 exactly, the object to which the action 
 implied in the derivative subst. was 
 especially directed ; see Soheuerl. Synt. 
 § 17. I, p. 126. The attempt 
 
 to refer the expression partly to God 
 and partly to the Thess. (Olsh., comp. 
 Theoph.), or to regard the operation of 
 the believer and that of the Spirit as 
 blended and confused (Jowett), is in a 
 high degree precarious and unsatisfac- 
 tory. On the meaning of eiSoKta, 
 see the good note of Fritz. I. c. Vol. 
 II. p. 369 sq., and on the meaning 
 of dyaSdxrvvni (moral goodness) and 
 its distinction from dya^iri);, notes on 
 Gal. V. 22. ^7ov irtoTcus] 
 'the work of faith,' the work which is 
 the distinctive feature of it; tpryov 
 being that which marks, characterizes, 
 and evinces the vitality of flie irloris, 
 almost 'the activity of faith,' not 
 however merely as tV iiroijuiv^v tuX 
 SiuynQv, Theoph., but uiro/toi^i> as ex- 
 hibited in the various circumstances 
 of Christian life and duty. On the 
 exact meaning and construction of 
 these words, see notes on i Thess. i. 3, 
 and comp. Beuss, Thiol. Ohrit. IT. 19, 
 Vol. II. p. 205. iv Svvdp^i] 
 'Tvith power,' i.e. powerfully, — specifi- 
 cation of manner annexed to the verb 
 ir\iipii(rii, with which it is associated 
 with a practically adverbial force; 
 comp. Bom. i. 4, Col. i. 29, and see 
 Bernhardy, Synt. v. 7, p. 209. The 
 analogous use of crim (comp. Scbeuerl. 
 Synt. § 22. b, p. 180) is not found in 
 the N. T. 
 
 12. {iirus lv8o|. K.T.X.] Hnorderthat 
 the name. ..be glorified;' reiteration of 
 the pm-pose (not merely result. Mo- 
 {aerOiio-erai, Theoph.) stated generally 
 in verse 10, in special reference to the 
 converts of Thessalonica. It is not 
 easy to define the exact difierence be- 
 
I. 12, II. I. 
 
 105 
 
 TO ovofta Tov Kvplov tifiSiv ^lija-ov ev v/iiv koi iifieti ev 
 avTta Kara Trjv X"!"'" tow 0eoi7 ^fiHov Koi Hvpiov 'Iijcrow 
 
 XpiOTTOV. 
 
 ceming the Lord's com- 
 ing. The Man 
 
 'EjOWTw/tei' §e vjULoii, aSe\(j>ol, virep II. 
 
 Be not disquieted con- 
 ! Lord's com- 
 asye know, mvi°t tot "^'^ -tapovviai TOV KvploV ri/AWV 'I,l<ToO 
 
 be revealed; and then shall be destroyed by the Lord. 
 
 tween the present use of Sttms (used 
 comparatively rarely by St Paul; only 
 6 times excluding quotationn), and the 
 corresponding one of tva. Speaking 
 somewhat roughly, one may perhaps 
 say that the relatival compound Sirus 
 (Donalds. Cratyl. § 196) involves some 
 obscure reference to manner, while Xva 
 (appy. connected with the reflexive X, 
 or the pronoun of the second person, 
 comp. Donalds. Cratyl. % 139) may 
 retain some tinge of its primary refer- 
 ence to locality. The real practical 
 differences however are these, (a) that 
 Sttu: has often more of an eventual 
 aspect ; (i) that it is used with the 
 future and occasionally associated with 
 Ijf, — ^both which conatrnctions are in- 
 admissible with the final ha ; see 
 Klotz, Deoar. Vol. n. p. 629 sq. 
 •td ovofiia TOV Kvp. is not a mere peri- 
 phrasis for i> Kipios, but specifies that 
 character and personality as revealed 
 to and acknowledged by men; comp., 
 but with caution, Bretschn. Zex. b. v. 6, 
 p. 291, and notes on Phil. ii. 10. The 
 assertion of Jowett in loc. that these 
 words have 'no specific meaning' can- 
 not be sustained, and is language in 
 every way to be regretted. 
 The addition X/ko-toC [Ree., Lachm. in 
 brackets, with AFG; Vulg., Syr. 
 (both) ; Chrys.] is rightly rejected by 
 Tiseh. viith BDEKLN ; Clarom., San- 
 germ., Copt., Sahid., al.; Theod. (ms.), 
 CEoum., aL 4v owr^] ' in 
 
 Him ;' not in referenee to t6 jvo/ta roB 
 Ev/>. (Liinem.), but to the immediately 
 preceding 'Iriaov. The exact notion 
 of reciprocity (comp. notes on Gal. vi. 
 
 14) would be best maintained by the 
 former reference ; but, as Alf . correctly 
 observes, the present expression is used 
 far too frequently and exclusively in 
 ref. to union in our Lord Himielf to 
 admit here of any different applica- 
 tion. Kard Ti]V x'^P^''] ' *" 
 accordance with the grace ;' the xi^P's 
 is the ' norma ' according to which the 
 glorification took place, and thence, 
 by an intelligible transition, that of 
 which it is regarded as a consequence; 
 ^ X^P^s avTov St* Tifiiav tr&VTa KaropBoi, 
 CEcum. ; comp. notes on icarA on Phil. 
 ii. 3, and Tit. iii. 5. roii 0jou 
 i])uov K.T.X.] This is one of the pas- 
 sages supposed to fall under Grranville 
 Sharpe's rule (comp. Middl. Or. Art. 
 p. 56, ed. Kose), according to which 
 Qebi and 'Kipioi would refer to the 
 same person. It may be justly doubted 
 however whether, owing to the pecu- 
 liar nature of Krfpws (Winer, Gr. § 19. 
 I, p. 113), this can be sustained in the 
 present case ; see esp. Middleton, p. 
 379sq., and comp. Green, Or. p. 216. 
 
 Ghafteb II. I. 'Ep(iiTw|i,cv Si v|i..] 
 'Now we heseech you;' transition by 
 means of the Si licrapariKhv (see notes 
 on Oal. iii. 8) from the Apostle's 
 prayers for his converts to what he 
 claims of them, and the course of con- 
 duct he exhorts them to follow. On 
 the meaning of ipurav, see notes on 
 I Thess. iv. i. {mip is here 
 
 certainly not introductory of a for- 
 mula of adjiu:ation (Vulg., perhaps 
 .^th. [baenta, — often so used], Beza, 
 al.), as such a meaning, though gram- 
 
106 
 
 nP02 eEZSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 2 Xpierrov Kal rifLwv evtcrvvayaiy^s eir avTov, «f to fiti 
 Taj^ewj (rakevdtivai vfnat airo rov voog fiijoe Qpoeiirdai, 
 
 maticaUy tenable (Bernhardy, Synt. T. 
 II, p. ■244, — partially, but appy. with- 
 out full reason, objected to by Winer), 
 is by no means exegetioally probable, 
 and is without precedent in the lan- 
 guage of the N. T. The more natural 
 interpretation is to regard the prep. 
 as approximating in meaning to vepl 
 (Winer, Gr. § 47. 1, p. 343; comp. 
 Krflger, Sprachl. § 68. aS. 3), but still 
 distinct from it, as involving some 
 trace of the idea of benefit to or fur- 
 therance of the irapovata ; comp. 
 Wordaw.m loc, and see notes on Phil. 
 ii. 13. The subject of the irapovala 
 had been misunderstood and misinter- 
 preted, and its commochim therefore 
 was what the Apostle wished to pro- 
 mote. i||iuv jmirvv. jir' avr6v] 
 'our gathering together unto Him,'' soil, 
 in the clouds of heaven, when He 
 comes to judge the quick and dead ; 
 see I Thess. iv. 17, and comp. Matth. 
 xxiv. 31, Mark xiii. 27. The subst. 
 iirurvvayayi) only occurs once again 
 in the N.T . (Heb. x. 25), in ref. to 
 Christian worship (comp. 1 Mace, iii 
 7), and seems confined to later writers. 
 The meaning assigned by Hammond, 
 • the greater liberty of the Christians 
 to assemble to the service of Christ, 
 the greater freedom of ecclesiastical 
 assembliea,' is due to his reference of 
 the present irapovtrla rov Kvpiov to~ 
 God's judgment on the Jews. The 
 mutual relation of the two Epp. seems 
 totally to preclude such a reference : 
 if in 1 Thess. iv. ig the words refer 
 to the final day of doom (Hamm.), 
 the allusion here must certainly be the 
 same. hr' ajrtfv] ' v/nto Sim ;' 
 comp. Mark v. 21, itwiixfiti 6xKos wb- 
 \iis iw avTiv ; the preposition marking 
 the point to which the amayuyii was 
 directed, and losing its idea of super- 
 
 position in that of approximation to 
 or juxtajposition; comp. Donalds. Cror 
 tyl, § 172. The difference between 
 irepl and irpAs in the present combi- 
 nation is perhaps no more than this, 
 that while irphi points rather to the 
 direction to be taken, iitl marks more 
 the point to be reached. 
 
 2. els rh [1.1] K.T.X.] 'that ye thould 
 not he soon shaken,' 'ut non cito move- 
 amini,' Yulg., Clarom. ; object and 
 aim of the ipwrav, vrith perhaps some 
 included reference to the subject of it; 
 comp. I Thess. iii. 10, and notes on 
 I Thets. ii. it. This construction 
 though not found elsewhere with 
 ipuTq.!) is perfectly intelligible. The 
 verb (rdKeiia, aa its derivation shows 
 [ai\os, connected with AA-, and with 
 Sanscr. form eal, Benfey, Wunellex. 
 Vol. I. p. 61], marlis an agitated and 
 disquieted state of mind, which in the 
 present case was due to wild spiritual 
 anticipations ; compare Acts xvii. 13, 
 and see exx. in Eisner, Obi. Vol. 11. p. 
 283. The Tajfiut does not seem to refer 
 to the period since St Paul was with 
 them, or to the date of the First Epi- 
 stle, but simply to the time when they 
 might happen to hear the doctrine; 
 the reference being rather modal 
 ('prseoipitanter,' De W.) than purely 
 temporal; 'si id crederent facili me- 
 mento quassaretur ipsorum fides,' Coc- 
 ceius. diri toS vo^s] 'from 
 
 your mind,' • a restro sensu,' Vulg. ; 
 certainly Aot 'a sententifi seudoctrinfi,' 
 Est., but simply ' statu mentis solito,' 
 Schott I, — their ordinary, sober, and 
 normal state of mind, iraparpainlmi 
 dTri TOW voii, iv P^XP^ '■o" "'>>' ffx"* 
 6p$ias Itrrdpevov, Theoph. ; comp.Som. 
 xiv. 5, and Beck, Seelenl. § 18. i, p. 51. 
 The construction is what is usually 
 termed pragnant, scil. ' ita concuti uj 
 
II. 2, 3- 
 
 107 
 
 fi^T^ Sia TTvevfiaroi fi^re Sia Xoyov fi^re Si ivterToXfjs 
 wg Si" fifiSiv, wf oTi eve<TTtiKev ti ^fxepa toS Kvplov. ft.^ 3 
 
 demovearia/ Schott ; comp. Bom. vi. 
 7, ix. 3, 2 Tim. iv. i8 (ed), al., and 
 Winer, Or. § 66. 2, p. 5+7. 
 |jii)8^ OpoctirSai] 'nor yet be troubled;' 
 stronger expression than the foregoing, 
 introduced by the slightly ascensive 
 li7]Si ; see notes on i Theas. ii. 3 
 (Tranal.). The verb Opoia [derived 
 from ePEOMAI, and connected with 
 rpiw ; comp. Donalds. Gratyl. § 272] 
 properly denotes 'clamorem tumul- 
 tuantem edere ' (Schott), and thence, 
 by a natural transition, that terrified 
 state {rapaxlieatai, Zonaras), which 
 is associated with and gives rise 
 to such outward manifestations. In 
 later writers |i^ 0poii]0ys comes to 
 mean little more than /li] dav/xAtr'jiii, 
 Lobeck, Phryn. p. 676. The reading 
 of Rec. /MJTe [with D^EKL ; several 
 Ff.] is rightly rejected by Laohm. and 
 Tiseh. on the preponderating external 
 authority of ABD^ (giving it also be- 
 fore Sid, \6yov) P (giving iiTjSi thrice, 
 but /tijre with Sii \oyov) GN ; Orig. 
 The change from the disjunctive nega- 
 tive was probably suggested by the 
 following /tT^Te, the true relation of the 
 negatives not having been properly 
 understood. ("'^'''^ ^'^ nv6V|MiTas] 
 'neither by spirit / soil, of prophecy; 
 8ict 7rpo0ijTe/o! • nvis y&p irpoipriTelav 
 iiroKpiv6/ievoi iv^dvuv rbv XoAy us ^Sij 
 TTo/iicTos ToO Kvpiov, Theoph. The 
 second negation is here, by means of 
 the thrice repeated /iT^rc, divided into 
 three members ; see exx. and illustra- 
 tions in Winer, Gr. § 55. 6, p. 437, 
 where the distinctive character of /iiiSi 
 and fi'/jre, their meaning, and sequence, 
 are well delineated. (iiJTc 8id 
 
 y,6yov may be either regarded, (a) as 
 an independent member distinguished 
 both from what precedes and follows, 
 or \b) tuay be connected more closely 
 
 with the third negative member, both 
 being associated with tis S! 'fmCov. In 
 the former case \liyov forms a species 
 of antithesis to Wiiei/JUTOS as denoting 
 oral teaching, less marked by super- 
 natural or prophetic characteristics 
 (SiSaffKoKlas j^dxry ipav^ yevopAvrp, 
 Theoph .) ; in the latter the X J70V stands 
 contrasted with iviffToXrii, as marking 
 what the Apostle had comnmiiicated 
 by word of mouth in contradistinction 
 to what he had written ; pAi tncTeieiv 
 .../i'qTe et irKair&iievoi lis i^ airov ypa- 
 tpetaajf iirtffTOKTjy irpotftipoiev, fiTJre el 
 iypd^as airbv elprixipai X/7oi6i',Theod. 
 Of these {b) seems slightly the most 
 probable, especially as \6yos and iiri- 
 arokti are found similarly combined in 
 ver. 15. To extend <is Si ■^pjov 
 
 to the first clause, either partially 
 ( Jowett) or completely (Niisselt), seems 
 illogical ,' oral or vrritten communica- 
 tions might be ascribed to the absent 
 Apostle, but the wev/ia could only 
 have been recognised as working in 
 him (DeW.) when he was with them; 
 comp. Ltinem. in loc. us Si 
 
 i]|xuv] ' as (coming) through nx,' repre- 
 sented to come from us as its mediate 
 authors ; the us as usual marking the 
 erroneous aspecti under which the 
 X670S or iirtffToX'^ was designed to be 
 regarded : ' particula us substantivis 
 participiis totisque enuntiationibus 
 prieposita rei veritate sublatft aliquid 
 opinione errore simidaiione niti decla- 
 rat,' Fritz. Bom. ix. 32, Vol. 11. p. 
 360, comp. notes on Eph. v. 22. It 
 seems impossible to understand these 
 words otherwise, especially when cou- 
 pled with the notice in ch. iii. 17, than 
 as implying that not only oral but 
 wrUten communications, definitely as- 
 cribed to St Paul, were, not conceived 
 (Jowett), but actually hnmm by the 
 
108 
 
 nPOS 0E22AAONIKEIS B. 
 
 TJ? vfiat e^airarficrri Kara fjtriSeva Tpoirov on eav /iij. 
 e\6^ fi avotrracria vpSsrov Ka\ airoicaXvc^O^ 6 avdpwiros 
 
 Apostle to have been lately circulated 
 in the Church of Thessalonica : Kal 
 yi,p Koi iruTToKi,! TXdrrovTes lis jrapi 
 HaiXov ffToXelffas ixipovv d IXeyoi', 
 Theoph., comp. Neander, Planting, 
 Vol. I. p. 204 (Bohn). When we con- 
 sider the extreme disquietude and 
 anxieties that appear to have prevailed 
 in this Church in ref. to the irapovala 
 ToS Kvptov, there appears nothing 
 strange in the supposition that even 
 within less time than a year since the 
 Apostle had last written fictitious let- 
 ters should have obtained currency 
 among them. To refer the ex- 
 
 pression with Hammond, al., to por- 
 tions of the First Epistle which had 
 been misunderstood seems distinctly 
 to infringe on the simple meaning of 
 
 lis Si "qimv. lOS 8tI ivllTT. K.T.X.] 
 
 'as that, to the effect that, the day of 
 the Lord is now commencing, already 
 come;' subject of the pretended com- 
 munication introduced by (is, which, 
 as before, represents the statement not 
 as actual, but as so represented, as the 
 notion which was designed to be pro- 
 pagated ; see Winer, Or. § 65. 9, p. 
 544, Meyer on 2 Cor. xi. 21, and exx. 
 in Kypke, Ohs. Vol. 11. p. 268. The 
 verb hiarriKev is somewhat stronger 
 than iipiar. (2 Tim. iv. 6), and seems 
 to mark not only the nearness but the 
 actual presence and commencement of 
 theiJ/<^/)a Tov Ku/>.; 'magna hoc verbo 
 propinquitas significatur ; nam iveuriis 
 [Bom. viii. 38, i Cor. iu. 22] est prce- 
 aens,' Beug., comp. notes on Gal. i. 4, 
 Hammond m loc, and see the nume- 
 rous exx. in Eost n. Palm, Lex. s. v. 
 Vol. I. p. 929. The ■n/Jiipa tov Kvp. 
 thus approximates in meaning to Trop- 
 oviria TO0 Kvp., and like it includes, 
 besides the exact epoch of the Lord's 
 appearance, the course of events im- 
 
 mediately preceding and- connected 
 with it ; comp. Reuss, Thiol. Chrlt. 
 IV. 21, Vol. II. p. 230, 243. For Kw- 
 ptov Rec. reads Xpurnv with D'K; 
 most mss. 
 
 3. (11] Tis K.T.X.] 'Let no one de- 
 ceive you in any way;' not only iu 
 any of the three ways before specified 
 (Theoph., CEcura.), but, with a more 
 completely inclusive reference, — in 
 any way, or by any artifice whatever ; 
 irdrra Kara ravrbv rd rijs diririjs 
 i^ifiaXei' etSii, Theod. On the form 
 i^aTarav, comp. notes on 1 Tim. ii. 
 14. Sri Idv (iij ^6xi] 'ici^itcs 
 
 (the day will not arrive) unless the/re 
 cows ;' slight grammatical irregularity 
 owing to the omission of any member 
 involving a finite verb (such as oi 
 7£i'^(r6Taii;iropoiiirfaToOKwp., Theoph., 
 or Ti ^nipa ovk ivarriaeTaC) which can 
 easily be supplied by the reader; see 
 Winer, Gr. § 64. 1. 7, p. 528, comp. 
 Donalds. Gr. § 583. j3, note. The 
 most natural punctuation is not a 
 comma before Sn, as in Lachm., Tisch,, 
 Buttm., but a colon, as in Mill, and as 
 suggested by Liinemann. 
 •f[ diroirrao-ta] ' the falling away,' the 
 definite religious apostasy that shall 
 precede the coming of Antichrist, and 
 of which it is not improbable that the 
 Apostle had informed them by word 
 of mouth; see ver. 5, and comp. Green, 
 Oram. p. 155. It is hardly necessary 
 to say that iiroaraiTla is not an abs- 
 tract for a concrete term {aifrbv xaKei 
 rbv ivrlxpiaTov iironTairlav, Chiys. ; so 
 Theod., Theoph., CEcum. i), nor again 
 a political (Nosselt) or politico-reli- 
 gious (Kern) falling away, whether 
 past or future, but simply, in accord- 
 ance with what seems to be the regular 
 use of the word (Acts xxi. 2 1, comp. 
 2 Chron. xxix. 19, i Mace. ii. 15), that 
 
II. 
 
 109 
 
 T?? d/iapTiai, 6 vibi t5j airuiXetas, 6 avTiKei/ievof Kai 4 
 
 religious and spiritual apostasy ('dia- 
 bolicam apostasiam,' Iren. adv. Hcer. 
 T. 25. i), that falling away from faith 
 in Christ {atrhQeovanaxiipiiiiiv, CEcum.) 
 of which the revelation of Antichrist 
 shall be the concluding and most ap- 
 palling phenomenon ; comp. Luke 
 XTiii. 8. The paulo-post future yiew, 
 according to which the avoaTaaia re- 
 fers to the revolt of the Jews from 
 the Romans (Schoettg. Sor. Eehr. 
 Vol. I. p. 840), is thus opposed to the 
 probable technical meaning of the 
 word, while that of Hammond, who 
 mainly refers it to the lapse to Gnos- 
 ticism, fails to exhibit its generic re- 
 ference, and to exhaust its prophetic 
 significance. On the form of the 
 
 word, a later form for airluTTaaii, see 
 Lobeck, Phryn. p. 528. 
 diroKaXvi|>6j] ' Je revealed,' — a very 
 noticeable expression : as the Lord's 
 coming is characterized as an diroic&- 
 \v^ts (ch. i. 7), so is that, of Anti- 
 christ. As He is now spiritually pre- 
 sent in His Church, to be personally 
 revealed with more glory hereafter, 
 even so the power of Antichrist is now 
 secretly at work, but will hereafter be 
 made manifest in a definite and dis- 
 tinctive bodily personality. The 
 Kal has here appy. its comeeutive force 
 (see notes on i Thess, iv, i) ; the re- 
 velation of Antichrist was the aggra- 
 vated issue of the diroaraala. 
 6 &v9p. TTJs diiaprCas] ' the man of 
 Sin,' the fearful child of man (obs. the 
 distinct term SvOp.) of whom Sin is 
 the special characteristic and attri- 
 bute, and in whom it is, as it were im- 
 personated and incarnate; dudpuroy 
 Si airbv a/iaprlas irpocrrfybpevuei), iwei- 
 S^ dv8p. ian rrji/ ((iviiiv, irSurav ii> 
 iavTtf rod Siii§i\ov Sexonevos t^v Ivip- 
 yami, Tbeod. On this gen. of the 
 ' predominating quality, ' which is com- 
 
 monly classed under the general head 
 of the gen. poisemvus, see Scheuerlein, 
 Synt. § i6. 3, p. 115, Winer, Gr. § 34. 
 3. b, p. 211 sq. IFor &napTlas, BK ; 
 10 mSs. read dvopias. o vUs 
 
 TTJs dir«\.] ' the son of perdition ;' he 
 who stands in the sort of relation to it 
 that a son does to a father, and who 
 falls under its power and domination, 
 'cujus finis est interitus,' Cocceius 
 [Phil. iii. 19] ; see John xvii. 12, where 
 this awful name is given to Judas, and 
 comp. Evang. Nicod. cap. 20, where 
 it is applied to Satan ; see Thilo, p. 
 708. The transitive (Pelt), or mixed 
 trans, and intransitive meaning (us 
 KoX aiirbs diroWv/iepos Kal iripois irpb- 
 ^evos TovTov ytvopLcvos, Theod., comp. 
 (Ecum.), seems to be phraseologically 
 doubtful; comp. 'Winer, Gr. § 34. 3.b, 
 p. 213, and notes on i Thess. v. 5. 
 4. 6 i!vTiKcC|jiEvos] ' hethat opposeth,' 
 
 the adversary, OOI ]l'-iriri\ < ojl 
 
 [qui adversarius est] Syr., comp. Copt., 
 MAh. ; participial substantive defining 
 more nearly the characteristics of An- 
 tichrist; comp. Winer, Qr. % 45. 7, 
 p. 316. The adversary, though assi- 
 milating one of the distinctive fea- 
 tures of Satan (ttS^V is clearly not to 
 be confounded with him whose agent 
 and emissary he is (ver. 9), but, in 
 accordance with the almost uniform 
 tradition of the ancient Church, is 
 Antichrist, — no mere set of principles 
 ('vis spiritualis evangelio contraria,' 
 Pelt) or succession of opponents (Jow- 
 ett, comp. Middl. dr. Art. p. 383, and 
 Wordsw. in loc), but one single per- 
 sonal beitig, as truly man as He whom 
 he impiously opposes : rls Si ovros 
 ivToi ; dpa o troTocSs ; oiSaiitir oXV 
 avipunros Tts ttSitox airov SeKpp.evX>i 
 TTiv hifTfeiav, Chrys., see Wieselei-, 
 Chronol. p. 261, Hofmann, Schnfib. 
 
110 
 
 EPOS eESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 VTrepatpofievos i-Ti nravTa "keyonevov Qeov n are^acrna, 
 
 II. i, Vol. II. p. 617. The patriatio 
 Teferencea will be foand in the Excar- 
 Bus of Liinem. p. 204, and at length 
 in AUord, Prolegom. on thia Epiatle, 
 The object of the oppoailion {din-iKelfi.), 
 it need eoarcely be aaid, can be none 
 other than Christ,— Se whose bleased 
 name is involved in the more distinc- 
 tive title (air/xpnTTOs) of the adver- 
 saiy, and to whom that aon of perdi- 
 tion, a.3 Origen well saya, is Kori, 
 didiierpov ivavrtos, contra Gels. VI. 64. 
 The present grammatical connexion, 
 which (see above) is as old as Syr., is 
 rightly adopted by De W., Lunem., 
 and moat modern commentators : the 
 absence of the art., urged by Felt, 
 only shows that the irepatpofievos iirl 
 irama, k.t.\. is not a different person 
 from the ivriKU/ievos, but by no means 
 specifies that both are to be united in 
 connexion with irrl irivra K. r. X. ; 
 comp. Winer, ffr. § 19. 4, 5, p. 116 
 sq. In a case like the preaent the 
 article really performs a kind of dou- 
 ble duty ; it aervea to turn dvTiK. into 
 a subst., and also indicates that the 
 two participles refer to the same in- 
 dividual. Kal vircpaipo)!.. k.t.X.] 
 ' and {who) eaxUteth himself above (and 
 against) every one called Qod,' aciL 
 every one so called, whether ' eum qui 
 verisaime dicitur X>eus' (Schott), or 
 those esteemed so by the ' heathen ; 
 the participle being prefixed to avoid 
 the appearance of placing on a level 
 or including in a common designation 
 rbv Qeov and the ao-called goda of 
 paganism ; comp. i Cor. viii. 5, X670- 
 litvoi Scot, Eph, ii. II. The verb 
 iirepaip. occurs (probably) twice in 2 
 Cor. xii. 7, and serves to mark the 
 haughty exaltation (u^uSiJirETai koI 
 fuyoKvvO'^jerai iwl trdtTa 8ebv, koX 
 XaXV" viripoyKa, Dan. xi. 36, Theod.), 
 while ^tt! with its general local mean- 
 
 ing (' supra,' Vulg., ' nfar,' Groth.) of 
 'motion with a view to superposition' 
 (Donalda. Or. § 483) involves the 
 more specific and ethical one of op- 
 position :' comp. Matth. z. %i, and 
 Winer, Gr. § 49. 1, p. 363 sq. 
 kit\ iravra Xcyojt. 0cov] This charac- 
 teristic of impious exaltation is in such 
 striking parallelism with that ascribed 
 by Daniel to 'the king that shall do 
 according to his will' (ch, xi. 36), that 
 we can scarcely doubt that the ancient 
 interpreters were right in referring 
 both to the same person, — Antichrist. 
 The former portion of the prophecy in 
 Daniel is appy. correctly referred to 
 Antiochus Epiphanes, but the con- 
 cluding verses (ver. 36 sq. ) seem only 
 applicable to him of whom Antiochus 
 was merely a type and shadow ; comp. 
 Jerome on Dan. xi. 21, and see Fii- 
 deaux, Connectum, Fart n. Book 3 
 (ad fin.). If this be correct, we 
 
 may be justified in believing that other 
 types of Antichrist may have ap- 
 peared, and may yet appear before 
 that fearful Being finally come. If 
 asked to name them, we shrink not 
 ii-om pointing to thia prophecy, and 
 saying that in whomsoever these dis- 
 tinctive features be found — whosoever 
 wields temporal, or temporal and spi- 
 ritual power, in any degree similar to 
 that in which the Man of Sin is here 
 described as wielding it — he, be he 
 pope or potentate, is beyond all doubt 
 a distinct type of Antichrist. From 
 such comparisons the wisest and most 
 Catholic writers have not deemed it 
 right to shrink ; see Andrewes, Serm. 
 VI. Vol. IV. p. 146 sq., and compare 
 the roff..at the end of Wordsworth's 
 long and important note on this pas- 
 sage, if (r^Paa-|i,a] ' or object 
 of worship,' soil, of divine worship, — 
 a further definition appended to Qe6y. 
 
II. 
 
 Ill 
 
 ftxTTe avTou eh top vaov rov QeoO KaOicrai avoSeiKvivra 
 
 The special inberpretation of Ben- 
 gel, founded on the counesion of 
 aipaff/ia and tre/Savr^s, ' Caesaris ma- 
 jestas et potestas Komse maxime 
 conapicua,' is wholly at variance with 
 the prevailing use of the word (Acts 
 ■xvii. 23, Wisdom xiv. 20, xv. 17, Bel 
 27 [Theod.}, see Suicer, Thesaur. s.v. 
 Vol. II. p. 942), and still more so with 
 the generic terms of the prophecy. 
 BNTTE avTiv...Ka6.] 'so that he aitteth 
 down:' his arrogance rises to such an 
 impious height as to lead to this utter- 
 most act of unholy daring ; 'ware minus 
 hie consilium quam sequelam innuere 
 videtur,' Felt. The verb KaBlaai is 
 here not transitive (i Cor. vi. 4, Eph. 
 i. 20), but in accordance with its 
 nearly regular usage in the N. T. in- 
 transitive; oomp. Thom.-Mag. p. 486 
 /ed. Bern.). The pronoun is thus not 
 reflexive (Grrot.), but is introduced and 
 placed prominently forward to mark 
 theindividualizingarrogance('hicipse, 
 qui quaevis sancta et divina contemnit,' 
 Schott) of this impious intruder. The 
 interpolation after 0eoO of i>s Qi6v, 
 adopted by Rec. with D'EKL(FGi 
 tva 9.) ; mas. ; Syr., Syr.-Phil. with an 
 asterisk, Ar. (PoL ) ; Chrya., al., is right- 
 ly rejected by Lachm., TUch., with A 
 BD'K ; 10 mas. ; Clarom., Sangerm., 
 Augiens., Boem., Vulg., Goth. (?), 
 Copt., Sah., Mih.., Arm. ; Origen (3), 
 and many Ff. C is de6cient. 
 cls T&v vadv Tov 0cov] ' in the temple 
 of God' (the ' adytum' itself, not the 
 mere Uptiv), literally 'into,' with the 
 not uncommon pregnant force of the 
 preposition in connexion with iJfeii', 
 KaeiieaBoi k.t.\.; comp. Winer, Or. 
 § 50. 4, p. 368 sq., Buttm. Mid. p. 1 75- 
 The exact meaning of these words has 
 been greatly contested. Are they (a) 
 merely a figurative or metaphorical 
 expression (i Cor, iii. 17, oomp. Eph. 
 
 ii. 21) for the Church of Christ, rets 
 TTon-axoC^KKXijfffas (Chrya.), according 
 to the views of most of the interpreters 
 of the fourth century! Or do they 
 refer to (i) the actual temple of God 
 at Jerusalem (Matth. xxvi. 61), which 
 prophecy seems to declare may be 
 reatored (Ezek. xxxvii. 26 ; see Todd 
 on Antichr. p. 218), as proposed by 
 Irenseus {Seer. v. 30. 4), and as adopted, 
 though with varying modes of explana- 
 tion, by the majority of recent German 
 commentators? If we are called on 
 to decide absolutely, the comtination 
 (opp. to Alf.) of local terms and the 
 poaaibly traditional nature of the in- 
 terpr. of Irenaeus must decidedly sway 
 us to (5). It may be asked however 
 whether in so wide a prophecy we are 
 wise in positively excluding (a). May 
 it not be possible that a haughty judi- 
 cial or dictatorial session In the Church 
 of Christ may be succeeded by and 
 culminate in a literal act of ineffable 
 presumption to which the present 
 words may more immediately though 
 not exclusively refer? Combined or 
 partially combined interpretations are 
 ever to be regarded with suspicion, 
 but in a prophecy of this profound 
 nature they appear to have some claim 
 on our attention. diroScucVvvTa 
 
 K.T.X.] 'exhibiting himself that he is 
 God;' not merely 'a god,' Copt., or 
 even ' tamquam ait Deus,' Vulg. (com- 
 pare Syr.), but '-^ _ iCTloAjl? 
 
 [quod sit Deus] Syr.-Phil., — with a 
 studied reference to the execrable as- 
 sumption of an unconditioned glory, 
 dignity, and independence, which will 
 characterize the God-opposing session 
 of the son of perdition : so, with an 
 effective pa/raph/raae, ^th. ' et dicet 
 omnibus Ego sum Deus.' The parti- 
 ciple thus does not mark the ' cona- 
 
112 
 
 nPOS eESZAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 5 eavTov oTi eerrtu Geo'f. Ov fivtifnoveveTe on ett o>v Trpof 
 
 6 vfias Tavra eXeyov vfiiv ', koi vvv to KaTe-)(Ov o'loare eis 
 
 tug ' {weipiiiievov iwoSeiKvivat, Chrys.), 
 — this must be from the nature of the 
 caae, — but the continuing nature of 
 the act, the impious persistence of this 
 dereloped outcoming of frightful and 
 intolerable selfishness ; see Miiller on 
 Sin, Book i. 3. -i, Vol. I. p. 145, comp. 
 Book V. Vol. II. p. 480 (Clark). For 
 examples of this use of iiroSaKviyat, 
 see Loesner, Ois. p. 384, and for the 
 force of the compound oiroS. ('spec- 
 tandum aliquid proponere'), Winer, 
 de Verb. Oomp. iv. p. 16. 
 
 5. Ov |i,vi]|iovcverc] ' Bememier ye 
 not;' emphatic, reminding them, with 
 some degree of implied blame, of the 
 definite oral commuDications which 
 had been made to them during the 
 Apostle's first visit ; ISoi y&p Kal Tap- 
 
 ■ bvTOs ^Kovaav raOra X^70»tos, xal ird- 
 Xic iSeiiBtiami vronv^aeus, Chrys. 
 irp6s vftas] 'with you;' so i Thess. 
 iii. 4. On this combination of Trpis 
 with the ace. and verbs implying rest, 
 see notes on, Gal. i. 8, iv. 18. The 
 Toura is clearly the substance of the 
 two preceding verses. 
 
 6. Kal v5v TO Kar^. 0I8.] 'and 
 now what restraineth ye know.' The 
 difficulty of these words is twofold, 
 (i) lexical, turning on the meaning of 
 pw, (2) exegetical, in reference to the 
 explanation that is to be given of ri 
 Karixo"- With regard to the first, 
 the temporal particle subsequently 
 connected with i Karixnir (ver. 7), 
 and the preceding in (ver. 5), both 
 seem to suggest the temporal use of 
 vui> (Wieseler, Chronol. p. 259 note) ; 
 the order of the words however and 
 the context are so very distinctly in 
 favour of the logical use (Hartung, 
 PaHik. vvv, 2. 2, Vol. 11. p. 25, see 
 notes on i Thess. iii. 8), that on the 
 whole that meaning is to be preferred ; 
 
 see esp. Liinem. in loc. who basappy. 
 brought valid arguments against the 
 temporal meaning. To investigate (2) 
 properly would far outstrip the limits 
 of this commentary. I may however 
 say briefly — ^that after most anxious 
 consideration I believe that a modifi- 
 cation of the current patristic view is 
 much the moat plausible interpreta- 
 tion. The majority of these early 
 writers referred the restraining influ- 
 ence to the Boman Empire, 'quis 
 nisi Bomanus status?' Tertull. de 
 Sesurr. cap. 24: so Ohiys., Theopb., 
 CEcum., Cyril of Jems., al. In its 
 literal meaning this cannot now be 
 sustained without artificial and unhis- 
 torioal assumptions : it however we 
 refer the t4 Karixov to what really 
 formed the groundwork of that inter- 
 pretation — the restraining power of 
 well-ordered human rule, the principles 
 of legality as opposed to those of 
 ivofda — of which the Boman Empire 
 was the then embodiment and mani- 
 festation, we shall probably not be far 
 from the real meaning of this very 
 mysterious expression. Of the nu- 
 merous other views, we may notice 
 the opinion of Theod. and Tbeod.- 
 Mops., that the to kot^ok is toB 
 6eaO opos, as certainly being at first 
 sight plausible ; but to this the im Ik 
 pAiTov yivriTai introduces an objection 
 that seems positively insuperable. 
 Further information will be found in 
 the Excursus of Pelt (who however 
 adopts the view of Theod.), p. 185 sq., 
 in the thoughtful note of Olsh., the 
 discussion of Liinem. p. 204 sq., the 
 useful summary of Alford, Prolegom. 
 on this Epistle, and the good note of 
 Wordsw. in loc. ; comp. also Hof- 
 mann, Schriftb. 11. 2, Vol. 11. p. 613 
 sq. Airi diTOKiiX,]'tkut 
 
11. 5. 6, 7- 
 
 113 
 
 TO aTTOKoKvipO^i/ai avTov ev to? eai/Toi; Kaip/f. to yap J 
 HvoTT^piov i]Si] evepyeiTai t?? ai/o/uiaj, fiovov 6 Kare-^u)v 
 
 he ahould he revealed;'' purpose con- 
 templated in the existence of tlie re- 
 stT^ning principle. This dTro/cdXv^is 
 was not to be immediate (ofi/c erTrei" Sn 
 Tttx^ws IffToi, Chrys.), or fortuitous, 
 but was to be deferred till the 6 ^av- 
 ToS Kaip6s, — the season appointed and 
 ordained by God. On the correct 
 insertion of iv, see notes onEph. ii. 12. 
 7. tA Y<lp ("""ifp. K.T.X.] 'i'ortAe 
 mystery of lawlessness ;' confirmatory ex- 
 planation of the precediug statement: 
 the mystery of lawlessness is truly at 
 work; but its full manifestation can- 
 not take place till the removal of the 
 restraining power. On this blending 
 of the explanatory and argumentative 
 forces of ydp, see notes on i Thess. 
 11 I. The meaning of /iuiTTi;- 
 
 piov TTJs ivofi. is somewhat doubtful. 
 Considered merely grammatically, the 
 gen. does not seem to be that of the 
 agent (Theod.), or that of apposition 
 (Lunem., and Alf. — who however 
 seems to mix it up with a gen. con- 
 tinentis), but simply a gen. definitivus 
 (comp. Madvig, Synt. § 49) or gen. of 
 the 'characterizing principle or qua- 
 lity' (Scheuerl. Synt. § 16. 3, p. 115), 
 — the mystery of which the character- 
 izing feature, or, so to say, the active 
 principle, is Avo/da ; comp. Joseph. 
 Bell. Jud. I. 24. i, riv 'AvTiirdTpov 
 piov oix S,v diiAproi ns eliriiv xaxlas 
 IxvGTiipiov. The transition from this 
 gen. to that of ethical content is so 
 easy and natural, that it is often diffi- 
 cult to decide whether the gen. be- 
 longs to that category or to that of 
 the possess, gen. ; see Scheuerl. I. c. 
 The genitival relation of /iv(rTijp. t^s 
 eiae^elas is often somewhat plausibly 
 contrasted with the present expression 
 (Audrewes, Serm. Iii. Vol. I. 34), but 
 really seems to be different • see notes 
 E. T. 
 
 on I Tim. iii. 9. This mystery 
 
 of avo/xia is no personality, scil. Auti-' 
 Christ, or any real or assumed type 
 of Antichrist {TSepuva ivravBi <j)7i<riv, 
 Chrys.), but all that mass of uncom- 
 bined and so to say unorganized dfo- 
 /ila, which, though at present seen 
 only in detail and not revealed in its 
 true proportions, is even now (ijSii) 
 aggregating and energizing, and will 
 hereafter [iv T(p iavrou KalpQ) find its 
 complete development and organiza- 
 tion in the person and power of Anti- 
 christ. On the meaning of /imriip., — '■ 
 here placed emphatically forward as 
 standing in tacit antithesis to &TOKa- 
 \v(pd. ver. 6, 8, — see notes on Eph. v. 
 32, and comp. Sanderson, Serm. IX. 
 (ad Aul.), Vol. I. p. 227 (ed. Jacobs.). 
 lv6pY«tTai] ' is working,' ' operatur,' 
 
 Vulg., r.|\g;. . AVn\ _J5_, [mci- 
 
 pit eEScax esse], Syr., comp. Mih.; 
 clearly not passive, ' efficax redditur ' 
 (Schott), which would not only be here 
 inappropriate but is opposed to the 
 prevailing use of the word in the N.T. ; 
 see notes on Gal. v. 6, and on the 
 different constructions of the word, 
 notes on ib. ii. 8. In the middle it 
 stands either absolutely or followed by 
 iv. Tijs dvo|JiCas] ' lawlessness;' 
 
 in appropriate and illustrative anti- 
 thesis to the principle of order and 
 legality involved in the probable mean- 
 ing of t6 kot^xoc. On the meaning 
 of dvoixia. ('inquS, cogitaturpotissimum 
 legem non servari,' Tittm.) and its 
 distinction from i.Si.Kla, see Tittm. 
 Synon. I. p. 48, Trench, Synon. Part 
 II. § 16, and notes on Tit. ii. 14. 
 [lovov o KaT^uv K.T.X.] ' only until he 
 that now restraineth shall have been re- 
 moved;' rhetorical change of the usual 
 order; see exx. in Winer, Gr. § 61. 3, 
 I 
 
114 
 
 nPOS GESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 8 aoTi ecas sk fxicrou yevijTai' kui Tore airoKaXv^O^a-isrtxi 
 
 p. 485, and oomp. G-al. ii. 10, /iSpor 
 Ti2v irTW)(Cav iva fivTjfioveOcijftev, where 
 the emphatic words are similarly at- 
 tached to the aemi-elliptioal liinov. As 
 however in Gal. I. c. so here it is not 
 necessary to supply definitely any verb 
 to complete the ellipsis ('tantum ut 
 qui tenet nunc teneat,' Vulg., comp. 
 Auth.), still less to connect ju6voi> with 
 what precedes (Kypke, Obs. Vol. II. 
 Pi 342). The /idiiov belongs to ?us, 
 and simply states the limitation in- 
 volved in the present working of the 
 fWffT^piov T^s dvofdas : it is working 
 already, but only with unconcentrated 
 action until the obstacle be removed, 
 and Antichrist be revealed. So rightly 
 as to structure Chrys., i} ipxh V I''*" 
 /ia'CKT] Srav &p0§ (k /jiiaov, rbre inetms 
 TJ^et, The only other plausible struc- 
 ture is the supplement of (ari,, but the 
 objection of Liinem., that in the pre- 
 sent case a word of such real import- 
 ance could scarcely be omitted, seems 
 reasonable and valid. The 
 
 greatest difBculty however is the 
 change of gender in the designation of 
 the restraining principle. Perhaps the 
 simplest view is to regard it, not as a 
 studied designation of a single indivi- 
 dual (e.g. St Paul, Schott, p. 249), 
 or of a collection of such {e.g. the 
 saints at Jerusalem, Wieseler, Chronol, 
 p. 273, or, more plausibly, the succes- 
 sion of Eoman Emperors, Wordsw.), 
 but merely as a realistic touch, by 
 which what was previously expressed 
 by the more abstract t4 narixov is 
 now represented as concrete and per- 
 sonified; comp. Bom. xiii. 4, where 
 the personification is somewhat simi- 
 larly introduced after, and elicited 
 from, a foregoing abstract term (^{ou- 
 fflav). ipTi is to be closely 
 
 connected with & Karixi^n, and simply 
 refers to time regarded as present to 
 
 the writer. On the derivation and 
 meaning of the word, see notes on 
 I Thess. iii. 6. 
 
 ius Ik (Uo-ov ■Y^VTjTai] On this con- 
 nexion of (as with the subjunctive 
 without &v, — a construction especially 
 characteristic of later writers, see 
 Winer, Gr. § 41. 3, p. 266, The dis- 
 tinction acutely drawn by Herm. {de 
 Partic. dp, II. 9, p. 109) between such 
 formulae as lil/ipere Sios Siva (de mori- 
 bundo) and fus &p diva (de eo qui 
 non ita propinquam sibi putaret mor- 
 tem esse) and repeated by Klotz 
 (Devar. Vol. 11. p. 568) cannot with 
 safety be applied in the K. T. j nor 
 can we with distinct probability as- 
 cribe the omission of &p to any idea of 
 design supposed to be involved in the 
 sentence (it is actually inserted here by 
 FG), as suggested by Green, Oram. 
 p. 64, note. We have only an in- 
 stance of that obliteration of finer 
 shades of distinction which charac- 
 terizes the later and decaden t Greek. 
 The phrase ix jUaov ylypeaSai is il- 
 lustrated by Wetstein and Kypke 
 {Obs. Vol. II. p. 343) : it indicates the 
 removal of any obstacle, of anything 
 ip jiiaif 6p (Xen. Cyrop. v. i. 26, 
 cited by Liinem.), leaving the manner 
 of the removal wholly undefined; 
 comp. ipB^ iK fiiaov viiop, i Cor, v. 2, 
 ^prai ix ToO fUaoVy Isaiah Ivii. -i. 
 
 8. Kol T(5t«] 'and THEN,' — then 
 when Kn.Tix""' BhaU have been re- 
 moved ; the primary emphasis clearly 
 falling on the particle of time, the 
 secondary and subordinate on oTrora- 
 Au0ffi;(reTO(. 6 avo|ios] ' the 
 
 lawleii one;' identical with the fore- 
 going i dvdpuTTos rijs d/ua/iT,, the 
 changing designation serving appro- 
 priately to echo the preceding term 
 {dpop,la), which defines more nearly the 
 evil principle that the Man of Sin will 
 
II. 8, 9- 
 
 115 
 
 o avofxoi, ov 6 Js^vptoi 'Jj/orouy aceXet tw Trvevfiari rod 
 &TOfiaTOi avTOv kui KUTapy^crei rp e7rt(pav€ia t5j -irapou- 
 (Tias avTov' ov etrriv r/ •jrapova-la kot evepyeiav tow 9 
 
 8. a»eXet] So Lachm., Tisch. ed. i, with ABD^ ; 10 msa.; al. — ivi\oi is the 
 reading of FGK* — avaXoi of K^. Sec, Tisch. ed. 2, 7, read dvoKiiaei. with 
 D'EKL ; mss. , Ff . C is deficient. In spite of the possibility of conformation 
 to Isaiah xi. 4, it seems best to retain the reading to which so great a prepon- 
 derance of MS. authority points. 
 
 especially develop: ' Eidex ilk qui 
 nullis legum vinculis coerceri vult, sed 
 omnia jura divina et humana suo 
 ipsius arbitrio subjicit,' Vorst, ap. 
 Pol. Spn. Sv 6 Kupios 
 
 K.T.\.] ' whom the Lord Jesus shall 
 consume with the breath of Sis mouth ; ' 
 relative sentence describing, with a 
 consolatory glance forward to the final 
 issue, the ultimate fate of Antichrist ; 
 Kal tI fierh ravra; iyyits 17 Trapa- 
 fivBta' iirdyeiyb,p'Ov 6 Kipios k.t.X., 
 Chrys. The forcible expression t(3 
 vpeifi. rou arltfi. avTov has received dif- 
 ferent explanations. It has been re- 
 ferred (o) by the Greek commentators 
 to the words of power {(pBiy^eru 
 H&vov, Chrys.; comp. Theod., Theod.- 
 Mops., al.) issuing from the Lord's 
 lips ; (i) by Athan. (ad Serap. i. 6, p. 
 655), Theoph. 2, al., to the Holy 
 Spirit ; but is most simply regarded 
 (c) as a vivid declaration of the glorious 
 and invincible power of the coming 
 Lord, 'cui sufficiat halitus oris quo 
 duo/ios ille perdatur,' Schott; comp. 
 Isaiah xi. 4 (from which these words 
 may have been derived), Wisdom xi. 
 20, 21, and the pertinent quotations 
 from Babbinical writera collected by 
 Wetst. in loc. : on the word Karapyia, 
 comp. notes on Oal, v. 4. The 
 
 reading is hardly doubtful : b 'Kip. 
 'Ii;o-oCs is supported by ADE'FGL^N ; 
 10 mss. ; Syr. (both), Vulg., al. Rec. 
 omits 'Iijo-oOs with BE^KL^; most 
 mss.; Arab. (Pol.); Orig., al. is 
 
 deficient. rfj ^i(|>avc(i} 
 
 TTJs trap. avToS] ' with the manifestation 
 of His coming;' not with » semi- 
 theological reference to the glorious 
 manifestation (' inlustratione, ' Vulg., 
 'brightness,' Auth., *vi salutari,' 
 Kypke, Obs. Vol. 11. p. 343) of Christ 
 at His second coming (comp. notes on 
 I Tim. vi. 14, and Tit. ii. 13, where 
 r-^s S6fi)s is definitely added), but with 
 simple reference to His visible coming 
 (' aspectuadventus sui,'Clarom.,^th.) 
 and actual local appearing; arifaa j^v 
 avirniv xal (pavds iibvov, Chrys. , Theoph, 
 9, o5 IotIv ij irapovcrCa] Return to 
 the time and subject of Antichrist's 
 coming, after the anticipatory allusion 
 to his final overthrow; the ou resuming 
 and re-echoing the ov of verse 8. The 
 ethical present i(rrlv marks the cer- 
 tainty of the future event; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 40. i, p. 237, Bemhardy, Synt. 
 X. 2, p. 371. The instant repetition 
 of irapovHa in the new connexion is 
 remarkable. kut' Iv^py, 
 
 Tov Sar.] 'according to the working 
 of Solan;' not here 'in consequence 
 of '.(DeW., comp. notes on ch. i. 12), 
 but, in accordance with the more 
 usual force of xard, ' in agreement and 
 correspondence with ' an ivipyaa such 
 as belongs to and might be looked for 
 from Satan; comp. notes on Eph. i. 
 19, and Col. i. 29. The remark of 
 Bengel is full of deep thought,^' ut 
 ad Deum se habet Christus, sic e con- 
 trario ad Satanam se habet Anti.- 
 12 
 
116 
 
 nPOS eESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 "Zarava eu iracrri Suvafiei Kui cr>]/ieloii Kal repacriv ■vf^eJ- 
 10 Sovt Kal iv Trda-^ airarri aSiKias TOii airoWvfievon, av6 
 
 chriatus.' Iv iritra 
 
 Swaji,. K.T.X.] ' in all power <md signt 
 and wonders of lying,' — in every form 
 of (see notes on Eph. i. 8) power, 
 signs, and wonders, leading to and 
 tending to develop ^euSos: w being 
 no 'nota dativi' (Olsh.), but marking 
 the sphere and domain of this [dvTi] 
 Tapovala (comp. notes on i Thess. i. 
 5), and both ir&ari (comp. Winer, Gr. 
 § 59- 5> P- 466) and the gen. being 
 associated with all the three substan- 
 tives. The exact nature of the geni- 
 tival relation is not perfectly certain : 
 tpeiSovs may be regarded as (a) a gen. 
 of the origin, (b) of the characteriang 
 quality or essence (see notes on ver. 
 7), or lastly, (c) of ' the point of 
 view' (Soheuerl. Synt. § 18, p. 129). 
 Of these (a) is by no means probable ; 
 but between (6) and (c) it is very difiB- 
 Cult to decide. Perhaps the object 
 specified in ver. 1 1 , and the analogy 
 of airiTti aSiKias (ver. 10), soil. ' fraus 
 quae ad improbitatem spectat ' (Schott 
 I, Winer, Gr. § 30. 2. jS, p. 170), may 
 here incline us to the latter ; so Chrys. 
 i, ek \l/eSSos ayovin. For exx. of these 
 more lax connexions of the gen., gee 
 Winer, Gr. I. e. 
 
 The three substantives might seem to 
 be climactic ; it was not only in an 
 element of power (see notes on i Thess. 
 i. 5), but one of signs, and further 
 one of prodigies, that the working of 
 Satan took place ; as however we f nd 
 a varied order (Acts ii. ii), and as the 
 di£ference between (rijiUcTa ('res inso- 
 litas quibuB Deus aliquid signijicet,' 
 Fritz.) and ripdra (' quae ut inusitata 
 observarisoleant,' ib.) exists less in the 
 things themselves than in the mode of 
 regarding them, we may perhaps most 
 naturally consider the substantives as 
 E^tudiedly accumulated so as to give 
 
 force and expansion to the description; 
 compare Bomemann, Scliol. in Z/uc, 
 p. XXX. On the meaning of the last 
 two words, and the derivation of ripas 
 [rripSa, comp. Benfey, Wwrzellex. Vol. 
 II. p. 238], see the elaborate note of 
 Fritz.' iJom. xv. 19, Vol. m. p. 270. 
 The form aitnetov appears closely con- 
 nected with a^iia (di;/iar-), and thence 
 with ®EO, TlBriiu; see Pott, Etym. 
 Forsch. Vol. II. p. 592. 
 
 10. Kal Iv wooT) K.T.X.] 'and in all 
 {every hind of) deceit of iniquity;' 
 generic and comprehensive term ap- 
 pended by the collective ko! to the 
 foregoing list of more special details; 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 53. 3, p. 388, and 
 notes on Phil. iv. 12. On the geni- 
 tival relation, see above, ver. 9, and 
 Winer, Gr. § 30. 2, p. 170, and on the 
 meaning of aSixla (' de qu4cunque im- 
 probitate dicitur quatenus T(f SiKotif 
 repugnat,' Tittm.), notes on 2 Tim. 
 ii. 19. The reading of Sec. rift 
 
 is. [with DEKX^5^; mss.; Hippol, 
 Chrys., Theod.] is rejected by Lachm. 
 and Tisch. on the higher authority of 
 ABFGNi; mss.; Orig. (6), Cyr.- 
 Jer. Tots diroXXv- 
 
 jiivois] 'for those thai are perishing;' 
 dat. incommodi, belonging to the gene- 
 ral head of the dative of interest; see 
 KrUger, Spradhl. § 48. 4. The more 
 exactly specifying tois diroXA. has no 
 reference to any ' decretum reproba- 
 tionis' (comp. even Pelt, 'damnationi 
 a Deo devoti '), but either like i<rTlp 
 marks the certainty of the event (' qui 
 certissime siint perituii,' Turret.), or 
 perhaps more simply, with merely a 
 temporal parallelism, points to those 
 who 'are perishing' at the time in 
 contemplation, — not too without re- 
 ference to the present existence (comp. 
 ver. 7) of such a class (i Cor. i. 18,' 
 
II. lo, ir. 
 
 117 
 
 wv Triv ayairtiv riji aXtjOetag ovk eSe^avro ek to a-iaO^mi 
 avTovs. KOI oia rovro vifivet avroii 6 0eo9 evepyeiav II 
 
 I Cor. ii. 15, iv. 3), of which those 
 here specified will be the coutinuaDoe 
 and development. The consolatory 
 nature of the tacit limitation is not 
 overlooked by the Greek commenta- 
 tors ; /«7 ^ojSv^BS iyaTr-qri, oKK Sxove 
 X^yoKTos aiiTov' iv rois dn-oXX. laxict, 
 ot el Kal fir) irapeyhiero iKetvos oix av 
 iirilirdiiirav, Chrya. '¥iv is 
 
 prefixed to rots oVoXX. by Rec. but only 
 on the authority of D^EKLK* ; mss. ; 
 Syr. (both); Orig. (i), al. 
 ov9' (Sv] 'for that,' 'in requital for 
 that' (tI ovv tA xipSos ; Chrys.), Luke 
 i. 20, xii. 3, xix. 44, Acts zii. 23, comp. 
 Lev. xxiv. 10 ; explanatory statement 
 of the cause of the judicial dispensa- 
 tion of God, and of the justness and 
 deservedneas of their punishment. On 
 this meaning of dvB' ui> ('propterea 
 quod'), seeHerm. Fts(er,No.33,Winer, 
 Gr. § 47. a, p. 336, and for exx. see 
 the list collected by Wetst. on Luke 
 i. 20, and Bapbel, Annot. Vol. i. p. 
 442. Tijv o.ya.tn\v Ttjs a\T|6.] 
 
 ' the love of the truth; ' not ' charitatem 
 veram, ' Anselm (cited by Corn, a Lap. ), 
 but ' the love felt for the truth,' ' di- 
 lectionem veritatis, ' Pseud.-Ambr., — 
 dXii^. not being a gen, of quality, but 
 the simple and common gen. objecti; 
 comp. Winer, dr. § 30, p. 167, Kruger, 
 Sprachl. § 47. 7. i sq. 'H aX^ffeia is 
 opposed to TO \l/ev5os (ver. 11). It 
 seems somewhat perverse in Jowett to 
 deny that this implies any higher de- 
 gree of alienation from the truth than 
 the less distinctive oix iSi^avTO t^v 
 SKriBeiav : surely it is one thing not to 
 receive the truth, — an unhappy state 
 that might be referable to a mental 
 obliquity for which some excuse might 
 be found, — and another to receive no 
 love of itj to be open to no desire to 
 seek it, to be worse than indifferent 
 
 to it ; ' ubi Veritas summopere amabi- 
 lis, ibi se quodammodo amor veritatis 
 insinuat,' Coooeius. The prosopopoeia 
 (ayiriiv dXrjOetas tov Kipwv KiKXrixev) 
 adopted by Theod., Theoph., and 
 (Ecum., is artificial, and unsupported 
 by analogy. els t4 o-uSijvai. 
 
 ovTovs] 'thai they might be saved;' 
 object that would have been naturally 
 contemplated in their reception of it ; 
 and which was disregarded and nega- 
 tived by their pursuing the contrary 
 course ; ' non ita sibi chari fuerunt ut 
 cogitarent de vit£ setern^,' Cocceius. 
 
 II, Kal Sid TOVTo] 'And for this 
 came ; ' almost ' so for this cause,' koX 
 serving to mark the correspondence 
 between the judgments and the course 
 of conduct that had provoked them, 
 and perhaps involving partly a conse- 
 cutive and partly a contrasting force.; 
 comp. note o^ the uses of Kai, on 
 Phil. iv. 12. ir^jiirci] 'doth 
 
 tend;' not so much an ethical (see 
 ver. 9) as a direct present ; the mys- 
 tery of iniquity is even now at work 
 (ver. 7), and is even now calling down 
 on itself the punishment of judicial 
 obduracy. There is no need for ex- 
 plaining away jrifiirci (iruyxwp'fff" 0o- 
 vwairTiyTr\dv'r)i','Ibeod., comp. Theod.- 
 Mops., Theoph., CBcum.), nor is it 
 right merely to ascribe it to a form of 
 thought in the age of the Apostle 
 (Jowett), nor enough to say merely 
 that ' whatever God permits He or- 
 dains,' Alf. The words are definite 
 and significant; they point to that 
 'judicial infatuation' (Waterl. Serm. 
 Vol. V. p. 486, — differently however 
 in Vol. IV. p. 363) into which, in the 
 development of His just government 
 of the world, God causes evil and 
 error to be unfolded, and which He 
 brings into punitive agency in the 
 
118 
 
 nPOS 0E22AAONIKEI2 B. 
 
 12 TrXovi/y e«J TO irto'Tevcrai avTOvi T(f y^evSet, "Iva KpiBweriv 
 airavTet ot furi irta-revcravTei t? aXijOela aW evSoKr/- 
 
 12. [^i-] Tj aSiriji] The reading is not quite certain ; iv is given by Hec. 
 and I^h. ed. i, 7, with AD'EKLX*; most msa. ; Orig. (a), CSbirys., Theod.,but 
 is enclosed in brackets by Lachm., and was rejected by Twch. ed. 1, with BD^ 
 JFGNi ; 7 mss. ; Orig. (2), Hippol., al. C is deficient. As, though the construc- 
 tion with the simple dat. is not found in the N. T., the omission of the pre- 
 position may have been suggested here by a desire to preserve a parallelism of 
 clauses, we still retain the h> in the text, but deem it necessary to mark the 
 increased doubt which the authority of K produces by enclosing the word in 
 brackets. 
 
 case of obstinate and truth-hating re- 
 jection of His offers and calls of mercy ; 
 comp. Mailer, Dodr. of Sin, Book v. 
 Vol. I. p. 471 (Clark), and see two 
 able Sermons on this text by South, 
 Serm. Vol. 11. p. 192 — 228. The read- 
 ing of Eec. viiifa [D^EKLK* ; mss. ; 
 Clarom., Augiens., majority of Vv., 
 and many K.] is rightly rejected by 
 inost modem editors, being inferior in 
 uncial authority to wfnTa [ABD'F 
 GNi ; 67 J Vulg. (Amiat.), Orig. (3), 
 aL], and a correction of it that would 
 easily suggest itself. 
 ivipyaav irXoviis] 'an in-worTdng of 
 error;' not jrXdxijj' tvepydv, CEcum., 
 — ^here a most questionable solution of 
 the governing subst. (see Winer, Gr. 
 § 34- 3> P- 2i')i but') i'' accordance 
 with SvviifLei — ^ei^Sovs, of which iyipy. 
 ttXokijs is a kind of summary, — 'a 
 working which tends to enhance and 
 develop irXdn;,' the gen. being (aa 
 ^//eiSovs in verse 9) that of ' the point 
 of view;' rd Ipya iJ Toiei ['Aj'tIx/'.] 
 eh t4 irXaiiiiaai, Theoph. On the 
 meaning of irXdi'j; , (' erroris,' Vulg.), 
 see notes on i These, ii. 3, and Eph. 
 iv. 14. ct$ ri irurrcOa-ai k.t.X.] 
 
 'to the intent that they should believe 
 the Ke,' opposed to 'the truth' (ver. 
 10), soil, the falsehood implied in the 
 preceding words off i(7rlv — aitxlai 
 
 (Green, Gram. p. 141), not falsehood 
 generally, as Middl. Gr. Art. p. 383 
 (ed. Bose) ; clause stating the purpose 
 of God ('non meram Bequelam,'Scbott) 
 in sending to them the iviyp. TrXOT))! 
 by His judicial act. He sends a power 
 of a nature designed to work out the 
 appointed issue, and to bring about a 
 state which involves its own chastise- 
 ment. On the force of els to in sen- 
 tences similar to the present, see Meyer 
 on JRom. i. 20. 
 
 12. tva KpiSuo-iv airavTfs] ' that 
 they may all of them ie judged;' more 
 remote purpose involved in the preced- 
 ing words ek to TriffTeCcrat (CT.X., with 
 which this clause seems more naturally 
 connected than directly with the pre- 
 ceding vifiirti. The preceding ds t4 
 K.T.X. renders a reference to result 
 ('quo fiet ut,' Schott) here distinctly 
 untenable. It need scarcely be said 
 that KpWuatv is not per se ' might be 
 damned,' Auth. {iva KaTOicpiff&ri, 
 Chrys.), but simply ' may be judged," 
 'judicentur,' Vulg., the further idea 
 of an unfavourable judgment being 
 supplied by the context ; comp. /cpi/ia 
 in I Tim. iii. 6, and see notes in loc. 
 The reading is doubtful : Tisch, reads 
 Siravres with AFGK ; mss. ; Orig. (2), 
 Oyr.: Eec. and Lachm. (non marg.) 
 adopt TTOKres with BDEL ; mss. ; Orig. 
 
11. 12, 13. 
 
 119 
 
 JhatHe"hathSenaSd '^/^""^ "^^ ocfjelXo/xev evxapicTTelv r^ 13 
 
 called you. Hold what O*^ ' \f« 'S'\jl*» 
 
 we deUvered unto you ; ^^V "TUVTOTE TTepi VftWV, aOeXcpOl Ijya- 
 
 and may God stablish / ^^■rr■» « rf-\ t " t 
 
 you. vrif/Levot viro J\.vpiov, on eiAaro vfiag o 
 
 Oeog air ap^^i ei'y crwTijplav iv ayiaiTfjLW UvevfuaTOi koc 
 
 (r), many Ff. The evidence is thus 
 very evenly balanced. 
 euSaKT](raVTes [ev] t^ dSiK.] 'took 
 pleasure in unrighteousness.' On the 
 meaning of eiSoKciv ('re aut person^ 
 deleotari,' Fritz.), compare notes on i 
 Thess. ii. 8, but see esp. the elaborate 
 note of Fritz. Rom. i. i, Vol. II. p. 
 .369 sq. 
 
 13. 'HpEis 8fl 'But we,' soil, the 
 Apostle and his companions, Silvanus 
 and Timothy (ch. i. i), not St Paul 
 alone (Jowett), — ^placed by means of 
 the oppositive Si in contrast with those 
 alluded to in the foregoing verses. 
 <3<|>€C\o|i.£v] ' are hound,' Auth. , ' opor- 
 tet,' Copt. [sempaha'\ ; the verb o(l>el\eiv, 
 as in ch. i. 3, expressing the duty on 
 its subjective side, ' das innerlich Ge- 
 idrungenfiihlen,' Liinem. On the con- 
 nexion of dixapurreiv vfith irepl, and 
 on the meaning of the verb, see notes 
 and reff. on i Thess. i. i. 
 aSe\<^oC K.T.X.] Similarly, i Thess. i. 
 4, aSiKipol ifyairriiUi/oi liiro OcoO, — ex- 
 cept that Kvplov here, as nearly always 
 in St Paul's Epp., refers to our Lord, 
 not to God the Father. Though love, 
 as Alf. remarks, is in this sort of col- 
 location somewhat more usually refer- 
 red by St Paul to the First Person of 
 the blessed Trinity (ver. 16, Eph. ii. 
 4, al.), yet such references to the 
 Second Person are by no means with- 
 out precedent; comp. Kom. viii. 37, 
 Eph. V. 2, 25. oTi ctXaTo k.t.X.] 
 
 ' that God chose you;' objective sen- 
 tence ('quod,' Yulg., J, Syr.), stating 
 the matter and grounds, surely not 
 ' the reason,' Alf. (comp. .ffith., Auth.), 
 of the eixapiarla; see i Thess. ii. 13, 
 I Cor. i. 14, and on objective sen- 
 
 tences generally, or as they are some- 
 times termed 'expositive' sentences, 
 consult Schmalfeld, iS^nt. § 163 sq., 
 Donalds. Gr. % 584 sq. The verb al- 
 peiaSai is a air. XeyS/t, in St Paul's 
 Epp. in reference to the divine ^/cXoy^, 
 the term iKXiyeaOai being used in i 
 Cor. i. 37, 28, and Eph. i. 4 ; comp. i 
 Thess. i. 4, and Eeuss, ThSol. Chrll. 
 IV. 14, Vol. II. p. 133 sq. Rec. reads 
 flKcTO with E ; most mss., but the 
 Alexandrian form elKaro (see Lobeck, 
 Phryn. p. 183) is rightly adopted by 
 -Lachm., Fisch., and most modern 
 editors, with greatly preponderating 
 authority [ABDEFGLK; some mss.; 
 Theod. (ms.)]. On these forms in the 
 N.T., see Tisch. Prolegom. p. LVi (ed. 
 7), and the somewhat opposing <;om- 
 ments of Scrivener, Introd. to N. T. 
 VIII. 6, p. 416. dir dpX'HS] 
 
 ' from the beginning,' scU. of all things, 
 'from eternity;' so i John i. i, ii. 13, 
 but not elsewhere in St Paul's Epp., 
 where the more distinctive formulas 
 irpo Kara^oX^s Kda/iov (Eph. L 4), irpo 
 Twv alwvuv (i Cor. ii. 7)> "'pd xpbvav 
 atuvlav (2 Tim. i. 9), and more re- 
 strictedly, airb rwv alibvuv (Eph. iii. 
 9), are used to express the same or a 
 similar idea. The reference to the 
 beginning of the gospel-preaching 
 (HichaeUs, al.) is rightly rejected by 
 Schott and Liinem., as requiring some 
 explanatoiy supplement either imme- 
 diately connected with apxij (Phil. iv. 
 15) or obviously involved in the con- 
 text (i John ii. 7, 24). Finally 
 the reading dirapxvi' (Lachm., Tisch. 
 ed. i) has the good external support 
 of BFG; S mss. ; Vulg., but is in- 
 ferior in external authority to air' apr 
 
120 
 
 nPOS 0E22AAONIKEIS B. 
 
 14 irlatei a\)j0«a?, etj o kaXetrev v/jlus Sia toS evayyeXlov 
 
 So^iji rod Kvptov iinwv 'Iijcrou 
 
 rinaiv, ety irepiTTOitjcrtv 
 
 Xvs [which is found in DEKLK ; nearly 
 all msa. and Vv. ; Gr. and Lat. Ff. 
 A non liquet and C is deficient. 'Air- 
 apxiiv tacitly involyea such a contradic- 
 tion to actual fact (the Thessalonians 
 were not the first believers in Maced.), 
 t]iat we can here scarcely hesitate in 
 our choice. Iv d7i.a<r|i^ 
 
 IIyev|iaTo$] 'in sanctificaiion of the 
 Spirit,' scil. wrought by, and effected 
 by the Spirit ; Hveifiaros being the 
 gen. of the causa efficients (see notes on 
 I Thesa. i. 6), and referring not to 
 man's spirit (Schott), but to the per- 
 sonal Holy Spirit. No argument can 
 be founded on the omission of the 
 article, as in the first place such omis- 
 sions are not rare with IlvcC/ia, and 
 secondly, it might here be due to the 
 common principle of correlation ; comp. 
 Middl. Gr. Art. ni. 3. 7, p. 49 (ed. 
 Eose). The prep, iv may be instru- 
 mental (Chrys., Llinem., al.), but is 
 perhaps more naturally taken in its 
 usual sense as denoting the spiritual 
 state in which the ttkaro els ffUTijplai) 
 was realized ; see Winer, 6r. § 50. 5, 
 p. 37o> who in ed. 5 with less accuracy 
 referred it to <rii>Ti/ipla, The assump- 
 tion of De W. that iv is here equiva- 
 lent to els is well refuted by Llinem. , 
 who justly urges the obscuring effect 
 this would have on the preceding els 
 aarriplav. irdrrci dXi]6c(as] 
 
 'faith in the truth ; ' dXTjSeias not being 
 a gen. of quality (Trio-Tews akiiBovs, 
 Chrys.), but simply the gen. objecli, 
 see Winer, Gr. § 30. i, p. 167, and 
 comp. Phil. i. 77. 
 
 14. tls S] 'whereunto,' soil, els 
 (ruTiiplav iv iyiartiif k.t.\., not 'ad 
 electionem atque animum quo e&dem 
 digni evadimua' (Felt), as the his- 
 torical iK6,\ecrev naturally stands in 
 connexion, not with the election 
 
 which had taken place ott' opx?!, but 
 with those issues contemplated by the 
 el\aTO which had their commence- 
 ments in time. So rightly Theoph., 
 els TOVTO yhp iKd\e<rev v/ios, iptialv els 
 TOVTO, irdiov ; els to aaBrivai Sih (?) 
 Tou d^ioiTfioO KoX TTJs vlffTeois. After 
 FGK; Vulg., al. add Kal. 
 v|ias] The reading of Lachm, ^/las has 
 the support of ABC ; » few mss. ; 
 Clarom., Sangerm., Augiens., and, — 
 as i!/ias might have been a conforma- 
 tion to the preceding inas,-. — is plaus- 
 ible, but hardly sufficiently supported 
 by external authority to be admitted 
 with confidence. 
 
 8id ToO Evayy. tJiiuv] 'iy means of 
 our Gospel,' scil. 'the Gospel we 
 preached,' that which involved the 
 dKorjv which is the antecedent of ttI- 
 (TTis; comp. Bom. x. 17, and Usteri, 
 Lehrl}. 11. 2. 2, p. 267. On the exact 
 genitival relation oi-riiiuv, see notes on 
 I Thets, i. 5. tls irepiiroCiioriv 
 
 K.T.X.] 'unto the obtaining of the 
 glory of our Lord J. C.,' 'in adquisi- 
 tionem glorise,' Vulg., Copt., compare 
 .ffith. ' ut vivatis in glori& Domini ; ' 
 more exact specification of the pre- 
 ceding els truTrjpiav (ver. 13), the term 
 irepiTTolriais giving the ffwrripta the 
 aspect of a KTij<ns (Hesych., Suid.), 
 and that of a glory of which Christ 
 was — not the author (Pelt), but, in 
 accordance with the analogy of Scrip- 
 ture — the Lord and possessor; see John 
 xvii. 24, comp. Rom. viii. 17. See 
 esp. notes on i Theas. v. g, where this 
 meaning of repar. is briefly investi- 
 gated. Of the two other interpreta- 
 tions of irepar., — (o) active, with re- 
 ference to God, scil. iva So^av wepi- 
 irof/iaxi Tif «!y airoO, (Ecum.; and (6) 
 passive (comp. Eph. i. 14), Jojijs being 
 resolved into an adj., soil, 'gloiiosa 
 
II. 14, 15, 1 6. 
 
 121 
 
 XpitTTOv, apa ovv, aSe\(poi, trr^Kere, kui KpareiTe ray 1 5 
 irapaootren ay eotod^driTe etre Sia \6yov eiTe Si iiri- ^ 
 OTToX^y ^fiSiv, auToy ^e 6 Ki/otoy ^/xcov Ijjffouy XjOJcrToy 1 6 
 
 poBsessio,' Est. 2, — the first is gram- 
 matically, the second contextually 
 doubtful. In the case of (a) we must 
 have had the usual dative of ' interest,' 
 not (as here) a gen. of possession ; in 
 the case of (i) the seeming parallelism 
 with I Thess. v. 9 would be destroyed, 
 and the glorification of our Lord would 
 really become the object of the 
 
 KoKeTy, as Syr. expressly ^OOli-i 
 
 I il(A IAjjOCLsZ [ut sitis glo- 
 
 ^ p -n 
 
 ria Domino nostro], not the future 
 reserved for the Thessalonians, on 
 which the illative exhortation of 
 Ter. 15 {apa ovv) seems logically to 
 depend ; comp. Lunem. in loc. 
 
 15. apa oSv K.T.X.] 'Accordingly 
 then, hreth/ren, stand {firm) ;' exhorta- 
 tion following on the preceding decla- 
 ration of the gracious purpose of God, 
 — ^the illative dipa being supported by 
 the collective ovv; see notes on Gal. 
 vi. 10, and reff. on i Thesa. v. 6. On 
 the present derivative meaning of 
 (TT^/cere (perstate, Beza, /i^ /coTajSXiJ- 
 Btfre, (Ecum. ; comp. i Thess. iii. 8), 
 here suitably used in retrospective an- 
 tithesis to aa\^0fivai (ver. 2), see notes 
 on I Thess. iii. 8 and Phil. i. 17. 
 KparciTC rds irapaSoircis] ' hold fast 
 the instructions ;' practically synony- 
 mous with I Cor. xi. 2, t&s vapaSbaas 
 Karix'^re. These irapaS6(reii (Mark vii. 
 3, Gal. i. 14, al.) probably related, — - 
 not as in i Cor. I. c. (see Meyer in 
 loc.) to matters both of doctrine and 
 discipline, but, as the more specific 
 ihSaxBriTe and the general tenor of 
 the context (comp. ver. 5) suggest, 
 solely to the former, Kaviva SiSatrxa- 
 
 Xfas, Theod. The polemical and con- 
 troversial use of the term, hinted at 
 even by Chrys., is brought forward by 
 Damasc. (de Imag. I. 23, Vol. I. p. 
 Si8, Paris, 1712), and enforced by 
 most writers of the Bomanist Church 
 (comp. Canon, Cone. Trid. Sess. iv. 
 p. 15, ed. Tauchn.), but distinctly 
 without plausibility. No reference to 
 any iKK\ri<ria<rTiKiv ipp6vTifia (Euseb. 
 ffist. Eecl. V. 28; comp. Mohler, 
 St/mbolik, § 38, p. 361) can fairly 
 be elicitfed from the words. The 
 Apostle, as the following clause moat 
 distinctly shows, is referring to some 
 definite and lately-given communi- 
 cations on doctrine which he had 
 specially made to the Thessalonians 
 (comp. I Cor. I, c, xaSiis vapiSuxa) 
 by word of mouth and in his former 
 letter. For the most ingenious modern 
 defence of the Bomanist doctrine of 
 tradition, see Mohler, Symiolik, I.e. 
 p. 361—365. &s 
 
 4Si,S<ix6i)T6] 'which ye were taugJU.' 
 For exx. of this well-known con- 
 struction, see Winer, Gr. % 32. 5, p. 
 204, and for the general theory of the 
 connexion of the accus. with passive 
 verbs, Schmalfeld, Syntax, %■ 25, p. 
 29 sq. ctrs Sid Xd'yov 
 
 K.T.X.] ' whether ly word or by our 
 epistle,' — iiriffToXi) Ji/uiv (gen. auc- 
 toris), not an iwi<rTo\i] us 81' riiiuv, 
 ver. 2. We can hardly say with 
 Gom. (cited and approved by Pelt, 
 comp. Sohott) — 'etre non disjungit, sed 
 conjungit et copulat;' it rather sub- 
 divides the gevevaXiBiSdx^riTe into the 
 two special modes in which SiSaxil is 
 usually and regularly conveyed ; comp. 
 I Cor. xiii. 8, and Meyer in loc. 
 16. avris Si 6 KOp.] ' hut may 
 
122 
 
 EPOS 0E22AAONIKEI2 B. 
 
 Kac 6 9eosf 6 iraTvp W®"* « ayaT^crai ^f^as kui Sovi 
 1 7 irapaKXtja-iv atcDHav Kal eXmSa ayaOhv ev X«V'''''» "'*'/"»* 
 
 1 6. 6 TTBi-^/.] So Zac^m. (text) with BDiFGSi (N* reads simply irar^p) ; 
 msB.; Augiens., Syr. ; aL Zachm. (in marg.) and Tieck. follow iJec. in reading 
 Koi TT. with AD'BKL ; mss.; Vulg., Clarom., al. Although judgment cannot 
 be absolutely pronounced, yet the reading given in the text has certainly the 
 best claim to appear there. The previous variations in the reading of the clause 
 are noticed below. 
 
 ow Lord himself;' concluding prayer 
 after exhortation, as in ch. iii. i6 
 {iriXiv eix^ /ierii, jrapalveffW toSto 
 yap iariv ivrias poTiBeiv, Chrys.), the 
 Si contrasting the succeeding prayer 
 with the foregoing exhortation, and 
 the ai!7-6s giving force and dignity to 
 the mention of our Lord as compared 
 with the preceding i}/*w»; oomp. the 
 similar concluding prayers in i Thess. 
 iii. II, V. 23, in both which cases how- 
 ever the connexion is less close, and 
 the contrasting force, both of the par- 
 ticle and the pronoun, somewhat less 
 emphatic. Our Lord is put first 
 in the enumeration (2 Cor, xiii. 13), 
 contrary to the Apostle's usual habit 
 of writing, either on account of the 
 recent mention of Him in ver. 14, 
 or from the feeling that it was by 
 His grace alone that they could have 
 strength to carry into practice the 
 preceding exhortations ; ' per gratiam 
 Christi venitur ad Patris amorem,' 
 Bengel on -i, Cor. I. c. This unusual 
 order is not left unnoticed by Chrys. 
 and the Greek expositors ; tj Tris 
 Tafews iva\\ay^Titi> ofWTifUav SeiKviei, 
 Theod. The readings throughout 
 
 the clause are somewhat doubtful. Be- 
 sides the variation given in the criti- 
 cal note, Lachm. differs from Tisch. 
 in inserting A before X/Jio-ris [with A], 
 and including it in brackets before 
 ©e4s [BD' omit]. & 6(65 
 
 6 irarijp ij|iuv] ' God our Father.' This 
 exact form of expression, though so 
 strongly supported here, doea not .ap- 
 
 pear to occur elsewhere, 
 6 dYain]o*a5 K.T.X. seems to refer 
 only to God the Father. The union 
 of Father and Son, esp. as shown by 
 the subsequent singular verb, is I 
 confess so mystically close that it is 
 difBcult to speak with complete con- 
 fidence (Alf., but see his previous 
 note), still the usual reference of d^dir?; 
 to the Father (see above) may incline 
 us here to the more exclusive refer- 
 ence. The arbitrary reference of the 
 first of the two participles to Christ, 
 and of the second to God the Father 
 (Baumg.-Crus.), is almost obviously 
 untenable. iropaKXi)- 
 
 o-iv olwvCav] ' etenud comfort ;' the 
 best shade of meaning for irapaxkriins 
 here. Alilivioi is used not appy, with 
 any specially qualitative reference to 
 an ikirlSa tu>v neWtivTav (Chrys., 
 Theoph.), but mainly in a, temporal 
 sense, in contrast to the transitory and 
 fleeting nature of earthly joys (Olsh,).: 
 the iXtrU tCiv fuWdnrav is embodied 
 in the iXvlSa (1709^1/, ' la perspective 
 d'un heureux avenir,' Heuss, Thiol. 
 CkrSt. IV. 9, Vol. II, p. 85; comp., 
 though with a slightly different refer- 
 ence, rijv fiaKaplav iXirlSa, Tit. ii. 13- 
 Aliivioi is used in the N. T. as an adj. 
 of two terminations except here and 
 Heb. ix. 12. 
 
 iv xdpvn] ' in grace ;' adjunct of 
 manner, not to both preceding par- 
 ticiples (d7air. being more usually un- 
 defined. Bom. viii. 37, Gal. ii. 20, al.), 
 but to ioAs (Schott, and appy.. Chrys., 
 
II. 17, III. r. 
 
 123 
 
 KoXea-tti V/J.WV Taj KapSias kui a-Ttjpl^ai ev iravri epyip 
 
 Kai Xoyw a^aSft), 
 
 KS TlA^^s '^° ^«"^°'' ■^po'reix^'re^, <i^e\<^o/, III. 
 
 word, and for us. He ^ p -. p; t \ f '^ V ' 
 
 wUl stablish you; and ^ejOt »?/*""', tva O \oyoi TOW JVHiOIOi; 
 
 may He guide your / ^ b >. jc^ /,, v ^ 
 
 nearts. "^P^XV '^"" OO^OC'JTat KaUWf Kai TTjOOS 
 
 ffioum.), the ^v as usual defining 
 the sphere and element in which the 
 love is evinced and the consolation 
 vouchsafed. In oases like the present 
 the line of demarcation between the 
 above reference to ethical locality and 
 the instrumental use (xV""!, Chrys.) 
 is really very shadowy. It can 
 scarcely be doubted that such a use 
 has arisen from the inclusive nature 
 of the Aramaic r^, and it is well not 
 to be unduly narrow in interpreta- 
 tion ; stUl in most of the expressions 
 similar to the present there is a theo- 
 logical idea, — an idea of an encompass- 
 ing element of grace, which it seems 
 desirable to retain; comp. notes on 
 I These, ii. 3. 
 
 17. irapaKaX^(rai] 'comfort;' opt. 
 and sing., as in r Thess. iii. 11, 
 where see notes. The Apostle does 
 not say merely iifias, but viuon rds 
 KapSlas (comp. Col. ii. 2) ; it was the 
 KapSla, the seat of their feelings and 
 affections (comp. notes on i Tim. i. 5, 
 Beck, SeelenZ. III. 24, p. 92 sq.), the 
 KapSla that was so full of hope and 
 fear about the future, that the Apo- 
 stle prayed might receive comfort. 
 
 This meaning ( | . »-m [consoletur] 
 
 Syr., comp. ^th.), seems thus in the 
 present case more suitable than ' ex- 
 hortetur,' Vulg., as a translation of 
 vapanaXiaai; see notes on 1 Thess. 
 V. II. irTT|pt{ai] 'stablish 
 
 (you) ;' ^e^aiuHrat, Hffre yc4^ <rd\eie<rffai 
 fi'^Si TrapaK\lve(r6ai, Chrys. ; comp. 
 I Thess. iii. 2. The obvious supple- 
 ment i/iSs is inserted by Bee. with 
 
 D'E^KL ; mss., but rightly rejected 
 by Lachm. and Tisch. with very de- 
 cidedly preponderating uncial autho- 
 rity, iv iravrV 2pY<s> k.t.X.] 
 'in every good wori: and word;' both 
 iraiirl and d7a$4' being clearly con- 
 nected with the two intervening sub- 
 stantives. The slightly unusual order 
 IBec. however gives \6y.K. Ipy., — but 
 only with FGK; msE.] has appy. 
 caused the Greek commentators (silet 
 Theod.) to assign the doubtful meaning 
 S6yp,a,Ta to the simple word \67V. 
 This is by no means probable ; the 
 association with Ipyif (comp. Fiitz. 
 Som. XV, 18, Vol. III. p. 268), and 
 still more the inclusive ttovt/, seem 
 both decisive for the ordinary mean- 
 ing. It is singular that Chrys. (so 
 Theoph.) should have here taken iv 
 as instrumental ; clearly the (pyov koX 
 X67'os are not the means ly which, but 
 the elements in which the aTripi.yp.os 
 takes place. 
 
 ChapiebIII. I. TAXoiiriSv] 'J!*;- 
 nally,' 'as to what remains to be 
 said;' similar in meaning to \oi7r6i> 
 (i Thess. iv. i), but owing to the 
 article slightly more specific. On the 
 grammatical difference between this 
 formula aud the gen. rou XoittoC, see 
 notes on Gal. vi. 17. 
 irpoa-evxc(r6c...irepl tjiJiuv] 'pray far 
 us;' Sj/a airbs ei^ap.evos iirip airav 
 vvv aheX elixri" '"''^p' air&v, (Ecum. 
 On the formula irpoo'eiJxo/'Ki Ttepl, and 
 its practical equivalence to irpoaeixo- 
 p.ai, virip, see notes on Ool. i. 3. 
 Iva. X^'yos K.T.X.] Subject of the 
 
124 
 
 nP02 eE22AA0NIKEI2 B. 
 
 2 vfiSi, Kai Iva pvtrOaifJiev airo rwv aTOirasv Koi iroviipwy 
 
 prayer blended with the purpose of 
 making it, as so often in St Paul's 
 Epp. ; see notes on Eph. i. 1 7. This 
 prayer of the Apostle, as Chrys. has 
 well observed, was not tva /tij KivSvveijj 
 (els TovTO yap Ikuto), but that his 
 Lord's word (compare i Thess. i. 8) 
 might speed onward and be glorified. 
 As ever so now his prayer did not 
 involve one single selfish element. 
 Tp^xij Kal So|ati)Tai] ' may have free 
 course and be glorified;' ' currat et 
 clarifioetur,' Vulg., i.e. may find no 
 cbstacles and hindrances (dfcwXiirus 
 (rui/Tp^X7?)Theod., wpoK6wTiii, Damasc.) 
 in its onward course (comp. 2 Tim. ii. 
 2, oi diSerat), and be manifested, felt, 
 and acknowledged in its true power 
 and glory by all; compare ch. i. 12, 
 but not, as usually cited, Acts xiii. 48, 
 — where, as De W. rightly observes, 
 the word (5o|af.) has a somewhat 
 weaker force, more nearly approach- 
 ing to 'laudare,' comp. Schneider on 
 Xen. Anab. x. g. 32. The middle 
 force adopted by Pelt, ' laudem sibi 
 paret,' is not supported by the usage 
 of the N.T., nor is it at all accurate to 
 say that ottA would have been more 
 naturally used if the verb had been 
 passive. If any other prep, had 
 been used, it would have been irb 
 (Matth. vi. 2, Luke iv. i5)or^i' (John 
 xvii.io,al.) with persons : comp. So|o(r- 
 0i...di' aiTijs IdaBeiielas] in John xi. 4. 
 Upis however is perfectly suitable, as 
 denoting the locality reached where 
 the glorification took place. On the 
 use of 7r/)As with verbs implying rest, 
 <fcc., see notes on Gal. i. 1 8. 
 Ka6(is Kol irpis v|ias] ' even as it is 
 also with you;' the Kal gently con- 
 trasting them with others where a 
 similar reception had taken place, and 
 the clause ' taoitS laude ' (Est.) remind- 
 ing them of their previous and present 
 
 readiness to receive the Word; comp. 
 
 1 Thess. i. 6 sq. 
 
 2. Kal tva ^vo-6u|i«v] ' and that 
 we may be delivered,' that we may by 
 our freedom co-operate in this advance 
 of God's word. To find here a mere 
 shrinking of the flesh on the part of 
 the Apostle from the dangers that 
 awaited him (Jowett) is to assign to 
 the Apostle a character that never 
 belonged to him, and which such pas- 
 sages as Bom. xv. 31 (see ver. 32, 
 which shows the true reason) and 
 
 2 Cor. i. 8 most certainly do not sub- 
 stantiate. How much keener are the 
 perceptions of the older commentators ; 
 JittX^ fiiv 17 atrrjais elvai 80K61, fiia Si 
 dfitas iffH' rCv y&.p ttovtjp'jop dvdpiiTraf 
 ■fiTTUiiivuv, aKuXiTUS KoL Tov Kiipiy- 
 fiaros avvTpixei Xoyos, Theod. 
 
 T(5v oTiirwv K. T.\.] 'perverse and 
 wicked men,' or, in the more deriva- 
 tive sense of the term aroTros, — ' ini- 
 quis et malis hominibus,' Clarom. ; 
 
 comp. Syr. ]AJAO ( ■ 1 *~) [malo- 
 
 rum et perversorum], where the order 
 is appy. reversed. The word ototos, 
 frequently used by Plato, and in con- 
 nexion with Kaivos {Rep. in. p. 4050), 
 6aviiaaT6s (Legg. I. p. 646 b), and 
 d^ffijs (Tim. p. 48 D, Legg. vn. p. 
 797 a), properly signifies 6 ij.ii ix"" 
 TOTTov (Suid. 8. v.), and thence deriva- 
 tively, as the same lexicographer ob- 
 serves, Kaxbs, nox9rip6s (see Bekk. 
 Anecd. p. 460, Hesych. vovTipbt, 
 alaxpos), with concomitant ideas of 
 ' mischief, ' <fcc,, according to the con- 
 text ; see Luke xxiii. 41, Acts xxv. 
 S, xxviii. 6, Philo, Leg. Alleg. in. 
 § 17, droiros X^crot elrat i 0oflXos, 
 OTOTToi' 8^ iari KaKon Siaderov (Vol. I. 
 p. 98, ed. Mang.), and the exx. col- 
 lected by Kypke, Obs. Vol. II. p. 
 14S sq. Who these men were 
 
III. 2, 3. 
 
 125 
 
 avOpwiriav ov yap Trdi'Twi' ^ vIsttis- xjo-toj Si ea-Tiv 6 3 
 K.vptOi OS (TTtjpl^ei v/xai Ka\ (j)v\a^et avo tow irovtipov. 
 
 is somewhat doubtful. The most na- 
 tural supposition is that they were 
 perverse and fanatical Jews (not Chris- 
 tians, on account of what follows) at 
 Corinth, who were then opposing the 
 word of God and the Apostle's minis- 
 try of it; comp. Acts xviii. ii sq. and 
 Wieseler, Chronol. p. 256. The remark 
 of TertuUian seems to have always 
 been very true in reference to the 
 early Church, — 'synagogas Judaeorum 
 fontes persecutiouum,' adv. Gnost. 
 Scorp. cap. ro. 
 
 o« 7oip irdvTwv ■q irCoTis] 'for the 
 faith doth not pertain to all men/ 
 reason for the foregoing clause and the 
 mention of those alluded to in it. The 
 definite ^ ir'urns can here only refer 
 to 'faith' in the Christian sense (rb 
 TTicrTcCo-ni, CEoum., and perhaps Syr. 
 
 o 1 V) .m : the expansion of 
 
 p p 
 Schott, 'fides sincera et constann,' in 
 contrast to false Christians {fevSiSeK- 
 </joi, Gal. ii. 4), seems inconsistent with 
 the use of the simple unqualified sub- 
 stantive. For exx. of this not un- 
 common use of the possessive gen., 
 see Kruger, Sprachl. § 47. 6. 8, and 
 comp. Acts i. 7, Winer, Gr. § 30. 5, 
 p. 176. Wetstein in loc. quotes the 
 well-known proverbial saying oi5 vav- 
 ris ivSpbi is KdpivBoi' iaB' 6 TrXout, 
 cited by Suidas s. vv. oi wavrds, Vol, 
 ir. p. 1220 (ed. Bern.). 
 
 3. itio-tAs a K.T.X.] 'But faithful 
 is the Lord / antithesis to the member 
 immediately preceding, with a paro- 
 nomasia, or rather play on the word, 
 suggested by the preceding xiffxts; 
 comp. 2 Tim. li. 13, and see exx. in 
 Winer, Gr. § 68. 1, p. 561, where the 
 distinction is drawn between simple 
 paronomasia and a play on words 
 (Wortspiel) where a fresh or slightly 
 
 changed meaning is introduced. There 
 seems no reason for departing, either 
 here or in ver. 4, from the usual refer- 
 ence of d "Kdptos to the second person 
 of the blessed Trinity ; comp. notes 
 on ch. ii. 13. The reading adopted 
 by Lachm, 6 Beos [AD^FG; Vulg. 
 (not Amiat.), Armen. (marg.) ; Latin 
 Ff.], seems to be a correction, and 
 conformation to the more usual for- 
 mula, I Cor. i. 9, X. 13, 2 Cor. i. 18. 
 Ss (m]pC|6i {|jia$] 'who shall stahlish 
 you,' not perhaps without a faint ex- 
 planatory force in the relative, ' being 
 one who will, <fcc. ;' comp. notes on 
 I Km. ii. 4, and on Col. i. 25, 27. 
 The form irTriplaa (found in B) is 
 noticed by Winer, Gr. § 15, p, 82, 
 and is not without analogy in Alex- 
 andrian Greek. ciiri 
 ToB irovripov] 'from the WicJced One.'' 
 Here as elsewhere in the N. T. it is 
 extremely doubtful whether tou vovri- 
 pov refers to evil in the abstract (see 
 Rom. xii. 9), or to the Evil One 
 (i John V. 18, comp. Eph. vi. 16, and 
 notes in loc.). The context alone must 
 decide ; and this in the present case, 
 in spite of the reference to oh. ii. 17, 
 rrripL^ai iv Tavrl lpry(fi xal \6yif, urged 
 by Liinem. and repeated by Alf., 
 seems rather in favour of the mascu- 
 line, — (i) in consequence of the pro- 
 bable ref. to the Lord's prayer, where 
 the Greek commentators (whose opinion 
 in such points deserves full considera- 
 tion) adopt the masc, — and (2) from 
 the tacit personal antithesis suggested 
 by the preceding Kvpios. The ancient 
 Vv., whose testimony would here have 
 been of considerable importance, do 
 not seem to afford us any sure indica- 
 tions of the view they adopted. The 
 same word, we may observe, is used 
 by Syr. both here and in i ^ohn v. 18, 
 
126 
 
 nP02 eESSAAONIKEIS B, 
 
 4 -Treiroid'afiev Se ev Kupi^ ecj) vfia'} on a -TrapfxyyeWo' 
 
 5 fi€v Kal troiuTe Ka) Trot^ereTe. 6 Se Kvpioi Korevdwai 
 
 where the meaning is not doubtful. 
 
 4. ireiroCflojiev 8S kv Kvp.] ' Yea 
 vie have iriist in the Lord;'' declara- 
 tion of the Apostle's trust in his con- 
 verts, — the 5^ subjoining with a faint 
 antithesis to the simple future just 
 preceding (' ei qusa jam signiGcata est 
 similis notio quodam modo opponitur,' 
 Klotz, Deva/i\ Vol. ir. p. 361) the 
 Apostle's present trust and convic- 
 tions, and paving the way for the ex- 
 hortations in ver, 6 sq. ; koX tovto els 
 irpoTpoirriv airdv riSeiKev, tva /jmSSptcs 
 o'ias ?x^' Sd^as irepl airuv Tois ipyois 
 Pe^cuiiffoxn Toiiros.Theod. Thia ireirol- 
 6ri(ns was now as ever iv Kvpt<fi : it 
 was not only a trust in His (pCKavBpu- 
 irla (Chrys.), but a trust in Him as 
 the blessed sphere and element in 
 which alone it could be truly felt and 
 entertained: see Phil. ii. 19, and notes 
 on Eph. iv. 17, vi. i. 
 4<^' v|ias] 'in regard of you;' the pre- 
 position marking the ethical direction 
 of the irfToiBifai ; oomp. Matth. xxvii. 
 43, 2 Cor, ii. 3, and see Winer, Gr. 
 § 49. 1, p. 363. It is very difficult to 
 draw clear lines of demarcation be- 
 tween the ethical uses of Trpos, Ittl, 
 and eh, in combinations like the pre- 
 sent. To speak somewhat generally, 
 we may perhaps say that vpbi with 
 the ace. commonly indicates simple 
 ethical motion (oomp. Donalds. Crat. 
 § 169, 171); iirl with the same case 
 mental direction with an Idea of ap- 
 •proximaUon (Donalds. Crat. § 172) 
 and a more defined expression of the 
 erga (Luke vi. 35) or contra (Matth. 
 X. 21) ; eis direction or destination with 
 the idea of having actually reached 
 the object (comp. KrUger, Sprachl. 
 § 68. 21. 5, and notes on Philem. 5), 
 and with a wider and more inclusive 
 notion of general behaviour however 
 
 characterized. For the distinctions be- 
 tween ds, wpos, and (card, see notes 
 on Tit. i. I. 
 
 OTi a irapoYyA.X.] 'that the things 
 which vie command:' objective or ex- 
 positive sentence (Donalds. Gr. § 584, 
 see notes on ch. ii. 13), stating the 
 matter of the Apostle's confidence. 
 The & TrapayyiW., — clearly not ' quse 
 prcBcepimw,' Pelt, — here refers most 
 naturally to the commands which the 
 Apostle is now in the act of giving to 
 his converts, and links the present 
 verse in an easy and natural way to 
 ver. 6. 
 
 Kal irouiTC K. iroii](r. belongs to the 
 apodosis of the sentence, Kal...Kal 
 presenting both iroieiTe and irot^a-. si- 
 multaneously in a single predication ; 
 see notes on i Tim. iv. 10. There is in 
 this verse much variation of reading. 
 After jra/io77^XXo|Ue» Rec. inserts v/uy, 
 but it is rightly omitted by Lachm. 
 and Tisch. with BD'K ; 2 mss. ; Vulg., 
 al. The insertion may have been sug- 
 gested by ver. 6. Also Lachm. reads 
 irapayyiWoiiev [iiuv Kal ^rpi^ffore icai] 
 voietTe Kal Toii/jacTc, but the reading 
 in this extended form is supported only 
 by B, as FG (which insert Kal ^iroi^ir.) 
 omit Kal Toi^aere. It is doubtful 
 however whether the Kal should be 
 retained before roietre as it is omitted 
 by ADi^i ; Syr. Observe that C is 
 deficient. 
 
 5. 6 SJ Kip. K.T.X.] ' Bui may the 
 Lord direct your hearts;' repetition 
 of the Apostle's prayer, introduced in 
 the form of a gentle antithesis (S^) to 
 what precedes, — 'I doubt you not, my 
 confidence is in the Lord; may He 
 however vouchsafe His blessed aid;' 
 &IJ,<l>or4pav thud xp^la Kal vpoBiataf 
 i.ya9rji Kal ttjs avuiBev ffvvepyelaf, 
 Theod. The appearance of rod Xpurrpff 
 
III. 4, 5, 6. 
 
 127 
 
 v/iMV Taj KapSlai els Trjv ayav^u toO Qeov Kai ety rrji/ 
 virofiov^v Tov XjOtffToi/. 
 
 Avoid all disorderly IIaiOa'Y'YeXXo«ei/ ^6 VUlV, aOeXcboi, 
 
 brethren, and imitate r / / "^ ' ' T ' 
 
 Subllandltd'yoS «" Ov6flaTl ToC KvpiOV hcTOV XpiCTTOV, 
 mark them that dis- /x-\ n t/*i\ s '5^J.'^ 
 
 obey. The Lord give (TTeWeoraai vfJLus aiTO TTacToj aoe\(pov 
 
 you peace. 
 
 in the concluding member of the verse 
 has led Basil [de Spir. Sanct. cap. 21), 
 Theod., Theoph., (Bo., and recently 
 Wordsw., to refer o Kiipios to the 
 Holy Spirit. This however is unne- 
 cessary, and indeed contrary to the 
 language of the N.T. ; Kiipios appy. 
 not being so applied even in the de- 
 bateable passage 2 Cor. iii. 18, see 
 Meyer in loc. On the compound 
 KarevBiveiv [eidvropeiv, Theoph.), see 
 notes on i Thess. iii. 11, and on the 
 meaning of Kapdia in such combina- 
 tions (here the centre of the active 
 will and its practical applications), see 
 Delitzsch, £ibl. Psych, iv. 12, p. 203, 
 Beck, iSee2en2. iii. 24, p. 94, 95. 
 €ls Tijv ay. TOV 0€o5] ' into the love of 
 God ;' principle to which and into 
 which the Apostle prays that his con- 
 verts may be guided. The only doubt 
 is whether tov Geou is a gen. sitbjecti, 
 under the more specific form of a gen. 
 auctoris, scil. ' amor quem Deus homi- 
 num quasi infundit animis,' Pelt, — or 
 fimply agen. objecti, 'amorergaDeum,' 
 Beng., t4 dyair'^iraL ai/VoV, Theoph. 
 The latter is most natural ; the love 
 of Grod is indeed the ' virtutis Christi- 
 anas fons limpidissimus,' Schott; see 
 Matth. xxii. 37. 
 
 ■njv viro|i. ToS iXp.] 'the patience of 
 Christ.' The meaning of these words 
 is also slightly doubtful, owing to the 
 different aspects in which the gen, 
 may be regarded. Analogy with what 
 precedes would suggest (a) a gen. ob- 
 jecti, 'patient waiting for Christ' 
 (Auth., Chrys. 2, Theoph. 2), but 
 would introduce a meaning of viro/t. 
 
 that is appy. not lej^cally defensible, 
 and certainly is contrary to the usage 
 of the N. T. Of the other meanings, 
 (6) the gen, auctoris or caus(E effinentii 
 (Felt) is plausible, but appy. less sim- 
 ple than the more inclusive possessive 
 gen. (Lunem,,Alf.), 'patience such as 
 Christ exhibited ;' tva iirofihoi/iev lis 
 ixelms iirlneivai, Chrys, i, Theod, i, 
 comp. I Pet. ii. 21. On the meaning 
 of the word iro/iov^, see notes on i 
 Thess. i, 3. The addition of 
 
 the art, before vTo/iovijv which Bee. 
 omits has the support of all the MSS. 
 most mss. and Greek Ff. 
 
 6. IlapaYY- 8^ -ujiiv] 'Now we com' 
 mand you;' transition by means of the 
 hi neTa^anKbv (see notes on Gal. iii. 8) 
 to the more distinctly preceptive por- 
 tion of the Epistle. In what follows, 
 the exhortations of the former Epistle 
 (oh. iv. II, 12, V. 14) are repeated and 
 expanded with more studied distinct- 
 ness of language, it being probable 
 that the evils previously alluded to 
 had advanced among some members 
 of this Church to a still more perilous 
 height. The words ev ovo/um k.t.\. 
 give the TapaYyeXla a greater force 
 and solemnity ; oix rip-eh rmra Xiyor 
 fiai aXV d X/JiffTos, Chrys. : see i Cor, 
 V. 4, and comp. Acts iii, 6, xvi, 18, 
 The addition tihHv after 'S.vplov {Sec., 
 with ADSE^FGKLN ; mss. ; Vulg.), 
 though strongly supported, is appy. 
 lightly rejected by Tisch. -with BD'E^; 
 Clarom., Sangerm. ; Cypr. (i), as a 
 likely interpolation. Lachm. inserts 
 it in brackets. <rTeXX«(r6a^ 
 
 vfias] 'that ye withdraw yourselves i 
 
128 
 
 nP02 GESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 aTUKTm vepnTarowTot Kai m Kara rhv irapaSotriv 
 7 ^1/ wapeXd^otrav vap w^"- "'^toJ yap o^iSare ttSj 
 
 ol)ject-inf., stating the substance of 
 the irapayyeUa. The verb trriWeiP 
 [derived from a root 2TA-, Pott, Etym. 
 Forsch. Vol. I. p. 197] properly signi- 
 fies ' oollooare,' — thence, with a not 
 improbable figurative reference (ri 
 laHa, Eost u. Palm, Lex. s.v. Vol. 11. 
 p. 1529), 'oohibere,' 'oomprimere,'and 
 reflexively, 'se subtrahere,' Vulg., 
 
 ^AjOCTIJ 
 
 Clarom. . 
 
 [ut sitis distantes] Syr., 
 izvis,' Goth., sim. Copt., al. ; comp. 
 Mai. ii. 5, 4ir4 irpoaiSiirov oyo/mros fiov 
 (TrAXeffflot airov [where the Heb. 
 nnp seems to suggest a tinge of the 
 still further derivative meaning 'pras 
 metuae subducere;' Hesych. tpo^cirai, 
 o-tAXetoi], Gren. viii. i (Aqvil.), and 
 withanaccus. 2 Cor. viii. 20, o-TcXXo/ie- 
 voi Tovro, rightly translated by Vulg. 
 'devitantes hoc;' add also Gal. ii. 12, 
 VT4<rTeXKev...iavT6v, Heb. x, 38, viro- 
 (TTcIXijToi. For further exx., see Eisner, 
 06s. Vol. II. p. 283, Kypke, 06s. Vol. 
 Ji. p. 344, Loesner, 06s. p. 387, where 
 this verb is copiously illustrated. 
 dTaKTfiis irepwr.] ' walMng disorderly ;' 
 comp. I Thess. v. 14, Tois ardicrous, 
 and see note on ver. 7. On this use 
 of the verb iripiTareiv (wcpiT. rovrinTi 
 PioOvTos, Chrys.), as indicating the 
 general course of a life in its habitual 
 and practical manifestations, see reff. 
 on I Thess. iv. 12, and comp. notes on 
 Phil. iii. 18. Kard T'iJv irapdr 
 
 Soiriv] ' according to the instruction or 
 lesson;' irapASoais (comp. ch. ii. 15) 
 including both the oral (comp. ver. 10, 
 I Thess. iv. 11) and written instruc- 
 tions which the Apostle had delivered 
 to his converts. To refer this to a 
 vapiSoffiv T^v 8i4 t&v Ipyuv, as Chrys. 
 and the Greek expositors do, is to in- 
 fringe on what follows, where this 
 
 mode of teaching is distinctly speci- 
 fied. 'Hv iropeXciPoirav] 
 'which they received,' soil, those inti- 
 mated in the foregoing expression 
 TapTOS dSeXipoS, which here serves the 
 purpose of a collective substantive. 
 The main difficulty is the reading. 
 Lachm. (text) adopts irapeKi^ere with 
 BFG; 3 mss.; Goth.,Syr.-Phil., al.,— 
 but scarcely with plausibility, as the 
 change would have been so easily sug- 
 gested by the seeming difficulty of con- 
 struction in the 3rd plural. The same 
 may be said of Rec. Trapi\a§e, which 
 however has only the authority of a 
 few mss. and Syr. The choice then 
 lies between irapiXa^av [Schalz, with 
 D^D^EKLK*; mss.; Greek Ff.] and 
 the text 7rap6Xa/3o(raj''[ffrJcs6., lisch., 
 Lachm. in marg., with AN^ ; Basil, 
 and iXd^ocrap, D']. The majority of 
 Versions support the third person 
 plural : C is deficient. The tendency 
 to grammatical correction coupled with 
 the known existence (Sturz, de Vial. 
 Alex. p. 60, Matth. Or. § 201. 5) and 
 prevalence even to a late period (Lo- 
 beck, Phryn. p. 349) of the form -oirai' 
 in the 3rd plur. of the imperf. and 
 second aor., induces us to acquiesce in 
 the probable, though not strongly sup- 
 ported reading rapeXapoaav ; so Olsh., 
 Liinem., Alf., and Wordsworth, 
 
 7. avTol fip 0I8.] 'For yom/rsehes 
 know;' confirmation of the wisdom 
 and pertinence of the foregoing exhor- 
 tation, and more esp. of the modal 
 clause immediately preceding, by an 
 appeal to their own knowledge and 
 observation. The Thessalonian con- 
 verts knew 'of themselves' irCs 8« 
 K.T.\., and needed not that the Apo- 
 stle should inform them, 
 irus Sci |i,i)i.6Ca-6ai '^|jl.] 'how ye ought 
 to imitate us;' a simple and intelligible 
 
III. 7, 8. 
 
 129 
 
 rOai 
 
 oei ftift.eca'oai >}f^<*9, ort ovk riTOKT^crafiev ev vfitv, ovi 
 Soopeav aprov ec^ayofJLev irapa tivos, aX\' ev kotto) kuI 
 fioyOi^ vvKTa Kai ^fjiipav epyaCofievoi itpoi to fxri etri- 
 
 uoe 8 
 
 'brachylogy.' The more natural se- 
 quence would have been ttSs Set jrepi- 
 irareiv Kal tj^kos /ufietaSai, but the more 
 brief mode of expression is probably 
 designedly chosen, as throwing em- 
 phasis on the fUfictffBai, and giving the 
 whole appeal more point and force. 
 It is somewhat doubtful whether the 
 plural is to be referred to St Paul 
 alone, or to the Apostle and his asso- 
 ciates. From comparison with i Thess. 
 ii. 9, where the ref. seems to be the 
 more inclusive one, we shall most pro- 
 bably be justified in adopting the same 
 view in the present case. 
 oTi oiiK i^TaKTijo-.] ' in that we lekaved 
 not disorderly.' This is appy. one of 
 those cases in which the causal sen- 
 tence approaches somewhat nearly, — 
 not BO much to the modal (oomp. ^th., 
 kama [sicut, quemadmodum], Peile, 
 'how') as to the relative (comp. Syr. 
 
 ,^ "^ Not (J ) [qui non ambulavimus]) 
 
 or to the expositive sentence, with both 
 of which it has some logical and gram- 
 matical aflSnity ; comp. Winer, Gr. § 6o. 
 6, p. 479. It was not so much ' be- 
 cause' St Paul and his associates o6k 
 iJrd/tTijo-ov, as ' seeing that,' 'in that,' 
 such was the case, that the Thessalo- 
 nians came to know how ('quali ra- 
 tione Vivendi,' Beng.) to imitate them. 
 In a word, the eira^la was not so 
 much a cause, as a causa sine qud nan 
 of the knowledge. This use of Sn, 
 which might perhaps be termed its 
 'sub-causal' or 'secondary causal' 
 use, deserves some attention, esp. in 
 the N. T. The verb iraKTeiv 
 
 is a dV. XiySn. in the N. T., as is 
 aroKTOs (i Thess. v. 14), while the 
 adv. only occurs in ver. 6, 11, the 
 E. T. 
 
 whole group being thus peculiar to 
 these Epp. The word is here practi- 
 cally synonymous with irepnraTav 
 ariKTUs, ver. 1 1 : it occurs occasionally 
 in classical Greek, sometimes in a 
 more restricted reference to ri arpa- 
 TioTMd, e.g. Demosth. Olynth. in. p. 
 31, Tois dTOKToWTOS {' qui disoiplinam 
 militarem labefactant,' Wolf), some- 
 times, as here, with a, more general 
 reference, e. jr. Xen. Oyrop. viil. 1.22; 
 see Kypke, Ohs. Vol. 11. p. 345. 
 
 8. ovS^ Stopcciv £pTov c<t"^Y-] ' "'"' 
 ate we hread for naught.' Aapeiv is an 
 adverbial accusative implying either 
 ' sine justit caus%' Gal. ii. 21 (see 
 notes), or, as here, 'gratis,' Vulg., 
 
 p 7 
 . 11 Vn Syr., — the true idea of Xa/uj3ii- 
 
 vetv Sapeiv being ' ita accipere ut nihil 
 referas, nuM prsegressS. causS. acci- 
 piendi,' Tittm. Synan. n. p. 161. The 
 formula dprov ij>ayeiv appears to be 
 Hebraistic (comp. Dnj 73K, Gen. 
 xliii. 25, 2 Sam. ix. 7, 10, al.), imply- 
 ing really little more than the simple 
 verb ipayetv (i Cor. ix. 4), but, like 
 all these Hebraistic turns, being full 
 of force and expressiveness ; comp. 
 Winer, Cfr. § 3, p. 26 sq. 
 Iv K^iro) Kal |j,ox6<p], ' in, toil and tra- 
 vail,' aoiL aprov itpdyo/iev ; adjunct of 
 manner, involving a tacit opposition 
 to the preceding Supedv, On the mean- 
 ing and derivation of these words, and 
 the apparent distinction between them, 
 see notes on i Thess. ii. 9. 
 vvKxa Kal ^|Ji. K.T.X.] ' working during 
 night and day ; ' participial explanation 
 of the preceding iv K6ir(f Kal fix^Vt 
 more remotely dependent on the fore- 
 going i^iyo/iev ; see Winer, Or. § 45. 
 6. b, p. 314. Lunem. connects the 
 K 
 
130 
 
 nPOS GEZSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 9 fiaptjerai riva v/iwv ovx on ovk 6j(0fi.ev i^overiav, a\\ 
 
 u'a eavTovf tvttov Swfiev vfuv eh to /ii/neiaOai ijf^as. 
 
 10 KOI yap ore ^/xev irpoi v/Jt.ai tovto irapijyyeWofiev vfuv 
 
 participial clause closely with iv xlnrif 
 jcal inix^f) according to which ipy. 
 would have a more distinctly modal 
 force. This is perfectly admissible ; 
 the emphatic position of Scape&v how- 
 ever suggests the sharper antithesis 
 which the separation of the members 
 here seems to introduce. The read- 
 ing vvKTbs Kal Tj/iipas \Lfwhm. (non 
 marg.) with BFGK ; S mss. ; Chrys. 
 (ma.), Dam.] has very strong claims 
 to attention. Still it may have been 
 suggested by i Thess. ii. g, iii. lo. 
 On the phrase itself, see notes on 
 I Thess. I.e., and on i Tim. v. 5. 
 irpos rh |jiif K.T.X.] 'wiih the view 
 of not iemg burdensome to any of yov,; ' 
 object contemplated in the viiKTa Kal 
 •^/i. ipyaj^. On the word iiripap. , see 
 notes on i Thess. ii. 9, where precisely 
 the same words are used in reference 
 to the same subject. 
 
 9. ou\ 8ti] 'not that;' limitation of 
 what precedes, to prevent thepreceding 
 declaration being misapprehended and 
 misapplied : the Apostle reserves his 
 ministerial right and privilege of re- 
 ceiving if need be support from his 
 converts ; comp. i Cor. ix. 4 sq. On 
 the use of this formula ('ex dialecticis, 
 ut ita dicam, formulis Paulo solemni- 
 bus,' Pelt), which is found several 
 times in St Paul's Epp. (2 Cor. i. 14, 
 iii. 5, Phil. iii. 12, iv. 11, 17), see 
 Hartung, Pwrtik. Vol. 11. p. 154, 
 comp. Herm. Viger, No. 253. 
 i^ovo-Cav] 'power' 'right' soil. toO 
 /ii) ipy. (De W.), or more naturally 
 ToC duipehv <paye!v aprov (Lunem.),^ 
 the latter being the principal state- 
 ment of the preceding verse. The word 
 i^ov<rla ('jus, licentia, auctoritas, ali- 
 quid faciendi,' Sohott) is used exactly 
 
 similarly in i Cor. ix. 12. 
 lavrovs] ' ounehes;' with reference to 
 the Apostle and his associates. On 
 this use of iavroiii for rinas airois, 
 6/ms ofirotis, see Winer, Gr. § 22. S, 
 p. 136, and for exx. in classical Greek, 
 Kriiger, Spraehl. § 51. 1. 15. 
 eIs t6 f.\,f.. i]|ias] 'that ye should, to 
 the intent that ye, imitate ns;' not 
 merely an objective member, but as 
 usual specifying the object and pur- 
 pose of the iavT, riwov diSdvai ; comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 44. 6, p. 295. 
 
 10. KaV 7ap] 'For also,' 'for he- 
 sides;' second confirmation of the 
 wisdom and pertinence of the preced- 
 ing warning that they ought to avoid 
 those that were walking disorderly, — ' 
 the yap being co-ordinate with the 
 preceding yi,p in ver. 7, and the koL 
 having appy. a eonjanclAve force, and 
 serving to connect this argumentative 
 clause with that in ver. 7, and thus 
 more thoroughly to substantiate the 
 Kori T^v vapiS. ■qv k.t.\. Lunemann, 
 followed by Alf., makes koX ascenaive, 
 and refers it to toBto vapiry^iKK, as 
 bringing out an additional element in 
 the reminiscence. This is somewhat 
 forced : xal yap has two usages in the 
 N.T., — one in which the conjunctive 
 force of Koi prevails ('etenim,' Beza), 
 the other (' nam etiam ;' ' nam et,' 
 Vulg., — but not Clarom., which omits 
 'et') in which the ascensive force is 
 predominant; see Winer, <?r. § 53. 8, 
 p. 397, and notes on Phil. ii. 27. The 
 latter has been undoubtedly far too 
 often overlooked in the N. T. (comp. 
 Fritz. Rom. xi. i. Vol. 11. p. 433), but 
 is not to be obtruded in a passage 
 like the present, where the context 
 (contrast i Thess. iii. 4) and sequence 
 
III. 
 
 -12. 
 
 131 
 
 OTi et Ti? ov deXet ipyaTeaOai fjLijSe iarOieTO). aKoiofiLev 1 1 
 •yap Tivas vepnraTovvras ev vfiiv aTct/cTwy, /xijSei/ epya- 
 ^ofievovs aXXa irepiepya^ofievovi. rots Se TOiovTOif 12 
 
 of argument seem somewhat decidedly 
 in favour of the conjunctive use. 
 On the use of jrpJs with etvai and 
 verba implying rest {irap i/iiv, /lefl' 
 ifiuy, Theoph.), comp. notes on Gal. 
 i. 1 8, and see i Thess. iii. 4, and 
 ch. ii. 4 (eJs). 
 
 to5to] 'this, — that follows ;' the pro- 
 noun being placed emphatically for- 
 ward to direct attention to the suc- 
 ceeding declaration ; comp. Winer, Cfr. 
 § '3- 5. P- I4S- The partially pro- 
 verbial statement which follows is il- 
 lustrated by Wetstein in loc, and 
 Schoettg. ffor. ffebr. Yol. i. p. 850 : 
 the most pertinent quotation is Bere- 
 schith, xrv. 12, 'K. Hunnadizit: fecit 
 eum servum manumissum coram se 
 ipso, ut si non laboret non manducet.' 
 The exhortation is expressed in the 
 form of a kind of ' enthymeme ' 
 (Whately, Logic, 11. 3. 7, p. iii), the 
 portion to be supplied being 'atqui 
 quilibet edit ; ergo quilibet laborato,' 
 Beng. On the use of oi following 
 
 d, when the negative is closely united 
 with the verb, see notes on 1 Tim. iii. 
 5, and the exx. collected by Winer, 
 Gr- § 5S- 2. P- 4'3 sq., Gayler, de 
 Part. Neg. ch. v. p. 99 sq. 
 
 II. aKoiio|i£v Ydp k.t.X.] ' For we 
 hear that there wre some walking, &c. ; ' 
 ground for the reiteration of the Apo- 
 stle's previous irapayyeXla. In cases 
 like the present the predicative parti- 
 ciple is not merely equivalent to an 
 infinitive mood, but is idiomatically 
 used as marking the state or action as 
 now in existence, and coming before 
 the observation of the writer as such ; 
 see Winer, Or. § 45. 4, p. 308 sq.,— 
 where there is a good collection of 
 exx. ; comp. also Sohmalfeld, Synt. 
 
 % 217. -i, p. 437, and esp. the able 
 tract of Weller (Semerh. zum Gr. Synt. 
 Meining. 1845), where the distinctions 
 between the finite verb with on, with 
 the infin., and with the participle, are 
 carefully stated, and illustrated by 
 numerous examples. drciKTOis] 
 
 See notes on ver. 7. |i.T]Siv ^p7oJ. 
 
 dXXd irepiepY-] ' doing no business, biit 
 being busy-bodies, ' ' nihil operantes, 
 sed curiose agentea, ' Vulg., Clarom., 
 
 VI 
 
 1 13] 
 
 
 ^Ari ..m [et nihil quidquam ope- 
 rantes nisi vana] Syr. ; more exact 
 specification of the preceding Trepiir. 
 iv i/uD araKTOis by means of a forcible 
 paronomasia which cannot but be 
 weakened in translation; comp. [De- 
 mosth.] Phil. IV. p. 150, e| & ipyi^ 
 Kalvcpiep/y&^'Q, andQuintil. Insl. Orat.- 
 ''^- 3- S4> '"<"! agere dixit, sed sata- 
 gere.' The verb irepiepy. is a 07ra| 
 \ey6pi. in the N.T., and serves to mark 
 the ivbrijTov 7roXinrpo7/io<riJi'9;i'(Theod.) , 
 the ' pravam curiositatem et sedulita- 
 tem' (Pelt), which marked the actions 
 of those to whom the Apostle referred ; 
 contrast 7rp6,ffa-eLVTa tdia in i Thess. iv. 
 1 1 , comp. ireplepyoi in i Tim. v. 1 3, and 
 see the good notice of this verb in 
 Suicer, Thesaur. a. v. Vol. II. p. 670. 
 12. Tots Si ToioiiTOis] ' Now to all 
 mtch,' the article with roiaSros marking 
 the whole class of persons that come 
 under the same denomination, and 
 have the same characteristics, as those 
 previously mentioned; so Gal. v. 21. 
 See Kriiger, Sprachl. § 50. 4. 6, Jelf, 
 G'»'. § 453- ft and Kuhuer oil Xen. 
 Mem. I. 5. 2. 
 
 K 2 
 
132 
 
 nPOS eESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 'irapa'Y'YeWof/.ev koi TrapaKoXovfiev ev Kvpica 'Irja-ov Xpi- 
 
 (TTw Iva (jL€Ta ^<rv)(ias epya^ofievoi tov eavTuiv aprov 
 
 13 ecrOiaxTiv. vfieis Se, aSeXcpoi, jul^ evKUKi^crriTe koXottoi- 
 
 Kal irapaKaXoSpiEv] ' andexliort {tJiem), ' 
 
 ^001 1 V) ,^ 1 I \'^0 [et petimus ab 
 
 iis] Syr., — rois Toioiirous (Sohott), or 
 more simply airoii (Liinem,), being 
 here supplied zeugmatically, as it is 
 called, to irapaKoK., which ia only 
 found with the accns. This irapdK\ii- 
 ffis is 4p Kvp. 'Ilia. Xp. ; it ia in Him 
 that it has its proper force and eflS- 
 cacy ; see notes on i Thess. iv. i, 
 where vapaxaXeiv is enhanced by the 
 same addition. The reading can hardly 
 be thought doubtful : li/ Kvp. 'Itjo: 
 X/)«rT<? is supported by AB(CE^ ip 
 K. 'I. XptoToS) FGK^; 4 mss.; Vulg., 
 Goth., Copt., al. {Lachm., Tisch. ed. 7). 
 The reading of Rec. 8ta rod Evptou 
 illiuv 'Iijirou Xpicrrov only rests on 
 the authority of D'^E'^KLN*; moat 
 mss. ; Chrys., Theod. al. [TiscA. ed. 2). 
 C ia deficient. 
 
 nerd ijmxCas] 'with quidneas;' 14 
 opposition to the busy and meddle- 
 some course of life followed by the 
 irepHroToSi/Tes irdKrus and irepiepya- 
 !:6p.€voi; see 1 Thesa. iv. 11. The pre- 
 position fitri, serves to point not to 
 the ' causa instrumentalis ' (Kypke, 
 Obs. Vol. I. p. 143), but to the conco- 
 mitant of their working, — that which 
 was associated with it, and character- 
 ized their 'modus operandi;' comp. 
 Winer, Or. § 47. h, p. 337. On the 
 derivation of ixrvxia and its probable 
 distinction from the less common ijpe- 
 /ila, see notes on x Tim. ii. 2. 
 rAv iwurm aprov] 'their own hread,' 
 —'their own' (rbv ii oUeluv viviav, 
 Chrya.), not without emphaaia; they 
 were not to seek it at the hands of 
 others (comp. ver. 8), they were not 
 'aliena vivere quadrft,' Juven. Sat. 
 
 y. 2. The sentiment ia well illua- 
 trated by Schoettg. and Wetst. in he. 
 from the Rabbinical writings, out of 
 which the following deserves citation ; 
 • quo tempore homo panem proprium 
 edit, animo compoaito ac sedato est ; 
 si vero panem parentum aut libero- 
 rum comedit, non animo tam sedato 
 est, ne dicam de pane peregrine,' 
 Ahoth K. Nathan, cap. 30. 
 
 13. viiEts 8^, dSEXcfioC] 'But ye, ire- 
 thren ; ' renewal of his addresa to those 
 who were 'reote animati' (Sohott), 
 and lived orderly after the example 
 which he had set them. Such the 
 Apostle urges to pursue their course, 
 and not from faintness to fall into idle, 
 and eventually meddlesome and un- 
 quiet habits, like those he had just 
 been condemning. |ii) Ivkuk. 
 
 KoXoir.] ' lose not heart in well-doing.' 
 The exact meaning of KaXonoieir has 
 been somewhat differently estimated. 
 Several modern writers, following the 
 hint, though not the exact interpr. 
 (p.il n^ii irepiISijre Xi/i^i Sta<j>BapivTas) 
 of Chrys., Theoph., assign to the verb 
 the idea of 'conferring benefits;' the 
 connexion between thia and the pre- 
 ceding verse arising from the gentle 
 contrast between the duty of living by 
 their own labour, and the atiU further 
 duty of conferring benefita on others; 
 see Calv. in loc. Aa thia meaning how- 
 ever aeema to be lexically doubtful, 
 see Lev. v. 4 {Cod. Coisl., where itaXoTr. 
 stands in antithesis to KaKowot^ai), 
 and as the more generic 'recte agere' 
 
 (comp. Syr. ', \ '^ »i ^«-^vVr>\) 
 
 ia perfectly in harmony with the con- 
 text, it seems best here, aa in the very 
 similar passage Gal. vi. 9, to give 
 
III. 13, 14. 
 
 133 
 
 ovvTSi. el Se tj? ov^ viraKOvei tw \6ym tjuSiv Sia t^j I4 
 eiriiTToXiji, TOVTOV (njfjtetovo'de Kai fiij <Tvvava[i.iyvv<TQe 
 
 KoKhv its less restricted meaning. The 
 exact definition of this KoXbv lies in 
 the specifications of the context. 
 On the form ivKHKeiv [Lachm., Tisch. 
 ■with ABD'N] and the somewhat doubt- 
 ful iKKaKcfK [iZec], see the remarks 
 and distinctions in notes on Gal. I.e. 
 
 14. T^ Xo-yu -iffMy K.T.X.] 'our 
 word, conveyed by the epistle ;' 
 
 [sermonibus nostris istis qui sunt in 
 epistoia]. It is doubtful whether Sid 
 T^s ^irio-roA^s is to be joined (a) with 
 the following verb (nj/iteioCffSe, or {I) 
 vrith the preceding subst. rQ Xivij), 
 soil. Tip Sid, TTJs iiriaroKiji AirotrTaKivri, 
 CEoum. The former is adopted by 
 .ffith. (Pol.), Beng., Pelt, Winer (6r. 
 § 18. 9. note 3, p. 108), and others, 
 either (aj in the simple sense, ' notate 
 in epistolS,' ^th., scil. 'in epistol^ 
 ad me scripts Ulum suis notis depin- 
 gite,' Grot., — ttjs iTri<rTo\rjs referring 
 to the letter which St Paul would in 
 that case receive from the Thess. (see 
 Winer) ; or (oj) in the more artificial 
 sense, ' kdc epistoia freti severius trac- 
 tate,' Pelt (comp. Beng.), — Trjs iin- 
 OToX^s in that case referring to the 
 present epistle. Of these last men- 
 tioned (a^) seems clearly forced and 
 improbable, while (Oj), though some- 
 what more plausible, lies open to the 
 contextual objection that the present 
 order of words would tend to throw 
 an emphasis on Sti, t^s cTriirr. which 
 cannot be accounted for, and further 
 to the still graver exegetical objection 
 that a letter would seem uncalled for 
 after the precept in ver. 6, where the 
 course to be pursued by the Thessalo- 
 nians is already stated. We retain 
 then (6) with Syr., not improbably 
 "Vulg., Copt., Goth, [the exact orde 
 
 of the Greek is preserved], Chrys. 
 (appy.), Theoph., CEcum., and most 
 modern expositors. The objec- 
 
 tion founded on the omission of the 
 art. tQ after ii/iuv is not of weight, as 
 5i4 T^s iirurr, is so associated with t^J 
 \6y<ii Tifi. as to form with it only a 
 single idea; see exx. in Winer, Gr. 
 § 20. 2, p. Its- It may be observed 
 that this is one of those cases in which 
 the use of the art. in the N.T. seems 
 slightly to differ from that in the best 
 Attic Greek. While in the latter the 
 article is rarely omitted, except after 
 verbal substantives (Kriiger, SpracM. 
 % 50. g. 9), or where the structural 
 connexion of the prepositional member 
 with what precedes is palpably close, 
 this omission of the art. in the N. T. 
 is so far from unusual, that its inser- 
 tion usually implies some degree of 
 emphasis ; see Fritz. Bom, iii. 25, 
 Vol. I. p. 195 (note). 
 (ni)i.Ei.OT)o-6c] ' marl;,' —BcSl. by avoid- 
 ing his company (comp, ver. 6), as 
 more fully specified in the words 
 which follow. So paraphrastically Syr. 
 
 n^\ v_»^£iAj [separetur avobis], 
 
 comp. .^th.-Platt. The verb a-ri/ietov- 
 cBai is a air. \ey6ii. in the N.T. : it 
 properly implies in the active ' signo 
 distinguere' (Schott), e.g. ivwroKas 
 aippaylSi, Dion. Hal. Antiq. IV. S7, 
 and thence in the middle ' sibi notare 
 aliquid ' (Polyb. Ekl. xxil. 11. 12), — 
 more correctly, according to the Atti- 
 cists, iToaijiiaiveffBai (Thomas-Mag. 
 p. 791, Herodian, p. 420, ed. Koch), 
 or as here, with a more intensive 
 force, 'notfi. (censori^) notare;' the 
 middle having what has been termed its 
 ' dynamic ' character, Kruger, Sprachl. 
 § 52. 8. 4. For a, large list of verbs 
 of this class, see Schmalfeld, Synt, 
 
134 
 
 nPOS eESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 15 avTw, Iva ivrpaTT^. Koi fit] m e-^Qpov ^yelaOe, oKXa 
 
 16 vovQeTelre wy aSe\(f)6v. auroy ^e 6 Kvptoi riyy eip^v^i 
 Siprj vfiiv Tfiv elp^vijv Sia vavTOS ev iravri rpoTrip. 6 
 J^vpioi fiera iravrwv vfioov. 
 
 § 35> P- 44 ^1-' ^^^ compare notes on 
 Col. ir. I. 
 
 f.^ <nPvovo|i,CYVD<r6e] 'keep no company 
 with;' present, pointing to the course 
 they were to follow. The double com- 
 pound o-vvava/ilyv. (Athen. Deipn. vi. 
 68, p. 256 a) is used in a sense little 
 differing from the simpler and more 
 usual aviiidyv. , and probably only in 
 accordance with the noticeable ten- 
 dency of later Greek to accumulate 
 prepositions in composition. The read- 
 ing is doubtful; Zachm. omits xal 
 with ABD'EK; 17; Clarom., San- 
 germ., Goth., Copt. ; Chrys. ; Tert., 
 al., — and reads <rvi>ava/dyvv<r8ai in 
 which he is supported as to the termi- 
 nation by ABD^EFGN; on this last 
 reading it is impossible to pronounce 
 from the Manuscript evidence, on ac- 
 count of the constant interchange of e 
 and ai by itacism. Of the Versions 
 Clarom., Sangerm,, Copt., Goth., sup- 
 port the infinitive, Vulg., Syr., Au- 
 giens., the imperative, 
 iva JvTpoir^] ' that he he shamed,' ' ut 
 oonfundatur,' Vulg. ; passive, — not 
 with a middle sense, <ad se ipsum 
 quasi redire,' Pelt (oomp. Grot., 'ut 
 pudore tactns ad mentem meliorem 
 redeat'), — a meaning for which there 
 seems no sufficient reason either here 
 or in Tit, ii. 8 (where see notes). The 
 active occurs in i Cor. iv. 14. 
 
 15. Kal does not stand 'here in- 
 stead of dXXd ' (Jowett ; comp. De W., 
 ' aber '), — a most precarious statement, 
 — but, with its usual and proper 
 force, subjoins to the previous exhor- 
 tation a further one that was fully 
 compatible with it, and in fact tended 
 to show the real principle on which 
 
 the command was given: it was not 
 punitive, but corrective. 
 OS k^pov] ' a» an enemy,' ' in the 
 light of an enemy ;' the ui: being used 
 (here almost pleonasticaUy, comp. 4>l- 
 'Koy yap ire ijyoV/iai, Plato, Gorg. p. 
 473 a) to mark the aspect in which he 
 was not to be regarded ; comp. notes 
 on oh. ii. 2, and on Col. iii. 23. 
 On vovBerety, see notes and reff. on 
 I Thess. V. 12. 
 
 16. avTos 8^ K.T.X.] 'BtUmaythe 
 Lord of peace Himself;' the Si (as in 
 I Thess. V. 23) putting in slight anti- 
 thesis the prayer with the foregoing 
 exhortation, and the airis enhandng 
 the dignity of the subject ; comp. notes 
 on ch. ii. 16, where however the anti- 
 thesis is somewhat more distinctly 
 marked. On the meaning of the word 
 HpijVTi, not merely 'concord' (aare 
 fi,ri8aii68ev ^x^'" ^'XovEiKfas &<t>opii.iii>, 
 Chrys.), but peace in its widest and 
 Christian sense,— the deep tranquillity 
 of a soul resting on God, see notes on 
 Phil. iv. 7, and on the nature of the 
 gen., see notes on i Thew. v. 23,— 
 but observe that Kii/uos can more 
 readily be associated with the gen. as 
 being allied to verbs that regularly 
 govern that case ; comp. Kriiger, 
 Sprachl. § 47. 26. 8. 
 Sid TTOVT^s K.T.X.] 'corUimially in 
 every manner,' — at all times (Matth. 
 xviii. 10, Acts ii. 25, Bom. xi. 10, 
 al., comp. Ast, Lex. Platan. Vol, m. 
 p. 63) and in every possible mode 
 of manifestation, ' in omnibus quae 
 facitis,' .ffith.-Pol,; iSrre ir/iAs airbv 
 etptiveieiv Kal irpbs dXXiJXous Kal t^s 
 rail' ivavrluv ^ttijSouX^s aTrrjKKixSai, 
 Theod. The second mode however 
 
III. 15, 16, 17. 
 
 135 
 
 Autograph salutation 
 and benediction; 
 
 'O aa-iratrfioi t^ e/«p X^'jO« ITau- 1 7 
 
 enters but slightly into the contem- 
 plation of the Apostle, as there is 
 nothing in the £p. to make us think 
 that rb elpjjveietv Trpbs aXX^Xous had 
 been seriously endangered or violated. 
 The reading ip iravrl rdirif, adopted 
 by Lachm. with A^D^FGr ; i mss. ; 
 Vulg. , Clarom., Goth. ; Chrys. [see the 
 note of Montfaucon], seems to have 
 been su^ested by the not uncommon 
 occurrence of the formula (i Cor. i. 
 2, 1 Cor. ii. 14, I Tim. ii. 8), and 
 perhaps partially by the foregoing allu- 
 sion to time. The reading of the text 
 ia supported by A^BD'EKLN ; nearly 
 all mss. ; Syr. (both), Copt., al. ; 
 Theod., Dam., and seems in every 
 way more suitable to the context. 
 
 17. 'O d<nra<r|i6s k.t.X.] ' The salu- 
 tation by the hand of me Paul ;' 
 comp. I Cor. xvi. 21, and Col. iv. 18. 
 On the quasi-appositional genitive 
 Jlai\ov, see exx. in Jelf, Gr. % 467. 4. 
 These words appy. form the com- 
 mencement of the autograph saluta- 
 tion vrith which the Apostle attests 
 the genuineness and authenticity of 
 the Epistle (comp. notes on Gal. vi. 
 11), the two verses having appy. both 
 been written by the Apostle, — not 
 merdy ver. 18 (to 'H X"/"' k.t.X. 
 Ofrl Tov i^pwiydai ffe ypd^eLV €lti)$€tf 
 Theod., ah), which, as Liinem. rightly 
 observes, could hardly be termed a 
 direct dffirairpis. 
 
 S] ' which thing / not meaning, by at- 
 traction (see exx. in Winer, Gr. § 24. 
 3, p. 150) to the following trijuelov, 
 'which greeting,' but more simply 
 and naturally referring to the preced- 
 ing words, and to the general fact of 
 their being written TB^/ijX^P^IfatfXoi;. 
 These autograph lines formed a <riip.etov 
 that the Ep, was not lis Si' airoO (ch. 
 
 ii. 2), but was truly and genuinely his 
 own inspired composition. 
 iv irtlo-j eiruTToX'g] ' in every epistle;' 
 appy. with reference to every future 
 Epistle (tS wpos ovffTivas d'qrore, 
 Theoph. 2) which the Apostle might 
 hereafter deem it necessary so to au- 
 thenticate, — notmerely those he might 
 have contemplated writing to Thessa- 
 lonica (Theoph. i, Liinem.); for con- 
 sider I Cor. xvi. 21, and Col. iv. 18. 
 If it be urged that these last men- 
 tioned are the only Epp. in which the 
 autograph attestation seems to have 
 found a place, it may be reasonably 
 answered that the iroVg must be un- 
 derstood relatively of every Epistle 
 that was sent in such a way or under 
 such circumstances as to have needed 
 it. All the other Epp. (except i Cor., 
 Col., which have the arnjietop, and 
 I Thess., which was sent before cir- 
 cumstances proved it to be necessary) 
 are fairly shown both by De Wette 
 and by Alf . in he. to have either been 
 delivered by emissaries (2 Cor., Phil.), 
 to bear such marks (Gal. vi. 11, and 
 perhaps the doxology in Bom. , Eph.), 
 or to be of such a general character 
 (Kom. ? Eph. ? and those to indi- 
 viduals), as to have rendered a formal 
 attestation unnecessary. 
 ovTUS ypd^ai] ' so I write / soil, in 
 such characters as ver. 17 and 18 
 appeared to be written with. The sup- 
 positions that the Apostle here in- 
 serted some words [to 'Ao-jrofojaai vfias, 
 77 TO 'B/i/5wo-Se, ij Ti toioOtov, (Ecum.), 
 or adopted » monogram (' conjunctis 
 scilicet apte Uteris n et A,' according 
 to Zeltner, de Monogr. Pauli, Altorf , 
 1 721; see contra, Wolf in loc.), or 
 lastly ' singulari et inimitabili picturS. 
 et ductu literarum expressisse iUud 
 
136 
 
 nP02 GESSAAONIKEIS B. 
 
 l8 ^ yaoj? Tov Hvpiov tif/Lwv It]<rov XjOJo-tov fiera Trai'TWj' 
 vfiwv. rAfii^v.j 
 
 1 8. ['An'^pJ This is omitted by Tisch. (marked by Qrksb. with'") with 
 BS>; 17. 44. 67**. 116; Fuld., Harl., Tol. ; Ambrst.,— but retained by Rec. 
 and Lachm. As it may not improbably be a liturgical interpolation it is the 
 safest course to insert it in brackets. See notes on Tit. iii. 15. 
 
 Gratia, <fco.' (Beng.), — seem all far too 
 artificial to deserve serious considera- 
 tion The otfrws simply and naturally 
 points to the visiile and recognisaile 
 difference between the handwriting of 
 the transcriber and of the Apostle. 
 
 18. 1] X'^P''^ K.T.X.] The same form 
 of benediction as at the end of i Thess. 
 (where see notes), except that the in- 
 clusive and significant iravTuy is here 
 
 added, — ' all,' — even those who had 
 deserved and received the Apostle's 
 censure (comp. /icri irdvTmi, ver. i6) 
 were to share in his benediction and 
 farewell prayer ; see Pelt in loe., who 
 however joins with it the less probable 
 supposition, 'ne rixse [none of which 
 appear to have existed] disceptationes- 
 que Thessalonicenses turbarent.' 
 
TRANSLATION. 
 
NOTICE. 
 
 THE following translation has been revised in .accordance with 
 the principles laid down in former portions of this work. 
 Experience seems satisfactorily- to show that change is undesirable 
 except where our Authorised Version is incorrect, inexact, insuffi- 
 cient, obscure (Pref. to Oalatians, p. xxv), or imconsistcnt with itself 
 in renderings of the less usual words or forms of expression (Notice 
 to Tramsl. of Pctstoral Epistles). The last form of correction is per- 
 haps the most difficult to adjust, as our Translators expressly state 
 that they have not been careful to preserve throughout their 
 work a studied uniformity of translation, and consequently any 
 attempt to do this regularly would reverse the principles on which 
 they acted, and tend to produce what they avoided — dulness and 
 monotony. StUl in the same Epistle, and especially in the same 
 context, it is so obviously desirable to be consistent, that here at 
 least changes will have to be introduced. It must however 
 always rest with individual judgment whether the word or ex- 
 pression in question is of such a character as to demand uniformity, 
 or whether it is best left to take its hue from the context. That 
 I have always been judicious in my decisions is more than I dare 
 hope, but still I have striven to make them with a clear recognition 
 of the general principles that characterize the noble Version which 
 I am presuming to revise. 
 
 That these points may be more fully considered, and that my 
 opinion, where seemingly capricious or precipitate, may be more 
 completely tested, I have made a few additions to the notes in the 
 shape of reasons for the changes adopted, and I have further 
 
140 NOTICE. 
 
 Bought to add to the common stock of principles of revision a 
 brief record of my own experiences and my own many difiEiculties. 
 Sincerely and earnestly do I trust that the revision of our Autho- 
 rised Version may be undertaken in its own good time, and that 
 that time is not indefinitely remote, still year after year I am made 
 more sensibly to feel that this can only be done by a frank and 
 modest avowal, on the part of every one who has gained any expe- 
 rience, of the real difficulties that attend on the work, — difficulties 
 far more numerous than the inexact and often presumptuous criti- 
 cism of the day is at all aware of. 
 
 I have carefully considered the Revised Translation of these 
 Epistles published by the American Bible Union (Trilbner, Lon- 
 don, 1856), and have in a few cases profited by its suggestions, 
 still I cannot but feel that this laborious work is at present very 
 far from what we may imagine to be the model of a national 
 Revision. 
 
 It may be as well to notice here that the translation of Wiclif 
 is quoted from the New Testament published by Pickering in 
 1848 ; that Ooverdale's Testament of 1538 is cited from the Paris 
 edition; that the edition of Cranmer employed is that of April 
 1540; that the Genevan Version is given from the first edition 
 1560; and that the citations from the Bishops' Bible are made 
 from the first edition 1568. Por the remaining Versions, of 
 Tyndale and Coverdale, the Rhemish and the Authorised, I 
 have used Bagster's reprints. 
 
THE 
 
 FIRST EPISTLE TO THETHESSALONIANS. 
 
 PAUL and Silvanus and Timothy to the church of the I. 
 Thessalonians in God the Father and the Lord Je- 
 sus Christ. Grace he to you and peace. 
 
 We give thanks to God always for you all, making 2 
 mention of you in our prayers ; remembering without 3 
 ceasing your work of faith, and toil of love, and patience 
 of hope in our Lord Jesus Christ, in the presence of God 
 and our Father : knowing, brethren beloved of God, your 4 
 election; because our Gospel came not unto you in word 5 
 
 I. Timothyl So WlcL., Chan., 
 Ehbm. i Timotheus, AnTH. and re- 
 maining Vv. See notes on Col. i. i 
 (Trand.). In God] So all 
 
 Vv. except AuTH., G-BN., which is 
 in God, — an unnecessary and inexact 
 addition, not adopted by AuTH. in 
 the parallel passage 2 Thess. i. t. 
 And the Lord] So WiCL., Cov. Teat., 
 Ehbm. (ov/r L.) : and in the Lord, 
 Atjth. and remaining Vv. The addi- 
 tion of ' in' seems unnecessary, and is 
 best reserved for those cases where it 
 is expressed in the Greek, or where, 
 as in I Tim. vi. 9 (see notes), there 
 are contextual reasons for its introduc- 
 tion. The mistakes caused by such 
 insertions are well noticed by Blunt, 
 Parish Priest, p. 56. And 
 
 peace] Adth. adds 'from God our 
 Father, and the Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 3. ToU} Similarly WlOL., trauei/l: 
 
 labour, AuTH. and the remaining Vv. 
 exceptGEN., diligent hue. Though 'la- 
 bour of love ' has from the alliteration 
 become familiar to the ear, it seems de- 
 sirable here to maintain the more strict 
 translation of /ciTros : see notes in loc. 
 In the presence of] So Adth. in ch. 
 ii. 19 : in the sight of, Adth. and the 
 other Vv. except WiOL., Cov. (both), 
 Bhem., before. It is of little moment 
 which of these translations is adopted ; 
 but as the expression l/jirp. toO 6eoS 
 is only used by St Paul in this Epi- 
 stle, it should be similarly translated 
 throughout. 
 
 4. Beloved of God, yovir el^ So 
 Adth. Marg., Cov. Test., Ehbm., and 
 (giving AoK) thai ye are electe) Ttnd., 
 Gov., Cban.: beloved, your election of 
 God, Adth., Bish., and sim. Gek. 
 (jAot ye are elect of God). 
 
 5. Because] For, Adth. and all 
 
142 
 
 THESSALONIANS. 
 
 only, but also in power and in the Holy Ghost and in 
 much assurance ; even as ye know what manner of men 
 
 6 we became among you for your sake. And ye became 
 followers of us and of the Lord, having received the word 
 
 7 in much affliction with joy of the Holy Ghost ; so that ye 
 became an ensample to all that believe in Macedonia and 
 
 8 in Achaia. For from you hath sounded forth the word 
 of the Lord not only in Macedonia and Achaia, but in 
 every place your faith to God- ward is gone forth; so that 
 
 9 we need not to speak anything. For they themselves 
 report of us what manner of entering in we had unto 
 you, and how ye turned unto God from idols to serve the 
 
 lo living and true God ; and to wait for His Son from hea- 
 ven, whom He raised from the dead, even Jesus who de- 
 livereth us from the coming wrath. 
 
 Vt. except Ehem., that. Even as] 
 As, AuTH. and all Yv. It is almost 
 impossible to lay dovm any exact rule 
 for the translation of KaSws. Whether 
 the lighter ' as,' or the more expres- 
 sive and perhaps more literal 'even 
 as' or 'according as' is to be adopted, 
 must appy. be left wholly to the con- 
 text and to individual judgment. 
 Became] Behamed ov/re selves, Ttnd., 
 Cban.; haiie hen, Cov. Test., Ehem. ; 
 were, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 6. Followers] So Auth. and all 
 Vv. Though ' imitators ' would be 
 more exact, it is hardly necessary to 
 displace the present idiomatic and 
 perfectly intelligible translation. 
 
 7. Became an ensample] Sim., are 
 become an ens., Cov. Test. : were * en- 
 samples, Adth.; were an ensample, 
 Ttnd., Cov., Chan., Bish. 
 
 And in Achaia] And * Achaia, AuTB. 
 
 8. Math sounded forth] Sounded 
 out, AniH., Ttnd., Cran,, Gen., 
 BiBH. The perfect ought always to 
 be observed in translation. Though 
 idiom may occasionally require the 
 
 aorist to be translated with the usual 
 sign of the perfect, the converse is 
 extremely rare ; comp. 2 Cor. i. 9. 
 But] But * also, Atjth. 
 Is gone forth] Sim. Cov. Test, (is 
 gone out) : is spread abroad, Adth., 
 Cov., Bish. ; spred her silfe ahroade, 
 Ttnd., Chan. ; isproceded, Bhbu. 
 
 9. Report] So Ehem. : shew, Adth. 
 and remaining Vv. Turned] 
 Returned, Adth. ed. 161 1, as given in 
 the English Hexapla. 
 
 10. From heaven] So Adth. and 
 all Vv. except WiOL., fro heuenes. 
 Many modern Vv. preserve both the 
 article and the plural, but with the 
 familiar usage of the word in the 
 N. T. (e. jr. Matth. vi. 9) before us it 
 seems in general passages like the 
 present both harsh and unnecessary 
 to be thus literally precise. Who] 
 So Ehem. : which, Adth. 
 Delivereth] So Ttnd., Cran., Gen., 
 Bish. : delivered, Adth., Wicl. ; hath 
 delyuered, Cov. (both), Ehem. 
 Coming iBrath] Wrath to come, Adth. 
 and all Vv. (w. to comynge, Wiot.). 
 
Chap. I. 6-II. 3. 
 
 143 
 
 For yourselves know, brethren, our entering in unto II. 
 you that it hath not been vain : but after that we had suf- 2 
 fered before, and had been shamefully entreated, as ye 
 know, at Philippi, we were bold of speech in our God, so 
 as to speak unto you the Gospel of God in much conflict. 
 For our exhortation is not of error, nor yet of unclean- 3 
 
 Chaptee II. I. Know, hrethren] So, 
 ia the same order, Tthd., Gen., 
 Khem. : hrethren, hnow, Auth., Gov., 
 Oban., Bish. There seems here no 
 cause for departing from the order of 
 the original. Enteringl 
 
 Entrance, AtHH. There is no reason 
 why the rendering adopted in ch. i. 9 
 shovdd not be retained. 
 Math not Seen] Was not, Auth. and 
 aU Vt. Vain] So "WiOL., 
 
 Khem.: in vain, Atiih. and remaining 
 Vv. 
 
 2. But after] But * even after, 
 Auth. Mad been shamefully 
 
 entr.l Were shamefully entr., Auth., 
 TiND., Cban., Gbk., Bish. The 
 other "Vr. vary the translation of the 
 participle ; Coy. gives, hut as we had 
 suffred afore, & were, &c.; Gov. Test., 
 iut we suffred.. .and were. ..and were 
 holdened : and Bhem. , hit halting suf- 
 fered before and been abused, &c. If the 
 view taken in the notes be correct, it 
 seems best to regard both participles 
 as temporal, and to express them both 
 by the idiomatic resolution into the 
 English pluperfect. On the transla- 
 tion of the aoristpart. when associated 
 with the finite verb, see notes on Phil. 
 ii. 30 (TraTisl.). Were bold of 
 
 speech] Were bold, Auth. and the 
 othet Vt. except WlCL., hadde triste; 
 Got. Test., were boldened ; and Bhem., 
 had confidence ; see notes in lac. 
 So as to speak] To speak, Auth. and 
 all Vt. (/oj-«o!p.,WlcL.). The intro- 
 duction of ' so as ' seems necessary to 
 exhibit the explanatory nature of the 
 nfinitive, and to avoid tautology. 
 
 In (3)] So WiOL., Gov. Test., Cban., 
 Bish., Ehem. ; *viilh, Auth., Ttnd., 
 Coy., Geit. Conflict] So Auth. 
 
 in Col. ii. i, giving contention here. 
 There is much Tariation in the trans- 
 lation here : Biaynesse, WiOL. ; care- 
 fvlnesse, Cov. Test., Bhem. (these 
 three following the Vulg. soUieitu- 
 dinc) ; strivynge, Ttnd., Coy., Cban., 
 Gen., Bish. 
 
 3. Is] Was, Auth. and all Vt. 
 Error] Soall Vt. except Auth., Gen., 
 'Bibb., deceit. Nor yet.. .nor] 
 
 Noryet... nether, Ttnd., Coy., Cban.; 
 nor. ..nor, Auth., Cov. Test., Gen.; 
 nether... nether, "WvsL., Bish.; not... 
 nor, Bheu. There is some little diffi- 
 culty in the choice of an appropriate 
 rendering in the different cases of con- 
 tinued negation. Perhaps the follow- 
 ing distinctions of translation may be 
 found generally satisfactory in appli- 
 cation, (i) M'i),../ii;S^ or ov...oiSi will 
 commonly admit the translation (a) 
 'not... neither,' when the two words 
 or clauses to which the negation is 
 prefixed are simply parallel and co- 
 ordinate, e.g. Matth. Tii. 6 ; (6) * not 
 ...nor,' when there is some sort of 
 connexion in thought, or accordance 
 in meaning, in the words or clauses 
 with which the negatiTCS are asso- 
 ciated, e.g.ok. T. 5 ; (c) 'not.. .nor yet,' 
 where there is less accordance, and 
 where the latter clause has some- 
 what of a climactic character, e,g. 
 Phil. ii. 16, and see notes to Transl. 
 (2) ill-^...ifiiSi...fi7iSi, 'not.. .nor.. .nor' 
 (John i. 13), where the terms are 
 similar or non-ascensive, or 'not' 
 
144 
 
 I THESSALONIANS. 
 
 4 ness, nor in guile : but according as we have been ap- 
 proved of God to be put in trust with the Gospel, even so 
 we speak ; not as pleasing men, but God which proveth 
 
 5 our hearts. For neither at any time used we speech of 
 flattery, as ye know, nor a cloke of covetousness ; God is 
 
 6 witness : neither seeking glory of men, neither of you nor 
 of others, though we might have used authority as Christ's 
 
 7 apostles. But we were gentle in the midst of you, like as 
 
 8 a nurse cherisheth her own children ; so, being affec- 
 tionately desirous of you, we had good will to impart to 
 
 followed by 'nor. ..nor yet,' as per- 
 haps Col. ii. 21 (but see notes), or by 
 'nor yet... nor,' as here, according as 
 the dissimilarity or climactic force 
 is mainly exhibited in the second or in 
 the third term. (3) M^.../ii}7-e...^i/Te, 
 'not.. .neither.. .nor;' where the first 
 negation, so to say, bifurcates, and is 
 expanded into two similar clauses in- 
 troduced each by the adjunctive /J.'^e ; 
 oomp. AuTH. in i Tim. i. 7. In cases 
 where there are three or more repeti- 
 tions of jttip-e, our Authorised Version 
 appears to adopt in the main (3), re- 
 peating 'neither' after 'nor;' comp. 
 Matth. V. 34, Luke ix.'3. 
 
 4. According as] As, AciH. and 
 all Vt. It has been before ob- 
 served that the introduction of ' ac- 
 cording ' or ' even ' must depend on 
 the general hue of the passage : here 
 it seems necessary. Save been\ 
 Were, Auth. Approved] So Ebem. ; 
 sim. prouede, WioL. : allowed, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. Froveth] So 
 WiOL., Ehem. : trieih, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. WiOL. and Ehem. are 
 the only Vv. which preserve the paro- 
 nomasia in SeSoKiiJ,d<rii,e8a ... SoKind- 
 
 5. Speech of flattery] Somewhat 
 similarly, worde of glosynge, WiOL. ; 
 the word of adulation, Ehem. : 
 flattering words, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv 
 
 6. NeUher seeking] So WiCL., and 
 (giving nor) Gov. Test., Ehem.: nor... 
 sought we, Auth., and so the remaining 
 Vv., except that they more correctly 
 adopt neither at the commencement of 
 the clauses. In some cases, especially in 
 St Paul's Epp., it is almost impossible 
 to give an idiomatic translation without 
 converting the participle into a finite 
 verb (comp. Eom xii. 9 sq.) : here 
 however there is no such necessity. 
 Nor] So rightly WiOL. (nether). Gov. 
 (both), Gen., Ehem. : nor yet, Auth., 
 TiND., Gran., Bibh. Though] 
 Vvhereas, Ehem.; when, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. Have 
 used authority] So Auth. Marg. : be 
 charge to you, WlCL. ; have bene charge- 
 able, Tynd., Gov. (both) [adding vnto 
 you], Geit. ; haue bene i auctorite, 
 Cban., Bise. ; haue been a burden to 
 you, Ehem. ; have been burdensome, 
 Auth. (Vulg. here adds vobis). 
 Christ's opos&s] So WiOL. : the Apo- 
 stles of Christ, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. (Gov. Test, omits the). 
 
 7. In the midst of] So WiOL. 
 (mydil), Ehem.: among, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. lAlce as] 
 So Gov. : eiien as, Adth. 
 
 Ser own] Her, Auth. and all Vv. 
 
 8. We had good will to] Somewhat 
 similarly ,'o«re good will was to, Ttnd., 
 Cbak., Gbk., Bibh.; wc.wolde with 
 good uyl, Gov. : we were willing to. 
 
Chap. II. 
 
 -12. 
 
 145 
 
 you, not the Gospel of God only, but also our own souls, 
 because ye became very dear to us. For ye remember, 
 brethren, our toil and travail : working night and day, 
 that we might not be burdensome to any of you, preached 
 we unto you the Gospel of God. Ye are witnesses, and 
 so is God, how holily and justly and unblameably we be- 
 haved ourselves to you that believe ; even as you know 
 how in regard of every one of you we did, so, as a father 
 toward his own children, exhorting you and encouraging 
 you, and testifying that ye should walk worthy of God 
 who is calling you into His own kingdom and glory. 
 
 lo 
 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 AtJTH. ; we...wolden, WiOL., Gov. 
 Test. ; me would gladly, Ehbm. Eu'- 
 SoKetv occurs again in oh. iii. i, 
 2 Thess. ii. i2, but it is not possible 
 to preserve a uniform translation. 
 Impart] So, as to the tense of tbe 
 infin., WlOL. (hitaJce), Ehem. (deliuer) : 
 have imparted, AuTH. ; hai/e deaUe, 
 Tynd. and the five remaining Vv. 
 Becxcme] Similarly WlOL., ben made; 
 and Ehem., are become : were, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. Very dewr} 
 
 Similarly Gov. Test., Ehbm., most 
 deare; and WiOL., most derworth: 
 dear, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 g. Toil] Labour, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. except WiOL., traiwyl 
 (giving werynesse for /i6x9ov). See 
 notes on ch. i. 3 (Transl.). 
 Worhing] So WiCL., Ehem. : *for la- 
 howring, Auth. It is well to translate 
 ^pyov, iprfdS^o/iai, always by 'work.' 
 That we might not, &c.] Because we 
 wovld not be cha/rgeable unto, Auth. , 
 Ttnd. (greveous), Gov., Cean., Gen., 
 BiSH. ; that we schulden not greue, 
 WiOL. ; leste we skulde be cha/rgea^e 
 vnto, Gov. Test. ; lest vveshould charge, 
 Ehem. 
 
 Preached we] We preached, Auth. 
 The inversion seems to give a slight 
 force, and to keep in more immediate 
 connexion the participle and its finite 
 verb. 
 
 E. T. 
 
 10. So is Qod] So Tynd., Gov. 
 (both), Gban. : God also, Auth., Gen., 
 BiSH. ; God, Wici., Ehem. To you] 
 So WiOL., Ehem. ; among you, Axsts. 
 and the other Vv. except Gov. Test., 
 wyth you. 
 
 11. .ffiicM o«] .4s, Auth. and all Vv. 
 How in rega/rd of, &c.] How we ex- 
 horted and comforted, a/nd charged every 
 one of you, (as a father doeth his chil- 
 dren, ), Auth. : Gban. alone preserves 
 the correct construction, though with 
 a somewhat free translation, Aow that 
 we ba/re soch affeccyon vnto euery one of 
 you, as a faiher doth vnto chyldren, 
 exhortynge, comfortyng, and besechyng 
 you that, &c. This also seems the 
 more correct position for the clause 
 us irarrip k.t.\., except that it some- 
 what interferes with the easy run of 
 the sentence. His own] 
 As above in ver. 7 : his, AuTH. and 
 all Vv. except Okan., which omits 
 the pronoun. Exhorting you] 
 Auth. omits you here ; and does not 
 supply it after the following word. 
 Encouraging] Auth. and all Vv. use 
 the word comfort for 7ro/)OKa\oCiT€s 
 here: for the constr. of Auth. see 
 above. Testifi^ing] So Auth. for 
 impripeaBaiiD. Gal. v. 3 ; Eph. iv. 17 ; 
 here it employs * cha/rge, reading 
 lutprrvpoiiievoi. 
 
 12. Should] So Wioii. : would. 
 
146 
 
 I THESSALONIANS. 
 
 13 For this cause we also thank God without ceasing, 
 that when ye received from us the word of preaching that 
 is of God, ye accepted not the word of men, but, as it is 
 in truth, the word of God, which worketh also in you 
 
 14 that believe. For ye, brethren, became followers of the 
 churches of God which are in Judaea in Christ Jesus, in 
 thatt ye also suffered the same things of your own country- 
 
 15 men as they too did of the Jews, who killed both the 
 Lord Jesus and the prophets, and drove us out, and please 
 
 16 not God, and are contrary to all men, hindering us from 
 
 AuTH. and remaining Vv. 
 Is calling] Math called, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. except WiCL., clepide. 
 Into] So WlOIi., EHElit. : wnto, Atjth. 
 and remaining Vv. Sis ovm] 
 
 His, AniH. and all Vv. 
 
 13. We also thanh] Also thank we, 
 ACTH. , Gen.: as xal belongs to iiims it 
 is better to adopt the order of the text ; 
 sim. Gov. Test., Bheu. That 
 
 (before when)'] So Gen. ^ iecause, 
 AuTH., BiSH. ; for, WioL. ; because 
 that, Ttnd., Gov. (both), Cean., 
 Ehkm. From us the word of, &o.] 
 
 Very similarly, of va the worde of the 
 preachinge of Qod, Gov. (both). Gen. : 
 the word of God, which ye heard ofvXj 
 AuTH. ; of vs the worde of the herynge 
 0/ jTod, WlOL., Ehbm. ; of vs tlie worde 
 wherwith God was preached, Ttnd.; 
 ofvs y' worde {wherwith ye learned to 
 foioaj God), Gran. ; the worde which ye 
 hearde of vs concernyng God, BiSB. 
 Accepted] Received, AuiH. and all other 
 Vv. except WiOL. (tofen, giving hadden 
 take before). It is desirable to show 
 by the translation that two words 
 are used, vapdXapbvTes ... iSi^a<rSe. 
 Vulg, uses accipere in both cases. 
 Not] It not as, Auth. and all Vv., 
 and so Vulg. WorJceth] 
 
 So all Vv. except Auth., Bibh., 
 t^ectimlly worheth. See also Auth. 
 in James v. 16. The force of li/ep- 
 
 yeitr$ai, ^ex se vim suam exercere,' 
 cannot easily be expressed in English : 
 'to work' seems hardly sufficient on 
 the one hand; 'to work effectually' 
 somewhat too strong on the other. 
 The most exact translation is perhaps 
 'to evince (its) working,' but is not in 
 harmony with the tone of our Autho- 
 rised Version. 
 
 14. Followers] See note on ch. i. 6 
 (Transl.). Are in J.] So WiOL., 
 Gov. Test., Ehbm. , following the Vulg. : 
 in J. a/re, AuTH. and remaining Vv. 
 In thai] Similarly Gen., because: so 
 thai. Gov. ; for, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. Suffered] Have suffered, 
 Auth. and all Vv. The same] So 
 WiOL., Gen., Rhem. : soch. Gov. Test. ; 
 like, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 As they too did] Even as they have, 
 Auth. 
 
 1 5 . Killed both] Both killed, Auth. , 
 Gen., Bish., Ehem. The prophets] 
 • Their own Pr., Auth. Drove 
 us out] Haue chased vs out, Auth. 
 Marg. ; pwrsuen vs, WiOL. ; haue 
 persued vs. Gov. Test. ; have persecuted 
 ui, Auth. and 6 remaining Vv. 
 Please not Qod] So Gov., Gov. Test. 
 {do not pi), Ehem. : they please not 
 God, Auth., Wicl. (to g.) ; God they 
 please not, Ttnd., Gean., Gen., Bish. 
 
 16. Hindering] Andhynder,Cjti.i<i., 
 Bish. ; forbidding, Auth., Wicl., 
 
Chap. II. 13 — 17. 
 
 147 
 
 speaking to the Gentiles that they might be saved, — in 
 order to fill up their sins alway. But the wrath is come 
 upon them unto the very end. 
 
 But we, brethren, having been torn from you for a 17 
 short time, in face, not in heart, the more abundantly en- 
 
 Cov. (both) ; and forbid, Tind., Gen. ; 
 prohibiting, Ehkm. Though the transl. 
 given by AuTH. is the usual one of 
 Kbi\6eiv and cannot be called incor- 
 rect, yet that adopted in the text is 
 here far more forcible. From, 
 
 speaking] To speah, AuTH. ; Bee pre- 
 vious note. In order to fill up] 
 To fill up, AxjTS. But] For, AvTS. 
 and all Vv. (fortotke, WiOL.). Vulg. 
 here gives enim for S^. 
 Is come] So AnTH. and all Vv. (Gov. 
 adds all/ready) except WiOL., Itifore 
 came. This certainly seems one of 
 those cases in which our English aorist 
 does not convey the full force of the 
 Greek, but remands the event too 
 absolutely to the past. While the 
 Greek l<p8a<Te states the fact, but is 
 simply silent as to ' quam late pateat 
 id quod actum est' (see notes in lac), 
 the English 'came' seems to express it, 
 and also to imply distinctly that the 
 event with all its issues plainly be- 
 longs to the past. Unto the very 
 end] Til into the ende, Wiot. ; euen to 
 the end, Khem. ; both follovring the 
 Vulg. ; to the uttermost, AniH., Cov. 
 (lynto y vUemost), Gen. (vlmoate), BiSH. 
 (vim.) ; even to the vtmost, Ttnd., 
 Cban. ; vntyll the vltemost, Cov. Test. 
 The translation adopted in the text 
 perhaps more precisely renders <j)8d,veiv 
 els Ti\o! than the more qualitative and 
 appy. adverbial 'to the uttermost;' 
 see notes in loc. 
 
 17. Having been torn from, you] 
 Being taken from, you, Adth. ; desolate 
 fro you, WiCL. ; for as moch...as we 
 are leept from you, Ttnd., Cov. (ha/ue 
 bene), Cban.,Gen. {were),'BlBB.;beynge 
 
 Icepte fro you, Cov. Test. ; deprived of 
 you, Keem. It is almost impossible to 
 represent in English without a para- 
 phrase the highly expressive airoptJM- 
 viaBhres, which serves so forcibly to 
 convey not only the separation and 
 severance of the Apostle from his 
 converts, but also his desolate and 
 bereaved state while so separated. The 
 present translation, adopted by Mur- 
 doch (Transl. of Syr. N. T.), Peile, 
 and others, seems to approach this 
 meaning as nearly as any single word 
 that has yet been suggested. 
 Face] Presence, Auth. ; vpoawirov is 
 translated face in the next clause. 
 The more abundamtly endeavowred] 
 More cdioundauntlyhauehiyede, Wiot. : 
 end. the more atmndantly, Auth. ; en- 
 forsed the more, Ttnd., Ckan., Gen., 
 BiSH. ; haue haisted the more, CoT.; 
 hasted more spedely, Cov. Test. ; haue 
 hastened the more dboundantly, Rhem. 
 Though all the Vv. except WiCL. put 
 the adverb after and not before the 
 verb, the latter order is perhaps to be 
 preferred, as throwing the emphasis 
 more distinctly on the 'more abun- 
 dantly.' It may be observed that 
 much caution mast be used in adjust- 
 ing the order of the words in English 
 with regard to emphasis ; for while in 
 Greek the emphatic word seems always 
 to have the precedence, the attentive 
 reader will often observe that the con- 
 trary is the case in English. In the 
 position of the verb and adverb how- 
 ever the two languages seem to be 
 mainly coincident. The discrepancy 
 between the English and the Oreek 
 position of emphasis has been far too 
 
 L2 
 
148 
 
 I THESSALONIANS. 
 
 1 8 deavoured to see your face with great desire. On which 
 account we would fain have come unto you, even I Paul, 
 
 19 both once and again, — and Satan hindered us. For what 
 is our hope or joy or crown of boasting ? Or is it not 
 also you in the presence of our Lord Jesus at His coming? 
 
 20 Verily ye are our glory and joy. 
 
 III. Wherefore when we could no longer forbear, we 
 
 2 thought it good to be left behind at Athens alone ; and 
 sent Timothy, our brother and fellow-worker with God in 
 the Gospel of Christ, to establish you, and to exhort you 
 
 3 in behalf of your faith that no man be disquieted in these 
 
 much neglected by modem revisers, 
 many of whom seem to think that in 
 all cases the most complete faith- 
 fulness is attained by rigidly following 
 the order of the original ; see for ex- 
 ample the canons laid down by Wade, 
 Notes onthe Sensed Tranal. of St John, 
 p. iv. 
 
 18. On which ctccoimt] * Wherefore, 
 AniH. Would f aim] 
 Would, AUTH. and all Vv. Few words 
 cause more difficulty to the translator 
 of the N. T. than the verb WXu : 
 ' wish ' is commonly much too weak, 
 ' desire ' not always exact, and ' will ' 
 and 'would' often liable to be mis- 
 taken for mere auxiliaries. In many 
 cases the Translators of our Version 
 appear to have availed themselves of 
 the past tense ■ would ' as a very suit- 
 able and idiomatic translation of the 
 present BiKw • comp. Kom. vii. 15 sq. 
 Here however it is open to the mis- 
 conception above alluded to. 
 
 Both once] Once, AuTH. And {2)] 
 
 But, AuTH. and all Vv. 
 
 19. Boasting] Mejoidng, Adth. and 
 the other Vv. except WioL., Gov. Test., 
 Rhbm. , fliZone (glorits, Vulg.). 
 
 Or is it not also you] Whether yee hen 
 not, jWioL. : are not even ye, Adth. ; 
 are not cue yon it. Gen. : a/re not ye it, 
 Ttitd., Gov. (both), Oban., Bish. ; 
 ore not you, Ehkm. It will thus be 
 
 seen that WlOL. alone offers any 
 equivalent to 1} oixl{norme, Vulg.), 
 and that Kaiis preserved only by AuTH., 
 Gen. It is frequently difficult to de- 
 cide whether in interrogations intro- 
 duced by 57 oixi the § is to be regarded 
 as only giving a greater vividness and 
 abruptness to the question, almost 
 ' What ! are not, (fee.,' or as really 
 retaining its proper disjunctive force. 
 In the present case, and in more per- 
 haps than are usually so regarded, 
 the latter seems the more correct 
 view. Lord Jesus] Lord Jesus 
 
 * Christ, AuTH. 
 
 20. Verily] Similarly, yes, Tind., 
 Gov., Gban., Gen., Bish.; farsothe, 
 WiOL. ; for, AuTH., Gov. Test., Ehem. 
 
 Chapter III. 1. Thought it good] 
 On the transl. of eiSoKeiv, see note on 
 ch. ii. 8 {Transl.). Be left 
 
 behind] Be left, Adth. ; dweUe, Wici. ; 
 remayne, Ttnd. and six remaining 
 Vv. 
 
 2. Timothy] Timotheus, Adth. : 
 see notes ore Col. i. t (Transl.). 
 And fellow-worJcer with Ood] And 
 
 * minister of Ood, and our fellow- 
 lahowrer, Adth. Exhort] So 
 Gov. Test., Ehem. (ad...exhortandos, 
 Vulg.) : comfort, Adth.,Ttnd., Gov., 
 Gean., Gen., Bish. 
 
 In lehalf of] * Concerning, Adth. 
 
Chap. II. i8— III. 7. 
 
 149 
 
 afflictions : for yourselves know that- we are appointed 
 thereunto. For verily, when we were with you, we told 4 
 you before that we were to be afflicted ; as also it came 
 to pass, and ye know. For this cause, when I too could 5 
 no longer forbear, I sent with a view of knowing your 
 faith, lest haply the tempter have tempted you, and our 
 toil should prove in vain. 
 
 But now when Timothy came unto us from you, and 6 
 brought us the good tidings of your faith and love, and 
 that ye have good remembrance of us always, longing 
 to see us, as we also to see you, — for this cause were we 7 
 
 3. £e] So WiOL., Ehem. : should 
 ie, AUTH. and remaining Vv. 
 JHspiieted] Moved, AriH. and all Vv. 
 As the word is peculiar and a aira^ 
 Xeyojisvov, it is better to give it a dis- 
 tinguishing translation. /n] So 
 all Vv. except Auth., hy; and Gen., 
 with. 
 
 4. Were to he afflicted^ Should suffer 
 tribulaiion, AuTH. and all Vv. WiOL., 
 Gov. Test., Gen. , Rhem., however give 
 tribulacons {vs to suffre t., WloL.). 
 As also"] So Cov. Test, (putting also 
 after passe), Ehem. ; as &, Wiol. : 
 even as, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 5. / too] Sim., I also, Ehem. : 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. except 
 WlOL. (which gives tfc / poul) omit to 
 translate xal. With a view of 
 knowing] To know, AuiH., WiOL. (for 
 to), Cov. Test., BisH., Ehem.; ^ / 
 mighte kn. of, Gen. ; that Jmyght have 
 knowledge of, Ttnd., Gov., Oban. 
 ffaply] So Ttnd., Cov. (both); and 
 sim., paroMentm-e, WlOL. ; perhaps, 
 Ehem. : by some means, Auth., Cban., 
 Bish. ; Ml any sorte. Gen. Same 
 tempted] So Auth,, Cov. Test., Ehem. 
 {hath) : had t., Ttnd., Gov., Gean., 
 Gen., Bish. Wiot. gives schal tempte. 
 Neither translation is quite exact or 
 strictly idiomatic ; the English perfect 
 however seems here to approach more 
 
 nearly to the present use of the Greek 
 aorist than the pluperfect, and per- 
 haps, owing to the peculiar form of 
 the expression in the original, may be 
 considered as admissible in point of 
 English. Toil] Ldbow, Auth. 
 
 See notes on ch. i. 3 {Transl.). 
 Should prove] Be, Auth. ; Ja made, 
 "WiOL., Cov. Test., Ehem.; had bene 
 bestowed, Ttnd., Gban. ; had bene, 
 Gov., Gen., Bish. 
 
 6. Timothy"] Timotheus, Auth. : see 
 notes on Col. i. i {Trwnsl.). Unto 
 
 us from you] So WiOL. {to), Cov. Test., 
 Ehem. : from you unto us, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv., — a departure from the 
 order in the Greek for which there 
 does not here seem any satisfactory 
 reason. The good tidings] Good t., 
 
 Auth. Love] So Ttnd., Gov., 
 
 Gean., Gen., Bish. : charity, Auth., 
 Wioi., Cov. Test., Ehem. On this 
 correction see notes on i Tim. i. 5 
 (Transl.). Longing] Desiring 
 
 greatly, Auth. ; desh-ynge, Wicl. and 
 remaining Vv. : the iTl in iwivoBuv is 
 not intensive ; see notes. Cov. gives, 
 to se vs as we also longe to 
 
 7. For this came] Ther^ore, Auth. 
 and all Vv. Were we] We were^ 
 
 Auth. The transposition seems to 
 keep the sentence a little closer toge- 
 
150 
 
 I THESSALONIANS. 
 
 comforted, brethren, over you in all our necessity and 
 
 8 affliction by your faith: since now we live, if ye stand 
 
 9 fast in the Lord. For what thanksgiving can we render 
 to God for you, for all the joy which we joy for your sakes 
 
 10 in the presence of our God ; night and day praying verj' 
 exceedingly that we may see your face and supply the 
 lacking measures of your faith ? 
 
 1 1 Now may God Himself and our Father and our Lord 
 
 12 Jesus Christ direct our way unto you. But you may 
 the Lord make to increase and abound in your love to- 
 wards one another and towards all men, even as we also 
 
 ther, and is frequently adopted in 
 AuTH. Brethrm\ So, in this 
 
 order, Ehbm. : Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. append it to tJierefore, Here it 
 aeems more exact to retain the order 
 of the Greek. Necessity and 
 
 affliction] * Affliction and distress, Auth. 
 There is no cause for forsaking the 
 ordinary rendering of dvar/KTi which is 
 preserved by 6 Versions. AniH. has 
 here distress: WiOL. and Gov. Teat. 
 give nede. 
 
 8. (Since] For, Auth. and the other 
 Vv. except Ehem., lecause. Here the 
 particle on seems scarcely to have so 
 full a force as 'because,' and yet to be 
 somewhat stronger than 'for,' — which, 
 as a general rule, it is desirable to re- 
 sei've as the translation of ydp. 
 
 g. Tlianksgimmg] So Gov. Test., 
 Ehem., and sim. WiOL. (doinge of 
 thanhyngis) : thanks, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv, Bender to Ood"] 
 So Cot. Test, {vnto), Bhem. , and simi- 
 larly WiOL. {jfilde to god) : rendear to 
 God again, Auth. ; recompence to god 
 agayne, Tynd., Gov., Gran., Gen., 
 ■BiSH. Which] Similarly, that, 
 Ttnd., Gov. {that we heme concemynge 
 you hefore owe 0.), Cbak. : wherewith 
 Auth., Gov. Test., Gen., Bish.,Ehbm.; 
 ■in whiche, WiOL. 
 
 In the presence of] B^ore, Auth. and 
 all Vv. ; see notes on oh. i. 3 (Tra/ntl.). 
 
 10. Very exceedingly] Exceedingly, 
 Auth. See ch. v. 13, Eph. iii. 20, the 
 only places where this emphatic com- 
 pound vTepeKireptao'oS [-<3s] occurs. 
 May] So Gov. Test., Bhem.: might, 
 Auth. Supply, &c.] Might per- 
 fect that which is lacking in, AUTH., 
 and sim. TlND. and Gov. (both giving 
 fulfill), Gen. (accoplish) ; fidfille tho 
 thingis that faylen of, WiOL. ; to fvX- 
 fyll the thynges that are lackyng vnto. 
 Gov. Test., Gban. (myght... which) ; 
 repayre the wantynges of, BiSH. ; may 
 accomjplith those things thai want of, 
 Ehem, Gov. omits might (2). 
 
 1 1 . May (?od] Auth. and the other 
 Vv. omit may, which however seems 
 to add perspicuity to the sentence 
 (Gran, gives wrongly God.. .shall). 
 
 12. But you may the Lord make] 
 And the Lord make you, Auth. But 
 isrightlygivenbyGov. (both). Though 
 there is perhaps some little awkward- 
 ness in the prominence given to the 
 pronoun, it seems required to convey 
 to the English reader the antithesis of 
 the original ; see notes. Yowr] 
 So WioL., Gov. Test., Ehem., follow- 
 ing the Vulg. It is better to insert 
 the pronoun in transl. though it is 
 here omitted by Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. Towards one another] One 
 towards another, Auth. We 
 also] So Gov. Test., BisH., Ehem. : 
 
Chap. III. 8—17. 6. 
 
 151 
 
 abound towards you; to the end He may stablish your 13 
 hearts unblameable in holiness in the presence of God 
 and our Father, at the coming of our Lord Jesus with > 
 all His saints. 
 
 Furthermore then, brethren, we beseech you and ex- IV. 
 hort you in the Lord Jesus, that as ye received of us how,- 
 ye ought to walk and to please God, as indeed ye are 
 walking — that so ye would abound still more. For ye 2 
 know what commandments we gave you by the Lord 
 Jesus. For this is the will of God, even your sanctifica- 3 
 tion, to wit that ye abstain from Fornication, — that every 4 
 one of you know how to get himself his own vessel in 
 sanctification and honour, not in lustfulness of desire, 5 
 even as the Gentiles also which know not God : that no 6 
 
 we, AUTH. omitting Kal in translation. 
 Abound (2)] Do, Auth. 
 
 13. In the presence of] Before, 
 AuTH. and all Vv. : see notes on oh. 
 i. 3 (Transl.). God and our Father] 
 So Wioii., Gov. Test., Bibh., Ehkm.: 
 God even our Father, Auth., Gen.; 
 God oure father, Ttnd., Gov., Cean. 
 On the best mode of translating this 
 august formula, see notes on Gal. i. 4 
 (Transl.). Lord Jesus] Lord 
 
 Jesus* Christ, AvTS. 
 
 Chapteb IV. I. ■ Furthermore] 
 So Auth. arid the other Vv. except 
 WioL., hensforthwarde ; and Ehbm., 
 for the rest. This translation of 
 AotTTox is perhaps not exactly literal, 
 but seems sufficiently approximate : 
 'finally' would here be hardly ap- 
 propriate, and 'for the rest' (Rhbm.), 
 though literal, is both harsh and awk- 
 ward. 
 
 Brethren, we] So Gov. Test., Ehbm., 
 and similarly WioL. (therfore br. hens. 
 we) : AtlTH. andremaining Vv. insert br. 
 after you, — but not in accordance with 
 the Greek order. In] So WiOL., 
 
 Ttnd., Gov. (both). Gen., Ehem.: bi/, 
 
 Auth., Gban., Bish. Beeeived] 
 
 Have received, Auth. and all Vv. 
 As indeed ye are wallcing] Auth. 
 *omits this clause. That so] 
 
 Auth. omits *iAa«. Still more] 
 
 More and more, Auth. and the other 
 Vv. except Wioi., Ehem., more; and 
 Gov. Test., which gives that yemayeb^ 
 more plentyfullyer. 
 
 3. To mt that ye] Sim., th^t yee, 
 WlOL., Gov. Test., Ehem. (you) : that 
 ye should, Auth., Gov., Gran., Bish. ; 
 and that ye shiild, TiND., Gen.— but 
 Ttnd. translates the preceding clause 
 even that ye shuld be holy: Gen. as 
 Auth. 
 
 4. Know] Should hriow, Auth. 
 This clause is parallel to the preceding 
 ' to wit that, ' &C. Get himself] 
 Possess, Auth., Gen,, Bish., Ehem.; 
 welde \i.e. wield] WioL. ; Ttepe, Ttnd.j 
 Gov., Gban. ; vse. Gov. Test. 
 
 Sis awn] His, Aoth. and all Vv. 
 
 5. Lustfat/aess of desire] Sim., pas- 
 sioun of desire, WlOL. : the passion of 
 lust, Ehem. ; the lust of concupiscence, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 Gentiles also] Auth. omits koX in trans- 
 la^tion. 
 
152 
 
 I THESSALONIANS. 
 
 man go beyond and overreach his brother in the matter : 
 because that the Lord is the avenger of all these things, 
 
 7 as also we before told you and did solemnly testify. For 
 God caUed us not for uncleanness, but in sanctification. 
 
 8 Wherefore then he that rejecteth rejecteth not man but 
 God, who also gave His Holy Spirit unto you. 
 
 9 Now as touching brotherly love ye need not that I 
 write to you ; for ye yourselves are taught of God to love 
 
 lo one another : for indeed ye do it towards all the brethren 
 that are in the whole of Macedonia. But we exhort you. 
 
 6. Overreachi So Auth. Marg. (<yp- 
 presse, or, ouerreach) : deceyue, Wiol. ; 
 iegyle, Cov. Test, ; do'cumuent, Kheu. 
 (all three from Vulg., circumveniat) ; 
 defraud, AuTH. and 5 remaining Vv. 
 The matter] So Auth. Marg. -. any 
 matter, Auth., GtEN., Bish. ; bmrgayn- 
 inge, Ttnd., Cov. (both), Cban. ; 
 iusinedse, Bheu. All these 
 things] So Wiol., Cov. Test., Khem. : 
 all such, Auth., Bish. ; all suche 
 thinges, Ttnd., Gov., Cean., Gen. 
 As also, &o.] .4s we also hwoeforewam- 
 ed you, and testified, Auth., Bish. 
 The renderings of the other Vv. are 
 here added as they exhibit a singular 
 variety of translation iu a simple 
 clause. As we lifore seyden to you, & 
 have witnesside {or prouede by autorite) , 
 Wiol. ; as we tolde you before tyme 
 and testified, Ttnd., Cean. (om. tyme) ; 
 as we haue sayde & testified vnto you 
 afore tyme, Cov. ; as we haue sayd and 
 witnessed vnto you before, Cov. Test. ; 
 as we also haue tolde you before time 
 amd testified. Gen. ; as we have fore- 
 told you, amd haue testified, Ehem. 
 The slight change to 'did testify' is 
 made for the sake of preserving a sort 
 of rhythm; comp. notes on Phil. ii. 
 16 {Traml). 
 
 7. Called us not] Clepide not vs, 
 Wict. ; hath not called us, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. For (a). ..in] To 
 ...vnto, Cov.; vnto. ..into, Bish. ; into 
 
 (bis), Wiol., Ehem. ; unto (bis), Auth. 
 and 4 remaining Vv. It is probably a 
 mere accident that Cov. and BisE. 
 preserve a difference in rendering be- 
 tween iirl and Iv, Sanctification] 
 So Ehem. : holiness, Auth. It is well 
 to preserve uniformity of translation 
 with ver. 3, 4. 
 
 8. Wherefore thai he] And so he, 
 Wiol. ; wherfore he, Cov. Test. ; ther- 
 fore he, Ehem. ; he ilierefore, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. Rejecteth 
 (bis)] So Auth. Marg. : despiseth, Auth. 
 and all Vv. WiOL., Cov. Test., Gen., 
 Eheh., insert thes thingis after the first 
 dispisith (Vulg. haec). Gave] 
 So Wiol. : hath sent, Ttnd., Cban. ; 
 hiUh.. .given, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 His Holy Spirit unio you] Unio "its his 
 holy Spirit, Auth. ; hi» holy spirit in 
 vs, WiCL., Cov. Test., Ehem.; his 
 holy sprete amonge you, Ttnd., Ckan. ; 
 his Iioly sprete in to you, Cov. ; you his 
 holie Spirit, Gen. ; to you his h. s., 
 Bish. 
 
 9. Now] But, Auth. and all Vv. 
 except Wiol. (forsothe). 
 
 I o. For indeed] And in deed, Auth. ; 
 Ik forsothe, Wiol. ; for, Cov. Test. ; ye 
 and...verely, Ttnd., Cean., Gen,, 
 BiSH. ; yee and, Cov., Ehem. 
 That] Which, Auth. The whole 
 
 ofM.] Whole M., Cov. Test. : all M., 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Exhort] Beseech, Auth.: see ver. i. 
 
Chap. IV. 7 — 15. 
 
 153 
 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 brethren, to abound still more, and to study to be quiet, 
 and to do your own business, and to work with your 
 hands, according as we commanded you ; in order that 
 ye may walk becomingly toward them that are without, 
 and may have need of no man. 
 
 Now we would not have you to be ignorant, brethren, 1 3 
 concerning them that are sleeping, that ye sorrow not, even 
 as the rest which have no hope. For if we believe that 
 Jesus died and rose again, even so them that are laid to 
 sleep through Jesus will God bring with Him. For this 
 we say to you in the word of the Lord, that we which are 
 
 14 
 
 IS 
 
 To dbou,nd\ That yee alounde, Wiot., 
 Ehem. (you) ; that ye increase, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. Still more] 
 
 More, WiOL., Bhem. ; more and WM-e, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. i;yet m. and 
 m., Cov.). See ver, 2. 
 
 II. To study] That ye st., Adth. 
 Tour hands] So Wicl., Cov. Test. : 
 your own h., Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. According as] As, Adth. 
 
 and all Vv. 
 
 II. In order that] That, Auth. 
 and all Vv. Secomingly] 
 
 Honestly, Auth. and all Vv. The 
 translation 'seemly' deserves consi- 
 deration, but is appy. open to the 
 objectioD that in point of strict ety- 
 mology such a form of the adverb is 
 somewhat doubtful; see Trench, on 
 Auth. Vers. ch. n. p. 31. May 
 
 haw] That ye may hwve, Auth. 
 Need] Lack, Auth. No mari] 
 
 So AUTB. Marg. : nothing, Auth. 
 The clause is translated, and that no- 
 thinge he lach/nge vrvto you, by Ttnd., 
 Cov., Cban., GrEN., BiSH. {in yov). 
 
 13. Now] But, Auth., Bish. ; for- 
 sothe, WlOL. ; and, Ehem. : the remain- 
 ing five Versions omit Si in translation. 
 We] *I, Auth. That] Which, 
 
 Auth. Are sleeping] Are *asleep, 
 
 Auth., Gsn.; are fallen a slepe, Ttnd., 
 Gov., Cean. ; slepe, Cov. Test., Bish., 
 Bhem. For vepl t<3v k. Wicl. has 
 
 simply of men slepyng {or dyinge). 
 The rest] Others, Auth., Ehem. ; oth^r, 
 WiOL. and the six remaining Vv. 
 
 14. Them that are laid to sleep 
 through Jesus] Them also which sleep 
 in Jesus, Auth. : no Version has at- 
 tempted to express the Aorist parti- 
 ciple. 
 
 15. In] So all Vv. except Auth., 
 CrVS.fiy. Which are living and 
 are remaining behind] Which are alive 
 and remain, Auth. ; &at lyuen that 
 ten residue {qr lefte), Wiol. ; which 
 live amd are remayninge, Tynd., Gov., 
 trBjT. ; that lyue, whych remayne, Cov. 
 Test. ; whych shall lyue, <& shall re- 
 mayne, Cban. ; whiche lyue, remayn- 
 ing, Bish. ; which line, which a/re re- 
 maining, Bhem. It is not easy to 
 give these -words a perfectly accurate 
 and perfectly idiomatic translation : 
 ' we the living, the remaining, dbc' 
 wotild be accurate, but bald ; ' we the 
 living who are, <S:c.' somewhat harsh 
 and appositional. We therefore may 
 perhaps not unwisely retain the ' and,' 
 and also (with AuTE. ) omit the second 
 relative in translation, as tending to 
 overload the sentence. The slight ad- 
 dition 'behind' seems suggested by 
 the compound TrepiKelTeaBai, the prep, 
 probably marking the idea of over- 
 plus, and thence, in the present con- 
 text, of a continuance on earth and 
 
154 
 
 I THESSALONIANS. 
 
 living and are remaining behind unto the coming of the 
 Lord shall in no wise prevent them that are laid to sleep : 
 
 1 6 because the Lord Himself shall descend from heaven with 
 a shout, with the voice of the Archangel, and with the 
 trump of God, and the dead in Christ shall rise first ; 
 
 17 then we which are living and are remaining behind shall 
 be caught up at the same time together with them in 
 clouds, to meet the Lord in the air ; and so shall we ever 
 
 18 be with the Lord. So then comfort one another with 
 these words. 
 
 V. But concerning the times and the seasons, brethren, 
 
 2 ye have no need to be written to. For yourselves know 
 perfectly that the day of the Lord so cometh as a thief in 
 
 3 the night. "When they shall say Peace and safety; then 
 doth destruction come suddenly upon them, as travaQ 
 
 survival; comp. Herod, i. 82. 
 Shall in no mse] Shall not, AuTH. and 
 all Vv. Great caution ia required in 
 the tranalation of ov /ii) in the Jf .T., 
 as in some cases it appears very doubt- 
 ful whether any emphatic negation is 
 really contemplated by the writer, and 
 whether the formula was not due to 
 that general tendency to strengthened 
 negation which is often observable in 
 later Greek. Perhaps the simplest 
 and beat rule is to be guided by the 
 context, — which here seems to require 
 the stronger form of translation. 
 Prevent] If it be thought necessary to 
 alter this now obsolete word, we may 
 have recourse to the more modern 
 ' precede : ' archaisms however as such 
 are not altered in this Beviaion. 
 HTwin that are laid to sleep] Them, 
 which are asleep, AuiH. : see note 
 on ver. 14. 
 
 16. Secause] For, Auth. and all 
 Vv. In the following worda it is per- 
 haps doubtful whether the order of 
 the Greek, which places /carajSi^irerat 
 aV ovpavoO last, might not be advan- 
 tageously retained, as indeed it is by 
 
 WlOL., Khem. It tends however to 
 throw appy. a greater stress on these 
 words than is conveyed by the ori- 
 ginal. 
 
 17. Are living, &c.] Are alive, and 
 remain, Auth. : see note on ver. 1 5. 
 At the same — them] Together with 
 them, Adth., Wiol., Gov. Test., BiSH. ; 
 with them also, TiND., Gov., Gban., 
 Gen.; vvithal...imthihem,,'RHEii. On 
 the translation of a/ui aiv ajrots, see 
 notes m loc. In clouds] So 
 WiCL. : in the clouds, AuiH. and re- 
 maining Vv. 
 
 18. So then] Wherefore, AxiTB. &Di 
 the other Vv. except Wioi,., Jt so; 
 and Bheu., therfore. 
 
 Chapter V. i. Concerning] Of, 
 Auth. and all Vv. To le 
 
 written to] To wryte vnio you, Gov. ; 
 that we do wryt vnto you. Gov. Teat. ; 
 that me write to you, Ehsm. ; (luit I 
 write tmto you, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. (Wiol., to). 
 
 3. When] *For when, Auth. 
 Doth destruction come suddenly] Sud- 
 den destruction cometh, Auth. : aUpvU 
 
Chap. IV. i6~V. ii. 
 
 155 
 
 upon a womaa with child ; and they shall in no wise 
 escape. But ye, brethren, are not in darkness, that the 4 
 day should overtake you as a thief. For ye all are sons 5 
 of light, and sons of the day : we are not of the night, nor 
 of darkness. Accordingly then let us not sleep, even as 6 
 do the rest ; but let us watch and be sober. For they 7 
 that sleep sleep in the night ; and they that be drunken 
 are drunken in the night. But let us, as we are of the 8 
 day, be sober, having put on the breastplate of faith and 
 love, and as an helmet the hope of salvation; because 9 
 God did not appoint us unto wrath, but to obtain salva- 
 tion through our Lord Jesus Christ, who died for us, that, 
 whether we watch or sleep, we should together live with 
 him. Wherefore comfort each other, and edify one the 
 other, even as also ye do. 
 
 10 
 
 II 
 
 Sios is a, 'secondary predication of 
 manner,' a force preserved by no Ver- 
 sion. In no wise] Not, Atjth. 
 and all Yv. ; see notes on ch. iv. 15 
 {Trcmsl). 
 
 4. The day] The ilke d., WioL.; the 
 sa/me d., Bhem. ; thatd., AuTH. and re- 
 maining Vv. (Gov. Test, omits one that 
 appy. by mistake). It may be doubted 
 whether the text is here so explicit 
 as AuTE. ; the translation however of 
 the article by a pronoun is so hazai'd- 
 ous, and so erroneous in principle, 
 that the cases are but very few in 
 which idiom or perspicuity can be al- 
 
 oned to prevail over the literal ren- 
 dering : comp. 2 Thess. iii. 14. 
 
 5. For ye all are] * Ye are all, Auth. 
 Independently of the insertion of yap, 
 which is required by Manuscript au- 
 thority, it seems better to give to ' all ' 
 a prominence corresponding to that of 
 Tdrres in the Greek. Sons 
 (bis)] Similarly WlOL. {the tones... 
 sones) : the children, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. ; but Gov. omits the arti- 
 cle in both cases, and Bhem. omits it 
 in the second. 
 
 6. Accordingly then] Therefore, 
 Adth. and all Vv. Even as] As, 
 
 Adth. The rest] The other. 
 
 Gov. Test.: odiers, Auth., Ehbm:.; 
 other, Ttnd. and remaining Vv. 
 
 8. As we are] Who are, Atjth. : all 
 Versions insert a relative. 
 Moving put on] Putting on, Auth. : 
 see notes in loo. As an helmet] 
 
 So Ttnd. ; for .am, helmet, Auth., 
 Gran., Gen. 
 
 g. Because] For, Auth. and all 
 Vv. Did not appoint] Hath not 
 
 appointed, Auth. and the other Vv. 
 except WiCL. (puttide not). 
 Through] So Gov. Test. : by, Auth., 
 VViol., Bibh., Rhem. ; by the meanes 
 of, Ttnd., Gov., Gban., Gen. 
 
 10. WatcA] So Rhem. : jBote, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. : see ver. 6. 
 Together Uve] Live together, Auth. and 
 all Vv. ; see notes. 
 
 11. Each other] Your selves together, 
 Auth., Ttnd., Gov., Gean., Bish. ; 
 one another. Gov. Test. , Gen., Ehem. 
 One the other]Eche other, Wioil; euery 
 one anotlier, Gban., Bish. ; one another, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
156 
 
 THESSALONIANS. 
 
 12 Now we beseech you, brethren, to regard them which 
 labour among you, and preside over you in the Lord, and 
 
 1 3 admonish you ; and to esteem them very exceedingly in 
 love for their work's sake. Be at peace among your- 
 
 14 selves. Moreover we exhort you, brethren, admonish the 
 disorderly, encourage the feeble minded, support the 
 
 15 weak, be longsuffering toward aU men. See that none 
 render evil for evil to any man ; but alway follow after 
 that which is good towards one another and towards all 
 
 17 men. Rejoice alway; pray without ceasing; m every 
 
 thing give thanks, for this is the will of God in Christ 
 
 Q Jesus toward you. Quench not the Spirit; despise not 
 
 21 prophesyings : but prove all things; hold fast that which 
 
 22 is good. Abstain from every form of evil. But may the 
 23 
 
 12. Nov)\ So Gen. : and, Auth., 
 Gov. Test., BiSH., Ehem. ; Ttnd., 
 Cov., Oean., omit. Segwrd] 
 Kime, Auth. and all Vv. 
 
 Preside over] Are over, Adth., Gmt. ; 
 len Ufore to, WloL. ; have the oversight 
 of, Ttnd., Cov. (both), Cran., Bish. ; 
 goueme, Bheu. 
 
 13. Very eacceedmgly] Very highly, 
 Adth. : Beenotes on oh. iii. 10 {Transl.). 
 SeatpeoiceJ So Gen. ; andsim.WioL., 
 Cov. Test., Rhem., omit and (follow- 
 ing the Vulg., and giving hatte p.) : 
 and he at p., Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 14. Moreover] Now, Auth. ; and, 
 Gov. Test., E.HBM. ; forsothe, WiOL. ; 
 the five remaining Vv. omit. 
 
 A dmonish] So Gen., Rhem. : reproue 
 yee (or chastise), WiOL. ; rebvilce, Cov. 
 Test.; wmm, Auth., Ttnd., Gov., 
 Cban. , Bish. The disorderly] Vn- 
 quyete men,WiOL. ; thevnqmet,'Rsmi. ; 
 them that are unruly, Auth. and 6 
 remaming Vv. (Auth. Marg., disor- 
 derly). Micowrage] Com- 
 fort, Auth. and all Vv. : see notes on 
 oh. ii. II. JBe longsuffering] 
 Have continuall padenoe, Ttnd. ; be 
 it, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 (WiOL., he yee p.). 
 
 1 5. None] So Auth. and the other 
 Vv. except WiOL., Cov. Teat., no man. 
 It may be remarked that Auth. and 
 the older Vv. appy. always adopt the 
 form 'none,' not 'no one.' 
 
 Alway] So Gov. Test., Rhem. (almaies): 
 euermore, WiCL. ; ever, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. Follow after] So 
 Auth. in i Tim. vi. 11 : sue, WioL.; 
 pwrsue, Rhem.; follow, Auth. and 6 
 remaining Vv. Towards one an- 
 other] Sim,, towarde your selties. Gen. ; 
 towards eche other, Rhem. : * both 
 among yourselves, Auth., Ttnd., Gov., 
 Coy. Test. (om. hoth), Cban., Bish. 
 WiOL. gives simply to gedir. See oh. 
 iii. 12. Towards (2)] So Gov. 
 Test., Gbn., Rhem. : to, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. (WiOL., into). 
 
 16. Alway] So Gov. (both), Rhem. 
 (alvvaies) : evermm-e, Auth., Gen., 
 WioL.; ever, Ttnd., Cban., Bish. 
 
 1 8. Toward] So Ttnd.,Cov. (both), 
 Cban., Gen., Bish. : concerning, 
 Auth. ; in, Wiol., Rhem. (so Vulg.). 
 
 21. But prove]* Prove, AviB.. 
 
 22. Every form of evil] All appear- 
 ance of eml, Auth., Gen., Bish., 
 
Chap. V. 12 — 28. 
 
 157 
 
 God of peace Himself sanctify you wholly ; and may your 
 spirit and soul and body be kept whole without blame in 
 the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ. Faithful is He 24 
 that caUeth you, who also will do it. 
 
 Brethren, pray for us. Salute all the brethren with 
 an holy kiss. I adjure you by the Lord that the epistle 
 be read to all the [holy] brethren. 
 
 The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you. 28 
 
 25 
 26 
 27 
 
 Ehem. ; euyl spice {or liekenesse), 
 WiOL. ; aZl suspicious ihinges, Tynd., 
 Gov. (both) ; all emll appearaunce, 
 Cban. 
 
 23. ^ui] Forsathe, Wicii. ; now, 
 Gbn. ; and, Auth., Bish., Ehem.; 
 omitted byTTND., Gov. (both), Ckan. 
 May the God of peace Mimself] So 
 Kheh. but omitting may : the same 
 god of pees, WloL. ; tJie very God of 
 peace, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 And mayl That, WiCL., Gov. Test., 
 Ehem. ; and I pray God, Atjth. and 
 remaining "Vv. (all but Auth. adding 
 that). Your spi/rit...whole'] 
 
 So WiOL.: your whole spirit, AuiH. 
 and remaining Vv. : see especially 
 notes in loc. Kept} So WiOL., 
 
 Ttnd., Gov. (both), Geit. : preserved, 
 
 Auth., Cean., Bish., Ehem. 
 WithMit hlame'] So Ehem. : blameless, 
 Auth., Gov. (both), Gen., Bish. ; 
 with outen pleynte, Wicl. ; fautlesse, 
 Ttnd. ; so that in nothyng ye maye be 
 blamed, Cban. In] So Wicii., 
 
 Gov. Test., Cean., Bish., Eheu. : 
 unto, AuTH^, Ttnd., Gov., Gen. 
 
 26. SaluteJ So Ehem. : greet, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. (Wlci., grete yee 
 wet). 
 
 27. Adfv/re'] So Auth. Marg., 
 Ehem., and sim. coniv/re, WiOL. : 
 charge, AuTH. and 6 remaining Vv. 
 The epistle] This Up., Auth. and all 
 Vv. : see notes on i Thess. iii. 14 
 (Traml.). 
 
 28. With you] Auth. adds *Amen. 
 
THE 
 
 SECOND EPISTLE TO THE THESSALONIANS. 
 
 [. T) AUL and Silvanus and Timothy to the church of the 
 t- Thessalonians in God our Father and the Lord Jesus 
 
 2 Christ. Grace be to you and peace, from God our Father 
 and the Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 3 We are bound to give thanks to God always for you, 
 brethren, as it is meet, because that your faith increaseth 
 exceedingly, and the love of every one of you all towards 
 
 4 each other aboundeth ; so that we ourselves make our 
 boast in you in the churches of God, for your patience and 
 faith in all your persecutions and the afflictions that ye 
 
 5 endure ; — which is a token of the righteous judgment of 
 
 I. Timothy] So WioL., Ehem. : 
 Timothens, Auth. and remaining Vv. : 
 see notes on Col. i. i {Transl.). 
 
 ■i. Grace Je] So Ttnd., Gov. (both), 
 Cean., Gen.: grace, Atjth., Wiol., 
 BiSH., Ehbm. For ifuv Tyhd., Gov., 
 Gen. , give with you ; the six remain- 
 ing Vv. giving to (or unto) you. 
 
 3. Give thanks to] So Gov. Test. 
 {vnto), Ehem., and Auth. in i Theas. 
 i. 2 : do thanhyngis ...to, WiOL. ; 
 thank, Auth. and 5 remaining "Vv. 
 Increaseth] So Gov. Test., Khem. : 
 waxith, WiOL. ; groweth, Auth. and re- 
 maining V v. However Gov. Test, omits 
 exceedingly, and Wiol. gives euer(^. read- 
 ing semper er.) before waxith. Love] 
 So Ttnd., Gov. (both), Gban., Gen., 
 BiSH. : chm-iiy, Auth., Wicl., Rhem. ; 
 comp. notes m i Tim. i. 5 (Transl.), 
 
 4. Make our hoast in] Similarly, 
 make oure hoast of. Gov. ; make hoast 
 of. Gov. Test. ; hoast of, Cean.; glory 
 in, Auth., Wiol., Rhem. ; reioyce of, 
 Ttnd., Gen. ; reioyce in, BiSH. 
 
 The afflictions] Tribulations, Auth. 
 and the nther Vv. except Gov. (both), 
 troubles. No Version inserts the 
 article. 
 
 5. Token] So Ttnd., Gov., Cean., 
 Gen., Bish.: manifest token, Auth, ; 
 ensaumple, Wiol., Gov. Test., Rhem. 
 Te are also steering] (& yee suffren, 
 Wiol. ; also you suffer, Rhem. ; ye 
 also suffer, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 The change appears to have two ad- 
 vantages, first, that it more distinctly 
 preserves the association of xal and 
 Tourxcre, and secondly, that it conveys 
 more fully the present and continuing 
 
Chap. I. i — lo. 
 
 159 
 
 God, that ye may be counted worthy of the kingdom of 
 God, for which ye are also suffering. If so be that it is a 6 
 righteous thing with God to recompense to them that afflict 
 you affliction ; and to you who are afflicted rest with us, 7 
 at the revelation of the Lord Jesus from heaven with the 
 angels of His power in flame of fire, rendering vengeance 8 
 to those who know not God, and those who obey not the 
 Gospel of our Lord Jesus. Who shall suffer punishment, 9 
 even eternal destruction away from the face of the Lord 
 and from the glory of His might, when He shall come to 10 
 
 nature of the trials of the Thessalo- 
 nians. 
 
 6. If so he that] So Auth. in Rom. 
 viii. 9, 17, I Cor. xv. 15, a Cor. v. 3, 
 I Pet. ii. 3 : seeing, AtlTH. ; yif ne- 
 theles, WiOL. ; verely, Ttnd. , Ckan. ; 
 for. Gov. (both). Gen., Bish. ; if yet, 
 Ehem. To them that afflict 
 you affliction] Tildynge to hem thai 
 turhlen you, WicL. ; tribulation, to 
 them that vexe you, Ehem. ; tribvXation 
 to them that trouble you, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. [Gov. (both), vnto]. 
 The change seems to preserve more 
 clearly the antithesis, and also to 
 bring more into prominence the 'lex 
 talionis ' that is tacitly referred to. 
 
 7. Afflicted] Troubled, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. except Bheu., vexed ; 
 see previous note. At the 
 revelation of] So BiSH., Ehbm. (both 
 giving in) ; in the schewynge of, WiOL. ; 
 in ^ appearyng of. Gov. Test. ; 
 when... shall be revealed, Auth.; when 
 ...shall shewe him silfe, Ttnd., Gov., 
 Gean., Gen. The angels of 
 His power] So Auth. Marg., Gov. 
 (both), Gban., Bish., Kheu., and 
 sim. WiCL. {a. of his vertue} : his 
 mighty Angels, Auth., Ttnd., Gen. 
 
 8. In flame of fire] So Rhem:., 
 and sim. WiCL. and Gov. Test. (Ihefl.) : 
 in flaming fire, AutH., Ttnd., Gen., 
 Bish. ; withfl. /., Gov., Ckan. 
 Rendering vengeance to] So Ttnd., 
 
 Gen., Bish. (all giving vnto) : talcing 
 vengeance on, Auth. Gran, gives the 
 transl. of the text, but has a different 
 construction, whych shall redre v. 
 Vnto. Those who (bis)] Them 
 
 that. ..that, Auth. Lord 
 
 Jesus] Lord Jesus *Ohrist, Auth. 
 
 9. Shall suffer punishment, even] 
 Shall be punished with, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. except WiOL., Gov. 
 Test., Ehem., which follow the Vulg. 
 poenas dabunt in interitu aetemas. 
 Eternal] So Ehem. : everlasting, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. Though here the 
 change is really unimportant, it is still 
 perhaps best to translate this word 
 uniformly, except where the context 
 seems specially and exclusively to 
 imply simple duration. In the present 
 case the aldvios is equally qualitative 
 and quantitative. 
 
 Away from] From, Auth. and all 
 Vv. Face] So Wiol., Gov. 
 
 Test., Ehem. : presence, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. Mighty] So 
 
 Auth. in Eph. vi. 10 : vertue, WiCL. ; 
 power, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 10. Shall come] So Auth. and all 
 Vv. There is some little difficulty in 
 the translation of oTav with the aor. 
 subj. Perhaps, as a general rule, it 
 may be said that when the exact ren- 
 dering 'shall have' is inapplicable 
 (see notes on Tit. iii. 12, Transl.), we 
 may conveniently adopt in transla- 
 
160 
 
 2 THESSALONIANS. 
 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 II. 
 
 be glorified in His saints, and to be admired in all them 
 that believed (because our testimony to yon-ward was be- 
 lieved) in that day. Whereunto we also pray always for 
 you, that our God may count you worthy of your calling 
 and fulfil every good pleasure of goodness and the work of 
 faith with power ; that the name of our Lord Jesus may 
 be glorified in you, and ye in Him, according to the grace 
 of our God and the Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 Now we beseech you, brethren, touching the coming 
 of our Lord Jesus Christ, and our gathering together unto 
 Him, that ye be not quickly shaken from your sober 
 mind, nor yet be troubled, neither by spirit, nor by word 
 nor by letter as coming through us, to the efifect that the 
 day of the Lord is now come. Let no man deceive you 
 in any way ; because the day shall not come except there 
 
 tiou the present (indie, or eoiu.) when 
 the reference to the actual futurity of 
 the subsequent event is less specially 
 contemplated (comp. Matth. xzi. 40, 
 Mark iv. 29 [Eec] , al.), and future 
 when, as here, such a reference is 
 more distinct and prominent. 
 That believed] That *believe, Auth. 
 To you-ward] Sim., toward you, Bibh. ; 
 that wehadimto you, Ttitd., Cban. {to); 
 vnto you, Gov. : among you, Auth. 
 
 11. Whereunto] Wherefore, Atitb. 
 We also] So Gen. : we, Ttnd., Gov. ; 
 also we, ACTH. and remaining Vv. 
 May] So Gen. -..would, Auth., Bisu. ; 
 wyll, Gov. Test., Chan. ; the four 
 remaining Vv. omit the auxiliary. 
 Yowr] This, Auth., Gban. ; his, 
 WlOL., Gov. Test., Gen., Ehem. ; 
 the, Ttnd., Gov., Bish. Mvery 
 good pleasure of g.] So BiSH. (all) : 
 all the good pleasure of his g., 
 Auth., Gen., Rhem. 
 
 1 2 . Lord Jesus] Lord Jesnix * Christ, 
 Auth. 
 
 Ghapteb II. I. Touching] By, 
 Auth. and all Vv. : see notes in loc. 
 
 And our] So WicL. : and ly our, 
 Auth., Gbn., Bish. 
 
 ■s. Quickly] Soon, Auth., Wicl. ; 
 sodenly, Ttnd., Cov., Cean., Gen., 
 Bish. ; hastely, Gov. Test. ; easily, 
 Khem. From yov/r sober 
 
 mind] Similarly, fro youre witte, WiOL. ; 
 from youre mynde, Ttnd., Gov. (both), 
 Gban., Gen., Bish. ; from your sense, 
 Bhem. : Auth. alone gives the in- 
 correct in mind. Nor yet he] 
 Nor be, Cov. Test., Gban., JBish., 
 Ehem. : nor, Gbn. ; or be, Auth. ; 
 nether be yee, WiOL. ; and 5e not, Ttnd., 
 Cov. Coming through] 
 From, Auth. Although 610 occurs 
 four times in this verse, it is not 
 worth while to overweight the sen- 
 tence by translating it uniformly 
 through. To the effect that] 
 As that, Auth. This slight change 
 seems to make the meaning a little 
 more perspicuous. The Lord] 
 * Christ, Auth. Now com^] 
 At hand, Auth. and the other Vv. 
 except Wicl., nyg. 
 
 3. In any way] In any maner, 
 WiOL. ; by any means, Auth. and 
 
Chap. I. u— II. 8. 
 
 161 
 
 come the falling away first, and the Man of Sin be re- 
 vealed, the son of perdition; he that opposeth, and ex- 4 
 alteth himself against every one called God or an object 
 of worship ; insomuch that he sitteth in the temple of 
 God, displaying himself that he is God. Remember ye 5 
 not that when I was yet with you I used to tell you 
 these things ? And now ye know what restraineth, that 6 
 he may be revealed in his own time. For the mystery 7 
 of lawlessness is already working, yet only until he who 
 now restraineth be taken out of the way. And then 8 
 
 remaining Vv. Because] For, 
 
 AuTH. and all ¥v. The day shall 
 
 not cornel So Auth., Gen. (both 
 giving that d.) : the lorde commeth not, 
 Ttnd., Cov. (both) ; the Lorde shall 
 not come, Chan., Iish. ; no clause is 
 supplied by WicL. or Ehem. 
 The falling away] A falling away, 
 Adth., Bibh. ; departynge aweye {or 
 discencon, WiOL. ; a reuolt, Bhem. ; 
 a departynge, Ttnd., Cean., Gen.; 
 the dep., Cov. (both), which alone of 
 all the Vv. rightly give the article. 
 The Man of Sin] So WiCL., Ehem. ; 
 that man of sin, AuTH., Cov., Gen.; 
 BiSH. ; that synfull man, Tynd., 
 Cran. ; the s. man, Cov. Test. 
 
 4. He that opposeth] Who opposeth, 
 Auth.; that is aduersarie, WiOL. ; 
 whych is the adu., Cov. Test. ; which 
 is an adv., Ttnd. and five remaining 
 Vv. It vpiU thus be seen that the Vv. 
 rightly recognise the substantival cha- 
 racter of d dvuKel/ievos, and unite iirl 
 irdvTa K. T. \. solely with the following 
 participle. Against] So Gen. : 
 
 syoM, WiCL. ; ahove, AniH. and remain- 
 ing Vv. £very one called] A II 
 thai is called, Auth. and all Vv. except 
 Wict. (alle thing that is seyde). An 
 object of worship] That is worshipped, 
 Adth. and the other Vv. except Cov., 
 Gods seruyce. Insomuch] So Cov. 
 Test. : so, Adth. and remaining Vv. 
 Be sitteth] He *as God s., Adth. 
 
 E. T. 
 
 Displaying himself] Shewing himself, 
 Adth., Wicl., Gen., Bish., Ehem.; 
 and shew him silfe, Ttnd. (giving shall 
 sift above); and hoasteih himself e, Gov.; 
 ioastynge kym self, Cov. Test., Cban. 
 
 5. Used to tell] Told, Avtk.: no 
 Version attempts to give the force of 
 the imperfect. 
 
 6. Restraineth] Withholdeth, Adth. 
 and the other Vv. except Cov. Test., 
 doth leithholde; . and Ehem., letteth. 
 There does not seem any reason for 
 supplying the pronoun 'him,' with 
 Soholef. {Hints, p. 116, ed. 4): we 
 seem bound to preserve the mysterious 
 indefiniteness of the original : Gov. 
 (both) supply it. May be] So 
 Cov. Test., Ehem. : le, Wicl. ; might 
 he, Adth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 His own] His, Adth. and all Vv. 
 
 7. Lawlessness] Iniquity, ADTH. 
 and all Vv. except WlOL., wicJddnesse. 
 But Ttnd. gives that in., and Cov., 
 Cean., give the in. It seems desirable 
 here to retain this more rigidly literal 
 translation as serving more clearly to 
 indicate the essential character of to 
 KaT^xov. Is already working] 
 Doth alreai3/y work, Adth., Cean., 
 Gen., Bish. Yet only until, &c.] 
 Similarly, tyll he which now onely let- 
 teth, Cov., Cean., Bish. ; only he who 
 now letteth, will let, until he, Auth. ; 
 onely that he that holdith nowe, holde, 
 til it, WlOL. ; which onlie loheth, vntill 
 
 M 
 
162 
 
 2 THESSALONIANS. 
 
 shall the Lawless One be revealed, whom the Lord Je- 
 sus shall consume with the breath of His mouth, and 
 9 shall destroy with the appearance of His coming ; whose 
 coming is after the working of Satan in all power and 
 
 10 signs and wonders of lying, and in all deceit of un- 
 righteousness to them that are perishing ; because they 
 embraced not the love of the truth, that they might be 
 
 1 1 saved. And for this cause doth God send them a work- 
 
 1 2 ing of error that they should believe the lie ; that they 
 may all of them be judged who believed not the truth, 
 but had pleasure in unrighteousness. 
 
 it, Ttnd. ; orUy he that holdeth, let 
 hym holde now, tyll he, Gov. Teat. ; 
 ondy he which now withholdeth, shal 
 let til he. Gen. ; only that he which 
 now holdeth, doe hold, vntU he, Bhek, 
 The insertion of 'yet' may perhaps 
 be admitted as slightly clearing up 
 the elliptical expression. 
 
 8. The Lawless One] That wicked, 
 Adth., Tynd., Cov. (both), Cban., 
 BiBH. : the ilke wichide (man), Wicl. ; 
 th£ wicked man. Gen. ; that wicked 
 one, Ehem. The Lord Jesus] The 
 Lord, AuTH. omitting 'Jesus. 
 JSrealh] Spirit, Auth. and all Vv. 
 Appearance] So Tynd., Cov. (both), 
 Oban.; brightness, Auth., Gen., 
 BiSH. ; illumynynge (or schynynge), 
 Wioii. ; manifestation, Ehem. The 
 regular translation of this word in 
 Auth. is 'appearing' (i Tim. vi. 14, 
 2 Tim. i. 10, iv. i, 8, Tit. ii. 13), 
 which is here slightly changed to 
 avoid the juxtaposition of two parti- 
 cipial substantives. 
 
 9. Whose] Hym mhos, WiOL., 
 Khem. : even him wham, Adth. and 
 remaining Vv. ln\ So WlOL., 
 Gov. Test., BiSH., Ehem. : vnih, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. Wonders of 
 lying] So BiSH. : lying wonders, Auih., 
 Cov. Test., Gen. 
 
 10. And in] So Wioi., TiND., 
 Cov. Test., Gen., Bish., Ehem. : and 
 
 with, Auth., Gov., Cban. 
 Deceit] So WlOL., Gov. Test. : seduc- 
 ing, Ehem.; deceivcibleness, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. To them] So 
 
 WlOL., Gov. Test, (vnto), Ehem. : in 
 them, Auth., Bish.; amange them, 
 Ttnd., Gov., Gban., Gen. 
 Are perishing] Perish, Auth. and all 
 Vv. Embraced] Received, Auth. 
 
 II. Both God send] God 'shall 
 send, Auth. A working of error] 
 
 So Wicl. ; the opexacvan of erroure. 
 Gov. Test., Ehem. ; strong delusion, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv.: see ver. 9. 
 Though in both cases the introduction 
 of the adjective ' effectual' before 
 'working' might be rendered suitable 
 by the context, it is still, lexically 
 considered, somewhat too strong as a 
 purely literal rendering. It would 
 thus seem perhaps better to strike out 
 'effectual' in Eph. iii. 7, iv. 16, or to 
 retain it only in italics. These are 
 however points which it is very diEBcult 
 to adjust, for if the one translation 
 is too strong, the other certainly seems 
 somewhat too weak: 'energy,' which 
 is adopted by some translators, ia 
 appy. too modern. The lie] A lie, 
 
 Auth. 
 
 n. That they may all of them,] 
 That they 'all might, Auth. ; that alle, 
 WioL.; that all they myght, Ttnd., 
 Gov., Gban., Gen., Bish.; that all 
 
Chap. II. 9 — 17. 
 
 163 
 
 But we are bound to give thanks to God alway for 1 3 
 you, brethren beloved of the Lord, that Ctod chose you 
 from the beginning unto salvation in sanctification of the 
 Spirit and faith in the truth : whereunto He called you 14 
 by our Gospel, unto the obtaining of the glory of our 
 Lord Jesus Christ. Accordingly then, brethren, stand 15 
 fast, and hold the traditions which ye were taught whether 
 by word or by our epistle. But may our Lord Jesus 16 
 Christ Himself, and God our Father, which loved us, and 
 gave us eternal comfort and good hope in grace, comfort 17 
 your hearts, and stablish you in every good work and word. 
 
 they maye. Gov. Test. ; that ai may, 
 Khem. The two slight changes are 
 made to preserve the reading airon-es, 
 and the correct sequence of tenses; 
 comp. Latham, £ngl. Lang. § 539 
 (ed. 4). Judged] So Bhem. : 
 
 demyde {or dampnyde), WiCL. ; damii- 
 ed, AuTH. and remaining Vv. 
 Sad pleaswe in} On the transl. of 
 eiSoKeu), see note on 1 Thess. ii. 8 
 {Transl.). 
 
 13. To Qod alway'] Alway to God, 
 AniH. : there is here no necessity for 
 deserting the order of the original. 
 That] So WiCL., Gov. Test, Khem. ; 
 because, Atjth.; for because that, Tynd., 
 Cban.; lee. that. Gov., Gen., Bish. 
 Chose you from the beginning] Hafh 
 from the beginning chosen you, Auth. 
 All Tt. except WiCL. {chees) give hath 
 chosen. In (r)] So WicL., Gov. 
 (both), BiBH., Ehem. : through, AniH., 
 TiND., Cbak., Gbn. Faith in 
 the truth] Feith of treuthe, WiOL., 
 Gen. {the f.), Bish. {the tr.), Rhem. 
 {the tr.) : belief of the truth, AuTH. 
 
 14. Our Lord] The Lord, Auth. 
 
 15. Accordingly then] Therefore, 
 Auth. and the other V v. except WiOL., 
 and so. Traditions] So AUTH., 
 WicL. \tr. {or techyngis)], Buem. Ths 
 other Vv. vary; ordinaunces, Ttnd., 
 Gov. (both), Cban., Bish,; insirwiions, 
 
 Gen. : see note on ch. iii. 6 {Trand.). 
 Were taught] Have been taught, Auth. : 
 no Version preserves the correct force 
 of the Aorist. By our] So 
 
 WiCL., Gov. Test., Gen., Bish., 
 Khem. : our, AniH. ; by, Ttnd., Gov., 
 Gban. , all expressing Tjiiw with "hayov. 
 
 16. But may] Now, Auth. 
 
 God our Father] God *even our Father, 
 Auth. : see especially notes in loc. ; 
 and on the transl. of o GeJs ko! irariip 
 rinSv, notes on Gal. i. 4 (Transl.). 
 Loved] So WiOL. : hath loved, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. Gave] So 
 
 Wioii. ; hath given, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv. [Gov. (both) however omit 
 the second hMh, see previous note]. 
 Eternal] So Ehem. : everlasting, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. ; see notes on ch. 
 i. 9 {Transl.). Comfort] Conso- 
 
 lation, Auth. The change is only 
 made to preserve the same rendering 
 for rapaK\ri<riv...irapaKa\4(rou, and in- 
 deed is given by Auth. in 2 Cor. i. 
 3, 4. In grace] So WicL., Gov. 
 
 Test., Bish., Bhem.: through gr., 
 Auth. and the four remaining Vv. 
 
 17. Stablish you] Auth. retains 
 you, in ordinary type, but contrary to 
 the best authorities ; see notes. 
 WorJc and word] *Word and work, 
 Auth. 
 
164 
 
 THESSALONIANS. 
 
 III. Finally pray ye for us, brethren, that the word of the 
 Lord may have free course and be glorified, even as it is 
 
 2 also with you : and that we may be delivered from perverse 
 
 3 and wicked men ; for it is not all that have Faith. But 
 faithful is the Lord, who shall stablish you and keep you 
 
 4 from the Wicked One. Yea we have confidence in the 
 Lord touching you, that ye both do and will do the things 
 which we command. But may the Lord direct your 
 hearts into the love of God and into the patience of 
 Christ. 
 
 Now we command you, brethren, in the name of the 
 Lord Jesus Christ, that ye withdraw yourselves from every 
 brother walking disorderly, and not after the tradition 
 
 5 
 
 Chapteb III. I. Pray ye for us, 
 hrethren} Brethren, pray for us, Auth. 
 Perhaps this changed order better re- 
 presents the prominent position of 
 irpoa-evxeirBe. Free course] In the 
 
 earliest copies of Aoth. 'free ' is marked 
 as an insertion, but it may fairly be 
 considered as involved in rpixv- 
 Even as it is also] Even as it is, Auth. 
 The change gives a juster equivalent 
 to Ka9(is Kal. See however notes on 
 I Tliess. i. 5 (TransL). 
 
 1. Perverse] Vncouenable (or noyous), 
 WiOL. ; importune, Gov. Test.; im- 
 portunate, Ehem. ; — representing Vulg. 
 importunis ; disordered, BlSH. ; unrea- 
 aonahle, Auth. and 4 remaining Vv. 
 It is not all, &c.] All men have not 
 faith, Auth. and the other Vv. except 
 WiCL., feith is not of alle men ; and 
 Gov., faith is not euery mas. 
 
 3. Faithful is the Lord] The 
 Lord is faithful, Auth. and the other 
 Vv. {oy/r L., Ehem.) except Wiot. 
 [tlie I. is trewe). Independently of the 
 change of order agreeing better with 
 that of the original, the paronomasia 
 caused by the juxtaposition of nlffns 
 and irurbs is more distinctly pre- 
 served. The Wicked One] Evil, 
 Auth. and all Vv. ; see notes in loo. 
 
 It is of no moment whether irovqpov 
 be translated 'evil' or 'wicked' but 
 the rendering should be kept that is 
 given in ver 2. 
 
 4. Zca] 4«(i, Auth., Gen., Bish., 
 Ehem. ; sothehj, WiOL. ; the rest, 
 Tynd., Gov. (both), Cean., omit Si in 
 translation. Comm,and] Com- 
 mand "you, Auth. 
 
 5. But may] Forsothe, WioL. ; 
 and, Auth. and the other Vv. except 
 Gov., which omits Si in translation. 
 Patience of Christ] So Auth. Marg., 
 WiCL., Ttnd., Gov. (both), Rhem. : 
 patient waiting for Christ, Auth., 
 Gkan., Bish. ; weating for of Christ, 
 Gen. 
 
 6. The Lord] *Owr Lord, Auth. 
 Walldng] So Eheu. ; sim. Wioii. 
 (wandrynge) : AuTH. (that walketh) 
 and remaining Vv. insert the relative. 
 Though the meaning is practically the 
 same, it still seems desirable in trans- 
 lation, when consistent with our idiom, 
 to mark the anarthrous participle. 
 Tradition] So Auth., Wiol., Ehem. : 
 insUlucion, TiND., Gov., Cean., Bish.; 
 ordinaunce, Gov. Test. ; instruction, 
 Gen. If any change be thought ne- 
 cessary, the last of these translations 
 is perhaps to be preferred. 
 
Chap. III. i — 13. 
 
 165 
 
 which they received of us. For yourselves know how ye 7 
 ought to follow us; in that we behaved not disorderly 
 among you, neither ate we bread from any man for 8 
 naught, but with toil and travail, working night and day 
 that we might not be burdensome to any of you : not that 9 
 we have not power, but to make ourselves an ensample 10 
 to you that ye should follow us. For also when we were 
 with you, this we commanded you, that if any will not 
 work, neither let him eat. For we hear that there are 
 some walking among you disorderly, working at no busi- 
 ness, but being busy-bodies. Now them that are such we 
 command and exhort in the Lord Jesus Christ that with 
 quietness they work, and eat their own bread. But ye, 13 
 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 They received} *He received, ArTH. 
 
 7. In Ihafl For, Adth. and all Vv. ; 
 see noteB in loc. Behaved nof] 
 Behaved not ourselves, Auth., Ttnd., 
 Gov., Cean., GtBN., Bish. 
 
 8. Ate we bread from any manl Did 
 we eat any mans bread, Auth. It 
 seems desirable here, with all Vv. ex- 
 cept WlOL., to invert the order of the 
 Greek, that Siiipedv which occupies the 
 emphatic place in Greek may occupy 
 the same place in the English, — that 
 place being not uncosiimonly in our 
 language the last. But with toil 
 ...working] But wrought with lahow, 
 Adth. :, the present transl. preserves 
 the true connection, and avoids the 
 incorrect rendering of ipja^fievoi by 
 the finite verb. That we. ..any] 
 Similarly, lest we should burden any, 
 Khem. ; that we might not be chairge- 
 able to any, AuiH. ; lest we shulde be 
 c. to eny. Gov. (both) ; because we 
 woUe not be c. to eny, Cban., Gen., 
 Bish. ; that we greueden none, WlOL. ; 
 becavM we wolde not he grevous to eny, 
 Ttnd. 
 
 g. Not tha(] Not because, Adth.; 
 not as, WiOL. ; not as though. Gov. 
 Test., Khem. That ye should] 
 
 For to, WicL., Ehem. ; to, Adth. and 
 remaining Vv. 
 
 10. For also] So Gov. Test., Rhem. : 
 Jbr even, Adth., Geit. ; and. Gov. ; for, 
 Ttnd., Gean., Bish., omitting koI in 
 translation. Will not] So WlOL. 
 {wole not), Ehem. : would not, Adth. 
 and remaining Vv. Neither 
 let him] So Bhem. ; and sim. {nether ete 
 he) WiOL.: neither shouldhe eat, Adth. ; 
 that the same shuld not eate, Tynd., 
 and Gov. (both), Cean., Bish., — these 
 four omitting that ; that he shulde not 
 eat, Gen. 
 
 11. Wandng] Which walk, Adth. 
 No Version gives a participial ren- 
 dering : see notes on ver. 6. 
 Working at no business] Working not 
 at all, Auth. This is perhaps the 
 only way in which the paronomasia 
 ipya^oiiAvaut...irepieiiria^oiUvoviCxa be 
 maintained. The word 'business' is 
 supplied by Adth. in i Thess. iv. ii. 
 Being busybodies] So Gean. : are busy- 
 bodies, Adth., Ttnd., Gov. (both), 
 Gen., Bish. (be b.) ; doinge curiously, 
 WlOL. ; curiously meddling, Bhem. 
 
 12. In the Lord] *By our Lord, 
 Adth. 
 
166 
 
 THESSALONIANS. 
 
 14 brethren, lose not heart in well doing. But if any man 
 obey not our word by the epistle, mark this man, and 
 keep no company with him, that he may be shamed. 
 
 15 And count him not as an enemy, but admonish him as 
 
 16 a brother. But may the Lord of peace Himself give 
 you peace continually, in every way. The Lord 6e with 
 you all. 
 
 17 The salutation by the hand of me Paul, which is a 
 
 13. Lo3R not hear{\ Be not* weary, 
 Adih. 
 
 14. Bia if] So Cov. : and if, 
 AUTH., Ehem. If 'but' be objected 
 to in consequence of the ' but ' in ver. 
 13, it would then seem better with 
 Ttnd., Cov. Test., Cean., Gen. , Bish., 
 to omit Si in translation. 
 
 Obey not] So Adih. and the other Vv. 
 except WiOL., schal not obeye; and 
 Cov. Test., doth not obey. At first 
 sight the latter translation might seem 
 preferable, but considered strictly, it 
 would seem to imply that such would 
 probably be the case (see Latham, Eng. 
 Za/ng. § 537, ed. 4), whereas the Greek 
 cl with the indie, 'per se nihil signifi- 
 cat prseterconditionem' (Klotz, Dmwr. 
 Vol. II. p. 455). It may thus be best 
 as a general rule, only to adopt the 
 indicative in English where either (a) 
 the context or circumstances of the 
 case corroborate the likelihood of the 
 assumed case, or (6) where the speaker 
 appears to regard it as a matter of 
 fact. The possibility of inserting after 
 ' if ' the words ' as is matter of fact,' 
 or 'as seems to be matter of fact,' 
 will commonly facilitate decision. 
 The epistle] This Epistle, Auth. All 
 the other Vv. except "WlOL. {oure 
 worde U epistle) join Sii, t^s lm(rro\iji 
 with atifievovffSe, and translate T'qs by 
 the English indefinite article. This 
 perhaps, with i Thess. v. 27, might be 
 considered as one of the few cases in 
 
 which idiom; and euphony may justify 
 us in retaining the pronominal trans- 
 lation : as however tovtov occurs di- 
 rectly after, it would involve the 
 necessity of translating it thxxt man, 
 as Adih., or hym, as WiCL. and all 
 other Vv. Scholefield (Hints, p. 118, 
 ed 4) proposes "our epistle,' but this 
 is scarcely suitable after the preceding 
 ' our word ' where the 'our' is a trans- 
 lation of i}iJii3v, as it would seem to 
 imply that it was repeated with Sii, 
 T^s iiruTToX^s. Marh] So WiOL. : 
 
 note, Adih., Gen., Rhem. ; sende vs 
 worde of, Tind., Cov., Cban. ; shewe vs 
 of, Cov. Test.; signifie, BiSH. 
 This man] That man, Adth. : hym, 
 WlCL. and remaining Vv. 
 Keep no company] So Auth. in i Cor. 
 V. II : comyne yee not, WlOL. ; do not 
 companie, Bhesi. : Aatte nothinge to do, 
 Cov. (both) ; have no company, Auth. 
 and four remaining Vv. 
 Shamed] Ashamed, Adth. : the slight 
 change brings to notice the passive 
 sense. 
 
 15. And] So WioL., TVND., Cov. 
 Test., CEAN.,EHEM.:2/e<, Auth., Cov., 
 Gen., Bish. 
 
 16. jBtrf may] JVbw, Adth., Gen., 
 BiSH. ; foraothe, Wiol. ; and, Kheu. ; 
 Ttnd., Cov. (both), Ceah., omit Si 
 in translation. Peaee continually, 
 in every way] Euerlastynge pees in al 
 place, WiCL., and Cov. Test., Bhem., 
 gjiving euery place; always, by ail 
 
Chap. III. 14—18. 167 
 
 sign in every epistle : so I write. The grace of our Lord 18 
 Jesus Christ be with you all. [Amen.] 
 
 means, AuTH. and remaining Vv. with m/yne awne honde, Ttnd., Cov. 
 
 1 7. By the hand of me Paul] So (both), Cban., GtEN., Bish. A 
 
 AUTH. in Col. iv. i8 : of Paul, with So WioL. (om. o), Khem. : the token, 
 mine own hand, Adth. ; of me Paul Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 THE END. 
 
eratttbrtirp : 
 
 PBINTED BY 0. J. CLAY, M.A. 
 AT THE BNIVEBSITY PBESS. 
 
tii,Sia!iiii;?!iii(;»is»iiiiJiSS#^^ 
 
 jl'i'>WliMMiAiiMi«<i